SpaceClaim2015 SP0 UsersGuide
SpaceClaim2015 SP0 UsersGuide
Copyright information 16
End user license agreement 18
Introduction 32
User's Guide 32
Welcome window 34
Tutorials 36
Text tutorials 36
Self-paced training tutorials 37
Text tutorials 38
Self-paced training tutorials 38
Bracket and knob assembly 38
Sheet metal tutorial 39
SpaceClaim objects 40
Design mesh objects 42
Locking and unlocking objects 47
The SpaceClaim interface 48
Structure tree 51
Selection panel 55
Layers 62
Groups 65
Views 69
Status bar 72
Options panel 73
Properties 74
Keyboard shortcuts 80
Using a multitouch screen 83
Mouse and touch gestures 92
Using the radial menu 93
Selecting 95
Clip with plane 103
www.SpaceClaim.com 2
Clip with volume 107
Box-selection 109
Free form selection 114
Select using polygon 117
Select by painting 119
Select using boundary 121
Component selection 123
Changing your display 124
Showing and hiding objects 125
Orienting designs 126
Spinning your design 128
Panning your design 131
Zooming in and out 132
Rotating your design 134
The home view 135
Viewing the sketch grid head-on 137
Selecting a view 138
Snapping to a view 140
Applying a graphics style 142
Displaying edges 144
Applying colors 146
Making objects transparent 149
Line styles 151
Style painter 152
Rendering style 153
Displaying in multiple windows 155
Splitting the design window 156
Switching between windows 157
Maximizing the design window 158
Displaying workspace tools 159
Sketch grid styles 161
Displaying lightweight components 163
www.SpaceClaim.com 3
Working with SpaceClaim documents 165
Creating, opening, and saving documents 165
Importing and exporting 169
Copy-paste from other applications 192
Printing 193
Journals and logs 196
SpaceClaim file format 198
Designing 202
Design modes 204
Editing in cross-section 206
Cut, copy, paste 209
Dimensions 211
Detaching 215
Undo and redo 216
Checking geometry 217
Sketching in 3D 218
Sketching 220
Editing a sketch 227
Copying a sketch 230
Sketch plane 231
Moving the sketch plane 233
Layout curves 235
Moving in 2D 237
Dimensional sketching 239
Points 240
Lines 243
Tangent lines 246
Construction lines 249
Rectangles 251
Three-point rectangles 254
Circles 256
Three-point circles 258
www.SpaceClaim.com 4
Ellipses 261
Tangent arcs 263
Three-point arcs 266
Swept arcs 268
Polygons 270
Creating a spline 273
Editing a spline 277
Splitting curves 281
Creating corners 282
Creating rounded corners 284
Bending lines 287
Trimming lines 289
Inserting a face curve 290
Offsetting curves 292
Projecting onto the sketch grid 294
Scaling a sketch 297
Scaling sketches using pull 300
Editing 301
Editing with annotation dimensions 303
Mathematical expressions 307
Pulling 309
Offsetting and extruding faces 322
Extending and extruding surface edges 326
Extruding edges 329
Rounding edges 331
Rounding between faces and surfaces 337
Chamfering edges 340
Pivoting edges 345
Revolving faces 347
Revolving edges 349
Revolving a helix 353
Sweeping 355
www.SpaceClaim.com 5
Sweeping with multiple trajectories 359
Sweeping with an axis 363
Drafting faces 365
Creating slots 370
Scaling solids and surfaces 375
Copying edges and faces 378
Pulling with the select tool 381
Pivoting with the select tool 382
Using measure to drive pull 383
Moving 385
Move handle 394
Moving symmetrically 396
Creating a pattern 399
Exploding an assembly 409
Pivoting and pulling solids 410
Moving with the select tool 411
Moving with a fulcrum 413
Moving protrusions and depressions 415
Using measure to drive pull 416
Fill 419
Removing rounds 436
Replacing faces 443
Tweaking a face 447
Editing tweaked faces 449
Adding tweak control curves 451
Tweak face display options 452
Blending 453
Blending between faces 457
Blending between edges 462
Blending between points 467
Creating objects and relationships 470
Inserting planes 470
www.SpaceClaim.com 6
Inserting an axis 474
Inserting points 476
Inserting an origin 477
Pinned datums 480
Inserting temporary points, axes, and planes 482
Linear patterns 488
Circular patterns 494
Fill patterns 500
Creating offset relationships 503
Shelling a solid 505
Creating mirror relationships 507
Inserting 511
Inserting another design 511
Orient mesh 513
Extracting curves 518
Creating a cylinder 520
Creating a sphere 523
Fit spline 525
Inserting a standard hole 526
Identifying holes 536
Move body 540
Create workpiece 543
Creating curves from edges 550
Deburring toolpath 551
Turn profile 552
Adding edge reliefs 553
Wrapping geometry 556
Unrolling surfaces 564
Downloading TraceParts 568
Downloading CADENAS models 569
Inserting an image 570
Inserting video 574
www.SpaceClaim.com 7
Combining 576
Intersecting 580
Merging solids and surfaces 582
Merging solids 583
Merging surface protrusions 585
Merging surfaces 586
Merging a surface and a plane 589
Splitting bodies and surfaces 590
Splitting a solid 592
Using the split body tool 594
Splitting a face 597
Splitting a surface 602
Removing material from a solid 603
Projecting to a solid 604
Working with components 608
Internal and external components 611
Lightweight components 615
Assigning assembly conditions 616
Making objects tangent 618
Aligning objects 620
Orienting objects 623
Making components rigid 626
Gear conditions 627
Anchoring components 629
Moving parts in an asssembly 630
Detailing 631
Annotation 632
Creating notes 634
Circular notes 641
Formatting note text 643
Creating note leaders 645
Creating dimension annotations 649
www.SpaceClaim.com 8
Dimensioning between virtual points 660
Center marks and lines 664
Geometric dimensioning and tolerancing 665
Non-semantic geometric dimensioning and tolerancing 666
Semantic geometric tolerances 668
Datum and surface finish symbols 679
Datum targets 680
Surface finish symbols 685
Barcodes 687
Welding symbols 689
Custom symbols 696
Creating custom symbols 697
Using custom symbols 700
Threads 705
Bills of materials 708
Tables 713
Hole tables 715
Curve tables 720
Balloons 723
Bolt circles 724
Adding hyperlinks to annotations 725
Drawing sheets 727
Drawing sheet setup 731
Formatting a drawing sheet 732
Editing a drawing sheet 734
Drawing sheet views 735
General views 737
Projected views 740
Cross section views 742
Offset cross section views 747
Aligned cross section views 750
Detail views 753
www.SpaceClaim.com 9
Displaying a modular grid 755
Broken views 758
Broken out section views 761
3D markup 763
Creating a 3D markup 765
Displaying changed dimensions 766
Coloring changed faces 767
Measuring and analyzing 768
Checking geometry 769
Measuring 770
Quick measurements 771
Mass properties 772
Displaying measurements 774
Measuring a projected area 779
Analyzing quality 780
Displaying normal directions 781
Displaying curvature 783
Displaying draft angles 785
Displaying the UV grid of a face 788
Displaying a dihedral graph 790
Displaying stripes 792
Displaying deviation 794
Repairing problems 796
Navigating through issues 798
Stitching adjacent faces 800
Repairing gaps 802
Missing faces 804
Split edges 807
Inexact edges 809
Exact edges 811
Duplicate faces 813
Merging faces 814
www.SpaceClaim.com 10
Removing small faces 816
Adjusting tangency 818
Simplifying a design 820
Relaxing surfaces 821
Straightening faces 823
Curve gaps 826
Small curves 827
Duplicate curves 828
Fitting curves 829
Preparing designs for analysis 831
Extracting volume 833
Creating midsurfaces 836
Weld points 840
Enclosures 844
Split by plane 847
Extend 849
Imprinting 852
Removing rounds 854
Displaying interference 859
Removing interference 861
Removing faces 863
Finding short edges 864
Bad faces 865
Overlapping faces 866
Checking clearance 867
Show contact 868
Beams 870
Creating beams 874
Extracting beams from solids 875
Beam properties 876
Creating beam profiles 878
Beam profiles 879
www.SpaceClaim.com 11
Orienting beams 881
Moving beams 883
Beam display 884
Working with sheet metal 885
Converting a design to sheet metal 886
Identifying sheet metal 889
Selecting sheet metal objects 893
Squaring up sheet metal faces 894
Sheet metal properties 895
Correcting a sheet metal component 898
Sketching sheet metal parts 900
Sheet metal lines 903
Sheet metal tangent lines 906
Sheet metal tangent arcs 909
Sheet metal rectangles 912
Sheet metal Three-point rectangles 915
Sheet metal ellipses 918
Sheet metal sweep arcs 920
Sheet metal three-point circles 923
Sheet metal circles 926
Sheet metal polygons 929
Sheet metal splines 932
Sheet metal three-point arcs 935
Creating and editing sheet metal parts 938
Pulling sheet metal 940
Moving sheet metal 950
Rotating sheet metal walls 952
Bending sheet metal walls 955
Forms 961
Splitting sheet metal faces 969
Beads 971
Sheet metal markers 973
www.SpaceClaim.com 12
Double walls 974
Gussets 976
Tabs 977
Hinges 982
Cross breaks 985
Sheet metal text 986
Lightweight patterns 987
Modifying sheet metal parts 989
Junctions 990
Edge reliefs 993
Corner reliefs 995
Notches 999
Hems 1001
Miters 1006
Watertight corners 1008
Partial flanges 1009
Unfolding sheet metal 1011
Calculating unfolded lengths 1017
Bend allowances 1018
Bend deduction table 1020
Additive manufacturing 1027
Mesh cleanup 1028
Organizing meshes 1033
Mesh modification 1035
Adjusting meshes 1040
Analyzing meshes 1045
Creating a mesh 1047
Exporting a mesh 1051
Customizing SpaceClaim 1052
Popular options 1054
General detailing options 1057
Drawing sheet size and format options 1062
www.SpaceClaim.com 13
Modular grid options 1063
Appearance options 1065
Selection options 1067
Snap options 1069
Units options 1073
Sheet metal options 1076
Navigation options 1079
Advanced options 1081
Import and export options 1087
Support file options 1100
Quick access toolbar options 1102
License options 1103
Multitouch options 1105
Displaying workspace tools 1106
Configuring windows 1108
Customizing the welcome window 1109
Views 1113
Creating custom shortcuts 1116
SpaceClaim add-ins 1117
SpaceClaim API 1118
Mastercam 1119
ESPRIT 1122
GibbsCAM 1125
Driving dimensions with Excel 1127
MakerBot Thingiverse 1129
ANSYS add-in 1130
ANSYS demos and tutorials 1132
Spot welds tutorial 1133
Spot weld tutorial conclusion 1134
Midsurface tutorial 1135
Shared topology tutorial 1148
Using groups and dimensions in ANSYS tutorial 1157
www.SpaceClaim.com 14
SpaceClaim parts and properties in ANSYS 1166
Using groups to drive changes in ANSYS 1168
Using Named selections in ANSYS 1169
Shared topology in ANSYS 1170
ANSYS workbench settings 1173
Working with ANSYS 13.0 1176
Configuring SpaceClaim and ANSYS 13 1176
Connecting to ANSYS 13 1177
Updating data with ANSYS 13 1178
Working with ANSYS 15.0 1179
Configuring SpaceClaim and ANSYS 15 1179
Connecting to ANSYS 15 1180
Updating data with ANSYS 15 1181
Working with ANSYS 16.0 1182
Configuring SpaceClaim and ANSYS 16 1182
Connecting to ANSYS 16 1183
Updating data with ANSYS 16 1184
Collaborating with LiveReview 1185
Hosting a LiveReview session 1187
LiveReview client sessions 1195
Viewer 1203
www.SpaceClaim.com 15
Copyright information
www.SpaceClaim.com 16
Persistence of Vision Raytracer and POV-Ray are trademarks of Persistence of Vision Raytracer Pty.
Ltd.
Portions of this software Copyright 1993-2009 Robert McNeel & Associates. All Rights Reserved.
openNURBS is a trademark of Robert McNeel & Associates. Rhinoceros is a registered trademark of
Robert McNeel & Associates.
Portions of this software Copyright 2005-2007, Sergey Bochkanov (ALGLIB project). *
Portions of this software are owned by Siemens PLM 1986-2011. All Rights Reserved. Parasolid
and Unigraphics are registered trademarks and JT is a trademark of Siemens Product Lifecycle Man-
agement Software, Inc.
SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation.
Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. 1986-2011. All Rights Reserved. ACIS and
SAT are registered trademarks of Spatial Corp.
Contains Teigha for .dwg files licensed from the Open Design Alliance. Teigha is a trademark of the
Open Design Alliance.
Development tools and related technology provided under license from 3Dconnexion. 1992
2008 3Dconnexion. All rights reserved.
TraceParts is owned by TraceParts S.A. TraceParts is a registered trademark of TraceParts S.A.
Contains a modified version of source available from Unicode, Inc., copyright 1991-2008 Unicode,
Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use
inhttp://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Portions of this software Copyright 1992-2008 The University of Tennessee. All rights reserved. [1]
Portions of this software Copyright XHEO INC. All Rights Reserved. DeployLX is a trademark of
XHEO INC.
All other trademarks, trade names or company names referenced in SpaceClaim software, doc-
umentation and promotional materials are used for identification only and are the property of their
respective owners.
*Additional notice for LAPACK and ALGLIB Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or withoutmodification, are permitted provided that the following conditions aremet:
-Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
-Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer listed in this license in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
-Neither the name of the copyright holders nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
www.SpaceClaim.com 17
End user license agreement
SpaceClaim Corporation
NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY. BY CLICKING THE ACCEPT BUTTON OR
DOWNLOADING OR INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE, YOU ARE BECOMING A PARTY TO A CONTRACT
WITH SPACECLAIM CORPORATION (SPACECLAIM) AND ARE CONSENTING TO ALL OF THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE RESTRICTIONS ON
USE SET FORTH IN SECTION 2; THE LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH IN SECTION 5; AND THE
LIMITATIONS ON SPACECLAIMS LIABILITY SET FORTH IN SECTION 6.
DO NOT CLICK THE ACCEPT BUTTON UNLESS YOU UNDERSTAND AND AGREE WITH THE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT, CLICK THE
DO NOT ACCEPT BUTTON AND DO NOT DOWNLOAD OR INSTALL THE SOFTWARE.
THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT APPLY IF YOU AND SPACECLAIM HAVE ENTERED INTO A SIGNED "HARD
COPY" AGREEMENT FOR THE LICENSE OF THE SOFTWARE ON TERMS AND CONDITIONS THAT
DIFFER FROM THOSE SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT.
THE SOFTWARE MAY INCLUDE PRODUCT ACTIVATION TECHNOLOGY AND OTHER TECHNOLOGY
DESIGNED TO PREVENT UNAUTHORIZED USE AND COPYING OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS TECHNOLOGY
MAY CAUSE YOUR COMPUTER TO AUTOMATICALLY CONNECT TO THE INTERNET. ADDITIONALLY,
ONCE CONNECTED, THE SOFTWARE MAY TRANSMIT YOUR SERIAL NUMBER, OTHER IDENTIFYING
INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR COMPUTER AND LICENSE, AND RECORDS OF THE SOFTWARES USE
AND PERFORMANCE TO SPACECLAIM AND IN DOING SO MAY PREVENT YOUR USE OF THE
SOFTWARE IF YOU DO NOT FOLLOW THE ACTIVATION AND INSTALLATION PROCESS OR FAIL TO
COMPLY WITH THE LICENSING AGREEMENT. VISIT HTTP://WWW.SPACECLAIM.COM/PRIVACY FOR
MORE INFORMATION.
www.SpaceClaim.com 18
(a) Documentation means the electronic, online or print user manuals, handbooks and other mater-
ials relating to the Software which are provided by SpaceClaim;
(b) License Term shall mean the license term set forth in the Order;
(c) Order means the purchase order or similar document (written or web) pursuant to which you
ordered the Software.
(d) Software means the software product(s) downloaded from the SpaceClaim web site, together
with any software provided to you by SpaceClaim on CD-ROM or similar media, any updates or
upgrades that may be made available to you from time to time and any add-in modules that you
may install from time to time;
(e) Subscription Services means (i) on-line web access to download the latest updates to the Soft-
ware; (ii) all major upgrades for the Software generally released by SpaceClaim; and (iii) email and
telephone support services (IN ENGLISH ONLY) during SpaceClaims normal business hours;
(f) Subscription Term means the subscription term set forth in the Order.
(g) you means you personally if you acquire a license to the Software for yourself or the company
or other legal entity for which you acquire a license to the Software.
2. License.
(a) Grant. SpaceClaim hereby grants to you, and you hereby accept, subject to the terms and con-
ditions set forth in this Agreement, a non-exclusive license, without the right to sublicense, effective
during the License Term, to (i) install and use the computer-executable object code of the Software
for your internal business purposes in accordance with the rest of this Agreement; and (ii) use the
Documentation in connection with your use of the Software. Node locked licenses may only be
installed and used on one computer per license issued. Floating licenses and the corresponding
SpaceClaim license server software that distributes those licenses may be installed on only one com-
puter, while the SpaceClaim Software may be installed on any number of computers located at the
same physical address and within the same local area network as the floating license server, and the
Software and Documentation may be used on as many computers simultaneously as the number of
floating licenses issued by SpaceClaim. This license is not transferable except as specifically set forth
www.SpaceClaim.com 19
in Section 11(d). The Software includes SpaceClaim API (Application Programming Interface). You
may use SpaceClaim API to create applications for use solely in connection with your permitted use
of the other Software for your own internal business purposes. You may not provide or make avail-
able to any third party any such applications.
(b) Expiration of License Term. Upon the expiration of the License Term, unless you have renewed
your license and paid all associated fees, the Software will convert into the SpaceClaim Viewer
product.
(c) Copying. You may make a reasonable number of copies of the Software and Documentation for
archival and back-up purposes only. You must include on each such copy all copyright or other pro-
prietary notices contained on the Software and Documentation.
(d) Modification, etc. You may not modify or alter the Software or Documentation, translate the Soft-
ware or Documentation, or create derivative works of the Software or Documentation. The source
code of the Software contains valuable trade secrets of SpaceClaim and its licensors. You may not
decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer the Software or otherwise attempt to discover the
source code of the Software (except only to the extent you may be specifically permitted under
applicable law to do so solely in order to achieve interoperability with other independently created
software). You may not remove or alter any copyright or other proprietary notice contained on the
Software or Documentation.
(e) Restrictions on Transfer. You may not unbundle the component parts or add-in modules, if any, of
the Software for use on different computers or attempt to use any such component parts or mod-
ules separately from your use of the Software. If you change computers with a node locked license,
you must de-install the Software from the old computer before installing it on the new computer.
You may not install the Software on a network server, transmit the Software over a computer net-
work, or operate the software from a remote location. You may not sell, license, sublicense, transfer,
assign, lease, rent, share or otherwise make available or disclose to third parties (including via an
application service provider (ASP), service bureau or timeshare arrangement) the Software or Docu-
mentation, except that you may assign your right to use the Software and Documentation in con-
nection with an assignment of this Agreement as specifically permitted in Section 11(d).
(f) Ownership. The Software is protected by copyright laws of the United States and international
treaty provisions. Title to and ownership of and all proprietary rights in the Software and Docu-
mentation and each copy shall remain at all times with SpaceClaim or its third party licensors. This is
not an agreement for the sale of the Software to you. Except as stated above, this Agreement does
not grant you any intellectual property rights in the Software.
www.SpaceClaim.com 20
3. Subscription Services.
(a) Subscription Services. Subject to the provisions of Sections 3(b) and 3(c), during the Subscription
Term you will be entitled to receive Subscription Services. You will have to renew, and pay for, Sub-
scription Services in order to receive Subscription Services after that date. If you discontinue Sub-
scription Services and later re-instate Subscription Services, licensee will have to pay all fees for the
period during which they did not receive Subscription Services. Subscription Service fees for the
second year of the license will remain at the same price as of the previous year.
(b) Limits With Respect to Earlier Production Versions. In no event will SpaceClaim be obligated to
provide support with respect to a production version of the Software more than three (3) months
after a subsequent production version of the Software has been released by SpaceClaim. Production
versions will be identified by the year following the product name (e.g., "SpaceClaim Engineer
2011"). A new production version within the same year will be designated by a "+" appended to the
year (e.g., "SpaceClaim Engineer 2011+). SpaceClaim shall be the sole determinant of what con-
stitutes a new production version.
(c) Certain Limitations for Software not Ordered From SpaceClaim. If you ordered Software from or
through a SpaceClaim reseller or partner, and not from SpaceClaim directly, you should contact the
reseller or partner for email or telephone support services.
4. Responsibility for Selection and Use of Software. You are responsible for the supervision, man-
agement and control of the use of the Software, including, but not limited to: (i) selection of the
Software to achieve your intended results; (ii) determining the appropriate uses of the Software and
the output of the Software in your business; and, (iii) establishing adequate backup to prevent the
loss of data in the event of a Software malfunction. The Software is a tool that is intended to be used
only by trained professionals and is not to be a substitute for professional judgment or independent
testing of physical prototypes for product stress, safety and utility.
5. Limited Warranty.
(a) Limited Warranty. SpaceClaim warrants solely to you that (i) for a period of 90 days following ini-
tial download, the Software will function substantially in accordance with the Documentation, and (ii)
any services it provides will be performed in a manner commensurate with usual and customary pro-
fessional standards. SpaceClaim does not warrant that the Software will meet your requirements or
operate without interruption or be error free and does not warrant the results you may obtain by
www.SpaceClaim.com 21
using the Software. SpaceClaims sole obligation under this warranty shall be to (i) use commercially
reasonable efforts to correct Software that is not functioning substantially in the manner described
in the Documentation, provided that you report such malfunction to SpaceClaim and provide reas-
onably detailed documentation of such malfunction within the warranty period; and (ii) re-perform
services not performed in the manner described above, provided that you give prompt notice to
SpaceClaim of such failure. EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH IN THE PRECEDING SENTENCES, THE
SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMIITED BY
LAW, SPACECLAIM HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN
THAT EVENT, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO 90 DAYS FROM THE DATE
OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE. HOWEVER, SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS
ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS
THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.
(b) Exceptions. SpaceClaim shall have no liability under this warranty for malfunctions resulting from
or caused by (i) alterations or modifications to the Software by anyone other than SpaceClaim; (ii)
accident, corruption, misuse or neglect of the Software; (iii) the combination or use of the Software
with hardware or software not supported by SpaceClaim; (iv) other software, hardware, network or
other infrastructure with which the Software is used; or (v) the failure by you to incorporate and use
all updates to the Software available from SpaceClaim.
(a) By SpaceClaim. Except as set forth below, SpaceClaim will defend at its expense any action
brought against you to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Software, when properly used
within the scope of this Agreement, infringe a United States or Europe patent, copyright or trade
secret of any third party and SpaceClaim will pay any costs, damages and reasonable attorneys' fees
finally awarded against you in such action which are attributable to such claim; provided that (i)
SpaceClaim is notified in writing promptly of the claim, (ii) you permit SpaceClaim to assume sole
control of the defense, compromise or settlement of said claim, and (iii) you provide to SpaceClaim
reasonable cooperation, information and assistance in connection therewith.
(b) By You. SpaceClaim shall have no liability to you with respect to claims of infringement based on
the following: (i) the use or combination of the Software with any other software or hardware not
supported by SpaceClaim, if such infringement would not have occurred but for such use or com-
bination, (ii) any modification of the Software by anyone other than SpaceClaim, (iii) the use of other
www.SpaceClaim.com 22
than the current version of the Software, if such version was made available by SpaceClaim for no
additional fees with notice that such version was being provided in order to avoid an alleged or
potential infringement, (iv) compliance by SpaceClaim with your designs or instructions, or (v) claims
of infringement of patents, copyrights or trade secrets of you or your affiliates. You shall, on terms
comparable to those set forth in Section 6(a), defend and indemnify SpaceClaim against, claims
described in clauses (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) of this Section (b), to the extent resulting from your act or
omission.
(c) THE FOREGOING STATES THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF SPACECLAIM WITH RESPECT TO
INFRINGEMENT OR ALLEGED INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT, TRADE SECRET OR
OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT.
7. Limitation of Liability.
(a) TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, SPACECLAIM WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, RELIANCE, EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF DATA OR LOSS OF USE DAMAGES,
EVEN IF SPACECLAIM HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF THE SAME AND EVEN IF A REMEDY
SET FORTH HEREIN IS FOUND TO HAVE FAILED OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
(b) EXCEPT FOR THE OBLIGATIONS OF SPACECLAIM ARISING UNDER SECTION 6(a), YOU AGREE THAT
THE MAXIMUM LIABILITY OF SPACECLAIM ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, SHALL NOT EXCEED
THE ACTUAL LICENSE FEES RECEIVED BY SPACECLAIM FROM YOU FOR THE IMMEDIATELY
PRECEEDING TWELVE-MONTH PERIOD.
(c) YOU RECOGNIZE THAT THE FEE PAID FOR THE LICENSE RIGHTS HEREIN MAY BE SUBSTANTIALLY
DISPROPORTIONATE TO THE VALUE OF THE PRODUCTS TO BE DESIGNED IN CONJUNCTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE. FOR THE EXPRESS PURPOSE OF LIMITING THE LIABILITY OF SPACECLAIM TO AN
EXTENT WHICH IS REASONABLY PROPORTIONATE TO THE COMMERCIAL VALUE OF THIS
TRANSACTION, YOU AGREE TO THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS ON SPACECLAIMS LIABILITY.
(d) You may not bring any suit or action against SpaceClaim for any reason whatsoever more than
one year after the cause of action accrued.
8. Termination.
www.SpaceClaim.com 23
(a) Term. This Agreement shall commence upon your initial download of the Software and shall con-
tinue in effect until the expiration of the License Term or until sooner terminated in accordance with
this Section.
(b) Termination By You. You may terminate this Agreement and all licenses granted under this Agree-
ment at any time by discontinuing use of the Software and notifying SpaceClaim; provided, however,
that you shall not in any event be entitled to any refund of license or other fees previously paid.
(c) By SpaceClaim. SpaceClaim may terminate this Agreement and all licenses granted under this
Agreement if you fail to pay when due any amount owed or if you breach any of your obligations
under this Agreement.
(d) Consequences of Termination. Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason, you must: (i)
cease to use the Software and Documentation; (ii) destroy all copies of the Software and Docu-
mentation; (iii) erase all copies which are stored in computer memory or hard disk or other similar
forms or media. At SpaceClaims request, you shall certify in writing to SpaceClaim that all such cop-
ies have been destroyed and erased. The following shall survive the termination of this Agreement:
(i) all liabilities accrued under this Agreement prior to the effective date of termination; and (ii) all
provisions of Sections 2(f), 6, 7, 8 and 11 of this Agreement. Subject to the provisions of Section 7
hereof, the rights provided in this Section 8 shall be in addition to any and all rights and remedies
available to a non-defaulting party at law or in equity upon any breach of this Agreement by the
other party.
9. Export. You agree not to ship, transfer or export the Software or Documentation into any country
or use the Software or Documentation in any manner prohibited by any export control laws, restric-
tions or regulations of the United States (collectively, the Export Laws). In addition, i) if the Soft-
ware or Documentation is identified as an export controlled item under the Export Laws, you
represent and warrant that you are not a citizen of, or located within, an embargoed or otherwise
restricted nation and that you are not otherwise prohibited under the Export Laws from receiving the
Software and Documentation, and, ii) if SpaceClaim has accepted an order from a non-compliant
export controlled customer, SpaceClaim has reserves the right to immediately cancel the license.
10. Notice to U.S. Government End Users. The Software and Documentation are "Commercial Items,"
as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 2.101, consisting of "Commercial Computer Software" and "Com-
mercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Docu-
www.SpaceClaim.com 24
mentation are being licensed to U.S. Government end users (i) only as Commercial Items and (ii) with
only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
11. Miscellaneous.
(a) Entire Agreement. Unless the parties have executed a "hard copy" agreement for the license of
the Software, this Agreement sets forth the complete understanding of the parties with respect to
the subject matter of this Agreement and supersedes all prior understandings and communications
relating thereto. No term or condition of your purchase order or other document provided to
SpaceClaim which is different from, inconsistent with, or in addition to the terms and conditions set
forth herein will be binding upon SpaceClaim. To the extent that this document may constitute an
acceptance, this acceptance is expressly conditioned on your assent to the terms and conditions set
forth herein.
(b) Modification; Waiver. This Agreement may not be modified or amended except pursuant to a
written instrument signed by both parties. The waiver by either party of a breach of any provision
hereof shall not be construed as a waiver of any succeeding breach of the same or any other pro-
vision, nor shall any delay or omission on the part of such party to avail itself of any right, power or
privilege that it has or may have hereunder operate as a waiver of any right, power or privilege.
(c) Governing Law. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws
of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts as if made in and performed entirely within Massachusetts,
United States of America, without regard to any conflict of law principles and excluding application
of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods.
(d) Successors and Assigns. This Agreement is binding upon and inures to the benefit of the parties
hereto and their respective successors and assigns, but you may assign or otherwise transfer this
Agreement or your rights and duties only with the prior written consent of SpaceClaim, except that
you may assign this Agreement, without the prior written consent of SpaceClaim, to the successor of
all or substantially all of your assets or business, provided that such assignee agrees in writing to be
bound by the terms hereof.
(e) Severability. In the event that any provision of this Agreement shall for any reason be held invalid,
illegal or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, to such extent such provision shall be
deemed null and void and severed from this Agreement, and the remaining provisions of this Agree-
ment shall remain in full force and effect.
www.SpaceClaim.com 25
(f) Headings. The headings of the sections of this Agreement are for convenience of reference only
and shall not be considered in construing this Agreement.
(g) Force Majeure. If SpaceClaim is unable to perform any of its obligations under this Agreement
due to any act of God, fire, casualty, flood, war, strike, shortage or any other cause beyond its reas-
onable control, and if SpaceClaim uses reasonable efforts to avoid such occurrence and minimize its
duration, then SpaceClaims performance shall be excused and the time for its performance shall be
extended for the period of delay or inability to perform.
(h) Canadian Users. If you purchased the license for the Software in Canada, you agree to the fol-
lowing: The parties hereto confirm that it is their wish that this Agreement, as well as other doc-
uments relating hereto, including notices, have been and shall be written in the English language
only. Les parties ci-dessus confirment leur dsir que cet accord ainsi que tous les documents, y com-
pris tous avis qui s'y rattachent, soient rdigs en langue anglaise.
(i) Rights of Licensors. Any licensor of SpaceClaim shall be a third party beneficiary of this Agreement
and shall have the right to enforce the terms of this Agreement against you as they relate to com-
ponents or other material licensed to SpaceClaim by such licensor. To the extent provided in the
respective license agreements between SpaceClaim and such licensors, all such licensors and their
affiliates (i) disclaim any and all warranties to you; and (ii) disclaim, to the maximum extent permitted
by law, liability to you for damages, direct or indirect, incidental or consequential, that might arise
from any use of the Software and/or the components or other material licensed to SpaceClaim.
12. Inquiries. If you have any questions about this Agreement, please contact: SpaceClaim Cor-
poration, 150 Baker Ave. Ext., Concord, MA 01742. A copy of this Agreement is included with the
Documentation and may also be found on the SpaceClaim web site at www.spaceclaim.com.
Copyright 2013 SpaceClaim Corporation. All Rights Reserved. SpaceClaim is a registered trade-
mark of SpaceClaim Corporation.
Portions of this software Copyright 2013 Flexera Software Inc. FlexLM and FLEXNET are trade-
marks of Flexera Software Inc.
Portions of this software Copyright 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All Rights Reserved.
Adobe and Acrobat are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated
in the United States and/or other countries
www.SpaceClaim.com 26
ANSYS Workbench and GAMBIT and all other ANSYS, Inc. product names are trademarks or
registered trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries.
Contains BCLS (Bound-Constrained Least Squares) Copyright (C) 2006 Michael P. Friedlander, Depart-
ment of Computer Science, University of British Columbia, Canada, provided under a LGPL 3 license
which is included in the SpaceClaim installation directory (lgpl-3.0.txt). Derivative BCLS source code
available upon request.
Some SpaceClaim products may contain Autodesk RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc., Copyright
1998-2010 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved. Autodesk, AutoCAD, and Autodesk Inventor are
registered trademarks and RealDWG is a trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
Portions of this software Copyright 2013 Trimble. SketchUp is a trademark of Trimble Navigation
Limited.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Portions of this software Copyright 1999-2006 Intel Corporation. Licensed under the Apache
License, Version 2.0. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.a-
pache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Portions of this software Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler and Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon
Graphics, Inc. [1]
www.SpaceClaim.com 27
2010 Microsoft Office System User Interface is licensed from Microsoft Corporation. Direct3D,
DirectX, Microsoft PowerPoint, Excel, Windows/Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8 and their respective
Start Button designs are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Persistence of Vision Raytracer and POV-Ray are trademarks of Persistence of Vision Raytracer Pty.
Ltd.
Portions of this software Copyright 1993-2009 Robert McNeel & Associates. All Rights Reserved.
openNURBS is a trademark of Robert McNeel & Associates. Rhinoceros is a registered trademark of
Robert McNeel & Associates. (License information at http://www.rhino3d.com/opennurbs)
Portions of this software are owned by Siemens PLM 1986-2013. All Rights Reserved. Parasolid,
Unigraphics, and SolidEdge are registered trademarks and JT is a trademark of Siemens Product Life-
cycle Management Software, Inc.
Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. 1986-2013. All Rights Reserved. ACIS, SAT
and SAB are registered trademarks of Spatial Corp.
Contains Teigha for .dwg files licensed from the Open Design Alliance. Teigha is a trademark of the
Open Design Alliance.
Development tools and related technology provided under license from 3Dconnexion. 1992
2008 3Dconnexion. All rights reserved.
www.SpaceClaim.com 28
TraceParts is owned by TraceParts S.A. TraceParts is a registered trademark of TraceParts S.A.
Contains a modified version of source available from Unicode, Inc., copyright 1991-2008
Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.u-
nicode.org/copyright.html.
Portions of this software Copyright 1992-2008 The University of Tennessee. All rights reserved.
[2]
Portions of this software Copyright XHEO INC. All Rights Reserved. DeployLX is a trademark of
XHEO INC.
Portions of this software are owned by Tech Soft 3D, Inc. Copyright 1996-2013. All rights
reserved. HOOPS is a registered trademark of Tech Soft 3D, Inc.
Portions of this software are owned by MachineWorks Limited. Copyright 2013. All rights
reserved. Polygonica is a registered trademark of MachineWorks Limited.
Amazon Web Services functionality licensed under Apache License, Version 2.0.
All other trademarks, trade names or company names referenced in SpaceClaim software, doc-
umentation and promotional materials are used for identification only and are the property of their
respective owners.
[1] Additional Notice for TIFF source code contained in the Software:
www.SpaceClaim.com 29
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and
its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided
that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in
all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of
Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or
publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written
permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
[2] Additional notice for LAPACK and ALGLIB code contained in the Software:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer listed in this license in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the copyright holders nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
www.SpaceClaim.com 30
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
www.SpaceClaim.com 31
Introduction
SpaceClaim 2015is the leader in 3D Direct Modeling solutions for rapid concept design and geo-
metry manipulation.
SpaceClaim is intended for use by those who need to focus on core competencies while benefiting
from working in 3D. With SpaceClaim, engineers can collaborate in the design and manufacture of
mechanical products across a broad range of industries. The software provides a highly flexible
design environment coupled with a modern user experience, and meets manufacturers require-
ments for excellence in engineering-driven product development that is both fast and cost-effect-
ive.
The Online Help (F1), Video Help (F3), tutorials, and training materials are provided to help you
become productive withSpaceClaim as quickly as possible. Before beginning your own work,review
the Getting Started section and step through the tutorials provided in the online help.
Printable documentation
Quick reference Mouse and touch gestures chart SpaceClaim User's Guide
User's Guide
This User's Guide begins with a focus on the basic tools and on simple concepts. SpaceClaim is all
about adding and manipulating the faces of a design model, primarily through pull and move oper-
ations. If there is a face, you can pull on it. If you need a new face, draw an edge or copy an existing
one. Design clutter is minimized wherever possible. This guide communicates these simple, but
powerful concepts so that you can extrapolate them to your real-world designs. This guide also
provides useful shortcuts to use as you progress, as well as animations of tools in action to help you
understand their function.
SpaceClaim is different, and we encourage you to open your mind and enter into a world where you
can focus on the design, not the software. SpaceClaim appreciates your feedback, so let us know
where we have succeeded and what we can do better. Thanks for your purchase and we look forward
to working with you!
www.SpaceClaim.com 32
Get started using SpaceClaim
1. Sketch and pull to create a part, or open an existing model from any modeling software.
2. Edit the part using SpaceClaim's 2D and 3D editing tools.
3. (Optional) Customize SpaceClaim and your workspace to your working style.
4. Detail the part with notes, measurements, and geometric tolerances.
5. Submit the part for review using 3D Markup.
www.SpaceClaim.com 33
Welcome window
When you start SpaceClaim, a Welcome to SpaceClaim windowdisplays. From this window, you can
view SpaceClaim Release Notes, Online Help and other Help documents, view videos and tutorials,
and open sample designs. SpaceClaim updates the welcome content each time the window is dis-
played.
The Welcome windowcontains links to more information aboutSpaceClaim .
When you finish with the Welcome window, click Close or press the Esc key.
You can hide the Welcome window by unchecking the Show at startup checkbox. To redisplay the
Welcome window, check the Show welcome screen box on the SpaceClaim Popular options page.
www.SpaceClaim.com 34
The layout and contents of the Welcome window can be customized by editing a single XML file.
You can add or remove buttons, edit the icon for a button, control the layout of buttons, and determ-
ine the action executed when a button is pressed. For more information, see Customizing the Wel-
come window.
www.SpaceClaim.com 35
Tutorials
Tutorials and demos are available on the SpaceClaim web site. Step-by-step tutorials are also avail-
able in this Help file. Working through each of the tutorials will allow you to quickly grasp the basics
of using SpaceClaim. We strongly recommend that newcomers to 3D design run through the tutori-
als. You will gain competency with the functionality featured and the experience will help you mas-
ter the remaining features more easily.
Text tutorials
The following tutorials are available in the Online Help:
www.SpaceClaim.com 36
In this tutorial, you
will
l Create and
shell a
simple solid.
l Use the
selection fil-
ter and
power selec-
Sheet Metal tion.
l Add corner
reliefs to a
sheet metal
part.
l Convert
edges to
sheet metal
bends and
junctions.
l Create rips
in the part
so it can be
unfolded.
l Unfold a
sheet metal
part.
To access MySpaceClaim, select the Login link at the top of the SpaceClaim.comhome page.
www.SpaceClaim.com 37
Text tutorials
This tutorial illustrates many of the tools and their capabilities by showing just one method of cre-
ating geometry. In SpaceClaim, there are several other ways to create identical geometry.
Please note that as you move back and forth between windows, you may need to click in the
SpaceClaim window to activate it.
The tutorial should take about an hour to complete.
Start the tutorial
www.SpaceClaim.com 38
Sheet metal tutorial
Sometimes it is easier to start with a solid and convert it to create a sheet metal part. This tutorial
will guide you through the process and teach you how to use some of SpaceClaim's powerful tools
to make your work easier, whether you're working with sheet metal parts or solids.
www.SpaceClaim.com 39
SpaceClaim objects
The SpaceClaim interface describes objects slightly differently than other modeling software you
might be familiar with.
Document
A SpaceClaim .scdoc file may contain any combination of design versions, associated drawing sheets,
and 3D markup slides.
Design
A design is a 2D or 3D model, which contains at least one top-level component.
Component
A component consists of any number of objects, such as solids and surfaces. You can think of a com-
ponent as a "part." A component can also contain any number of sub-components. You can think of a
hierarchy of components and subcomponents as an "assembly."
Object
An object is anything recognizable by SpaceClaim tools. For example, 3D objects include vertices,
edges, faces, surfaces, solids, layouts, planes, axes, and origins. 2D objects include points and lines.
Examples of some object types are shown below:
Surface Solid
www.SpaceClaim.com 40
Plane Axis Origin
Body
In SpaceClaim, a body is a solid or surface.
Assembly constraints
Components are aligned using assembly constraints. See Assigning assembly conditions
Curve
An imported Curve file.
www.SpaceClaim.com 41
Design mesh objects
An STL file can be imported aslightweight (facets:facet only) with the ability to snap to the facets.
www.SpaceClaim.com 42
Selecting on a mesh object
When you select placement points on a mesh object, a circle around the point of the cursorhelps
you to identify facet faces, edges, and points.Thefollowing images show the types of selections you
can make:
www.SpaceClaim.com 43
Internal Edges Displayed
www.SpaceClaim.com 44
In SpaceClaim Options, the Appearance section has options for changing mesh colors and high-
lighting.
The Highlighting scheme for meshes matches that for solid bodies (Classic, Default, Custom). You
can use the Ctrl+Alt+Shift+H shortcut to toggle through the different schemes.
Also in the Appearance Options, you can enable the mesh back face color to make it different than
front faces. If enabled, you can change the color of mesh back faces.
You can toggle the Front and Back faces (i.e. switch the normals) using the context menu for a selec-
ted Design Mesh. You know the switch has taken place because the Front and Back colors will switch.
If Back face color is NOT enabled, there will be no visible change.
Material properties
You can assign Material Properties to Design Meshes.
Material Properties are preserved after operations such as:
www.SpaceClaim.com 45
l Copy/Transform
l Move to component
l Mesh boolean operations
l Facets>Reduce
www.SpaceClaim.com 46
Locking and unlocking objects
You can lock solids and surfaces so they cannot be changed. When an object is locked, you can only
change that object's visibility by clicking its check mark in the Structure tree. You cannot change the
object's geometry, location, name, color, or properties. Locked objects display a lock icon in the
Structure tree, as shown in the image below.
l You can't modify locked bodies directly or by group modification, and the API cannot modify
them via group values.
l Locked bodies cannot be pulled or moved, so the Pull arrow or Move handle appears gray.
They can be copied by holding Ctrl with the Pull or Move tool. The Pull arrow or Move handle
changes to color when you hold Ctrl.
l You can use a locked body as a cutter with the Combine tool, but you cannot use it as target.
l You can use a locked body as a location or selection reference, but it cannot be changed as a
result. For example, you can sketch on a locked body but the sketch lines will not imprint on
the body.
www.SpaceClaim.com 47
The SpaceClaim interface
SpaceClaim s graphical user interface (GUI) was designed to conform (within reason) to Microsoft
Vista standards and contains the toolbars, buttons, and windows associated with a Vista-compliant
graphical application. As a result, only those features of the GUI that relate to performing
SpaceClaim -specific tasks are explained in this guide. We assume, for example, that you are familiar
with standard Windows conventions, such as dragging a windows title bar to move the window, or
clicking the close button to close the window.
To take advantage of the full range of SpaceClaim features, we recommend using SpaceClaim with a
scroll wheel mouse or with a 3D Connexion SpaceBall or SpaceNavigator. However, SpaceClaim is
also fully operational with a laptop's touchpad and integrated mouse buttons. You can use the nub
as a scroll wheel, and configure the laptop so that pressing both buttons simultaneously behaves the
same as pressing a middle mouse button.
This image shows the major interface elements in the SpaceClaim application:
www.SpaceClaim.com 48
l Ribbon: Contains all the tools and modes you need to design, detail, and display models,
drawing sheets, and 3D markups.
l Active tool: The active tool is highlighted in orange.
l Design window:Displays your model. If you are in sketch or section modes, it also contains
the sketch grid to show the 2D plane on which you are working. The tool guides for the selec-
ted tool appear on the right side of the Design window. The cursor also changes to indicate
the selected tool guide. The mini-toolbar places commonly used options and actions close to
the cursor.
l Mini-toolbar: Contains frequently used options for the current tool.
l Tool guides: Help step you through using the tool and change the way the tool behaves.
l Status bar: The status bar displays messages and progress information about your actions on
the current design.
Panels
The panels initially appear along the left side of the application window. You can dock and detach
these panels.
l Structure panel: Contains the Structure tree, which shows you each of the objects in your
design. You can quickly show or hide any object using the checkbox next to the object's name.
You can expand or collapse the nodes of the tree, rename objects, create, modify, replace, and
delete objects, as well as work with components.
l Layers panel: The Layers panel allows you to group objects and set their visual characteristics,
such as visibility and color.
l Selection panel: The Selection panel lets you select other objects related to the one currently
selected.
l Groups panel: The Groups panel stores groups of selected objects. Selection, Alt+selection,
and move anchoring, axis, and ruler dimension information is all stored with the group.
l Views panel: The Views panel stores standard and custom views, and lets you assign shortcut
keys to custom views.
l Options panel: The Options panel allows you to modify the functions of the SpaceClaim tools.
For example, when you use the Pull tool, selecting an edge and then selecting the Chamfer
Edge option creates a chamfer instead of a round when you pull the edge.
l Properties panel: The Properties panel displays details about the selected object. You can
change the property values to change the object.
www.SpaceClaim.com 49
Customizing the ribbon background image
You can override the ribbon background image with the following command line options:
l /RibbonImage=<filename>
l /RibbonImageLocation=(Left|Center|Right)
For example:
SpaceClaim.exe/RibbonImage=c:\temp\img.png /RibbonImageLocation=Left
The image needs to be 52 pixels in height. The width can vary and you may have to experiment.
www.SpaceClaim.com 50
Structure tree
The Structure panel contains the Structure tree, which shows you each of the objects in your design.
Objects are displayed in the order in which they were created, or in the orderin whichthey were
imported. The figure below showsall the object types that can be displayed in the Structure tree.
www.SpaceClaim.com 51
You can use the Structure tree to find objects, select objects, set object visibility, expand or collapse
the nodes of the tree, rename objects, create, modify, move, replace, and delete objects, as well as
work with components using the Structure tree.
You can uncheck the box next to an object to hide it in the Design window.
Some objects, such as sketch curves and 3D curves, are automatically placed in Curves groups
in the Structure tree. You can rename a curve, but not the curve group. You can move the
Curves group, but you cannot move a curve out of the group. Deleting the group deletes all
the curves in the group.
You can set the visibility of a Curves group or an individual curve in the group,even if the
Curve group is within a dependent copy of a component.
To find objects
To find an object in the Design window, hover over an object in the Structure tree to highlight it in
the Design window. Hovering over a hidden object displays it temporarily in the Design window.
To find an object in the Structure tree:
l Hover your mouse over an object in the Design window to highlight it in the Structure tree. (Its
component is highlighted if it is not expanded.)
l Right-click an object in the Design window and select Locate in Structure Tree to highlight
the object in the Structure tree.
l Press Ctrl+F to open the Find dialog.
When Pattern is selected in the Structure tree, the selection list updates to display the number of pat-
terns included in the design.
To move objects
Drag an object or component to change its position in the Structure tree.
Right-click an object and select Move to New Component to create a component within the active
component and move the object into it. If the object has a custom name, the new component will
have the same name.
Ctrl+right-click multiple objects, then right-click and select Move Each to New Components to cre-
ate a new component for each object within the active component and move the objects into the
components. If the object has a custom name, the new component will have the same name.
You can move the view of a component from one drawing sheet to another by dragging the view in
the Structure panel.
An annotation plane cannot be moved to a sub-component after you add dimensions because
www.SpaceClaim.com 52
the references would be lost.
Offset, mirror, and shell relationships stay with a solid when it is moved to another component,
unless the relationship would link two components when it is moved.
To rename objects
Right-click an object in the Structure tree and select Rename or press F2 to rename the selected
object. You can also click the object, pause, then click again to rename it.
The top level component is automatically named when you first save your design, but you can
rename it.
www.SpaceClaim.com 53
To lock and unlock objects
Locking a solid or surface prevents any changes from being made to it.
Right-click the object and select Lock from the context menu to lock the object. If you right-clicked
a component, all the objects in the component that can be locked are locked.
Select Lock again to unlock the object.
www.SpaceClaim.com 54
Selection panel
Use the Selection panel to select objects in the same part that are similar or related to the object cur-
rently selected. The results list is based on the geometry you select for the search. For example, we
searched based on the round face highlighted in the image below. See the examples below to see
what happens when you click on each of the search results.
www.SpaceClaim.com 55
Selection categories
www.SpaceClaim.com 56
Category Description Example Selection types
All coincident faces
Patterns Pattern mem- Pattern member
bers, entire pat- Recognized pattern
terns, or
All pattern members
recognized pat-
terns Note:
If the pattern does not have a pat-
tern relationship in [%=Ge-
eneral.ProductName%, you must
hold Alt and select the face that
contains the pattern members in
order to select a recognized pat-
tern.
Rounds Rounds and Equal radius rounds
chamfers Equal or smaller radius rounds
Equal or smaller-sized chamfers
Variable radius round faces and
chains of faces even if they are com-
posed of a mix of constant and vari-
able faces
Same Color Faces of the Faces
same color
Same Curve Curves of the Faces with the same color as the ori-
Type same color, ginally selected face
type, and
length
Same Hole Standard Holes Standard Holes
Dimensions with the same
Hole Dimen-
sions
Same size Faces that have Equal radius cylinder
the same radius Equal radius hole
or area
Equal radius protrusion
Faces with the same area
Holes equal to or smaller than
Surface holes equal to or smaller
www.SpaceClaim.com 57
Category Description Example Selection types
than
Sheet Metal Sheet Metal Miter Corners
objects Same Junction type and parameters
Beads and Forms with the same
parameters
5. (Optional) If you turn off Automatically calculate power selection results in the Selection
options, then you must click to search for related objects in your design. Otherwise, the
search results are automatically displayed.
Related objects are displayed in the main area of the panel. Mouse over the objects in the list
to highlight those objects in the Design window.
6. (Optional) Set the Power Selection Relative Tolerance in the Selection options to find items
within a tolerance of the target size.
7. (Optional) Click on a blue link to change that parameter in the search.
8. Click any number of the related objects in the list to add them to the current selection.
You can Ctrl+click to select multiple objects.
www.SpaceClaim.com 58
To select faces that surround an internal void
1. Click a face of the solid with internal faces.
2. Select Inner Faces from the category list.
To find all faces within the range ofareas between two faces
1. Select two faces.
2. Click in the Selection panel.
The search results display all faces in your designwith an area between the two faces you selec-
ted.
www.SpaceClaim.com 59
Examples
The faces highlighted above are selected when you click All rounds are equal to or smaller than
4.34mm.
The faces highlighted above are selected when you click Depression.
www.SpaceClaim.com 60
The faces highlighted above are selected when you click Surface edge loop.
www.SpaceClaim.com 61
Layers
Layers can be thought of as a grouping mechanism based on visual characteristics. Visual char-
acteristics include visibility, color and linestyle. Layers are managed in the Layers panel and accessed
and modified with the Layer tool in the Display tab Style group.
The default layer color for new documents can be set in the Appearance section of SpaceClaim
Options.
Layers are especially useful when you want to hide annotation planes.
Sheet metal parts have a set of default layers when the part is in an unfolded state. They are:
l Dimension
l Bend Lines Up
l Bend Lines Down
l Bend Dimensions
l Forms
To create a layer
Right-click in the Layers panel and select New.
This layer becomes the activate layer. Any objects created are automatically placed on this layer.
www.SpaceClaim.com 62
To rename a layer
Right-click the layer in the Layers panel and select Rename or click the layer name and slowly drag
to the right.
Layer0 cannot be renamed.
To delete a layer
Right-click the layer in the Layers panel and select Delete.
Layer0 cannot be deleted.
To activate a layer
1. Right click on a layer to open the context sensitive menu.
2. Choose Make Active.
3. New objects created are assigned to the active layer.
To set the visibility of layout lines and imported, DWG and DXF lines
Select Solid or Hidden from the layer's line drop-down in the Layers panel.
www.SpaceClaim.com 63
You can also specify a custom color by selecting Custom Color and using the Color window.
You can override the layer color for solids, surfaces, faces, or curves. See Applying colors to design
elements.
www.SpaceClaim.com 64
Groups
You can create a group from any set of selected objects. When storing Ruler Dimensions for Pull or
Move in a group, keep in mind that how the tool is initially placed and what is stored for later play-
back.
l The Move tool initially places itself ( for ease of quick moving) with respect to the oriented
bounding box of the selected items
l The Group functionality stores the following:
l Selected objects
l Active tool
l Any sub-selections that affect the behavior of the tool
l Any active ruler dimension
l Any anchor reference to that ruler dimension
For example, insofar as Group creation goes, a Move tool can be anchored to an edge of a face and
oriented in a direction. This stores the selection, the edge, and the orientation direction. Sub-
sequently, a selected axis of the Move handle can have a ruler dimension to a dimension reference.
This stores the Move handle axis and the ruler dimension. Any re-invocation of this group will
attempt to re-setup the tool, the selection, any options, and ruler dimensions, according to how the
group was saved.
When using groups to store Move and Pull operations as described above, choose references
appropriate to your design intent and the likelihood of any of the required references being
present on re-invocation.
You can use groups in combination with the %%Product%% API to change these parameters, or use
them as a way to indicate to others your design intentions about which sort of changes you expect
them to make to your design.
www.SpaceClaim.com 65
Scope
Groups can be saved for the root part or for its children. To change the scope at which groups are
displayed, select Root Part or Active Part in the drop-down list near the top of the Groups panel. This
allows you to see groups that are in children components without opening the component in
another window.
If an external part has groups defined in it, you can right-click the component and select Import
Component Groups to copy the groups to the current root part. This means you can open the com-
ponent in its own window to change the groups there as well. Because the groups reflect geometry,
they will change the geometry in original model where they were defined; but you're not changing
the definition of the groups. If you redefine the copied group, the original group will not get
redefined.
Driving dimensions
When you select an object with a dimension property and create a group, a driving dimension is usu-
ally created. These groups are added to the Driving Dimensions folder. Driving dimensions include
offset distance (faces with an offset relationship), round radius, and ruler dimensions. You can change
the dimension in the groups panel, and the geometry will change. These saved groups can be used
for API-driven modification and can be sent to ANSYS.
l Creating a driving dimension with Pull (offset)
l Creating a driving dimension with Move (translation or rotation)
l Creating a driving dimension with the Select tool (round radius and distance between offset
faces)
www.SpaceClaim.com 66
Named selections
If no driving dimension is available, a named selection is created. This allows you to save selection
sets to easily recall them.
A round group is also created each time you fill a round and is saved in the Filled Rounds folder. You
can reattach a group of rounds as long as some portion of the original edges (or faces that bordered
the edges) still exists in your design.
Drag a group in the Groups panel to change its position in the list. Group order is important because
they are changed from top to bottom when the change is initiated in an external application.
To create a group
1. Select any set of 3D objects.
2. Click Create Group in the Groups panel or press Ctrl+G.
The group appears in the list. Mouse over the group to highlight the objects in the group and
click the group to select them. Properties and other information, such as the selected axis for
the last Move rotation, are saved with the group.
To reattach a round
1. Right-click one or more round group in the Groups panel.
2. Select Reattach Round from the context menu.
www.SpaceClaim.com 67
1. Right-click the group in the Groups panel.
2. Select Rename from the context menu.
3. Enter the new name for the group and press Enter.
To explode a group
1. Select the group in the Groups panel.
2. Right-click and select Explode from the context menu.
Each group will be placed in its own group. The new group names are based on the parent group.
For example, a group named "Group" will explode into "Group 1", "Group 2", etc.
www.SpaceClaim.com 68
Views
You can change the shortcut keys for standard views and create your own custom views to save set-
tings for object orientation and visibility.
User-created views will not auto-scale when they are moved.
www.SpaceClaim.com 69
l Orientation: Select if you want the current orientation to be saved in the view.
l Object visibility: Select if you want the visibility of objects in the current view to be
saved in the view. Objects that are hidden when you create the view will be hidden
when you apply the view. Visibility is applicable to all types of geometry, planes, and
curves.
l Visibility behavior for new objects: Select the visibility behavior you want to apply to
objects you create after you create the view.
l Leave Unchanged: New objects will retain their visibility when you apply the
view.
l Visible: New objects will be visible when you apply the view.
l Hidden: New objects will be hidden when you apply the view.
5. Click OK.
Your custom view is added to the View tool menu.
www.SpaceClaim.com 70
3. Edit the view properties.
www.SpaceClaim.com 71
Status bar
From left to right in the image above, the Status Bar shows the following:
l Status message: Displays messages and progress information about your actions in the current
tool. You can view these messages in the top left of the Design window by selecting Show
status messages in design window in the Popular options.
l Quick measurement: Displays simple measurements of the selected object(s), such as the dis-
tance between two objects or the X, Y, Z coordinate of a point. See Quick measurements. Use
the Measure tool for other types of measurements, such as volume and mass.
l Error and warning messages: Displays error messages as they occur. Click the icon to display
all the messages currently relevant to your design. Click a message to highlight the object ref-
erenced by the message. Double-click a message to select the object(s) referenced by the mes-
sage.
l Selection list: Shows you a list of objects you currently have selected. Hover over the list area
on the status bar to see a complete list. When Pattern is selected in the Structure tree, the
selection list updates to display the number of patterns included in the design.
l Select Parents or Select Children : Depending on the selection, you can select the parents
(up arrow)of the currently selected objects or the children (down arrow)of the currently selec-
ted objects.
l Revert selection : Reverts your selection to your previous selection.
l Selection filter : Allows you to choose what can be selected in the Design window. A
label in the status bar, located to the left of the selected object status, displays the currently
pre-selected object.
l Selection mode : ChooseBox, Lasso, orPaint.
l View controls: Use these controls to spin, pan, zoom, and switch to previous or next views.
You can also change your view using the tools found in the Orient group, which is found on
most tabs.
www.SpaceClaim.com 72
Options panel
The Options panel allows you to modify the functions of the SpaceClaim tools. For example, when
you use the Pull tool, selecting an edge and then selecting the Chamfer Edge option creates a cham-
fer instead of a round when you pull the edge.
Options are enabled when the relevant geometry is selected.
This is the Options panel for the Pull tool when an edge is selected:
www.SpaceClaim.com 73
Properties
The Properties panel is on the left side of the SpaceClaim interface, below the Structure tree and
Options panel. When you select a complete component, surface, or solid by triple-clicking it in the
Design window or selecting it in the Structure tree, you will see its properties in the Properties
panel. You can use the Properties panel to modify various properties values, such as Color to set the
color of a selected face or body, or to change other properties values.
In addition to components, surfaces, and solids, you can modify property values for sketched
objects, inserted images, patterns, and sheet metal. The property settings for these objects are
described in detail in their specific topics.
It may be helpful to configure the Properties panel so that you can see object properties and the
Structure panel simultaneously.
www.SpaceClaim.com 74
l Display Name: If you want the name to be different than the file name.
l Document Path: Path to the file on disk.
l Locked: Set this to true if you want to prevent the model from being modified.
l Use File Name: Set this to True if you want to display the file name for the top level
design component in the Structure tree. Set this to False if you want to use the Display
Name.
3. Enter additional information such as Creator, Description, Title, and Version in the File section
of the Properties panel.
These properties can be included in BOM tables.
Material properties
You can set the gage for a material used in a sheet metal part. Assigning a gage enables you to con-
trol the thickness of a sheet metal part at a more granular level. Gage, or, gauge, is the thickness of
the metal organized by numbers: the smaller the number the thinner the metal. A sheet metal design
www.SpaceClaim.com 75
or component of a design must be assigned a material in order for the gage drop down to display.
You cannot select a gage for designs or components that are assigned the Unknown Material
option.
To assign a material, from the Structure tree select the design at the top level, or select the com-
ponent for which you want to assign a material, and then click the Material Name dropdown from
the Material group in the Properties panel. From the Thickness group in the Properties panel, click
the gage drop down, and select a gage.
You can specify material properties for a component in several ways:
www.SpaceClaim.com 76
Select a Material from the local library
1. Select a component in the Structure tree.
2. In the Properties pane, expand Material properties.
3. Click in the Material Name field to display the Materials Library.
4. Select the Local Materials tab.
5. Select a material and click OK.
The material and its properties are displayed and can be edited in the Properties panel. The
material also saves with the SCDOC file.
You can rename, copy, and delete Materials from the Local Library. You can also create new
Materials.
www.SpaceClaim.com 77
Create a material
1. Select a component in the Structure tree.
2. In the Properties pane, expand Material properties.
3. Click in the Material Name field to display the Materials Library.
4. Click the New button to create a new material.
5. Enter the name of the material.
6. Click OK.
7. Enter the density of the material in the Density property.
If you specified the density for the material elsewhere in the design, or specified it in the same
SpaceClaim session, SpaceClaim displays that value in the Density property for you.
8. (Optional) Expand other material properties and enter their value and units.
The material and its properties appear in the Local Materials tab and save with the SCDOC file.
To remove a material from a component, select Unknown Material from the Local Library.
You can only change the Density value for material properties. All other values are determined by the
material you select.
In the Local Materials tab, you can also do the following:
l Select a material and click the Copy button. A new material is created with the original name
and "Copy 1" appended
l Delete selected materials
l Rename selected materials
l Select a material and click the Add to Library button to add that material to the Library.
www.SpaceClaim.com 78
Recognizing rounds and chamfers
Rounds and chamfers created in SpaceClaim are automatically recognized, but they may not be
recognized on imported models.
1. Select a round or chamfer face.
2. Change the Round or Chamfer property to True.
www.SpaceClaim.com 79
Keyboard shortcuts
You can use the following shortcuts to quickly access tools, tool guides, and other SpaceClaim com-
mands.
www.SpaceClaim.com 80
Copy Faces Ctrl+Shift+C
Create Group Ctrl+G
Cut Ctrl+X
Cut Faces Ctrl+Shift+X
Delete Del
Detach face Ctrl+D
Exit Alt+F4
Invert selection Ctrl+Shift+I
Display next Design window Ctrl+Tab
Display previous Design window Ctrl+Shift+Tab
Move sketch grid in Ctrl+right arrow
Move sketch grid out Ctrl+left arrow
Nudge primary (active) dimension Up by normal
Shift+up arrow
amount
Nudge primary (active) dimension Down by normal
Shift+down arrow
amount
Nudge primary (active) dimension Up by small amount Alt+Shift+up arrow
Nudge primary (active) dimension Down by small
Alt+Shift+down arrow
amount
Nudge primary (active) dimension Up bylarge amount Ctrl+Shift+up arrow
Nudge primary (active) dimension Down by large
Ctrl+Shift+down arrow
amount
Nudge secondary (inactive)dimensionDown by nor-
Shift+left arrow
mal amount
Nudge secondary (inactive) dimensionUp by normal
Shift+right arrow
amount
Nudge secondary (inactive) dimensionDown by small
Shift+Alt+left arrow
amount
Nudge secondary (inactive) dimensionUp by small
Shift+Alt+right arrow
amount
Nudge secondary (inactive) dimensionDown by large
Ctrl+Shift+left arrow
amount
Nudge secondary (inactive)dimensionUp by large
Ctrl+Shift+right arrow
amount
New Ctrl+N
Open Ctrl+O
Paste Ctrl+V
www.SpaceClaim.com 81
Print Ctrl+P
Print Preview Ctrl+F2
Redo Ctrl+Y
Save Ctrl+S
Save As Ctrl+Shift+S
Save As New Alt+Shift+S
Share As File Alt+S
Save As New Version Ctrl+Alt+S
Select all of same type as selected Ctrl+A
Bold text Ctrl+B
Italicize text Ctrl+I
Underline text Ctrl+U
Hide object Ctrl+H
Undo Ctrl+Z
Zoom In Ctrl+ +
Zoom Out Ctrl+ -
Set spin center Ctrl+T
Locate spin center Ctrl+L
Clear spin center Ctrl+Q
Expand entire node in Structure tree ' * ' on number pad
Expand selected node in Structure tree ' + ' on number pad
Collapse selected node in Structure tree ' - ' on number pad
Activate object in Structure tree Ctrl+Shift+A
Change Highlighting scheme Ctrl+Shift+H
Toggle quick rendering mode Ctrl+Shift+R
www.SpaceClaim.com 82
Using a multitouch screen
SpaceClaim supports Microsoft Touch technology for Windows VistaTM, Windows 7, Windows 8. It
allows you interact with your designs using a stylus or multiple fingers on a touch screen. Touch
screens with multitouch capabilities improve your work experience by providing:
l User interface controls that are always close to a finger, so you use your mouse less often.
l 3D interaction, such as panning and rotating views, that offers a different navigation mech-
anism than with modifier keys or separate tools.
l More intuitive selection, because you put your fingers directly on the geometry you want to
manipulate.
l Modeling in a more hands-on environment, so it feels more like working on a real part than a
virtual part.
l Real-time, interactive design reviews using large format multitouch displays.
When using SpaceClaim s multi touch feature, you can widen the SpaceClaim application window to
span across two multi-touch monitors at the same time, or, you can move SpaceClaim between mon-
itors to display the entire SpaceClaim window on either monitor.
While a significant effort was made to optimize the multi touch functionality to fit (and enhance) the
SpaceClaim user model, the intention was never to replace the mouse entirely. Touchshould be
used when it feels easier to do so, and the mouseshould be used alongside the touch screen. The
same philosophy applies to keyboard shortcuts and even to precise selection techniques: the user is
encouraged to try out touch to see where it improves the user experience - and feedback is very wel-
come.
Touch is incorporated into SpaceClaim in many ways:
l Navigation (Spin/Pan/Zoom/Rotate) uses emerging Microsoft standard gestures (those having
been extended from 2D to 3D).
l Precise selection of toolbar buttons is made easier by heads-up bubble notes, that appear
over the icon that a finger may obscure.
www.SpaceClaim.com 83
l Radial menus have been introduced to ease the choice of selection types, as a shortcut to get
to major tools, and as a method to select edge loops.
l A flick gesture takes the place of the missing mouse wheel to select objects that lie behind
other objects.
l Where possible, difficult selections have been made easier by automatic selection, such as the
one axis that is free to move in the Move tool (on assembled components).
For HID-supported devices, SpaceClaim will use the faster HID signal.
For non-supported hardware, SpaceClaim will use the Windows 7 and 8 built-in Multitouch API.
www.SpaceClaim.com 84
Basic touch gestures
Description Action
Tap Touch screen briefly
Double-tap Touch screen briefly twice
Triple-tap Touch screen briefly three times
www.SpaceClaim.com 85
Description Action
An animation is displayed when you use a
multitouch gesture with a pause, such as
touching with two fingers, waiting, and then
dragging to invoke gesture mode. The anim-
ation shows the wait time as the circle is
drawn. When the circle is complete, then the
wait time has been reached and the alternate
Hold
behavior is invoked. If you lift or move your
finger before the circle is complete, then the
alternate behavior or mode is not invoked.
So in this example of two fingers touching,
it would revert to panning the view.
Holdone, two, three or four fingers
toinvoke different functions.
Navigation
Action Description
Pan Move two fingers together across the screen.
Zoom Move two fingers away from each other to zoom in or toward each other to zoom out.
Hold one finger on the axis you want to rotate around and move the other finger in an arc
Rotate
that is centered on your first finger.
Spin Move three fingers together across the screen.
Spin
on an Hold one finger on the axis you want to spin around and drag two fingers on the screen.
axis
Hold three fingersto activate the Snap View tool. While the Snap View tool is active, tap
Snap
for a left mouse click and flick for a left mouse flick. Hold three fingers again to inactivate
View
the tool. You can also press the Escape key toexit the tool.
If you use multiple screens, then the screen that is designated as the touch screen at the oper-
ating system level is the one for which SpaceClaim detects touch input. If a SpaceClaim session
has windows on multiple multitouch displays, you can sequentially use one or the other display
for multitouch interaction.
www.SpaceClaim.com 86
Action Touch or pen gesture Mouse
Finger: Tap
Select geometry Click
Pen: Hover to preview the selection, tap to select
Add or remove
geometry from
Ctrl +
selection, remove Ctrl + tap
click
query-selected
edge loops
Shift + tap
Add geometry to Shift +
In Pull and Select: Drag to prehighlight the object(s), then lift your fin-
selection click
ger.
Add geometry to
Alt +
alternate ref-
click
erence selection
Alt + tap
l If you are already dragging geometry, then a long touch with a
second finger changes to an alternate selection tool (shown on-
screen with a blue touch circle)
www.SpaceClaim.com 87
Action Touch or pen gesture Mouse
Box-select with
n/a
four fingers
www.SpaceClaim.com 88
Action Touch or pen gesture Mouse
This allows you to preview and change your selection before it
becomes final, rather than getting one chance to select the objects
you want. Slight finger movements will not interrupt the previewing.
Click
Select,
Lasso-select faces then
Invoke lasso selection with the radial menu
or edges click
Using
Lasso
Click
Select,
then
Paint-select Invoke paint selection with the radial menu
click
Using
Paint
Finger or pen: Touch long enough to show the multitouch circle, then
Invoke a context-
lift finger or pen
sensitive menu (a Right-
right-mouse-but- Pen: Tap with pen button pressed click
ton menu)
If using the gizmo, just click the button labeled Right on the gizmo.
Finger: Touch with two fingers, pause, then drag in the gesture pattern.
You will know when the gesture can start when two multitouch circles
like this pop up under your fingers:
Gesture
Use gesture
with the
recognition (see
right
Mouse and touch
mouse
gestures)
button
Pen: Touch and drag in the gesture pattern with the pen button
pressed
If using the gizmo, just drag the button labeled Right on the gizmo.
Reset all pen and
Ctrl + Shift + F2 n/a
touch input
Invoke mag- Ctrl + Shift + F3
nifying loupe win- (This slows down drag by 10% for precise selection with tap, double- n/a
dow tap, or up-select.)
Invoke keypad for Ctrl + Shift + K
Ctrl, Alt, Shift, (This is useful for tablet PCs on which the keyboard is obscured by the n/a
Tab, Esc, Enter, rotated screen.)
www.SpaceClaim.com 89
Action Touch or pen gesture Mouse
and Space
www.SpaceClaim.com 90
l Starting on whitespace, drag with one finger, then hover over an edge and double-tap with
another finger to query select through the available edge loops. This behavior is the same as a
simple double-tap.
l Starting on whitespace, drag with one finger, then hover over a face and triple-tap with
another finger to select all the faces of the body. This behavior is the same as a simple triple-
tap
www.SpaceClaim.com 91
Mouse and touch gestures
Use gestures in the Design window as shortcuts to common actions and tools. Gesture information is
displayed in the status bar as you use gestures.
l To gesture with a mouse, hold down the right mouse button and drag in the gesture pattern.
l To gesture with a touchscreen or touchpad, touch with two fingers, pause, then drag in the
gesture pattern. With a pen, touch and drag in the gesture pattern with the pen button
pressed.
l To cancel a gesture, pause for one second.
If you have upgraded SpaceClaim from a previous version and some of these gestures don't
work for you, then you may need to remove your user settings file. On Windows 7 and Win-
dows Vista, remove the files and folders in C:\User-
s\<YourUserName>\AppData\Local\SpaceClaim.
www.SpaceClaim.com 92
Using the radial menu
This menu gives you quick access to the most commonly used tools and makes it easy to choose a
select mode while another tool, such as the Pull tool, is active. The radial menu supports secondary
selection. For example, you can select one of the Pull tool guides, then select loops of edges with
the radial menu, whether or not a primary reference was selected.
When the radial menu is displayed on a multi-touch screen, touch input is processed only within the
menu to avoid accidental dismissal of the menu.
You can changeradial menu optionsin Popular options.
www.SpaceClaim.com 93
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 94
Selecting
You can select vertices, edges, planes, axes, faces, surfaces, rounds, solids, and components in 3D. In
2D, you can select points and lines. You can also select circle and ellipse centers, the midpoints of
lines and edges, and the internal points and end points of splines.
You can select components and other objects in the Structure treeand use the Selection panel to
select objects in the same part that are similar or related to the object currently selected.
Objects that cant be selected are dimmed in the Design window.
Your selection list is shown in the status bar at the bottom of the SpaceClaim window. Status bar
labels display both pre-selected and selected objects. Hover over the status message for a detailed
list of what you have pre-selected or selected, including primary and secondary (Alt+selected)
objects.
Select modes
You can click the arrow on the Select tool to use the following optional modes:
l Using Box: Click and hold the mouse button while drawing a box in the Design window. If you
draw the box from left to right, all objects fully enclosed within the box will be selected. If
you draw the box from right to left, all objects touching the box will be selected.
l Using Lasso: Click and hold the mouse button while drawing a freeform shape. All objects fully
enclosed by the shape will be selected.
l Using Polygon: Click and move the mouse to draw a line, then click again to draw the next con-
necting line, so that you create a polygon shape around the area you want to select.
l Using Paint: Click and hold the mouse button while highlighting adjacent faces and edges. All
edges and faces that you move the mouse over will be selected. Release the mouse button to
finalize your selection.
www.SpaceClaim.com 95
l Using Boundary: Select faces or edges that define a boundary, click the Select Seed tool
guide, and click any object within the boundary. All objects from that seed object to the
boundary are selected.
l Select Components: In this selection mode, as you mouse over geometry, when you are over
an object that is ina component, that component will be pre-highlighted. This mode is set on
a per window basis. It can be On in one window and Off in another.
No matter which mode you use, the objects that will be selected are highlighted to preview your
selection. You can use the Selection filter to control what gets selected. To select or deselect all
available filters, select the All checkbox.
If you entered the Design tab with sheet metal features selected, the Select tool will work as it
does in Sheet metal. Right click on the sheet metal part in the Structure tree and choose Sus-
pend Sheet Metal in the context menu.
To select
The most commonly used selection methods are:
l Click to select an object.
l Double-click to select an edge loop. (Double-click again to cycle through alternate loops.)
l Triple-click to select a solid.
l Drag (or select Using Box from the Select tool menu) to create a selection box.
l Press Ctrl+A to select all similar objects, such as faces, edges, or points on the same solid or
surface part. For example, if you have a sketch curve selected when you press Ctrl+A, then only
sketch curves will be selected.
l Hold Ctrl and select to add or remove items from the selection. Ctrl with box-selection
toggles the selection; Shift with box-selection adds to the selection.
l Hold Alt and select to create a secondary selection set.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 96
Double-click to select and cycle through chains of similar,
connected faces (face loops):
Detailed instructions
To select: Do this:
Double-click an edge or line. Double-click again to select the next
All the edges around loop of edges. Repeat as necessary. You can also right-click the edge
a face or closed loop or line and choose one of the loop options in the Select menu.
When you repeatedly double-click outside surface edges, the selec-
www.SpaceClaim.com 97
To select: Do this:
tion cycles through open loop, tangent chain, and face loop, then
repeats through that list.
Double-click a face. (Tangent faces are created by rounds or when
All tangent faces
edges are drawn on a face.)
Contiguous edges or Click one face or edge, then Shift+click another face or edge to select
faces all the faces or edges between the two.
The sides (but not the
Triple-click the solid and Ctrl+click the top and bottom to remove
top and bottom) of a
them from the selection.
solid
A solid or surface Triple-click the solid, or right-click on the solid and select Select >
body Body.
An entire sketch Triple-click the sketch.
Right-click on the component and select Select > Component. This
A component option is available only when you right-click an object within the act-
ive component.
All objects of same
type as selected Select an object and press Ctrl+A.
object
All the objects in the
Click Select All in the Select tool menu, or right-click and select Select
active component
> Select All from the context menu. The types of objects selected
(except layout sur-
depend on whether you are in Sketch, Section, or 3D mode.
faces)
Layout surfaces Click the object in the Structure tree.
Anything within a
See Box-selecting.
selection box
A lightweight com- Check the Lightweight Components box in the Options panel. Then
ponent right-click and select Select > Component.
The inverse of the cur-
rent selection (in the Right-click a selected object and select Select > Inverse Selection.
active component)
A protrusion Right-click on a protrusion and select Select > Protrusion.
A depression Right-click inside a depression and select Select > Depression.
One member of a pat-
Right-click a pattern member and select Select > Pattern Member.
tern
All members of a pat- Right-click a pattern member and select Select > All Pattern Mem-
tern bers.
Anything partially in a Click and drag from the lower right to upper left when drawing a selec-
selection box tion box.
www.SpaceClaim.com 98
To select: Do this:
The inverse of the cur- Press and hold Ctrl while box-selecting to toggle the selected state of
rent box selection the objects within the selection.
Objects that are
behind other objects Hold the Ctrl key and turn the mouse wheel.
("query selection")
If any object was part of a group selection used to perform an action, the other parts of the
group are highlighted when that object is selected. Click again to select the entire highlighted
group.
When selecting within a view on a drawing sheet, you can only select those objects that are on
the cross-section plane, or that are within the boundary of a detail view. Box selecting in
Sketch mode selects only sketch lines. Box-selecting in Section mode selects only section
lines.
(Optional) Ctrl+click and Shift+click to add or remove items from the selection set.
Ctrl+click to add or remove one item from the selection set. Shift+click to add everything
between your first click and the Shift+click to the selection. You can add or remove items both
in the workspace and on the Structure tree. You can also press Ctrl and drag to add the items
within the selection box to the selection.
(Optional) Alt+click to create a secondary selection set.
Hold down the Alt key while performing any of the other selection techniques (double-click,
triple-click, Ctrl, Shift) to create the second selection set. Alternate selections are shown in
blue, and are used to guide the actions of the Pull and Move tools.
Mesh selection
Use Shift+Double-click on sharp (>60) internal edges that form an isoline (i.e. edges that are nearly
continuously tangent to each other as the line propagates).
The selection will be the best polyline found and not necessarily a complete loop. As you can see in
the image below, the selection stops at the cylinder because adjacent edges are not within the tol-
erance (>10) to be considered tangent.
www.SpaceClaim.com 99
Use Ctrl+Shift+Double-click on sharp edges to select multiple mesh edge isolines.
Use Double-click on Boundary mesh edges to highlight and select the boundary edges
www.SpaceClaim.com 100
To clear a selection
Click any empty space in the Design window or select Clear Selection from the Select tool menu.
www.SpaceClaim.com 101
The up and down arrow keys work the same as the mouse wheel. Mouse over the element you want
to select, and press the up or down arrow keys to "scroll" through the possible selections. This is use-
ful if you are on a laptop or when you use a mouse that doesn't have a scroll wheel.
Tool guides
Within the Select tool, the following tool guide is available:
The Select tool guide is active by default. This tool lets you click, double-click, triple-click,
Ctrl+click, Shift+click, and Alt+click to select items.
Options
The following options are available for sketches:
Maintain Keep the connection between a sketch curve and other curves that share its end
sketch con- points. If you deselect this option and move a sketch curve, the curve will move inde-
nectivity pendent of other curves.
Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian dimensions from
Cartesian the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the point you
dimensions select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from the
origin. When you select a point, the X, Y, and Z locations display in the status bar.
Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions from the
Polar dimen- point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
sions If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the ori-
gin.
Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap to the
Snap to grid minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will
Snap to
snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See
angle
Snap options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
www.SpaceClaim.com 102
Clip with plane
You can use multiple planes to quickly clip your design to show only the geometry on one side of a
plane or the other.
Clip with Plane options includes Clip, Reverse Direction, and Union. Planes, axes, and annotations
are not clipped. The image below shows how planes in different clip states display in the Structure
tree:
By default, when you create a plane, the Structure tree displays a black-outlined visible plane icon.
You can select a visible plane you want to clip from either the Structure tree or in the Design win-
dow, then right-click anywhere in the Structure tree or Design window to display the Clip with Plane
context menu.
You can select up to 10 planes to set a clipped volume. Planes selected for clipping display with red
boundaries in the design window.
As you develop a model, you can also work with Clip with Volume to create a spherical clip volume
around an object so that you can selectively isolate a specific region, element, or section of a design.
The plane orplanesyou clipped display with a red outline. Icons update in the Structure tree. With
the plane(s) selected, you can modify values in the Properties panel.
Torestore the view of your design, right-click the plane and select Clip again.
By default, when clipping is initially set, additional selected planes automatically combine using an
and operation. This way you can isolate the inside of two parallel planes or the inside of 3 pairs of
parallel planes (one of themost common usages for this feature).
www.SpaceClaim.com 103
To reverse the direction of the clipped view with a plane or multiple planes
1. Right-click a plane and hover over Clip with Plane to display the entire menu.
2. Select Reverse Direction.
Thegeometry of your designflips to what is on the other side of the plane. To return to the original
clipped view of your design, right-click the plane and select Reverse Direction again.
To view the plane's direction, click the Move tool. The blue arrow on the Move tool indicates the
positive direction of the plane. The reversed direction is the opposite direction of the blue Move
tool arrow, as shown below:
Selecting multiple planes for clipping adds them to an or set. With a group (2 or more) of planes,
you can also right mouse click, then select Union from the Clip with Plane context menu. This option
is essentially an or operation that defines a plane group that you intend to combine with the rest
of the planes. Once you define and unite a group of planes, the Union set is put at the beginning of
the logical set, and the rest of the planes follow with their default and states.
For example, you can select 3 planes and get these logical sets, as shown in the table of images
below:
l A and B and C, which is the default (showing 1/8 of the model)
l (A or B) and C, where A and B are united (showing 3/8 of the model)
l (A or C) and B, where A and C are united (showing a different 3/8 of the model)
l (B or C) and A, where B and C are united (showing a different 3/8 of the model)
l A or B or C, where A and B and C are united (showing 7/8 of the model)
www.SpaceClaim.com 104
To create a union betweenplanes
1. Ctrl+Select more than one plane.
2. Right-click one plane and hover over Clip with Plane to display the entire menu.
3. Select Union.
The image below shows the results of uniting two planes. Sets of parallel planes default to keeping
the material inside:
When you save a model with clipped planes, and you are working with the model in various clipped
plane states in two or more design window panes, the clip state of each plane in the model is saved
www.SpaceClaim.com 105
per window with the model. As you move between window panes, the Structure tree updates to
reflect the clip state of each plane in the active window context.
www.SpaceClaim.com 106
Clip with volume
As you develop a model, theClip with Volume tool enables you to create a spherical clip volume
around an object so that you can selectively isolate a specific region, element, or section of a design.
Using Clip with Volumecan be particularly helpful when you need to closely view and work on a spe-
cific feature of interest within a complex model. For example, after isolating a design area, you can
use the Repair > Missing Faces tool to help detect and fix missing faces on a body.
Use the Move option in the Clipped Volume menu to move the clipped volume frame to a different
area of the model, or the Resize option to adjust the size of the Clipped volume frame. See images
below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 107
www.SpaceClaim.com 108
Box-selection
The Using Box mode is found in the menu under the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group on the
Design tab, and also in the radial menu. You can access this menu while almost any tool is active. For
example, if you want to change selection modes while the Pull tool is active, just click the arrow
under Select. The Pull tool will remain active.
From the context menu, you can alsochoose Select > Using Box
The mode enables you todraw a box in the Design window to select objects for most tools. As you
draw a selection box, objects are highlighted (after a slight delay) tohelp you see exactly what will
be selected.
Draw the box from left to right to select only the objects that are fully contained within the box. The
box appears as a solid line.
Draw the box from right to left to select everything the box crosses, even if it isn't fully enclosed by
the box. The box appears as a dashed line.
In the animation below, box mode is used twice with the selection filter set to Smart (the default) to
select the entire part. You can see vertices, edges, and faces highlighted for selection as the box is
drawn. First the part is selected by fully enclosing the part with a box drawn from left to right. Then
the part is selected by drawing a box from right to left that crosses over but does not enclose all
faces on the part. You can release the mouse button at any time to select the highlighted objects.
1. Click the arrow beneath the Select tool and click Using Box, or click and hold in the
Design window to activate the radial menu and then select Lasso.
www.SpaceClaim.com 109
2. (Optional) Use the Selection Filter in the status bar to change the type of objects that will be
selected.
The Smart option is enabled by default and whenever you switch to another tool. Select
Smart to select the highest checked item in the list that is found in the boxed, lassoed, or
painted area. Drawing a box or freeform shape selects objects in the following order:
l In a Design Window: Face, Edge, Sketch, Annotation, Plane, Axis, Point
l In a Drawing Window: Annotation, Sketch, Face, Edge, Plane, Axis, Point
Deselect Smart to select all the selected object types. Click to select or clear the types of
objects you want to select.
3. Start drawing a rectangle in the Design window. Click and hold the left mouse button at one
corner of the area you want to box-select.
4. Hold the mouse button and draw a rectangle in the Design window.
l Draw the box from left to right to select only the objects that are fully contained within
the box. The box appears as a solid line.
l Draw the box from right to left to select everything in the box, even if it isn't fully
enclosed by the box. The box appears as a dashed line.
The objects that will be selected are highlighted as you draw the box.
5. Release the mouse button to complete the box.
The objects are selected when you release the mouse button.
When you switch to another tool, the filter selections are remembered but the Smart option is
enabled. If you disable the Smart option, the previously checked options will be selected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 110
Changing your selection
Holding Shift while box-selecting adds to the selection. In the first image, the blue box is selected.
After holding Shift and box selecting, all of the boxes are selected:
Holding Ctrl while box-selecting toggles the selection. In the first image, the blue box is selected.
After holding Ctrl and box selecting, the blue box is deselected and the green boxes are selected:
www.SpaceClaim.com 111
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 112
Box-selecting with Smart disabled in the Selection Filter
Selecting points by turning off Smart, Faces, and Edges in the Selection filter, then drawing a box
around the object in the Design window
www.SpaceClaim.com 113
Free form selection
The Using Lasso mode is found in the menu under the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group on the
Design tab, and also in the radial menu. You can access this menu while almost any tool is active. For
example, if you want to change selection modes while the Pull tool is active, just click the arrow
under Select. The Pull tool will remain active.
This select mode enables you todraw a free form shape in the Design window to select objects for
most tools. As you draw, objects are highlighted (after a slight delay) tohelp you see exactly what
will be selected.
In the animation below, lasso mode is used with the selection filter set to Smart (the default) to
select the entire part. You can see vertices, edges, and faces highlighted for selection as the shape is
drawn. You can release the mouse button at any time and a straight line is drawn from the beginning
point to the current point to complete the shape, and everything within the shape will be selected.
1. Click the arrow beneath the Select tool and click Using Lasso, or click and hold in the
Design window to activate the radial menu and then select Lasso.
2. (Optional) Use the Selection Filter in the status bar to change the type of objects that will be
selected.
The Smart option is enabled by default and whenever you switch to another tool. Select
Smart to select the highest checked item in the list that is found in the boxed, lassoed, or
painted area. Drawing a box or freeform shape selects objects in the following order:
www.SpaceClaim.com 114
l In a Design Window: Face, Edge, Sketch, Annotation, Plane, Axis, Point
l In a Drawing Window: Annotation, Sketch, Face, Edge, Plane, Axis, Point
Deselect Smart to select all the selected object types. Click to select or clear the types of
objects you want to select.
3. Start drawing a shape in the Design window. Click and hold the left mouse button at the spot
where you want to start drawing the shape.
4. Hold the mouse button and draw a shape in the Design window.
You can make multiple loops, like drawing a figure 8.
5. Release the mouse button to complete the shape.
The shape will be closed by a straight line between your starting and ending points when you
release the mouse button.
Everything except inserted images is selected when you release the mouse button.
You can activate Lasso mode by holding the Alt key while the Select tool is active. This hotkey
only works when you are using the Select tool, and not when another tool is active.
When you switch to another tool, the filter selections are remembered but the Smart option is
enabled. If you disable the Smart option, the previously checked options will be selected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 115
Example
www.SpaceClaim.com 116
Select using polygon
The Using Polygon mode is found in the menu under the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group on
the Design tab, and under the Select tool in the Edit Group on the Sheet Metal tab. You can also
right-click in the design window and choose Select>Using Polygon. This selection mode enables
you toselect all objects within a polygon you create.Each time you click, a new starting point for the
next line is created.You control the length and angle of each polygon line you create.
Use this mode to draw around a specific geometry or model feature you want to select, for
example,a protrusion of other geometry you maywant to clearly identify.Using a polygon shapefor
selectioncan apply when you are,for example, trying to select an irregular or angularshaped part, or
assembly of parts.
When you switch to another tool, the filter selections are remembered but the Smart option is
enabled. If you disable the Smart option, the previously checked options will be selected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 117
Example
www.SpaceClaim.com 118
Select by painting
The Using Paintmode is found in the menu under the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group on the
Design tab, and in the radial menu. You can access this menu while almost any tool is active. For
example, if you want to change selection modes while the Pull tool is active, just click the arrow
under Select. The Pull tool will remain active.
This select mode enables you toselect faces, edges, and sketch curves in the Design window by
"painting" faces and edges that are adjacent to each other.As you paint, objects are highlighted
tohelp you see exactly what will be selected.
In the animation below, paint mode is used with the selection filter to select only the edges of the
lower box. Edges are selected as the mouse moves over them. You can release the mouse button at
any time to select the highlighted faces or edges.
To select by painting
1. Click the arrow beneath the Select tool and click Using Paint, or click and hold in the
Design window to activate the radial menu and then select Paint.
2. (Optional) Use the Selection Filter in the status bar to change the type of objects that will be
selected.
The Smart option is enabled by default and whenever you switch to another tool. Select
Smart to select the highest checked item in the list that is found in the boxed, lassoed, or
painted area. Drawing a box or freeform shape selects objects in the following order:
l In a Design Window: Face, Edge, Sketch, Annotation, Plane, Axis, Point
l In a Drawing Window: Annotation, Sketch, Face, Edge, Plane, Axis, Point
www.SpaceClaim.com 119
Deselect Smart to select all the selected object types. Click to select or clear the types of
objects you want to select.
3. Click on the first object you want to select and hold the mouse button.
4. Drag the mouse onto adjacent faces or edges that you want to add to the selection.
The objects that will be selected are highlighted as you move over them with the mouse.
If you hold Ctrl you can move the mouse over an object without selecting it, or move the
mouse over a selected object to deselect it.
5. Release the mouse button to complete the selection.
The objects are selected when you release the mouse button.
When you switch to another tool, the filter selections are remembered but the Smart option is
enabled. If you disable the Smart option, the previously checked options will be selected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 120
Select using boundary
The Using Boundary mode is found in the menu under the Select tool in the Design tab Edit group.
This mode enables you toselect all objects within a boundary.
You can select bounds (Ctrl+alt+selection) and seeds (Ctrl+selections), then click the
boundary tool under the Selection drop down menu to perform the boundary selection
operation without actually entering the Select tool. The Select Bounds tool guides does
not display..
On a subsequent invocation of the tool, the primary and secondary references do not de-select, and
are not displayed. Click the appropriate tool guide to re-display your boundary or seeds.
www.SpaceClaim.com 121
Filtering your selection
Filter the selection using the Selection Filter control in the status bar, as shown in the image below.
The Smart option controls how objects are selected when you use the Box, Lasso, or Paint selection
modes to select objects in the design area:
l Smart checked on will only select the highest checked item in the list that is currently in the
selectionarea.
l Smart checked off will select all of the checked items in the list that are currently in
theselection area.
When you switch to another tool, the filter selections are remembered but the Smart option is
enabled. If you disable the Smart option, the previously checked options will be selected.
Example
Selecting faces todefine a boundary and then selecting the seed object. All objects from the seed
object to the boundary are selected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 122
Component selection
TheSelect Componentsmode is found in the menu under the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group
on the Design tab. You can access this menu while almost any tool is active. For example, if you want
to change selection modes while the Pull tool is active, just click the arrow under Select. The Pull
tool will remain active.
In this selection mode, as you mouse over geometry, when you are over an object that is ina com-
ponent, that component will be pre-highlighted.
Pre-highlighting while box-selecting shows just the compopnent bounding boxes. No faces, edges,
etc. are pre-highlighted
www.SpaceClaim.com 123
Changing your display
The tools you use to customize the appearance of your design within the design window are found
on SpaceClaim's Display tab.
l Customize your design by modifying which objects are displayed, the style in which solids and
edges are displayed, and the color in which solids appear in your design.
l Paint display properties from one object to another.
l Create layers to save different customizations and display characteristics.
l Customize the workspace by creating windows or splitting the window to display multiple
views of your design.
l Show or hide workspace tools.
l Configure the docking/detached location of all your workspace windows.
l Create views to save the camera perspective and assign the view to a hotkey.
www.SpaceClaim.com 124
Showing and hiding objects
You can use any of these methods for setting the visibility of objects in the Design window:
l Right-click an object in the Design window and selectHide Othersto view only that solid, sur-
face, or curve.
l Right-click anywhere in the Design window and select Show All to make all objects visible.
l Right-click an object in the Structure tree and select Always Visible from the context menu.
The object will remain visible if you hide its layer, but this setting has no effect on other vis-
ibility commands such as Isolate or hiding its parent component by deselecting its check box
it in the Structure tree.
l Deselect the check box in the Structure tree to hide the object in the Design window. The
object icon is displayed in gray. You can also right-click an object in the Design window and
select Hide (or select it in the Design window and press Ctrl+H) to turn the visibility of the
object off.
l Select the check box next to the object in the Structure tree to set the visibility of the object
to the layer visibility. If the layer is hidden, then the object will be hidden. If the layer is visible,
then the object will be visible.
If the layer visibility is on, the icon appears normally. If the layer visibility is off, the icon appears like
the Solid_LayerHidden icon in the figure above. You cannot work with hidden objects in the Design
window.
www.SpaceClaim.com 125
Orienting designs
Select a tool from the Orient ribbon group to orient your design in the workspace. You can use
these tools at any time, even when you are designing with other 2D or 3D tools.
Drag the middle mouse button to spin, Shift+drag it to pan, and Ctrl+drag it to zoom. You can
switch between spinning, panning, and zooming by pressing and holding Ctrl (to zoom) or
Shift (to pan). When you release the key, you will return to spinning.
Use the Home tool to return the orientation of your design to the default, trimetric view.
You can customize the Home view to show your design with any orientation, location, and
zoom level.
Click the Plan View tool to display a head-on view of the sketch grid or the select plane or
planar face. Alt+select an edge to orient the plan view horizontally or vertically.
You can use the Spin tool to re-orient your design in any direction. Spinning your design
allows you to view it from any angle.
Use the Pan tool to move your design within the Design window.
Use the Zoom tool to display your design closer or farther away in the Design window. You
can zoom the design to fill the Design window, zoom into an area, or zoom in or out a pre-
set amount.
Use the View tool to display a trimetric or isometric view of your design. You can also dis-
play a head-on view of the top, bottom, front, back, right, or left side.
Use the Snap View tool to display a head-on view of a face. You can also use the tool to
"throw" the highlighted face to the top, bottom, right, or left by dragging it toward the
edge of the Design window.
Use the Rotate tool to rotate your design 90 degrees in the plane of the screen. You can
rotate your design clockwise or counterclockwise.
Use the Next and Previous arrows (or left/right arrows on your keyboard, or browser nex-
t/previous buttons) to change your view to the previous or next orientations.
Orient modes
When you click the Spin, Pan, and Zoom tools, they stay enabled until you click them again, press
Esc, or click another tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 126
Undoing and redoing views
You can undo and redo views using the Previous View and Next View tools on the status
bar. You can also use the left and right arrow keys, or any system-defined browser forward or back
method such as special keyboard buttons.
www.SpaceClaim.com 127
Spinning your design
You can use the Spin tool in the Orient group on the Design tab to re-orient your design in any
direction. Spinning your design allows you to view it from any angle. SpaceClaim uses standard arc-
ball rotation; your design spins as if you could grab it with the cursor and adjust it like a real object.
You can also rotate your design either clockwise or counterclockwise.
When you click the Spin tool, it stays enabled until you click it again, press Esc, or click another tool.
Set the Rotate about pre-selected object in spin option. Then, when working in any
tool, position the middle mouse button on the face, edge, plane, or axis about which you
want to spin your design, and drag to spin.
You may find it easier to reach a desired orientation if you use short mouse drags to spin the
design a little bit at a time.
www.SpaceClaim.com 128
If you double-click a face while using the Spin tool, the face is zoomed so that it fills the
design window. You can also switch to the Zoom tool temporarily by holding down the Ctrl
key while turning the mouse wheel.
www.SpaceClaim.com 129
To rotate your design
From the Spin tool in the Orient group on the Design tab, select Rotate 90 Clockwise or Rotate
90 Counterclockwise. These controls can be used whether your Spin is set to On Center or On
Cursor. Click either rotational control once or multiple times to orient your design as needed for
optimal viewing.
The cursor changes to indicate when you are in Turntable Spin mode.
You can see the difference by orienting the World Origin with the Z-axis horizontal.
Cursor movement Left-to-Right spins the model only about the Z-axis
Cursor movement Up-and-Down Also spins the model only about the Z-axis
A combination of both movements Also spins the model only about the Z-axis
www.SpaceClaim.com 130
Panning your design
Use the Pan tool to move your design within the Design window.
When you click the Pan tool, it stays enabled until you click it again, press Esc, or click another tool.
To pan
1. Select the Pan tool from the Orient ribbon group or status bar.
2. Drag to move your design around the Design window.
If you double-click a face while using the Pan tool, the face is zoomed so that it fills the
design window. You can also switch to the Zoom tool temporarily by holding down the Ctrl
key while turning the mouse wheel.
When working in any tool, Shift+click the middle mouse button and drag to move your design.
www.SpaceClaim.com 131
Zooming in and out
Use the Zoom tool to display your design closer or farther away in the Design window. You can
zoom the design to fill the Design window, zoom into an area, or zoom in or out a preset amount.
When you click the Zoom tool, it stays enabled until you click it again, press Esc, or click another
tool.
When working in any tool, Ctrl+click the middle mouse button, then drag up and down to
zoom. You can also press Ctrl+ or Ctrl- to zoom in or out a preset amount.
www.SpaceClaim.com 132
To zoom the design or a selected face or edge to fit the Design window
Select Zoom > Extents or press Z.
The design or selected face or edge is zoomed so that it fills the Design window. When working
with a drawing sheet, it will fit the drawing sheet to the Design window. If you resize the Design win-
dow, the design will also be resized until it again fills the Design window.
www.SpaceClaim.com 133
Rotating your design
Use the Rotate tool to rotate your design 90 degrees in the plane of the screen. You can rotate your
design clockwise or counterclockwise.
www.SpaceClaim.com 134
The home view
Use the Home tool to return the orientation of your design to the default, trimetric view. You can
customize the Home view tool so that it displays your design with a specific orientation, location,
and zoom level.
Compared to the isometric view, the trimetric view orients your design so that the front face is
angled slightly towards you and less of the top is shown. The isometric view is on the left and the tri-
metric view is on the right.
www.SpaceClaim.com 135
Now, when you click the Home tool, your custom view is displayed. Your home view is saved
with your design.
Click Home > Reset Home View to return the Home view to the default, trimetric view.
www.SpaceClaim.com 136
Viewing the sketch grid head-on
Click the Plan View tool in the Orient ribbon group or in the Sketching mini-toolbar to display a
head-on view of the sketch grid or the selected plane or planar face.
If this tool is disabled, select a plane or planar surface or display the sketch grid.
www.SpaceClaim.com 137
Selecting a view
Use the View tool to display a trimetric or isometric view of your design. You can also display a
head-on view of the top, bottom, front, back, right, or left side. Your design's orientation in the
head-on views is determined by SpaceClaim's default coordinate system.
Compared to the isometric view, the trimetric view orients your design so that the front face is
angled slightly towards you and less of the top is shown. Compare the two views in the image
below. The isometric view is on the left and the trimetric view is on the right.
To select a view
Select the view you want from the View tool menu in the Orient ribbon group.
When you hover over a view name in the list, a preview of the view is displayed.
If you have Animate changes to view projection selected in the Advanced SpaceClaim options, the
change in view state is animated.
www.SpaceClaim.com 138
To display a head-on view of your design
Select Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Right, or Left from the View tool menu.
www.SpaceClaim.com 139
Snapping to a view
Use the Snap View tool to display a head-on view of a selected face or plane. You can also use the
tool to throw the highlighted face or plane to the top, bottom, right, or left. On a drawing sheet, flip-
ping one view also flips all related views.
Snap View works on objects with a direction: planes, datums, cones, torii, curves and edges. For non-
linear curves, the direction is determined by the direction between the endpoints.
You can only use this tool in 3D mode; it is disabled in Sketch and Section modes.
www.SpaceClaim.com 140
l Click, drag, and release a plane, point, cone, torus, curve, or edge to throw it up, down,
left, or right.
If the object is not oriented head-on, then it will rotate so the face you click is viewed
head-on and square with the Design window, like this:
If the object is oriented head-on, it will rotate 90 in the direction you drag, like this:
l Click anywhere in empty space to rotate the view 90 counter-clockwise, like this:
www.SpaceClaim.com 141
Applying a graphics style
SpaceClaim offers several different styles to view your design. You can apply styles to your entire
design or drawing sheet, to individual layers, or to individual views in your drawing sheet.
l Shaded: The default and recommended view; displays solids and surfaces as three-
dimensional, shaded objects.
l Perspective Shaded: Like the Shaded style, except the objects are also displayed in per-
spective.
l Wireframe: Only the edges of objects are displayed. The wireframes are the same color
as the edges.
l Hidden Line: Objects are displayed as wireframes with hidden lines displayed in a light
gray.
l Hidden Line Removed: Objects are displayed as wireframes and hidden lines are not
www.SpaceClaim.com 142
shown.
All objects in the Design window will be displayed in the style you select.
www.SpaceClaim.com 143
Displaying edges
Use the Edges option tool in the Style group on the Display tab to customize which edges are dis-
played. These settings are saved with the document, but are only used for 3D display. The edge dis-
play options apply to the design in the current Design window tab, and not other designs you may
have open in other tabs in the Design window.
See Applying colors to change the color of edges.
l Tangent: Display lines indicating tangent edges and edges that do not span a face.
l Silhouette: Display the lines that indicate the silhouetted edges of all curved surfaces.
This option affects only Wireframe, Hidden Line, and Hidden Line Removed graphics
styles.
www.SpaceClaim.com 144
l Mesh: Display facet edges on an STL model. You can toggle the display of internal mesh
edges and open meshes edges on boundaries. You can sketch on themesh objectand
your sketch tools will snap to the facets.
l Soft: Display the soft edges of imported SketchUpmodels. This option is ON by default.
www.SpaceClaim.com 145
Applying colors
The color of solids, surfaces, and components are normally determined by the layer color; however,
you can override the layer colors for objects. By default, all objects are placed on Layer0, which is
green. You can modify the color of edges, faces and bodies when selecting an object.
See Working with Layers to change the layer color or move an object to a different layer.
See Changing object transparency to change the transparency of an object.
Use the Color tool in the Style ribbon group of the Display tab to override the layer color for solids,
surfaces, faces, and curves, or the color of individual faces on a 3D markup slide. When you add a Cus-
tom Color in the color palette, it is added to the bottom of the menu and it is saved between
SpaceClaim sessions.
If you change the color when nothing is selected, the color will become the default for new objects.
This allows you to set the color for things you haven't created yet, without using layers and default
layer colors.
www.SpaceClaim.com 146
To override the layer color of a solid, surface, face, or curve
1. Select one or more solids, surfaces, faces, curves, or components in the Design window or
Structure tree.
You can select a body by selecting one of its faces or edges, then selecting Body as the Tar-
get.
If you select a component, then the color of all of the component's children will be changed.
2. Click Color in the Style group on the Display tab.
3. Select a color.
If the color you want is not in the list, click More Colors and select a color or create a new cus-
tom color.
www.SpaceClaim.com 147
4. Choose Randomize Colors to let the system assign colrs to the selected objects
5. (Optional) Set the transparency of the object. See Changing object transparency.
To remove color overrides and return the object to the layer color and transparency
1. Select one or more solids, surfaces, faces, curves, or components in the Design window or
Structure tree.
You can select a body by selecting one of its faces or edges, then selecting Body as the Tar-
get.
If you select a component, the color of all of the component's children will be changed.
2. Click Color in the Style group and select Remove Color Override.
www.SpaceClaim.com 148
Making objects transparent
By default, the transparency of an object is determined by its layer color and whether or not the
object is a surface. Surfaces are displayed as semi-transparent to visually distinguish them from
solids. You can override the transparency of objects using the Color tool.
In a graphics editing application, color is assigned to an Alpha channel (ARGB, for example).
SpaceClaim follows this standard convention and also treats transparency as a property of the
object's color.
The hierarchy of rendering overrides is as follows:
l The opacity setting for the layer is used if no other transparency is set for the object.
l The transparency setting from the Color tool or Style Painter overrides the transparency of the
layer.
l Style Override makes the object opaque or transparent, regardless of face or layer settings.
These overrides are automatically deselected when you change the transparency of an object
using the Color tool or Style Painter.
www.SpaceClaim.com 149
l Opaque to make the object completely opaque.
Deselect so neither override is selected if you want to use the object's transparency setting.
www.SpaceClaim.com 150
Line styles
You can apply a custom line style and line weight to the lines in your designs and drawing sheets.
The line styles you choose apply to annotations, center marks, center lines, and drawing sheet cross-
section view arrows, hatching, hatched area borders, and detail view boundaries. You can apply line
styles to individual objects or to all the objects on a layer. The width that you set is exactly the width
that will be printed when you print an unscaled drawing sheet.
You can set the default line styles for various objects in the SpaceClaim options. Setting the line
styles individually overrides the default setting.
Line styles can be assigned to layers so that you can have different line styles for sketch and layout
lines.
www.SpaceClaim.com 151
Style painter
Use the Style Painter tool to apply the display properties of one object to another object. The tool
applies color and transparency intelligently from one object type to a different object type.
You can select a component in the Structure tree as the target for the Style Painter tool. The color
and transparency are applied to all solids in a component. You cannot select a component as the
source object, and only the solids in the target component are changed.
In the example below, the red part is semi-transparent and has blue edges. The style from the red
block was painted to the green block and to the note. The color, transparency, and edge color of the
red block was copied to the green block. Only the color of the red block was copied to the note,
because a note doesn't have transparency or edge color.
www.SpaceClaim.com 152
Rendering style
The Rendering Style tool, in the Style group of the Display tab, allows you to change how solid
faces are rendered. You can choose between a shiny, light reflectivefinish (Metallic), a matte finish
(Plastic), a sketched finish (Brushed), ora hatch line finish (Hatched). Assigning different rendering
styles to a model helps you to better visualize parts, assemblies, or components as you develop your
design.
In the images below, all four rendering styles are used: the top of the pitcherisset to plastic. The
handle and pitcher are brushed.The blade base is hatched, and the base of the pitcher is set to
metallic:
In the image set below, Regular display mode is shown on the left and Quick Rendering mode is
shown on the right. Regular modeuses a single light source, while quick rendering mode uses mul-
tiple lights and reflects a background of sky and clouds on surfaces to give them depth and interest:
www.SpaceClaim.com 153
To change the rendering style of a solid or surface
1. Select the solid or surface.
2. Click Rendering Style in the Style group on the Display tab.
This icon changes to reflect the current setting, but always appears as a shaded sphere.
3. Select Hatched, Brushed,Metallic or Plastic to apply that surface style to the selected solid or
surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 154
Displaying in multiple windows
Use the New Window tool to create new workspace windows. Creating multiple windows allows you
to set up several views of your design. Each window has a numbered tab at the bottom of the work-
space.
www.SpaceClaim.com 155
Splitting the design window
Use the Split Windowtool in the Window ribbon group on the Display tab to divide the work-
space window into multiple windows. Splitting the window allows you to see multiple views of your
design simultaneously.
Select how you want to split the workspace window from the Split Window toolmenu. The window
is split based on your selection. The active window is indicated with a yellow border.
www.SpaceClaim.com 156
Switching between windows
If you have more than one window open, you can select the window you want to display from the
tabs at the bottom of the workspace.
If you have many windows open and the tabs do not fit in the workspace, you can use the Next Win-
dow and Previous Window arrows at the bottom of the workspace to switch between windows.
You can also use the Switch Window tool to select the window you want to display. Select the win-
dow you want to display from the Switch Window tool menu on the Display tab's Window rib-
bon group.
www.SpaceClaim.com 157
Maximizing the design window
Press F11 to maximize the design window to full screen. You can still switch between windows and
use the tool guides when the window is maximized.
Press F11 to return to the standard user interface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 158
Displaying workspace tools
You can adjust the display of workspace tools and the display of your design in the Design window
using the Show drop-down list of tools in theDisplay ribbon group on the Display tab, and by modi-
fying SpaceClaim options.
To customize the tools displayed while you are working with your design
SpaceClaim offers the following tools on the Show ribbon group on the Display tab to assist you
while creating, editing, and detailing your designs:
l Check the World Origin box to display the axes that set the default orientation of the design
in the Design window.
l Check the Spin Center box to mark the center of the spin when using the Spin tool. (This is the
same as the Show Spin CenterSpaceClaim option.)
l Check the Lineweight box to switch the line style of lines (such as those displayed in Hidden
Line, Hidden Line Removed, and Wireframe graphics styles) from thin to the thickness set by
the Lineweight tool in the Style ribbon group.
l Check the Face Highlight box to enable pre-highlighting of faces.
l Check the Face Spotlight box to show a spotlight attached to the cursor when passing over
faces.
l Check the Adjacent Entities box to display faint highlighting on adjacent faces when you
hover over an edge and on adjacent edges when you hover over a vertex. Scrolling the mouse
wheel switches between adjacent entities. This feature is useful in selecting the correct edge
or face to extrude.
l Check the Layout Lines box to display sketch curves on layout planes.
l Check the Offset Baseline Faces box to display offset relationships with blue shading.
l Check the Standard Holes box display Standard Holes in blue. When unchecked, Standard
Hole faces display in the normal face color.
l Check the Lightweight Components box to display Lightweight components. This also has a
flyout for setting Lightweight component transparency.
l Check the Environment box to display according to the settings in the Appearance panel.
To display other workspace tools, modify the settings in the Popular SpaceClaim options.
You can also display journal-related tools by checking the Show Journal Tab option in the Popular
SpaceClaim options.
www.SpaceClaim.com 159
Examples
Hovering over an edge with Adjacent Entities highlights the faces shared by the edge
www.SpaceClaim.com 160
Sketch grid styles
You can modify whether the sketch grid is displayed, and how the geometry above or below the
grid is displayed in each Design window. You may want to use one style when you are examining a
component, and another when you are creating new geometry within a component. You can further
customize the sketch grid by hiding section lines and faces using SpaceClaim options.
Examples
Fading the scene below the grid makes it easier to see when you sketch in section mode.
www.SpaceClaim.com 161
Examining a section with the scene clipped above the grid
www.SpaceClaim.com 162
Displaying lightweight components
Lightweight components are a graphics-only representation of a design. You can adjust the trans-
parency of the lightweight components in your design. If you do not see lightweight components
when you open or insert a design, make sure your settings are configured to display them.
See also Lightweight components.
Before dimming, the lightweight components appear slightly transparent and their edges aren't dis-
played.
www.SpaceClaim.com 163
After dimming, all components regardless of lightweight status, become dim except the selected
lightweight component.
www.SpaceClaim.com 164
Working with SpaceClaim documents
When you create a new design, it appears on a tab in the workspace. Designs can contain drawing
sheets, multiple windows, and 3D markups. Each drawing sheet and 3D markup appears on its own
tab in the workspace. You can edit your design directly using the drawing sheet.
You can create a drawing sheet for an existing design, or you can begin with an empty drawing sheet
Click a tab at the bottom of the SpaceClaim application window to display that design, drawing
sheet, or 3D markup document, or click the arrow icons to cycle between them. Click the x button to
close the tab.
www.SpaceClaim.com 165
To open an existing design by dragging and dropping
l Drag the .scdoc file icon to anywhere in the title bar and ribbon area.
l You can also drag the icon into the design window if no design tab is open.
l This will open the design in 3D mode along with all of its drawing sheets, annotations, etc.
l You can drag-and-drop .scdoc files and any other importable files attached to emails in
Microsoft Outlook.
To save a design
l Select Save from the File menu.
l If you imported or opened non-SpaceClaim designs as multiple external documents, click
References to specify where the documents are saved.
l Otherwise, opened design documents are stored in their original locations as .scdoc files, and
inserted documents are saved in the same directory as your design.
To copy a design
l Save any changes made to external components.
l Select Save As from the File menu and enter a new name for the design.
www.SpaceClaim.com 166
l Click Save to save your active design with a new name and/or format.
To make a copy of a design and all its references for sharing or archiving, click Send.
To archive a design
l Select Share from the File menu.
l SelectAs file.The Archive dialog box opens.
l When you archive a model, it stores the .scdoc file and the .zip file in a file folder named with
the file naming convention <model name>_archive.
l This feature allows for improved file organization and use of file storage space.
Tosend a design
l Select Share from the File menu.
l SelectAs Outlook attachment.
l The Send In Outlook dialog box opens.
l Specify recipients and add any message text.
l Click OK.
To close a design
Make sure its window is active in the workspace, then do one of the following:
www.SpaceClaim.com 167
sheet name. A thumbnail of your design displays when you hover over the name of your
design, as shown below. A Save prompt displays if you have made changes to your design;
select Yes to save your changes and close the design, No to discard your changes and close
the design, or Cancel to stop the close process and return to your design.
Toadd customproperties
l Right-click in the Properties panel and select Add Property to create a custom property.
l Expand the property to display its value.
l Enter a name for the property, select its type (date, Boolean, number, or string), and enter its
value.
www.SpaceClaim.com 168
Importing and exporting
Use the Open command to open files createdin any supported format. Use the Save As command to
export parts, assemblies, drawing sheets, and 3D markups to formats read by other applications. Your
license type determines which of these actions are supported.
If you work frequently with non- files, we recommend that you set your file options to optimize the
importing and exporting process for your needs.
Object IDs for edges, faces, and bodies are now stored within the.scdoc file. Object IDs are pre-
served when other files are opened or inserted into , and the IDs can also be exported. For example,
if you export a design to an analysis company, and they tag geometry with load positions, boundary
conditions, and so on, then when you re-import that design, make changes, and re-export to the ana-
lysis company, they will not need to recreate their tags on the new design.
If you import a file and it fails, the reason for the failure is reported in the Status Log on the lower
right edge of the window.
To import a design
1. Select Open from the File menu or click in the Quick Access toolbar, or click the Insert tool
in the Insert ribbon group on the Design tab.
Depending on the selected file type, additional elements appear in the Open window. For
descriptions of these options or to set their default values, click Options.
2. Select Check geometry to run the geometry check after the file is opened or imported. See
Checking geometry.
3. Navigate to and select the file you want to open or insert.
If you are opening a file, it is displayed in a new Design window. If you are inserting a file, it
appears as an external component within the active design.
If there is an invalid character in the path of a file you are trying to open or insert, that char-
acter is replaced with a valid character to avoid errors.
If you open an Inventor, Pro/ENGINEER, or Unigraphics file that has missing components, you
will be prompted to locate the missing files.
Click Stop in the status bar to cancel an import while it is in progress.
The name of the imported file is displayed in the Status Log when it is successful.
Expand thesections belowfor information about a specific file format.
www.SpaceClaim.com 169
To export a design or 3D markup
1. Select Save as from the File menu.
You can also press F12 or Ctrl+Shift+S.
Your design must be saved as a document before you can export it in another format.
2. Select a file type from the Save as type drop-down.
3. Depending on the selected file type, additional options appear in the Save As window:
l Save as copy if you want to save copies of external components referenced by the
design with new names or replace external components with other external com-
ponents. You must click Resources to do this.
l References to display all the external components referenced by the file. Select one or
more external components and click Browse to rename or replace the components.
l Override Units is available when you export some file types. Select the units from the
list.
l Options to also set your default export options for the selected file type.
l Improve data on exportto clean up imprinted edges and split curves when you export
data.
l Units Depends on file type
l View Choose a standard view
l Version Depends on file type
l Export part manufacturing information (JT)
l Use Perspective Camera for KeyShot
l Store 3D data as: For PDF, choose either Geometry (PRC B-Rep) or Facets only (Univer-
sal 3D)
l Convert components to Rhino layers
l Protocol: For STEP files can be 203 or 214.
l Image size (pixels): For Bitmap, GIF, JPEG, PNG, TIFFfiles opens Image Size dialog
Hidden lines are exported with the default line weight. Components maintain their mirror rela-
tionships when they are exported.
For CATIA, Parasolid, STL, and STEP files, you can select which version or protocol to save as.
You can also set your default export options by clicking Options.
You can save documents that only contain sketch curves to ACIS binary (.sab), ACIS text (.sat),
Parasolid, CATIA, IGES, STEP, and VDA formats. You can import and export free points for
Rhino, PDF, ACIS, IGES, JT Open, Parasolid, STEP and VDA formats.
www.SpaceClaim.com 170
Imported designs with identical file names are given unique file names when you save your
design. For example, if you imported name.prt and name.asm, these files are saved as
name.scdoc and name2.scdoc.
Expand the sections belowfor information about a specific file format.
4. Browse to a folder and type a file name in the dialog.
5. Click Save.
ACIS
3D - parts, assemblies (versions up to 25)
.sat, .sab
l When you save an SAT file to an X_T file, bad edges are cleaned up in the design.
l When you import ACIS files, the instance name "part n (body m)" is now imported, but only if
the body name is different from the part name. The component and body names are sep-
arated by a character which you can define in the options for ACIS files. For example, the
default character is a period, so the imported name would be component.body. This way, if
there were one body named wheel in one component, the name of the imported component
in SC would be wheel. An instance is a copy of a body (a copied or pattered solid).
l ACIS bodies can be imported using the RealDWG option, Sketch curves and text can be impor-
ted into Designs, 2D.
www.SpaceClaim.com 171
l Surface Finishes
l Datum Symbols
l Datum Targets
l No Adobe Acrobat required for B-REP import and export, 32bit and 64bit platforms sup-
ported, Adobe Acrobat X Pro is not supported
l 3D PDF via a PRC neutral file along with Semantic PMI (if PMI data is present)
l Curves are imported from faceted data.
AMF
3D - parts, assemblies
.amf
l Import also supports compressed AMF.
l You can stop AMF import using the Stop button when image processing takes too long.
l Body names and colors are supported.
AutoCAD
R12 to 14, 2000, 2004, 2007, 2010, 2013
modelspace and layout space entities including solids (ACIS V7 format)
Includes Polyface Meshes
.dwg, .dxf
l AutoCAD drawings can be inserted as layouts.
l If you import an AutoCAD file and you don't see the geometry you expect, try changing the
import options. See File import and export options.
l When you save a design with a shaded graphics style as a DWG file, it is converted to the hid-
den line style.
l When you save a sheet metal design as a DXF file, notes and bend lines are saved on the same
layer, and the overall unfold dimensions are removed.
l Line weights can be exported to AutoCAD (DXF or DWG). Hatch lines on drawing sheets are
exported as stand-alone lines.
l You can import polyface meshes from AutoCAD files as 3D solids. See File import and export
options for a list of polyface mesh import options.
l imports "Proxy entities" in AutoCAD DXF and DWG files when you select the TeighaDWG
www.SpaceClaim.com 172
option.
l If an AutoCAD file won't open, try changing the DWG option to RealDWG. Some AutoCAD files
contain embedded ACIS models; however, these may not be standard ACIS models. The
RealDWG libraries contain an API to save back these variant ACIS models in the last common
format, ACIS v7. The TeighaDWG libraries do not.
l ACIS bodies can be imported using the RealDWG option, Polyface meshes import as light-
weight (read-only), Sketch.
l Export as 2D snapshot
l Layout Spaces are imported into separate windows.
l Empty Layout Spaces are ignored on import.
l Layout Spaces are only supported for Teigha, NOT RealDWG.
CATIA
parts, assemblies (versions V4 4.1.9 to 4.2.4)
assemblies (versions V5 R8 to R24, V6R2014)
.model, .CATPart, .CATProduct, .cgr, .exp
CATIA V6 .3DXML R2010x - R2013x
l CATIA faceted (.cgr) files can be opened, but appear as lightweight components that cannot
be loaded. You can save imported .cgr files as documents that can be opened later; however,
this documents content remains lightweight. It is visible in the Design window but you can't
change the model.
l CATIA files with product manufacturing information (PMI) can be opened or inserted. Visibility
is turned off. If a layer doesn't exist, it is created automatically.
l When exporting CATIA V5 files, you can deselect the Simplify Spline Surface Data option.
When importing or exporting CATIA files, the XYZ locations of point objects scale correctly.
l Includes Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) placed on the Imported Annotation Planes.
l CATIA V6 precise part and product data must be exported as V5CATPart and CATProduct to be
read into SpaceClaim.
l Import and export of free points is supported
l CGR imports Facets as mesh objects. SpaceClaim recommends editing meshes on a 64bit OS.
Design Modeler
www.SpaceClaim.com 173
parts (assemblies are flattened)
.agdb
Up to 16
ECAD IDF
IDF and PADS files (versions IDF 3.0 and IDF 4.0)
.idf, emn, .idb
l Most content within IDF 4.0 files is supported.
l Assembly of panels and boards, cutouts, filled areas, keep-ins, materials, panels and everything
related, sublayouts, and thermal models are not supported.
l Open IDF and PADfiles
l IDF files can be synchronized with the imported model.
l Select any geometry in the model and use RMB > Update IDF to update the IDF file
based on component operations performed in the model (e.g. moved components).
l The current SpaceClaim document must have been created by importing an IDF file.
l The source IDF file must be present on disk at its original location.
l A new IDF file is written that contains the updated information.
l The new file can be read back into the originating ECAD system to update the com-
ponents.
IGES
parts, assemblies (versions up to 5.3)
.igs, .iges
l Curves and Curve Colors are supported on import.
Image Files
files (insert only)
.bmp,.pcx, .gif, .jpg, .png, .tif
See Inserting an image
Inventor
parts (versions 6 10)
www.SpaceClaim.com 174
.ipt
parts, assemblies (versions 11 to 2015)
.ipt, .iam
l You can read the limitations here: http://-
doc.spatial.com/index.php/InterOp:Connect/Inventor/Inventor_Reader#Limitations.
l Limited support for Inventor assembly
l Assembly attributes such as colors and layers are not supported.
l Inventor parts and Inventor sub-assemblies should be present in the main (root) of the
Inventor Assembly directory.
l Assembly level features are not supported. For example, an instance can be marked as
suppressed (that is, not visible) in an Inventor assembly. Because the translator does not
support reading suppressed information, suppressed instances are translated.
l Inventor surfaces not supported
The translator currently does not handle "helical" surfaces in Inventor 6 files and "cylspl" sur-
faces in Inventor 7 files. If the Inventor file contains any of these surfaces, a partial translation
takes place skipping the data for these surfaces and converting the remaining entities.
l Limited entity support for Inventor 11, 2008, 2009, and 2010
The translator currently does not support some specific entities resulting from advanced fea-
ture Inventor operations such as Lofting.
l No support for attributes
The translator does not support translating attributes such as colors and layers.
l No support for hidden flag
The translator does not support filtering hidden bodies. Thus, all hidden bodies are translated
as well.
l Limited support for units
The translator supports only millimeter and inch for Inventor 6 11 and 2008. For versions
2009 and 2010, the translator supports only millimeter as unit. All unsupported units are
assumed to be millimeter.
JT Open
parts, assemblies (versions 6.4, 7.0, 8.0, 8.1, 8.2, 9.0 to 9.5)
.jt
l JT Open 5.3 libraries are available for reading and writing JT files that were created with ver-
sion 5.3.
www.SpaceClaim.com 175
l JT files with product manufacturing information (PMI) are supported for:
l datum labels
l text notes
l dimension measurements
l GD&T
l Surface finish symbols
l Weld symbols
l Flagnotes
l PMI option is ON by default
l Semantic and Polyline PMI are supported. Semantic imported dimensions will update with
geometry changes. Polyline are simply curves in space that do not update.
l Semantic PMI is placed on Layer0 after import. Polyline is placed on a layer called Imported
Polyline Annotations.
l For GD&T symbols, you can click any tolerance annotation or datum symbol to view its values
in the Properties panel.
l Click on an arrow or line to view or modify arrow or styles in the Properties panel.
l Unicode file names are supported.
l Import and export of free points is supported
l JT Open V6.4 and V7.0 imported and exported as faceted data
Keyshot
Not supported
NX
parts, assemblies (versions NX1 through NX9 and UG v11 through 18)
.prt
Parasolid
parts, assemblies (V10.0 through V26)
.x_t, .x_b, .xmt_txt, .xmt_bin
www.SpaceClaim.com 176
l A spline curve is created by default or if the option Polyline=False is used. If the option
Polyline=True is used, then the points are connected by straight line segments.
l By default, 2D curves are created. When specifying 2D curves, the first column of the data
points must be an integer and gives the height of the plane of one of the curves. The begin-
ning of a new curve is specified by changing this height from one line to the next. If option
3D=True is used, the curves can be 3D
l Use the Fit keyword to specify whether Curve Fitting or Interpolation is used.
Fit=True uses Curve Fitting. Curve Fitting creates a curve that "Fits" the data points using a spe-
cified tolerance. The curve may not pass exactly through all points and the distance from the
curve to the point will be within the tolerance.
Use the Fittol keyword when Fit=Trueto specify the Curve Fitting tolerance in model units. For
example Fittol=1.0e-2
The curve below uses Curve Fitting (i.e. Fit=true). A large tolerance (fittol=2.0) is used to exag-
gerate the fact that the curve does not pass through the points but only gets within the spe-
cified tolerance.
Fit=False uses Interpolation. Interpolation requires that the curve pass exactly through all of
the points. An interpolation method is used to build a continuous curve through all of the
points.
The curve below is interpolated (i.e. Fit=False). There are seven points in the file and the curve
passes exactly through each one.
www.SpaceClaim.com 177
l Multiple curves are separated by blank lines.
l You can import point curve text files that contain single-point curves, which will be created as
points.
l Point-curve text files opened or inserted in display a closed curve when the file has a repeated
value.
l Curves can be imported to coordinate systems or other geometry like other imported objects.
l Point-curve text files with columns separated by commas can be opened or inserted in . This
feature allows you to import any comma-separated value file into .
l If there is an error reading the input text file, a message will appear with the line number of
the error in parentheses followed by the text appearing on that line.
l The following example shows the contents of a point curve text file on the left and the 3D
curves it creates on the right:
l Note that the point coordinates are (Z, X, Y).
l For example (1, 2, 3) is (Z=1, X=2, Y=3).
3d=true
polyline=false
100
101
110
111
201
210
www.SpaceClaim.com 178
300
301
310
Keywords:
l polyline=false - spline curves are created.
l polyline=true - straight lines are created.
l 3d=true - 3D curves are created.
l 3d=false - curves are two-dimensional. This is also the case if the option is not set.
l fit=true - use Curve Fitting.
l Curve Fitting finds the "Best Fit" through the points.
l Does not require the curve to pass through all of the points
l fit=false - use Interpolation.
l Interpolation forces the curve to pass through all the points in the file.
l fittol=1.0e-2 - Curve Fitting tolerance in the units used in the file.
The blank line after the first set of coordinates indicates that the next set of coordinates is a new
curve.
You can copy the file contents above and paste them into a text file, then use Insert File to try it
yourself.
Microsoft PowerPoint
Not supported
POV-Ray
Not supported
Pro/ENGINEER
parts, assemblies versions 16 through Wildfire 5.0(Creo 1.0, 2.0)
.prt, .asm, .xpr, .xas
l When you import Pro/ENGINEER assemblies and parts are missing, you will be prompted to
search for the missing files.
l Wildfire 5 (Creo 1.0, 2.0) PMI is not supported.
www.SpaceClaim.com 179
l Instance and assembly accelerator files (*.xpr and *.xas) can now be opened directly into .
l Mesh is automatically imported when there are no B-Rep contents in the Rhino file.
Rhino
parts, assemblies (version 4.0, V5.0)
.3dm
l When importing a Rhino file, multi-segmented curves are consolidated.
l You can export layer names, color information, sketch lines, and material information.
l Neighboring topology is taken into consideration by default. This means that if problems are
found with a face, then its neighboring faces can provide information used to fix the face.
l The Rhino 32/64-bit plug-in supports the Rhino V5 Beta version. You can use it to import and
export using Rhino V4 formatted data. As before, you can also cut and copy work in progress
out of Rhino and MOI, and paste it into .
www.SpaceClaim.com 180
RS Components
parts, assemblies V2015 SP0
.rsdoc
SketchUp
parts, assemblies up to SketchUp 8
.skp
SolidEdge
parts, assemblies (V18 - ST6)
.par, psm, .asm
SolidWorks
parts, assemblies (version 98 through 2014)
.sldprt, .sldasm
l If you open a SolidWorks file, searches for required assembly and external part files in the fol-
lowing locations:
l Root folder of the assembly
l Equivalent subfolder in new root folder
l Absolute path to the component saved in the assembly file
l When you import a design from SolidWorks, the units are changed to match the part.
STEP
parts, assemblies (version AP203, AP214 [geometry])
.stp, .step
When you import STEP assemblies from one file, select the Create multiple documents when
importing assemblies file option if you want the assemblies to remain in one file instead of being
split into multiple files, one for each internal component.
STL
parts, assemblies Facets or Solids
.stl
l When exporting STL files, the output is set to Binary by default.
l STL files can include polyface meshes, and they can be imported as lightweight objects.
www.SpaceClaim.com 181
Polyface meshes are imported as solids.
l When saving as an .STL file, the quality is based your graphics quality setting. We recommend
setting the option to enable the highest possible graphics quality if you want your design to
be useful as an SLA rapid prototype for form, fit, and function purposes.
l You can import an STL file as a solid, if it has multiple planar areas that can be merged into
one planar face.
l You can import an STL file as a Mesh object and export it as another STL file. This makes it pos-
sible to import multiple STL files into a document and then export everything as a single STL
file.
VDA-FS
parts, assemblies (version 1.0 and 2.0)
.vda
Video files
files (insert only) with proper codec(s) required for all but WMV and AVI
.wmv, .avi, .flv, .mkv, .mov, .mp4, .mpg, mpeg, .ogm, .vob
See Inserting a video
Wavefront
parts, assemblies (Facets)
.obj
XAML
Not supported
XPS
Not supported
ACIS
Versions 6, 7 15-25 (V25 default)
parts and assemblies (assemblies are flattened)
www.SpaceClaim.com 182
.sat, .sab
l When you save an SAT file to an X_T file, bad edges are cleaned up in the design.
l When you import ACIS files, the instance name "part n (body m)" is now imported, but only if
the body name is different from the part name. The component and body names are sep-
arated by a character which you can define in the options for ACIS files. For example, the
default character is a period, so the imported name would be component.body. This way, if
there were one body named wheel in one component, the name of the imported component
in SC would be wheel. An instance is a copy of a body (a copied or pattered solid).
l ACIS bodies can be imported using the RealDWG option, Sketch curves and text can be impor-
ted into Designs, 2D.
l PMI can be written to SAT and SAB files.
Acrobat PDF 3D
Facets, Geometry (PRC B-Rep), curves
parts and assemblies
.pdf
l 32-bit and 64-bitplatforms are supported.
l Color information is exported for 3D PDFs.
l SupportsB-Rep import and export
l Mesh-only .scdoc's can be exported to PDF.
l No Adobe Acrobat required for B-Rep import and export, 32bit and 64bit platforms sup-
ported, Adobe Acrobat X Pro is not supported
Acrobat PDF 2D
2D Print to or save drawings only
.pdf
l 32-bit and 64-bitplatforms are supported.
AMF
V1.0
3D - parts, assemblies
.amf
www.SpaceClaim.com 183
l Exportalso supports compressed AMF
l The following are supported for export:
l Geometry
l Body and face colors
l Body material
l Textures
l Lightweight components
l Assembly structure tree
l Export is supported by the Converter.
AutoCAD
R12 to 14, 2000, 2004, 2007, 2010, 2013
solids
.dwg, .dxf
l AutoCAD drawings can be inserted as layouts.
l If you import an AutoCAD file and you don't see the geometry you expect, try changing the
import options. See File import and export options.
l When you save a design with a shaded graphics style as a DWG file, it is converted to the hid-
den line style.
l When you save a sheet metal design as a DXF file, notes and bend lines are saved on the same
layer, and the overall unfold dimensions are removed.
l Line weights can be exported to AutoCAD (DXF or DWG). Hatch lines on drawing sheets are
exported as stand-alone lines.
l You can import polyface meshes from AutoCAD files as 3D solids. See File import and export
options for a list of polyface mesh import options.
l imports "Proxy entities" in AutoCAD DXF and DWG files when you select the TeighaDWG
option.
l If an AutoCAD file won't open, try changing the DWG option to RealDWG. Some AutoCAD files
contain embedded ACIS models; however, these may not be standard ACIS models. The
RealDWG libraries contain an API to save back these variant ACIS models in the last common
format, ACIS v7. The TeighaDWG libraries do not.
l ACIS bodies can be imported using the RealDWG option, Polyface meshes import as light-
weight (read-only), Sketch
l Export as 2D snapshot
www.SpaceClaim.com 184
CATIA
V5/V6 R6 to R25 (R24 default)
parts, assemblies
.CATPart, .CATProduct,
l CATIA faceted (.cgr) files can be opened, but appear as lightweight components that cannot
be loaded. You can save imported .cgr files as documents that can be opened later; however,
this documents content remains lightweight. It is visible in the Design window but you can't
change the model.
l CATIA files with product manufacturing information (PMI) can be opened or inserted. Visibility
is turned off. If a layer doesn't exist, it is created automatically.
l When exporting CATIA V5 files, you can deselect the Simplify Spline Surface Data option.
When importing or exporting CATIA files, the XYZ locations of point objects scale correctly.
l Includes Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) placed on the Imported Annotation Planes
l CATIA V6 precise part and product data must be exported ass V5CATPart and CATProduct to
be read into SpaceClaim
Excel
MS Office 2003, 2007, 2013
.xls, .xlsx
l If MS Office is installed
ECAD IDF
Not supported
IGES
parts, assemblies (version 5.3, JAMA-IS, Types: 186, 144, 143)
.igs, .iges
Image files
parts, assemblies, drawing sheets, 3D markup slides (export as 2D snapshot)
.bmp, .gif, .jpg, .png, .tif
On export, you can specify the image size in pixels or percent of full size.
www.SpaceClaim.com 185
When saving a drawing as an image you can specify Use Scene extents or Use Sheet extents. Scene
extents includes gray borders around the drawing to fill the size of the entire scene. Sheet extents
only includes what is within the sheet boundary.
See Inserting an image
Inventor
Not supported
JT Open
parts, assemblies V6.4, 7.0, 8.0, 8.1, 8.2, 9.0 to 9.5
.jt
l JT Open 5.3 libraries are available for reading and writing JT files that were created with ver-
sion 5.3.
l JT files with product manufacturing information (PMI) are supported for:
l datum labels
l text notes
l dimension measurements
l GD&T
l Surface finish symbols
l Weld symbols
l Flagnotes
l PMI option is ON by default
l Semantic and Polyline PMI are supported. Semantic imported dimensions will update with
geometry changes. Polyline are simply curves in space that do not update.
l Semantic PMI is placed on Layer0 after import. Polyline is placed on a layer called Imported
Polyline Annotations.
l For GD&T symbols, you can click any tolerance annotation or datum symbol to view its values
in the Properties panel.
l Click on an arrow or line to view or modify arrow or styles in the Properties panel.
l Unicode file names are supported.
l Semantic GD&T created in is exported to JT.
l Export and import of free points is supported
l JT Open V6.4 and V7.0 imported and exported as faceted data
www.SpaceClaim.com 186
Keyshot
parts, assemblies
.bip
NX
Not supported
Parasolid
parts, assemblies V12 through 26 (V26 default)
.x_t, .x_b
POV-Ray
3.6
parts, assemblies
Mesh-only .scdoc's can be exported to POV file format
Microsoft PowerPoint
MS Office 2003, 2007, 2013
3D markup slides .ppt
Pro/ENGINEER
Not supported
Rhino
V4.0, V5.0
parts, assemblies
.3dm
l When importing a Rhino file, multi-segmented curves are consolidated.
l You can export layer names, color information, sketch lines, and material information.
l Neighboring topology is taken into consideration by default. This means that if problems are
found with a face, then its neighboring faces can provide information used to fix the face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 187
l The Rhino 32/64-bit plug-in supports the Rhino V5 Beta version. You can use it to import and
export using Rhino V4 formatted data. As before, you can also cut and copy work in progress
out of Rhino and MOI, and paste it into .
l The SpaceClaim plugin for Rhino is only supported for Rhino V5.0.
SketchUp
parts, assemblies SketchUp V3.0 to V8.0
.skp
SolidWorks
Not supported
STEP
AP203, AP214 (geometry)
parts, assemblies
www.SpaceClaim.com 188
.stp, .step
When you import STEP assemblies from one file, select the Create multiple documents when
importing assemblies file option if you want the assemblies to remain in one file instead of being
split into multiple files, one for each internal component.
STL
parts, assemblies
.stl
l When exporting STL files, the output is set to Binary by default.
l STL files can include polyface meshes, and they can be imported as lightweight objects. Poly-
face meshes are imported as solids.
l When saving as an .STL file, the quality is based your graphics quality setting. We recommend
setting the option to enable the highest possible graphics quality if you want your design to
be useful as an SLA rapid prototype for form, fit, and function purposes.
l You can import an STL file as a solid, if it has multiple planar areas that can be merged into
one planar face.
l You can import an STL file as a Mesh object and export it as another STL file. This makes it pos-
sible to import multiple STL files into a document and then export everything as a single STL
file.
l STL export can be performed directly from lightweight (visualization only) .scdoc
VDA-FS
V2.0
parts
.vda
VRML
parts, assemblies
.wrl
Video files
Not supported
Wavefront
parts, assemblies
www.SpaceClaim.com 189
.obj
l Structure is not maintained when you save as an OBJ file.
l When you save your design as an OBJ file, the current graphics tessellation is used for accuracy.
You can modify the tessellation by setting the Image quality vs. graphics speed option.
l UV's are transformed according to a body or face and texture information is exported with the
file.
XAML
part and assembly solids only
.xaml
The orientation and translation of the current view is saved in an XAML file.
XPS
3D markup slides
.xaml
www.SpaceClaim.com 190
To copy the contents of the Design window to Windows clipboard
Right-click in the Design window and select Copy Scene to copy an image of the contents of the
Design window to the Windows clipboard. You can then paste the image into a document.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 191
Copy-paste from other applications
You can copy from another application and paste into SpaceClaim. This is currently supported for
Rhino and Moment of Inspiration (MoI). Simply copy an object in Rhino or MoI, then open
SpaceClaim and click Paste.
Objects are placed in their original position and will not be placed relative to selected objects in
SpaceClaim.
Objects pasted from MoI do not have their units defined by default and could be scaled very dif-
ferently when you paste them into SpaceClaim. To change the units in MoI, click Options, then set
the Unit System field.
www.SpaceClaim.com 192
Printing
Your zoom settings determine how a drawing sheet or design will print. For best results, select a
paper size from the Print window that is the same as the drawing sheet format. If you changed the
orientation of the drawing sheet, then the view that appears in the Design window is the one that
will be scaled to fit the selected paper size. This can result in a clipped drawing.
Shaded designs are converted to hidden-line removed graphics style when you select Print from the
File menu. Select Shaded from the Graphics Style drop-down after printing to return your design to
the shaded style.
When a curve is clipped (or hidden) behind a solid or surface in the Design window, it will not be
clipped when it is printed. The curve will appear to be in front of the solid or surface on the printed
page. The example below shows a curve that is clipped in the Design window on the left, and the
same view in print preview on the right.
You can also use Save As to save the sheet as a 2D PDF (*.pdf). The PDF will reflect the current format
and size properties of the sheet.
www.SpaceClaim.com 193
To print all open drawing sheets
1. Click Print in the File menu.
2. Select All Open Sheets for the Sheet Range.
3. Set the paper size, margins, and other options as desired.
4. Click Print.
To print a design
1. Position your design in the Design window as you would like it to appear on the printed page.
Tip: Select Zoom > Zoom Extents from the Orient ribbon group in the Design tab.
You can also print the design at different zoom levels by zooming in or out, but for the best
results we recommend you use Zoom Extents.
2. Select Print from the File menu.
3. Set the following options:
l Number of copies
l Paper margins: Set the margins in millimeters (mm) or inches (in).
l Paper orientation: Choose between landscape or portrait mode.
l Paper size: Select from the list of standard paper sizes.
l Print content: Select Scene to print the design based on the size shown in the Design
window. This setting is used by default for designs. Select Extents to expand the design
until it fills the printable area of the page. This setting is used by default for drawing
sheets.
l Print scale: If you select Extents for the Print content, you can set the scale of the prin-
ted image. Enter a value for the scale, or select Scale to fit.
l Shaded quality: You can set the resolution for 3D objects in dpi (dots per inch). Select
System-defined to use the printer's default dpi setting.
l Print as image: Set this to Yes to print the drawing as a snapshot of the screen. Default is
No.
l Print to PDF: The design window and its contents scale to fit the paper size of the selec-
ted printer. The Shaded Quality is automatically set to 110 dpi, which is best for on-
screen viewing. For printing, change the value to 300dpi.
4. (Optional) Click Preview to see how your printed design will look.
5. Click Print.
The Design window contents will be zoomed so that it fits the page size.
www.SpaceClaim.com 194
To adjust the design's size on the page
1. Select Print from the File menu and click Print Preview.
2. Select one of the following from the Content ribbon group:
l Scene to display the design based on the size shown in the Design window. This setting
is used by default for designs.
l Extents to expand the design until it fills the printable area of the page. This setting is
used by default for drawing sheets.
3. If you selected Extents, select or enter one of the following from the Scale ribbon group:
l Scale to fit to scale the design to fit the page. This setting is used by default.
l Enter a value in the scale drop-down to scale your design by that amount.
www.SpaceClaim.com 195
Journals and logs
Journals record the actions you performed while creating your design, including file actions, such as
closing a design. You must play a journal from a newly opened SpaceClaim application to avoid
errors.
SpaceClaim also logs information automatically into the SpaceClaim .log file, which can be found in
one of the following directories:
l C:\Users\<User>\AppData\Roaming\SpaceClaim on Vista systems
l C:\Documents and Settings\<User>\Application Data\SpaceClaim on XP systems
You can replay journal files in Cosmetic Replay mode, which skips extraneous cursor movements and
shows only a minimum of spin, pan, zoom, and other navigation movements. This allows you to
make a journal file and record it as a video without doing as much editing after the video is recor-
ded. Animations are shown for pulls and geometry moves and changes when appropriate.
www.SpaceClaim.com 196
Play plays back every movement you made in the session, while Cosmetic Replay skips
extraneous cursor movements and shows only a minimum of spin, pan, zoom, and other nav-
igation movements.
3. Navigate to and select the journal file you want to play and click Open.
4. Review the actions from the session.
To create a video
1. Click Create Video in the Journal tab. The Create Video dialog box opens.
2. Specify an output video file (.avi) by browsing to a location and entering a name for the file.
3. Select a video codec.
4. (Optional) Adjust the video settings
1. Pixel Depth: (16, 24, or 32) The default is 16. Pixel Depth represents the video quality
and thus the size of the file. The higher the pixel depth, the more colors are maintained
in the video.
2. Frame Rate: The default is 10.
3. Compression: On or Off
5. Click the Start button to begin recording video.
6. Perform the operations you want to record.
7. Click the Stop button to end recording. Once recording stops, the video file is created in the
specified location.
You can also play an existing journal file by checking the Journal checkbox and browsing to a file.
The journal can be played with delay.
www.SpaceClaim.com 197
SpaceClaim file format
Our files comply with the Microsoft Open Packaging Convention, which is also used by Microsoft
Office 2007. These files are actually zip archives with a special structure, the contents of which are
primarily XML data.
This open format makes it possible for third parties to get the information they need from
SpaceClaim without talking directly to the SpaceClaim API. For example, a PDM system could check
in a SpaceClaim document with all external dependencies and show a 3D preview of the model. One
could also create a batch translator that runs on a UNIX operating system.
Third parties planning on working with SpaceClaim data should contact SpaceClaim for advice on
how to best integrate their solutions. In general, the benefit of working with SpaceClaim files is that
there is no need for a license of SpaceClaim to be present to read SpaceClaim data. When creating
SpaceClaim data or extending the SpaceClaim user interface, the API is a better choice. SpaceClaim
provides sample code for extracting solids from SCDOC files.
www.SpaceClaim.com 198
Files contained within the SpaceClaim file
The document.xml.rels file contains pointers to all the files required to load the design into
SpaceClaim. The figure below shows this content for the Flashlight example.
www.SpaceClaim.com 199
For example, you can use the information in this file to determine all the parts required for a BOM by
looking at the assemblyComponent relationship. In this case, it points to another file called Standard
Parts.scdoc. By opening this file and reviewing its components and subcomponents, you can gen-
erate a BOM report.
There are three types of external file pointers:
l assemblyComponent points to a file that contains subcomponents used in the assembly
l drawingFormat points to the file used to format the drawing sheet
l redlineComponent points to a 3D markup slide
There are also multiple internal file pointers to the geometry files, thumbnail, tessellated data, and
window settings. The bodyGeometry Id provides the key to identifying the bodies described in the
other XML and XAML files.
www.SpaceClaim.com 200
To view the data contained within SCDOC files
1. Copy the .scdoc file you want to view.
2. Replace the .scdoc file extension with the .zip file extension.
3. Extract the files within the zip file.
4. Open the folders and view the contents of the xml and xaml files with an XML viewer like
XMLNotepad.
www.SpaceClaim.com 201
Designing
The tools you use for 2D and 3D sketching and editing are found in SpaceClaim's Design tab. With
the design tools, you can sketch in 2D, generate and edit solids in 3D, and work with assemblies of
solids.
In SpaceClaim, there are three modes you can use to design: Sketch, Section, and 3D mode. You can
switch between these modes at any time.
When creating designs, you will use the following tools most often:
Use the Select tool to select 2D or 3D objects in your design for editing. You can select ver-
tices, edges, axes, faces, surfaces, solids, and components in 3D. In 2D, you can select points
and lines. You can also use this tool to change the properties of recognized or inferred
objects.
Use the Pull tool to offset, extrude, revolve, sweep, draft, and blend faces; and to round or
chamfer corner edges.
Use the Move tool to move any single face, surface, solid, or component. The behavior of the
Move tool changes based on what you have selected. If you select a face, you can pull or draft
it. If you select a solid or surface, you can rotate or translate it.
Use the Combine tool to merge and split solids and surfaces.
Use Section mode to create and edit designs by sketching on and editing any cross-section
through the design.
www.SpaceClaim.com 202
If an operation runs more than three seconds, the Stop icon is activated in the status bar. Click to
cancel the current operation. You can also press and hold Esc to cancel out of any design action that
is taking too long.
When using any tool guide, you can click an empty point in the Design window to clear the tool
guide selection and return to the previous action within the tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 203
Design modes
In SpaceClaim, there are three modes you can use to design: Sketch, Section, and 3D. These modes
make it clear when you are working in 2D vs. 3D, and clarify the difference between working in cross-
section (where you can alter 3D objects) and sketching (where you cannot alter 3D objects).
To switch modes
1. Click a tool in the Mode ribbon group.
You can also right-click an empty area of the Design window and select Sketch Mode, Section
Mode, or 3D Mode from the context menu, or press K (for Sketch mode), X (for Section
mode), or D (for 3D mode).
If you are sketching, you can also click Return to 3D mode in the Sketch plane mini-tool-
bar.
2. If you are switching from 3D mode to one of the other modes, select a plane to sketch on or
create the cross-section.
When you select an origin object or its center and click Sketch mode, the sketch plane is
aligned to the origin object's XY axis.
Sketch mode displays the sketch grid, so you can use any of the sketch tools to sketch in 2D.
Section mode lets you edit solids and surfaces by working with their edges and vertices in
cross-section. You can also use all the sketch tools in Section mode to create and edit solids
and surfaces in cross-section.
3D mode lets you work directly with objects in 3D space.
www.SpaceClaim.com 204
Examples
A design in section mode; the active component is displayed in the part color (magenta in this
example) and the inactive components are displayed in gray.
Switching from Sketch mode to 3D mode automatically converts closed sketched curves into surface
objects and the sketch curves become edges. Only the sketch curves that contribute to the closed
surface are converted to edges; leftover curves remain in the design as free curves.
www.SpaceClaim.com 205
Editing in cross-section
Use Section mode to edit solids by working with their edges and vertices in cross-section. You can
modify faces, edges, planes, cylinders, rounds, and chamfers in section mode. You can edit solids
and surface bodies.
In Section mode, lines represent faces and points (or vertices) represent edges.
For example, to rotate a face around an edge, select the line that represents the face, Alt+click the
vertex that represents the edge, and pull. Moving a sketched line in Section mode does not move
the solid it is sketched on. You must move a section line (a line that represents a face) to modify a
solid in Section mode.
Hatching is used to show the intersection of the cross-section plane and a solid. Arc centers are
shown as small cross marks. Hatching appears bolder inside faces to indicate what is shown in a
cross-section view. (See Examples, below).
You can use the following tools: Select, Pull, Move, Combine, Split Body, Shell, Offset, Fill, and all
sketch tools. Use the Select tool to edit spline faces (represented by a spline in cross-section). You
can also cut, copy, and paste. We recommend that you clip the scene above the grid to enhance the
visibility of the cross-section.
To edit in cross-section
1. Select or de-select options based on whether you want to maintain and view relationships
while you edit in cross-section.
2. Select the face you want to use to create the cross-section plane, or select any faces, edges, or
vertices that define a plane.
If you are in a drawing sheet with cross-section views, you do not have to choose a face, as the
plane of the drawing sheet is automatically used as the section plane.
3. (Optional) Move or rotate the cross-section grid and click the Section tool when you are fin-
ished.
www.SpaceClaim.com 206
4. Click and drag the edges and vertices of the cross-section to edit them.
You can also bend edges with the Bend tool, and pull section points (edges) and section lines
(faces) with the Pull tool. If you set the Auto-extrude/revolve sketches in Section
modeAdvanced SpaceClaim option, sketch made with the sketch tools are automatically
extruded or revolved to form surfaces and solids when you begin the sketch on the edge of an
existing surface or solid. To automatically revolve, the sketch must be attached to a revolved
face. If you do not begin the sketch on an existing edge, you are switched to Sketch mode.
We recommend zooming into your design so that it is easier to select the correct entity. For
example, if you are trying to select an edge, but your design appears very small in the Design
window, it is possible to accidentally select a midpoint or end point of the edge instead. Mov-
ing the midpoint or end point of an edge will not be reflected by a mirrored entity.
Options
The following options are available in the Section tool:
Maintain
Select this option to maintain the influence of mirrors in your design while editing.
Mirror
Maintain Select this option to maintain the influence of baselines in your design while edit-
Offset ing. Baseline faces are shown as blue edges when viewed in cross-section.
Curve Fit- If the section plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit curves
ter through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The
Options following options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves
through the points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determ-
ines how many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more
points will be found and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to
form splines. Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 207
Examples
Bold hatching indicates the hatching that would be shown on a drawing sheet cross-section view
www.SpaceClaim.com 208
Cut, copy, paste
Select a tool from the Clipboard ribbon group to cut, copy, or paste any 2D or 3D object. You can
use these tools any time, even when you are designing with other 2D or 3D tools.
Objects are pasted into the active component. Objects that can be named (components, bodies,
axes, or planes) will retain their names when pasted.
When you cut and paste a solid or surface, the object retains its color and face style.
To cut an object
1. Select the object.
2. Select the Cut tool from the Clipboard ribbon group.
You can also press Ctrl+X or right-click in the Design window and select Cut from the context
menu. If you cut the face of a solid, it is converted to a surface.
To copy an object
1. Select the object.
2. Select the Copy tool from the Clipboard ribbon group.
You can also press Ctrl+C or right-click in the Design window and select Copy from the con-
text menu.
www.SpaceClaim.com 209
The face is highlighted in blue.
3. Cut or copy the selection.
4. Click the face onto which you want to paste the object.
5. Paste the object.
The object is pasted on the face at the location you clicked. The blue face is attached to the
clicked face.
To delete an object
1. Right-click the selected object (or set of objects).
2. Press Delete.
If you want to delete something and fill the gap with neighboring geometry, or create faces in
the gap, you should use the Fill tool.
If you delete the face of a solid, it is converted to a surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 210
Dimensions
You can dimension every element in your design, from lines in sketches to faces of solids. In
SpaceClaim, dimensions are not constraints. Rather, they are tools for precise control during the cre-
ation or modification of a design. In SpaceClaim, if you do want to save a dimension with your
design, use the Ruler Dimension option when pulling or moving. You can save the ruler dimensions
as Groups for later edits.
Whenever dimension fields appear, you can press the spacebar or click on them to enter a value, and
press Tab to switch between fields.
You can use mathematical expressions in a dimension.
1. Press the spacebar (or just type) to enter a value in the highlighted field.
2. Press Tab to switch between dimension fields.
3. Repeat step 2 until you have entered all the dimensions.
4. Press Enter to accept the values and return to sketching.
The dimensions persist until you select another tool or begin drawing another sketch object.
www.SpaceClaim.com 211
To dimension the start, end, or middle point of a sketch line from another point in your sketch
1. Hover the mouse over the point from which you want to dimension.
2. Press Shift.
As you move your mouse around the sketch grid, a dimension will appear from the point you
indicated to the mouse location.
3. Press the spacebar (or just type) to enter a value in the highlighted field.
4. Press Tab to switch between dimension fields.
5. Repeat step 4 until you have entered all the dimensions.
6. Press Enter to accept the values and place the point that begins or ends your line.
www.SpaceClaim.com 212
To dimension while moving or pulling
www.SpaceClaim.com 213
To create an angular ruler dimension
www.SpaceClaim.com 214
Detaching
You can detach individual pieces of a sketch, or detach objects or faces in 3D. You can detach pro-
trusions to move them with the Move tool's Detach First option.
To detach in 2D
Alt+drag with the Select tool to detach the selected item when sketching. Use the 2D Move tool to
detach items and move them.
To detach in 3D
1. Click the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group.
2. If you want to detach an object, Ctrl+click all its faces to select them.
3. Right-click the object and select Detach from the context menu.
www.SpaceClaim.com 215
Undo and redo
SpaceClaim stores all your actions from the moment you open the SpaceClaim application until you
close it. This includes the use of all tools in all tabs, opening and closing files, loading and activating
components, and changing settings. Every action is recorded and can be undone and redone.
The undo list is set to 50 steps by default. You can modify this number, but we recommend that you
keep the default setting.
Click the Undo and Redo tools in the Quick Access toolbar or press Ctrl+Z to undo and
Ctrl+Y to redo.
You can undo and redo actions until you have undone or redone every action in your session, or you
can jump to a particular action by selecting that action from the Undo and Redo menus. If undoing
an action will open or close a document or switch to a new Design window, a confirmation window
is displayed.
When you undo a tool action, the view is also changed to the view you used to perform that action.
Click the Previous View and Next View tools on the status bar to undo and redo your
design view changes.
www.SpaceClaim.com 216
Checking geometry
You can check the geometry for solids and surfaces. The geometry is checked for all possible ACIS
errors. Select errors and warnings in the dialog to highlight the associated geometry in the Design
window, as shown below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 217
Sketching in 3D
You can use the following tools from the Sketch group to change curves in 3D mode:
Create Rounded Corner can be used on curves when they are coplanar.
Create Corner can also be used on coplanar curves.
Trim Away can be used to trim curves in 3D mode.
Split Line can be used to split curves in 3D mode.
www.SpaceClaim.com 218
l You can change the radius of a circle or an arc directly in 3D by selecting it with the Select
tool.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 219
Sketching
Sketching is useful if you want to create a region that can be pulled into 3D. If you want to create a
2D layout, and have no immediate need to generate 3D objects from the lines in the layout, then you
should create a layout.
Use the sketch tools to sketch shapes in 2D. When you exit the sketch, regions are formed by inter-
secting lines. These regions will become solids and lines become edges when you pull your sketch
into 3D with the Pull tool. Even when pulled into 3D, a region can be decomposed back into its
sketched lines for further editing as long as any remnant of the lines is still unused in 3D.
To use any of the sketch tools to sketch in 2D, you must first display the sketch grid. If you have a
planar surface highlighted, and press a sketch tool shortcut (such as L for the Line tool), you can
mouse over planar surfaces in the design to highlight surfaces for the sketch grid. (Press Esc while in
this state to return to the Select tool in 3D mode.) You can adjust the units and spacing of the grid,
and we recommend that you fade the scene under the grid to enhance the visibility of your sketch.
You can lock the base dimension base point when sketching multiple objects. Locking a base point
enables you to secure the dimensions of an object relative to that point, or, the dimensions of an
object relative to any object you previously sketched. As you sketch, you can enter coordinates for
each successive point relative to the previous point.
While you are sketching, you may need to orient your design. If you use the Spin, Pan, or Zoom tools
to reorient the sketch, click the navigation tool again or press Esc to continue sketching where you
left off.
If you select Auto-extrude/revolve sketches in Section mode in the Advanced options, sketching
in Section mode will automatically extrude your sketch to 3D. The extrusion depth is set to 10 times
the spacing of your sketch grid. You can dimension this depth for any extruded sketch by entering a
www.SpaceClaim.com 220
value in that dimension field. If your are sketching on an already revolved face, the sketch is auto-
matically revolved.
When you copy and paste sketch objects, they are placed in their original location relative to the cen-
ter of the grid. The objects will be highlighted when you paste, so you can easily move them to a dif-
ferent position.
Sketched objects are added to the Curves folder in the Structure tree as you create them. If the list
of sketch curves is long, then you will see More Curves in the list. Click More Curves to display the
entire list.
Detailed instructions
1. Click Sketch Mode in the Mode group on the Design tab.
2. Choose where you want to sketch.
Mouse over the planes and planar faces in your design to preview the location and orientation
of the sketch grid.
The sketch grid is placed automatically if you pre-select an object in the active component
before you click Sketch Mode. If you pre-select an origin object, the sketch grid will be
aligned with its X and Y axes and the sketch origin will be centered on the origin object. If you
pre-select axes objects, the grid will run through the axes.
If you previously selected a set of references that define a plane, the sketch grid is placed on
the defined plane. The sketch grid mini-toolbar allows you to switch from sketching on one
plane to sketching on another without leaving the sketch tools.
1. If the sketch grid is currently displayed, click Select New Sketch Plane in the mini-
toolbar, or right-click and select Select New Sketch Plane from the context menu.
2. Mouse over any existing geometry to display existing planes.
3. Click to select the highlighted plane and display the sketch grid. Any vertices or edges
on the plane are drawn in the current layer color and bolded.
4. (Optional) Click Plan View in the mini-toolbar or in the Orient ribbon group to view
the sketch grid head-on.
3. (Optional) Move or rotate the sketch grid.
1. (Optional) Select any points, lines, or curves that you want to move with the sketch grid.
2. Click Move Grid in the mini-toolbar.
3. Use the Move handle to move or rotate the sketch grid. Highlighted curves will be
moved with the grid.
4. (Optional) Use the Orient ToObjecttool guide to orient the sketch grid to an object in
the Design window. The object does not have to lie in the sketch plane.
www.SpaceClaim.com 221
4. Select any sketch tool from the Sketch ribbon group.
You can draw points, lines, tangent lines, construction lines, rectangles, three-point rectangles,
circles, three-point circles, ellipses, splines, tangent arcs, three-point arcs, sweep arcs, and
polygons using the sketch tools. You can also create sketch lines by projecting the edges of
3D solids onto the sketch grid.
SpaceClaim's sketch tools also let you split, trim, and offset lines, as well as create corners and
rounded corners.
5. Draw with the tool.
Mousing over the sketch grid snaps to points based on your snapping options. Press Shift to
turn snapping on and off.
While mousing, SpaceClaim also provides extension lines when you are parallel to an edge or
perpendicular to an end point. For certain drawing tools, it displays indicators of tangency, line
midpoint, line end point, squares, and golden rectangles.
All tools let you enter dimensions while sketching. In some tools, you can press Shift at a ref-
erence point to see dimensions from that point to the cursor.
When you are done sketching with the tool, you can:
l Click another sketching tool.
l Click Return to 3D Mode in the mini-toolbar or 3D Mode in the Mode group in the
ribbon bar to pull your sketch to 3D.
l Press Esc or click the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group to edit the sketch.
www.SpaceClaim.com 222
To edit a sketch
1. Click the Select tool. (You can also press Esc if you are in a sketching tool.)
2. Click and drag the line or point you want to edit.
Alt+click and drag if you want to detach the line or point before moving it.
Ctrl+click and drag to create a copy.
Enter a value to dimension the move.
You can also use the Move tool to edit a sketch.
www.SpaceClaim.com 223
known points, or tangent attachments.
Use the Polygon tool to sketch a polygon with up to 32 sides.
Use the Tangent Arc tool to sketch an arc tangent to any single curve or line in your design.
Use the Three-Point Arc tool to create an arc by specifying its start and end points, and the
radius or chord angle.
Use the Sweep Arc tool to create an arc with a known center and end points.
Use the Spline tool to sketch splines in 2D. A spline is a continuously curved line, without sharp
boundaries (that is, without vertices).
Use the Point tool to sketch points in 2D.
Use theFace Curvetool tosketch a curve on a face of a solid.
The Sketch ribbon group contains the following sketch editing tools:
Use the Create Rounded Corner tool to trim back or connect two intersecting lines or arcs so
that they meet with an arc tangent at both ends.
Use the OffsetCurve tool to create an offset of any line in the grid plane.
Use the Project to Sketch tool to project edges from a 3D object onto the sketch grid.
Use the Create Corner tool to trim back or extend two lines so that they meet at a corner.
Use the Trim Away tool to delete any line portion bounded by an intersection with a line or
edge.
Use the SplitCurve tool to split one line with another line or point.
Use the Bend tool to bend straight lines and edges to form an arc. You can also use the Bend
tool to adjust the radius of arcs and arced edges. Bend works on straight lines when you are
sketching and when you are editing in cross-section.
Use the Scaletool to display control handles you can use to manipulate a 2D object.
Use Move Dimension Base Point to move the base point from your starting point
to a different location. This is useful when you want to control the distance between
your new sketch and existing object.
www.SpaceClaim.com 224
erence angle from a point on an existing object.
Sketching mini-toolbar
While you are sketching, the mini-toolbar provides quick access to the following actions:
Click Return to 3D Mode to switch to the Pull tool and pull your sketch into 3D. Any closed
loops will form surfaces or faces. Intersecting lines will split faces.
Click SelectNew Sketch Plane to select a new face to sketch on.
Click Move Grid to move or rotate the current sketch grid with the Move handle.
Click Plan View for a head-on view of the sketch grid.
Options
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
l Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian
dimensions from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
www.SpaceClaim.com 225
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 226
Editing a sketch
You can edit the dimensions of sketched lines, arcs, and points using the Select tool. Tangency is
maintained when you edit a sketch.
To edit a sketch
1. Click the Select tool. (You can also press Esc if you are in a sketching tool.)
Select the Select Reference Curve tool guide to dimension from another object, similar to the
Shift+hover functionality in other tools.
2. Click and drag the line or point you want to edit.
Alt+click and drag if you want to detach the line or point before moving it.
Ctrl+click and drag to create a copy.
Enter a value to dimension the move.
www.SpaceClaim.com 227
To edit the distance from another point
1. Click the midpoint of a line, the center of an arc, or any sketched point to display a dimension
to a reference point.
2. Mouse over the reference point, then drag the blue circles to the location you want to dimen-
sion from.
3. Click to set the new reference location.
To skew the X-Y lines, click the outer blue circle and enter the skew angle.
Tool guides
When editing sketch dimensions with the Select tool, you can use the following tool guides after
you select an end point or arc center:
Select the Select Reference Curve tool guide and click another sketch line to edit the dimen-
sions from the selected point to that sketch line.
Use the Move Dimension Base Point tool guide and click any point to edit the dimensions
from the selected point to that point.
Use the Change Dimension Reference Angle tool guide and click to set the angle reference
for the selected point.
www.SpaceClaim.com 228
Examples
Editing a racetrack by dragging internal lines. You can drag to resize, rotate, lengthen, or make one
side larger than the other by dragging different lines or points in the sketch.
www.SpaceClaim.com 229
Copying a sketch
You can copy a sketch line in Sketch mode with the Select tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 230
Sketch plane
The sketch grid indicates that you are performing actions in a 2D plane. Selection, sketching, creating
layouts, adjusting blend planes, cross-section editing, and annotation all use the sketch grid. You can
adjust the units and spacing of the grid, as well as how solids are displayed when the grid appears.
www.SpaceClaim.com 231
This command is in the context menu for all tools that can be used in both sketch and section
modes, such as Pull.
All closed sketch curves in the current planeare converted to surfaces.
The last plane used for sketching on is set as active, and dynamic plane mode is ended when you use
the Use Last Sketch Plane command.
www.SpaceClaim.com 232
Moving the sketch plane
Use the Move Grid tool to move the sketch grid. Make successive sketches by moving the grid after
sketching closed line regions. These closed lines turn into regions when you move the grid.
The icon at the center of the sketch grid indicates the origin of the grid and moves with the grid
as you move the grid.
www.SpaceClaim.com 233
1. Insert an origin.
2. Select an axis of the origin.
3. Switch to Sketch mode.
You can also move the center of the sketch grid while sketching by using the Move Grid or
Select New Sketch Plane tools in the Sketch mini-toolbar.
www.SpaceClaim.com 234
Layout curves
You can sketch on a plane when you want to draw curves but have no immediate need to generate
3D objects. If you want to create a region that can be pulled into 3D right away, create a sketch
instead.
You can think of a layout as a pencil drawing made on your design. If you try to pull layout lines to
3D, they do not behave the same way that sketched lines do. Closed lines are not converted to
regions, so if you pull a layout line, it creates a surface, not a solid. When you are ready to use your
layout to create geometry, project the layout lines to a sketch. Projecting a layout line to a sketch is
like inking the line.
Layouts always appear on planes in the Structure tree.
We strongly encourage you to use layers when working with layouts to help you organize your
design. For example, you can color individual lines on each layout, show or hide the lines, or put the
bounding planes on a separate layer and turn that layer's visibility off to declutter your design.
(When you import files, they will initially appear in one color.)
To create a layout
1. Insert a plane.
2. Right-click the plane in the Structure tree or graphics window and select Activate Curve Con-
tainer.
The icon on the Structure tree changes to reflect that the plane is a layout.
3. Sketch on the plane.
www.SpaceClaim.com 235
To import a 2D AutoCAD DXF or DWG file as a layout
You can import a 2D AutoCAD file into your design in the following ways:
l Drag and drop the DXF or DWG file into the Design window to create a layout in the active
component.
l Drag the file onto a plane in the Structure tree to place the drawing on that plane and convert
it to a layout.
Edit a layout
Right-click the plane in the Structure tree or graphics windowand select Activate Curve Container.
A layout plane is drawn around the selected sketch entities.
www.SpaceClaim.com 236
Moving in 2D
Use the Move tool to move lines or points with the Move handle. When you move points or lines
with this tool, they do not maintain their connections to other lines or points. If you want to maintain
the connections in your sketch, use the Select tool to edit the sketch.
www.SpaceClaim.com 237
l Drag one of the small balls on the rotational axis to reorient the Move handle, or dimen-
sion the orientation by typing the rotation angle while you are dragging, then pressing
Enter.
l You can also Alt+click a point or line, or click the Move Direction tool guide, then click
a point or line, to orient one of the Move handle's axes toward that point or along that
line.
If you Alt+click a trajectory, you can move along the trajectory. Ctrl+Alt+click to add con-
tiguous lines or edges to the trajectory.
If you Alt+click a plane, the direction of movement is set perpendicular to the plane.
6. Click an axis and drag in that direction to move the selected object.
A line extends from the Move handle axis to indicate the direction you selected for move-
ment.
7. To dimension the move,
1. Click Ruler in the Options panel.
2. Click an edge or face to anchor the ruler.
The ruler is oriented along the selected Move handle axis.
3. Type a distance and press Enter.
www.SpaceClaim.com 238
Dimensional sketching
SpaceClaim allows you to do precise, dimensional sketching internal to the current line and relative
to other lines and points. If a dimension cannot be edited, it does not highlight on mouse over.
www.SpaceClaim.com 239
Points
Use the Point tool to sketch points in 2D and 3D. Points are useful as a dimensional reference, for
splitting, and for creating a point on a line or curve through which you want to draw a three-point
circle. You can also project vertices in 3D to create points in the sketch.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
To draw a point
1. Click Point in the Sketch group on the Design tab.
2. Choose a mode:
l If a sketch plane is not active, press Esc to sketch in 3D or click on an object or objects in
the Design window to make a sketch plane.
l If a sketch plane is active, click 3D Mode in the Mode group or press D to sketch in 3D.
3. (Optional) Dimension the point relative to another object.
4. Click to place a point:
l On a face or surface: click on a location on a face or surface.
l On an edge or curve: click on a location on the edge or curve.
l On the midpoint of a straight line between two points in 2D: hold Alt and Shift and
select two points, then click on the temporary point at the midpoint.
l On the midpoint of a straight line between two points in 3D: select two points.
l Projected onto a face: select a point and then a face to project onto.
l Projected onto an edge: select a point and then an edge to project onto.
l In a UV direction within a face/surface: select an existing point on a face and then a
location on the face to specify the direction.
l Along an edge from an existing point on the edge: select a point on an edge and a
location along the edge.
www.SpaceClaim.com 240
You can also use temporary points, axes, and planes to help you create points. When hovering
over, or selecting on a point with the Select tool, the X, Y, Z locations of the pointdisplay in
the status bar.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
Use the Select tool guide to select a location for the point.
Use the Select Direction tool guide to change the direction of the dimension for the point.
Options
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
l Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian
dimensions from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
www.SpaceClaim.com 241
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 242
Lines
Use the Line tool to sketch lines in 2D or to draw lines between points on objects in 3D. These lines
will become edges when you pull your sketch into a solid with the Pull tool.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
www.SpaceClaim.com 243
To draw lines between points in 3D
1. Click Line in the Sketch group or press L.
2. (Optional) Select Define line from center in the Options panel to start drawing the linefrom
its center instead of an end.
3. Switch to 3D mode:
l If a sketch plane is not active, press Esc.
l If a sketch plane is active, click 3D Mode in the Mode group or press D.
4. Click to set the first point of the line.
This can be any point on an object in your design.
5. Continue selecting points to draw line segments.
6. End the line:
l Double-click to set the end point of the line.
l Right-click and select Finish Line.
l Press Esc.
l Connect the end point to the start point.
l Click any tool (except the Clipboard and Orient tools).
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Define line Select this option to sketch a line from the center. Click to define the center of the
from center line, then click again to set the length. You can also drag to draw the line.
www.SpaceClaim.com 244
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 245
Tangent lines
Use the Tangent Line tool to sketch lines tangent to any curves in your design.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
www.SpaceClaim.com 246
The tangency indicator shows you how the new line will be tangent with existing geometry if
you click on the current cursor location.
4. Click to set the end point of the line.
Options
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
l Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian
dimensions from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
www.SpaceClaim.com 247
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 248
Construction lines
Use the Construction Line tool to draw lines that help you create an accurate sketch. Construction
lines become axes in 3D. They are also useful for creating mirrors.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
Options
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
l Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian
dimensions from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
www.SpaceClaim.com 249
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge lines and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 250
Rectangles
Use the Rectangle tool in the Design tab or press R to draw a rectangle along the axes of the
sketch grid. When you exit the sketch, any rectangles become surfaces, and the lines become edges
of a rectangular solid when you pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
To draw a rectangle
1. Click Rectangle in the Sketch group or press R.
2. (Optional) Select Define rectangle from center in the Options panel to start drawing the rect-
angle by clicking the point for its center instead of a corner.
3. Click to set the first corner.
Move your mouse over the sketch grid to preview the rectangle. Dashed lines appear when
you create a square or golden rectangle.
You can dimension the points relative to other sketch objects.
4. Click to set the opposite corner of the rectangle.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Define Select this option to sketch rectangles from their centers. Click to define the center of
rectangle the rectangle, then click again to set the length of the sides. You can also drag to draw
from cen- the rectangle. Hold the Alt key while drawing a rectangle to toggle this option on-the-
ter fly.
www.SpaceClaim.com 251
l Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian
dimensions from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
Examples
Sketching a square
www.SpaceClaim.com 252
Sketching a rectangle from its center
www.SpaceClaim.com 253
Three-point rectangles
Use the Three-Point Rectangle tool to quickly sketch a rectangle at any angle on the sketch plane.
These lines will become the edges of a rectangular solid when you pull your sketch into 3D with the
Pull tool.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
Click and drag to draw the first side, then click to set the length of the second side.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Define Select this option to sketch rectangles from their centers. Click to define the center of
Rectangle the rectangle, then click again to set the length of the sides. You can also drag to draw
from the rectangle. Alt+drag or Alt+click to return to the standard behavior when the option
Center is selected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 254
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
l Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian
dimensions from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 255
Circles
Use the Circle tool to sketch a circle in 2D when you know the location of the circle's center and a
point on the circles edge, or the radius or diameter. The circle can become a cylinder or hole when
you pull it into 3D with the Pull tool, or a sphere or torus if you rotate or sweep it.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
To draw a circle
1. Click Circle in the Sketch group or press C.
2. Click to set the circles center.
You can dimension the points relative to other sketch objects.
3. Click to set the circle's diameter.
4. The circle will snap to existing sketches or determined circles and arcs in the plane of the
sketch.
If you sketch two circles that are tangent to each other, and then change the diameter of one
circle by editing its dimension, tangency with the other circle is maintained.
If you drag the center of a circle that is tangent to another circle, the radius of the other circle
changes to maintain tangency.
Options
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
l Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian
dimensions from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
www.SpaceClaim.com 256
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge lines and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
Examples
Editing a tangent circle by dragging the circle's center with tangency is maintained
www.SpaceClaim.com 257
Three-point circles
Use the Three-Point Circle tool when you dont know the center of the circle, but you know where
the edge of the circle must be. This tool works with any combination of free points, known points, or
tangent attachments. The circle will become a cylinder or hole when you pull it into 3D with the Pull
tool. You can also rotate the circle about a line to make a sphere or torus.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
www.SpaceClaim.com 258
If you drag the center of a circle that is tangent to another circle, the radius of the other circle
changes to maintain tangency.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Three-
Check this option to create an arc that is a segment of a three-point circle. To create an
point
arc with this option, click to set the first point, click to set the second point, then enter
circle seg-
the diameter or click to set the final point.
ment
www.SpaceClaim.com 259
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
Examples
Dragging (with the Select tool) a three-point circle drawn through a rectangles vertex maintains the
connection.
www.SpaceClaim.com 260
Ellipses
Use the Ellipse tool to sketch an ellipse in 2D. The ellipse can become an elliptical solid or hole
when you pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool. You can also sweep the ellipse in 3D, or rotate
it.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
To draw an ellipse
1. Click Ellipse in the Sketch group.
2. Click to set the center of the ellipse.
You can dimension the points relative to other sketch objects.
3. Click to set the overall length and angular orientation of the first axis.
4. Click to set the length of the second axis.
Options
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
l Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian
dimensions from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
www.SpaceClaim.com 261
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 262
Tangent arcs
Use the Tangent Arc tool to sketch an arc that is tangent to a curve or line in your design. This arc will
become an edge when you pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
www.SpaceClaim.com 263
The tangency indicator shows you how the new arc will be tangent with existing geometry if
you click on the current cursor location.
4. Click to set the end point of the arc.
Options
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
l Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian
dimensions from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
www.SpaceClaim.com 264
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 265
Three-point arcs
Use the Three-Point Arc tool to create an arc by specifying its start and end points, and the radius
or chord angle. This arc can be created tangent to another arc, line, or spline at its start. The arc will
become an edge when you pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool. As an option, you can also cre-
ate a Three-Point Arc in 3D mode.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
Options
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
l Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian
dimensions from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
www.SpaceClaim.com 266
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 267
Swept arcs
Use the Sweep Arc tool to create an arc with a known center and end points. Tangency is not a factor
in the creation of this arc. The arc will become an edge when you pull your sketch into 3D with the
Pull tool.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
Options
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
l Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian
dimensions from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
www.SpaceClaim.com 268
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 269
Polygons
Use the Polygon tool to draw a polygon with between 3 and 64 sides. You can dimension the loc-
ation of the axis, the length of the radius, the orientation angle, and set the number of sides as you
sketch the polygon.
The sides of a sketched polygon maintain their relationship to each other. When you pull a polygon
into 3D, faces with a polygon relationship are displayed with a pattern when you select the solid.
Changing one face or edge affects all the faces in the relationship.
To draw a polygon
1. Click Polygon in the Sketch group.
2. (Optional) Select Use internal radius in the Options panel to dimension the polygon based on
the diameter of a circle inscribed within the polygon. Uncheck the option to dimension the
polygon based on a circumscribed circle.
3. Click to set the center of the polygon.
You can dimension the points relative to other sketch objects.
4. Drag the mouse to draw the polygon and change its orientation.
The orientation is the polygon's angle relative to the X and Y axis.
You can press Tab and type a number to change the diameter, orientation, or number of sides.
5. Click to complete the polygon.
www.SpaceClaim.com 270
The sides of the polygon are all related, and act as one object. When pulled in 3D, the edges
and faces of the polygonal solid will also maintain this relationship.
Tip If you trim a polygon sketch with the Trim Away tool, you can drag the original sides of
the polygon with the Select tool to recreate the polygon.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
www.SpaceClaim.com 271
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
Examples
A polygon pulled into a solid maintains the relationships between its sides. In this example, pulling
one side pulls all sides of the polygon.
www.SpaceClaim.com 272
Creating a spline
Use the Spline tool to sketch splines in 2D or to draw splines between points on objects in 3D. A
spline is a continuously curved line, without sharp boundaries (that is, without vertices). Splines can
become edges when you pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool. Sweeping along a spline in 3D
lets you create smooth, curvy shapes.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
www.SpaceClaim.com 273
l Connect the end point to the start point.
l Click any other tool (except the Clipboard and Orient tools).
www.SpaceClaim.com 274
Once you have created a closed spline, you cannot edit it into an open spline.
Options
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
l Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian
dimensions from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 275
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 276
Editing a spline
You can drag a spline, its spline points, or its control points while the Select tools is active. You can
be in 2D or 3D mode.
Spline points are the points along the spine that define the position of its curves. Spline points are
displayed as circles when you hover over a spline.
Control points are displayed outside of the spline, and define the curvature of the spline between
points. Control points are displayed as diamonds connected by a dotted line when you select a
spline.
To move a spline
1. Click the Select tool in the Edit group on the Design tab while in 2D mode.
2. Mouse over the spline to highlight the spline and display its defining points.
3. Click anywhere on the spline except for the defining points, and drag it to move it.
To edit a spline
1. Click the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group while in 2D mode.
2. Mouse over the spline to highlight the spline and display its defining points.
3. Click and drag on any spline or control point to move it, leaving the other spline and control
points fixed in space.
You can box-select spline points.
4. (Optional) Edit the dimensions associated with that point.
www.SpaceClaim.com 277
tance away from your sketch. Zoom out from the sketch until you can see the end point con-
trol handle.
If another line, arc, or spline shares that end point, the end point influence may snap into tan-
gency with that sketch entity. To adjust the end point influence in this case, move the mouse a
short distance away from the end point to display the end point control handle.
After it is moved, the end point will snap to its original tangency.
2. (Optional) In 3D, hold Alt and select a planar or linear object that you want the spline to be tan-
gent with. You can hold Alt and select a curve, edge or face if the curve, edge or face passes
through the point. If you select a face, the tangency at the point where the point intersects the
curve or surface is used. The default is the tangency direction with the least amount of
curvature.
3. Drag the end point control handles to change the influence of that end point on the shape of
the spline.
The control handle will snap back to its initial tangent direction, which is indicated by a dotted
line.
The amount of the end point's influence can be controlled by dragging the end point control
handle closer to or further away from the end point.
www.SpaceClaim.com 278
l True: If you change this property to True, the tangencies of the beginning and end of
the spline curve will match to create a closed curve. If a spline curve is open and you set
the property to True, the spline will be closed, as shown here:
l False: If you change this property to False, the end tangencies of a closed curve dont
match. If a spline curve is closed and you set the property to False, the curve will
become teardrop-shaped because the end points will no longer be tangent, as shown
here:
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 279
Dragging a control point
www.SpaceClaim.com 280
Splitting curves
Use the Split Curve tool to split one curve with another curve or point. You can also use a 3D object
that intersects the curve, such as a plane or face. The segments of the split curve can then be selec-
ted and edited independently.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can split curves.
To split a curve
1. Click Split Curve in the Sketch group.
2. Click the curve you want to split.
3. Click a curve or point that intersects the curve you want to split. The curve will be split at the
intersection.
www.SpaceClaim.com 281
Creating corners
Use the Create Corner tool to trim back or extend two lines so that they meet at a corner.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can create corners.
Options
The following options are available in the Create Corner tool:
If you select this option and click the first line, then click a second, non-intersecting
Trim/Extend
line, you extend the first line, but not the second. If the two lines intersect, the first
curve
line is trimmed by the second line.
www.SpaceClaim.com 282
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 283
Creating rounded corners
Use the Create Rounded Corner tool to trim back or connect two intersecting lines or arcs so that
they meet with an arc tangent at both ends. You can also use this tool with coplanar 3D lines, such as
lines you created by blending.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can create roundedcorners, which are
also known as fillets.
For lines that meet at a corner, you can select and drag the vertex.
You can also enter the tool first and then make your selection.
www.SpaceClaim.com 284
Options
The following options are available with the Create Rounded Corner tool.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 285
Rounding corners of 3D lines, then sweeping to create a pipe
www.SpaceClaim.com 286
Bending lines
Use the Bend tool to bend straight lines and edges to form an arc. You can also use the Bend tool to
adjust the radius of arcs and arced edges. Bend works on straight lines when you are sketching and
when you are editing in cross-section.
You can insert a point curve text file to make a complicated bend.
Options
The following options are available for every sketch tool:
l Cartesian dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Cartesian
dimensions from the point. Cartesian dimensions show you the X and Y distances from the
point you select. If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the X and Y distances from
the origin.
l Polar dimensions: Select a point in a sketch and then click this option to see Polar dimensions
from the point. Polar dimensions show you an angle and a distance from the point you select.
If you don't have a point selected, it shows you the angle and distance from the origin.
l Snap to grid: Select this option turn snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor will snap
to the minor grid spacing increment while you sketch. The defaults are 1mm for Metric and
0.125in for Imperial units. See Units options to change the minor grid spacing.
l Snap to angle: Select this option to turn angle snapping on or off while sketching. The cursor
will snap to the angular snap increment while you sketch. The default is 15 degrees. See Snap
www.SpaceClaim.com 287
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 288
Trimming lines
Use the Trim Away tool to delete any line portion bounded by an intersection with a line or edge.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can trim lines.
www.SpaceClaim.com 289
Inserting a face curve
You can draw spline curves on a 3D face using the Face Curve tool. These curves follow the contour
of a face. The face curve can be used like any other edge to modify the object.
Tip: You will get much more predictable results if the face to face boundaries you are drawing over
are tangent. Click on the edges (tangent or not) to place a point for more control over the inter-
section point at that boundary.
www.SpaceClaim.com 290
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
Examples
The result of offsetting the edges that were created as a result of the face curve above
www.SpaceClaim.com 291
Offsetting curves
Use the Offset Curve tool to create an offset of any curve in the grid plane. If you are creating an off-
set spline, you will get the best results with an offset distance appropriate to the curvature of your
spline.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can create offset curves.
To offset a curve
1. Click Offset Curve in the Sketch group on the Design tab.
2. Select the curves you want to offset.
Standard curve selection techniques apply, so you can double-click to select connected loops
of curves. Ctrl and Shift can also be used to extend or replace the selected items prior to off-
setting.
You can also use box, lasso, and paint select modes to select multiple sketch curves. See Using
the radial menu to learn how to access these select modes.
If you select more than one curve, then they will be merged when they are offset.
To clear the current selection, click an empty spot in the Design window.
3. Hover the mouse over a line or point and press Shift to create an offset from that curve or
point.
As you move the cursor away from the selected curve, you can see a preview of the offset res-
ult. The offset defaults to one grid square.
4. (Optional) Select an option to specify how intersecting offset curves should meet.
5. Enter a dimension or click to set the width of the offset.
Options
The following options are available in the Offset Line tool:
www.SpaceClaim.com 292
Close with corner Close intersecting offset lines with a corner.
Close with arc Close intersecting offset edges with an arc.
Close naturally Close intersecting offset edges with a curve.
Offset both ways Create two offset lines on either side of the selected line.
Example
Highlighted line offset using each option. Shown from top to bottom: Close naturally, Close with
corner, and Close with arc.
www.SpaceClaim.com 293
Projecting onto the sketch grid
Use the Project to Sketch tool to copy an edge or vertex of a solid to a 2D line or point that you can
manipulate with the sketch tools. You can also project a note onto the sketch grid. Projecting an axis
onto the sketch grid creates a construction line.
Except when explicitly selecting a new sketch plane, this is the only sketch tool that can select items
that are not on the sketch grid. You can also select note text and project the text onto your sketch.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can project edges onto it.
You can project a body onto a layout sketch plane on a drawing sheet.
www.SpaceClaim.com 294
To project a solid onto the sketch grid
1. Click Project to Sketch in the Sketch group on the Design tab.
2. Click on the Select Bodies tool guide if you want to select bodies in the design window.
You do not need the tool guideto select bodies in the Structure tree.
3. Select one of the following options:
l All body edges if you want all edges projected onto the sketch grid.
l Visible body edges if you want only the visible, or silhouette, edges projected onto the
sketch grid.
l Bodyoutline if you want to just project the body outline. Select a body in the Design
window or Structure tree.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 295
It may be necessary to use the tools in the Fix Curves group on the Repair tab if the sketch does not
automatically close into a surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 296
Scaling a sketch
Use the Scale tool to display control handles that you can use to manipulate a 2D object. The Scale
tool also works in Section mode on solids with only planar faces.
The Scale tool works for sketches that lie on a plane. If you need to scale sketches that lie on mul-
tiple planes, see Scaling sketches with Pull.
Options
The following option is available in the Scale tool:
Fix aspect Select this option to keep the ratio between the sides the same when you drag or
ratio enter a dimension. You can also Shift+drag to keep the aspect ratio without selecting
www.SpaceClaim.com 297
this option.
Reorient the
Move and rotate the scale bounding box without affecting the selected geometry.
box
Maintain Keep the connection between a sketch curve and other curves that share its end
sketch con- points. If you deselect this option and scale a sketch curve, the curve will scale inde-
nectivity pendent of other curves.
www.SpaceClaim.com 298
Examples
The Scale tools dimensions refer to the extents of the selected sketch object
www.SpaceClaim.com 299
Scaling sketches using pull
You can scale sketch curves with the Scale tool, or you can use the Pull tool.
You should use the Scale tool when you want to scale sketch curves that lie on a plane. Use the Pull
tool when you want to scale curves that lie on multiple planes, as in the example below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 300
Editing
Use the editing tools to create and edit 2D and 3D solids. You can select, pull, move (in 2D and 3D),
edit in cross-section, fill (heal), bend lines and edges, and tweak faces.
In SpaceClaim, there is little need for a distinction between creating and editing. There is no hier-
archical feature tree, so you have considerable freedom when designing. Create a box by pulling on
a rectangular region. Edit the size of the box by pulling on one of its faces. Draw a rectangle to cre-
ate a pull-able region. Draw a rectangle on a face to create a new face.
In general, you are either editing or creating with one of the main tools (Select, Pull, Move, Combine,
or sketching and editing in Section mode), the many secondary tools, or inserting relationships
between faces in the design (Shell, Offset, Mirror). Combining objects (intersecting, merging, cutting,
etc.) is handled by the tools in the Intersect ribbon group.
Selection is integral to face and edge manipulation. You can extend selections with standard con-
trols (double-click, Ctrl, Shift), by right-clicking and selecting from the Select menu, or using
SpaceClaim's power selection functions.
A quick note about solids and surfaces: SpaceClaim always converts a closed set of surface faces into
a solid. Similarly, sketched lines that clearly create regions on faces are replaced with real edges. The
change in face transparency and edge lines reflects this transformation.
You can cut, copy, paste, and detach objects in most tools.
You can also nudge objects in most tools. Hold Ctrl+Alt and the up or down arrow to nudge an
object. The up arrow increases the dimension and the down arrow decreases the dimension. If you
nudge multiple times then click Undo, all the nudges will be reverted. You can view and change the
nudge distance in the Snap options.
In SpaceClaim, there are three modes you can use to edit your designs:
Sketch mode displays the sketch grid, so you can use any of the sketch tools to sketch in 2D.
Section mode lets you edit solids by working with their edges and vertices in cross-section.
3D mode lets you work directly with objects in 3D space.
Use the Select tool to select 2D or 3D objects in your design for editing. You can select ver-
tices, edges, curves, planes, axes, faces, surfaces, rounds, solids, and components in 3D. In 2D,
you can select points and lines. You can also select circle and ellipse centers, the midpoints of
www.SpaceClaim.com 301
lines and edges, and the internal points and end points of splines. The Select tool can also be
used to edit a sketch.
Use the Pull tool to offset, extrude, revolve, sweep, draft, scale, drape, and blend faces; use it
to round, chamfer, or extrude edges.
Use the Move tool to move one or more faces, surfaces, solids, or components. The behavior
of the Move tool changes based on what you have selected.
Use the Fill tool to fill in the selected faces with the surrounding surface or solid. The region
must be completely surrounded to be filled. You can also use the Fill tool to patch new sur-
faces through loops of edges.
Use the Replace tool to replace one face (or multiple faces) with another face (or faces). You
can also use it to simplify a spline face that is very similar to a cylinder or plane, or to align a
set of planar faces that are almost aligned.
You can edit any face or surface with Tweak Face to change its surface geometry. This tool is
available in 3D mode and in drawings.
www.SpaceClaim.com 302
Editing with annotation dimensions
You can use 3D annotation dimensions to change your design using the Pull and Move tools. Annota-
tion dimensions can be used in combination with ruler dimensions.
To view a video tutorial on this topic, see Tutorial: Annotation Dimensions on the SpaceClaim web
site.
www.SpaceClaim.com 303
If the tool can't make the change in the direction that the Pull or Move handle points toward,
then it will try to make the change in the opposite direction to achieve the dimension you
enter.
Examples
Selecting a dimension with the Move tool active. You must select a direction on the Move handle
before you can select a dimension.
www.SpaceClaim.com 304
Using an angular dimension to Pull a face with a revolve axis set
www.SpaceClaim.com 305
Pulling with a radial dimension on a face that is offset with another cylindrical face; also works when
you select both radial faces without an offset relation
www.SpaceClaim.com 306
Mathematical expressions
Units are applied to previous terms if units were not specified and are applied to subsequent terms
unless you override them:
l 1 + 1cm = 1cm + 1cm
l 1cm + 1 = 1cm + 1cm
l 1cm + 1 + 1mm = 1cm + 1mm + 1mm
l 1cm + 1 1/2 mm = 1cm + 1mm + 1mm / 2
Trigonometry functions work in radians by default, but you can enter degrees:
sin(45 deg)
www.SpaceClaim.com 307
Numbers support standard form, but e is a built-in constant:
l 2e2 = 200
2e 2 = 2 * e * 2 = 10.873...
l 2e-2 = 0.02
2e 2 = 2 * e 2 = 3.436...
l 2e1 = 20
2e = 2 * e
www.SpaceClaim.com 308
Pulling
Use the Pull tool to offset, extrude, revolve, sweep, anddraft faces; use it to round, chamfer, or
extrude edges. You can also drag a point with the Pull tool to draw a line on a sketch plane.
The Pull tool can also be used on selections of Mesh facets.
Pulling the apex of a cone changes its height. Pulling through the base plane will invert the cone.
Pulling a loop of edges attached to a vertex will create conical faces at the corners when appro-
priate.
You can select a face, then pull, dragging anywhere to act, or you can click, drag, and release a high-
lighted face. In general, the result of a pull stays selected or highlighted after the pull operation.
The action of the Pull tool depends on which faces and edges you select to work with, and which
faces, planes, or edges you select to drive the change. For example, if you choose to work with a
face, then select an edge to "drive" the pull, the Pull tool infers that you want to pivot the face
around that edge. When multiple actions can be inferred, you can use the Tool guides to correct the
Pull tool's inference. The Pull tool maintains any offset, mirror, pattern, or coaxial relationships.
When you pull a face, there are two main decisions you need to make. The first is to determine the
direction you want to pull in. A default direction is offered to you, but it can be overridden using the
Direction tool guide. The second is to determine what is going to happen at the edges of the face.
By default, the edges of the face are determined by its neighbors, but you can override this behavior
by including the edges in your Pull selection to create an extrusion. When you pull, connected cham-
fers are automatically removed and replaced.
If you entered the Design tab with sheet metal features selected, the Pull tool will work as it
does in Sheet metal. To work as usual, right click on the sheet metal part in the Structure tree
and choose Suspend Sheet Metal in the context menu.
www.SpaceClaim.com 309
To create and edit a solid
www.SpaceClaim.com 310
4. (Optional) Select options from the Options panel, or right-click and select them from the
mini-toolbar.
5. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to create or edit a solid.
6. If the correct pull arrow is not highlighted, press Tab or click the Pull arrow you want to use.
Press Shift to snap while pulling.
Press the spacebar or click on a dimension to enter a value.
To dimension the pull, type the distance you want to pull and press Enter. You can also type a
dimension in the dimension box in the mini-toolbar.
You do not have to click and drag on (or even near) the Pull arrow. In fact, we recommend that
you move your cursor away from the arrow for more precise control of the pull. The only
important input to the Pull tool is the direction in which you are moving the cursor. When you
pull, contiguous solids are automatically combined.
If you want to pull in a head-on view, use the ruler at the bottom right corner of the Design
window to pull instead of the Pull arrow. Slide the gray bar to the left to subtract material, and
to the right to add material.
You can also click the Up To tool guide, then click the object that sets the plane up to which
you want to pull. (When pulling an edge, the face does not need to intersect the edge you are
pulling.)
If you pull through another object in the same component, the smaller object is merged into
the larger one, and receives the larger object's properties. If you pull multiple, touching sur-
faces, the smaller surfaces are merged into the largest one. Select the No Merge option if you
don't want objects merged.
Hold the Ctrl key while pulling to create a copy of the object that is offset by the distance you
pull. You can also hold Ctrl while revolving to create a copy of a surface. The influence of
www.SpaceClaim.com 311
neighboring faces is taken into account to trim or extend the edges of the copied face, when
appropriate. You can use the Up To tool guide with Ctrl to make a copy, and you can use the
Both Sides option to make two copies that are offset in opposite directions from the original.
You can also use the Up To tool guide to pull surfaces up to a reference edge.
Press Esc to cancel the Pull.
See the topics in the Table of Contents under Designing > Editing > Pulling for the list of
actions you can perform with the Pull tool.
Do it faster
1. Select the faces, edges, and points you want to work with.
In general, pulling a face increases the size of the solid, pulling an edge creates a surface, and
pulling a point creates a line or curve.
2. (Optional) Alt+click the face or edge that will drive the pull.
3. Drag in the direction of the Pull arrow.
Pulling a curve
When you select a curve with the Pull tool, the direction of the extrusion is determined by the plane
of the curve.
If a curve lies on the Z axis, the pull arrow points in the Y direction.
If you select two curves on the same plane, the pull arrow points in the dir-
ection that is perpendicular to the plane of the curves.
If you select a curve that touches another curve, the pull arrow points in the
direction perpendicular to the plane of the two curves.
www.SpaceClaim.com 312
Pulling curve ends
You can toggle between Tangent and Natural (curvature continuous) extension when dragging the
end of a curve. To drag the extension Tangent to the curve, press and hold Ctrl prior to dragging.
You can release the Ctrl key once you start dragging. If you do not press Ctrl, the extension is created
Curvature Continuous.
Works for Splines (extended or trimmed-back)
Works for Arcs
Press Ctrl and drag to Pull the curve end tangent to the curve.
www.SpaceClaim.com 313
Without pressing Ctrl, Pulling the curve end extends it with its natural curvature.
Press Ctrl and drag to Pull the edge tangent to the surface.
Without pressing Ctrl, Pulling the edge extends it with its natural curvature.
Tool guides
Within the Pull tool, there are several tool guides that let you specify the behavior of the Pull tool:
The Select tool guide is active by default. When this tool guide is active, you can perform
standard selection tasks, and create natural offsets and rounds. Select a face, parallel faces, or
surface edges to offset them. Select a solid edge to round it. Alt+click to select the driving
face or edge for revolves, directed extrusion, sweeps, and drafts. Alt+double-click an edge to
www.SpaceClaim.com 314
select an edge loop. Alt+double-click again to cycle through alternate edge loops. You can
select objects across multiple components to pull.
Use the Direction tool guide to select a straight line, edge, axis, origin axis, plane, or planar
face to set the pull direction.
Select a face to pivot or select a face and edge to revolve. Then use the Revolve tool guide
to select the straight line, edge, or axis around which you want to pivot or revolve.
Select any number of contiguous faces on the same body, then use the Draft tool guide to
select the plane, planar face, or edge around which you want to pivot. None of the con-
tiguous faces can be parallel to the neutral plane, face or edge around which you want to
pivot.
Use the Sweep tool guide to select the straight or curved lines or edges along which you
want to sweep. Faces and edges can be swept, and the sweep trajectory cannot be in the
same plane as the face.
Use the Scale Body tool guide to scale objects in 3D. See Scaling solids and surfaces.
Use the Up To tool guide to select the object that you want to pull to. The pulled object's
face or edge will mate with the surface of the selected body or be pulled up to a plane
through the selection. You can also use this tool guide to pull surfaces up to a reference edge
or facet. When pulling Up To a Facet reference, a dimension is displayed for further editing.
The object will be copied if you hold Ctrl.
Extends an edge or face to the nearest face. This option works similar to the Up To tool
guide, except you don't select the face to extend to.
You can useFull Pull to automatically pull edges up to the closest faces that intersect with
the object. The edges you select are extended in the direction of the Pull handle up to the
next set of faces or edges that fully bound the extension. The original surfaces that the edges
belong to are extended and new edges may be created; however, new faces are not created.
Pull Options
The following options are available in the Pull tool. Once you select the edge or face to pull, select
these options from the Options panel or the mini-toolbar:
Only add material when you pull. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no change will
Add
occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
Only remove material when you pull. If you pull in an additive direction, no change will
Cut
occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
No Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects with
Merge an existing object.
When this check box is selected and you pull a surface, the surface is extruded into a
Thicken solid. This is the default behavior. When the option is deselected and you pull a surface,
www.SpaceClaim.com 315
the surface is offset to a new location, changing the original surface. When you hold
surfaces Ctrl and drag a surface with the option selected or deselected, the surface is copied
and then offset.
Main-
tain Off- Select this check box to maintain the offset relationship when pulling.
set
Pull
Select a single, detached edge, imprinted edge, or surface, then click this option to pull
Both
both sides of the edge or surface at once.
Sides
Opens the Measure tool. Selecting a measurement result returns you to the Pull tool
Meas- and displays the measurement valuein a dimension box with an arrow pointing to the
ure measured object. Modify the value for a one-time adjustment of the model or create a
Measurement Group which can be modified at any time.
Opens the Mass Properties tool. Selecting a mass property result returns you to the
Mass Pull tool and displays the measurement valuein a dimension box with an arrow point-
Properties ing to the measured object. Modify the value for a one-time adjustment of the model
or create a Measurement Group which can be modified at any time.
Select this option, then click to connect a ruler, oriented along the pull axis, to an
anchor edge or face. You can use the ruler to dimension the pull. The direction must be
Ruler
specified to successfully create a ruler dimension. Press Esc to cancel the ruler dimen-
sion.
When you are pulling an edge, select this option to create a rounded corner, which
Round
isalso known as a fillet.
Cham-
When you are pulling an edge, select this option to create a chamfer.
fer
Extrude When you are pulling an edge, select this option to extrude the edge into a surface.
Edge
When you are pulling an edge, select this option to create a copy of the edge.
The type of offset is determined by whether or not Offset edges by geodesic cal-
Copy culation is selected in Advanced options. This option is selected by default. When this
Edge option is selected, all the points on the offset edge are the same distance from the ini-
tial edge. In the examples below, the original edge is highlighted in green, the regular
offset is shown in orange, and the geodesic offset is shown in blue.
www.SpaceClaim.com 316
Pivot When you are pulling an edge, select this option to pivot the edge along the selected
Edge Pull arrow.
Examples
Pulling the edge of a surface first simplifies the edge, then its neighboring edges are extended (or
trimmed)
Pulling the edge of a surface while holding Ctrl makes a new surface that is tangent to the edge.
www.SpaceClaim.com 317
Pulling edges up to other edges with the Up To tool guide
Pulling edges with the Full Pull option. If you select the lower edge of the green surface shown
above, you will receive an error because the neighboring surface does not extend past the end of
the selected edge. The edge on the right side of the face can be pulled with the option, because the
neighboring face extends beyond its length. A new edge is created, which is marked in red in the
illustration on the right.
www.SpaceClaim.com 318
Pulling edges to their nearest neighbor with the Full Pull option
Pulling a sketched line on a planar face creates a surface in the same plane as the face
Pulling the edge of a toroidal surface. Three directions are available for pulling.
Holding Ctrl while pulling a surface with the Both Sides option creates copies of a surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 319
Pulling two edges with the Extrude (2a), Copy Edge (2b), and Pivot (2c) options.
Pulling a face offsets it, and its edges are influenced by neighboring faces.
Pulling a face with its edges selected extrudes the face without influence from neighboring faces.
Pulling a conical face Up To a parallel cylindrical face replaces the cone with the cylinder if the axes
are close together. Otherwise, the conical face is replaced with a cylindrical face that is coaxial to the
cone and has the same radius as the cylinder.
www.SpaceClaim.com 320
Pulling a pocket with rounded edges down through the bottom of a solid transfers the rounds to the
resulting hole.
www.SpaceClaim.com 321
Offsetting and extruding faces
You can extend or extrude the edges of any surface with the Pull tool. When you extend an edge, the
pull extends the neighboring faces without creating a new edge. Extruding an edge creates edges.
1. Click Pull in the Edit group on the Design tab. The Select tool guide on the right side of
the Design window should be active.
2. Select the outside edge of a surface.
Ctrl+click to select multiple edges.
3. Click the Pull arrow oriented along the surface to extend the edge. Press Tab or click the other
Pull arrow to extrude the edge in another direction.
4. (Optional) Ctrl+click the vertex of one or both neighboring edges to ignore their influence.
5. Drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to extend the edge or create a new surface per-
pendicular to the old one.
If the correct pull arrow is not highlighted, press Tab or click the Pull arrow you want to use.
The natural direction of a surface edge is in the plane of the surface.
You can use the Up To tool guide to pull a linear edge up to a face, surface, edge, or point. If
the face or surface does not intersect the edge you are pulling, the edge will be pulled par-
allel to the selected object.
To dimension the extension, type the distance you want to extend the surface while you are
pulling and press Enter.
Options
The following options are available in the Pull tool. Once you select the edge or face to pull, select
these options from the Options panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-toolbar:
www.SpaceClaim.com 322
Select the Add option to only add material. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no
Add
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
Select the Cut option to only remove material. If you pull in an additive direction, no
Cut
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
No Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects with an
Merge existing object.
Extends an edge or face to the nearest face. This option works similar to the Up To tool
Full guide, except you don't select the face to extend to. If used to revolve or sweep, click this
Pull option to revolve 360 degrees or to the next face, sweep through the full trajectory, or
blend through selected faces.
Pull
Select a single, detached edge, imprinted edge, or surface, then click this option to pull
Both
both sides of the edge or surface at once.
Sides
Select this option, then click to connect a ruler, oriented along the pull axis, to an anchor
edge or face. You can use the ruler to dimension the pull. The direction must be specified
Ruler
to successfully create a ruler dimension. Press Esc to cancel the ruler dimension.
Pulls the element so it mates with the surface of the selected body or be pulled up to a
Up
plane through the selection. You can find this option in the mini-toolbar and it is the same
to
as the Up To tool guide.
Extrude When you are pulling an edge, select this option to extrude the edge into a surface.
Edge
Copy When you are pulling an edge, select this option to create a copy of the edge.
Edge
When you are pulling an edge, select this option to pivot the edge along the selected Pull
Pivot
arrow.
Edge
Examples
Pulling the edge of a surface up to another edge forms a solid if it closes the body
www.SpaceClaim.com 323
Pulling the edge of a cylindrical surface extends the surface along a cylindrical path (A) unless you
hold Ctrl (B).
Pulling the edge of a cylindrical surface with the No Merge option selected creates a new edge.
Pulling the edge of a cylindrical surface with the Both Sides option and holding Ctrl creates a new
surface tangent to the cylinder and extends in both directions from the edge.
www.SpaceClaim.com 324
Pulling an edge with the Pivot Edge option
www.SpaceClaim.com 325
Extending and extruding surface edges
1. Select the Pull tool in the Edit group on the Design tab. The Select tool guide on the
right side of the Design window should be active.
2. Select the face or surface you want to offset or extrude.
You can select multiple surfaces and faces of solids to offset or extrude them simultaneously.
3. (Optional) Add edges to your selection.
Select the edges of the face that you want to extrude when you pull. (Any unselected edges
are defined by the neighboring geometry during the pull, creating an offset instead of an
extrusion.)
4. (Optional) Select the Direction tool guide , then click the straight line, axis, or edge if you
want to offset or extrude in a different direction.
You can also Alt+click a straight line, axis, plane, origin axis, or edge. Sometimes SpaceClaim
guesses your intent incorrectly when you Alt+click the direction line. If this happens, just use
the Direction tool guide to correct it.
The pull direction is shown in blue and the pull arrow is reoriented.
5. Click and drag the face in the direction of the Pull arrow.
To dimension the offset, type the distance you want to pull and press Enter.
Press and hold Ctrl to offset a copy of the face as a surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 326
Neighboring faces automatically extend to bound the offset face.
You can also use the Up To tool guide to pull up to any edge, plane, surface, or face in your
design. If you pull a round, chamfer, or cylinder with the Up To tool guide, and pull up to sim-
ilar geometry, the radius or offset is changed to the dimension of the Up To face you select.
Options
The following options are available in the Pull tool. Once you select the edge or face to pull, select
these options from the Options panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-toolbar:
Select the Add option to only add material. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no change
Add will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
Select the Cut option to only remove material. If you pull in an additive direction, no
Cut
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
No Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects with an
Merge existing object.
Pull Select a single, detached edge, imprinted edge, or surface, then click this option to pull
Both both sides of the edge or surface at once.
Sides
Select this option, then click to connect a ruler, oriented along the pull axis, to an anchor
edge or face. You can use the ruler to dimension the pull. The direction must be specified
Ruler
to successfully create a ruler dimension. Press Esc to cancel the ruler dimension.
Pulls the element so it mates with the surface of the selected body or be pulled up to a
Up
plane through the selection. You can find this option in the mini-toolbar and it is the same
to
as the Up To tool guide.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 327
Selecting a face and edges to extrude
www.SpaceClaim.com 328
Extruding edges
You can extrude the edge of any solid by selecting the Pull tool's Extrude Edge option. You can also
extend and extrude surface edges.
To extrude an edge
1. Click Pull in the Edit group on the Design tab. The Select tool guide on the right side of
the Design window should be active.
2. Select the edge or edges you want to extrude.
Ctrl+click to select multiple edges. Double-click to select a tangent chain.
3. Select the Extrude Edge option in the Options window, or from the mini-toolbar.
The Pull arrow changes to show the two directions in which you can extrude the edge. One
arrow is highlighted to show the primary direction.
4. If the arrow pointing the direction you want to pull is not highlighted, click the arrow or press
Tab to change the direction.
5. Click and drag the edge in the direction of the Pull arrow.
To dimension the extrusion, right-click and enter a distance in the mini-toolbar, or type the dis-
tance while you are pulling and press Enter.
Press Ctrl to copy the edges.
Press Ctrl+C, then Ctrl+V to quickly copy and paste a selected set of edges in place.
You can click the Up To tool guide and click a face, edge, or point to pull up to. If the face
does not intersect the edge you are pulling, the edge will be pulled parallel to the face. If you
pull the edge of a surface up to another object, the result is automatically solidified if it cre-
ates a closed volume.
www.SpaceClaim.com 329
Options
The following options are available in the Pull tool. Once you select the edge or face to pull, select
these options from the Options panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-toolbar:
Select the Add option to only add material. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no
Add
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
Select the Cut option to only remove material. If you pull in an additive direction, no
Cut
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
No Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects with an
Merge existing object.
Pull
Select a single, detached edge, imprinted edge, or surface, then click this option to pull
Both
both sides of the edge or surface at once.
Sides
Select this option, then click to connect a ruler, oriented along the pull axis, to an anchor
edge or face. You can use the ruler to dimension the pull. The direction must be specified
Ruler
to successfully create a ruler dimension. Press Esc to cancel the ruler dimension.
Pulls the element so it mates with the surface of the selected body or be pulled up to a
Up
plane through the selection. You can find this option in the mini-toolbar and it is the same
to
as the Up To tool guide.
Extrude When you are pulling an edge, select this option to extrude the edge into a surface.
Edge
Copy When you are pulling an edge, select this option to create a copy of the edge.
Edge
When you are pulling an edge, select this option to pivot the edge along the selected Pull
Pivot
arrow.
Edge
www.SpaceClaim.com 330
Rounding edges
Use the Pull tool's Round option to round the edges of any solid. You can also round an inside or
outside corner of a surface. To create a rounded face between two faces, see Rounding between
faces and surfaces.
Rounds are recognized as a face type, with their own options in the Properties panel. You can
change the Round value (true or false) and the Radius value. The Round value for a variable radius
round is Varies.
You can change a constant- or variable-radius round with the Pull tool in section mode.
To round an edge
1. Click the Pull tool in the Edit group on the Design tab.
2. Select the edge or edges you want to round. Double-click to select a tangent chain.
You can also select the vertex of an inside or an outside corner of a surface.
3. Select the Round option in the Options panel or from the mini-toolbar. This option is auto-
matically selected for edges that can be rounded.
4. Click and drag the edge in the direction of the Pull arrow.
To dimension the round, press the Spacebar, type the radius, and press Enter.
When you pull an edge to create a round, the Pull tool determines whether it should be a con-
stant radius or a variable radius round based on the geometry.
Once you create a round, pulling an adjacent face also pulls the round.
When you round more than one edge at the same time, and one or more of the rounds cannot
be created, only the successful rounds are created.
The face hidden by the round is remembered, so that if you fill the round it can be displayed. If
you move a round, the face hidden by it is also moved.
www.SpaceClaim.com 331
Examples
Pulling edges on geometry that automatically determines rounds will be variable radius.
When creating surface-to-surface rounds, the expansion direction depends on the order in which
you select the edges. In the example above, the rounds expand toward the left because the upper
edge was selected first.
Rounding the edge created by two rounds with one edge not tangent.
www.SpaceClaim.com 332
Pullingrounds in a tangent chain. Pulling the selected tangent chain does not change the round
shown in blue.
Adding and changing a rounded edge on a shelled or offset part changes the inside faces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 333
To create a full round by selecting faces
1. Click the Pull tool.
2. Select the face where you want the full round.
3. Hold Ctrl and select the two side faces that will be tangent to the full round.
4. Right-click and select Full Round.
Example
www.SpaceClaim.com 334
made variable independently by selecting the sharp end edge that is not shared by the rounds.
In the Pull tool, when you select an edge of a constant radius round, the Smooth option becomes
enabled if the geometry allows it. When checked, the transition between radius at each end of the
round will vary smoothly instead of linearly. Once set, the Smooth option remains set for subsequent
rounds until you change it.
The image below shows a Smooth variable radius round. Other editing examples follow.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 335
Selecting multiple edges to create a variable round across those edges
1. Click the Fill tool in the Edit group on the Design tab.
2. Select the rounded edge.
3. Click the Complete tool guide.
The round is removed and a round group is created.
www.SpaceClaim.com 336
Rounding between faces and surfaces
You can create a rounded edge acrossthe gap between two faces or surfaces that would meet at a
corner. To create a rounded face on an edge, see Rounding edges.
When you round between faces of two solids, the solids must extend into the area where the roun-
ded face is created.
www.SpaceClaim.com 337
When pulling Face-to-Face round,s you can match their radius to an existing round using the
Up To tool guide.
Unlike rounds made on edges, the faces hidden by the round are not remembered. If you fill
the round it will be replaced by an edge.
Examples
Rounding between faces on two parts. Material exists in the area where the rounded face is created,
so this operation will succeed.
A rounded face cannot be created between these faces because material doesn't exist in the area
between the parts where the round will be created.
This sequence shows creating a round between faces, then using the Fill tool to remove the round.
The Fill replaces the round with an edge and not with the original geometry.
www.SpaceClaim.com 338
Rounding between two surfaces creates a rounded surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 339
Chamfering edges
You can chamfer the edges of any solid by selecting the Pull tool's Chamfer option. Sketched cham-
fers that you make using the CreateRounded Cornertool with the Chamfer option are recognized as
chamfers when they are extruded into a solid.
Chamfers are recognized as a face type, with their own options in the Properties panel. You can
change the Chamfer (true or false) and Distance values.
After you create the chamfer, you can adjust the setback distance of both sides and you can change
its offset. Drag the arrows above or below the chamfer to change the distance, or drag the arrow that
is perpendicular to the chamfer to change its offset. You can also pivot the edges and the chamfer's
distance properties will be updated with the new values.
When you make a hole in a chamfered face, the face is no longer a chamfer. You can still pull
the face, or the hole, but you cannot change the chamfer to a round or dimension the chamfer.
To chamfer an edge
www.SpaceClaim.com 340
To dimension the chamfer, right-click and enter a setback distance in the mini-toolbar, or
press the space bar, type the setback distance, and press Enter.
To create a chamfer with the same setback distance and size as an existing chamfer, use the Up
to tool guide and select an existing chamfer face. You can also select an edge with Up To to
set the setback distance.
l To change the offset distance of the chamfer, pull the arrow that is perpendicular to the
chamfer, as shown below. Press the spacebar while pulling to type a distance value.
l To modify by Distance and Angle, select one of the side handlesto displaythe mini-
toolbar and click the Angle dimension option. The selected side becomes the dis-
tance side and the other switches to angle.
www.SpaceClaim.com 341
l To convert the chamfer to a normal face, select False in the Chamfer field of the Prop-
erties panel. You can select True to convert a face to a chamfer; however, faces with
holes cannot be modified as chamfers. Changing this property does not change the geo-
metry. See the instructions below to remove a chamfer from an edge.
Hold the Shift key while pulling a chamfer setback or offset to snap to existing edges.
You cannot convert a chamfer to a round if you have changed its setback distance(s).
To make a chamfer with the same setback and offset as another chamfer
www.SpaceClaim.com 342
The first chamfer will be changed so its offset and setback distances are the same as the
second chamfer.
Examples
Pulling to enlarge an existing chamfer while holding Shift to snap to an edge. You can only snap to
an edge in this case when you pull an existing chamfer.
www.SpaceClaim.com 343
Using the Up to tool guide to change the offset and setback distances of a chamfer to match an
existing chamfer.
www.SpaceClaim.com 344
Pivoting edges
You can pivot the edge of any solid with the Pull tool's Pivot Edge option. You can alsopivot two
separate edges together when pulling in one direction.
To turn a cylinder into a cone, select the Pull tool and the Pivot Edge option. Then click the edge of
the cylinder and pull it until it forms a point. To turn a truncated cone into a cylinder, click the small
edge and pull it out.
To pivot an edge
1. Select the Pull tool in the Edit group on the Design tab.
TheSelect tool guide is enabled by default.
2. Select the edge or edges you want to pivot. Double-click to select a tangent chain or edge
loop.
3. Select the Pivot Edge option in the Options panel, or from the mini-toolbar.
The Pull arrow changes to show the two directions in which you can move the edge to pivot
the connected faces. One arrow is highlighted to show the primary direction.
4. If the arrow pointing in the direction you want to pull is not highlighted, click the arrow or
press Tab.
5. Drag the edge in the direction of the Pull arrow.
During the pull, the distance you have moved the edge is displayed. You can dimension the
distance in Section and 3D mode, and dimension the angle in Section mode.
You can hold Shift to snap to existing geometry.
www.SpaceClaim.com 345
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 346
Revolving faces
You can revolve any face or surface with the Pull tool. The face or surface can lie on both sides of the
revolve axis.
To revolve a face
1. Select the Pull tool in the Edit group on the Design tab. The Select tool guide on the
right side of the Design window should be active.
2. Select the surfaces, faces, or solids you want to revolve.
3. Alt+click the straight line, axis, or edge to set the revolve axis.
You can also select the Revolve tool guide, then click to set the revolve axis. The revolve axis
is shown in blue.
4. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to revolve the selected object, select the Up
To tool guide and click an edge, face, or plane, or select Full Pull from the Options panel or
mini-toolbar.
Neighboring faces automatically extend to define the boundaries of the revolved faces of
solids. Revolving from a flat surface face has no neighboring faces, so it makes new face
boundaries.
To dimension the rotation, type the rotation angle and press Enter. The positive direction is
shown by the Revolve handle.
Alt+click an axis, then mouse over a face and pull to revolve the face around the axis.
Options
The following options are available in the Pull tool. Once you select the edge or face to pull, select
these options from the Options panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-toolbar:
Select the Add option to only add material. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no change
Add will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
Select the Cut option to only remove material. If you pull in an additive direction, no
Cut
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
No Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects with an
Merge existing object.
Full Once you select the edge about which to revolve or sweep, click this option to revolve 360
Pull degrees or to the next face, sweep through the full trajectory, or blend through selected
www.SpaceClaim.com 347
faces.
Pulls the element so it mates with the surface of the selected body or be pulled up to a
Up
plane through the selection. You can find this option in the mini-toolbar and it is the same
to
as the Up To tool guide.
Examples
Revolve using cut, 180 degree revolve, and a full revolve of an ellipse around an asymmetrical axis
Revolving a surfacing using Cut, when the surface lies on both side of the axis and is enclosed within
a solid
www.SpaceClaim.com 348
Revolving edges
You can revolve an edge to form a surface with the Pull tool. You can revolve the edge of a solid or
surface.
1. Select the Pull tool in the Edit group on the Design tab. The Select tool guide on the
right side of the Design window should be active.
2. Select the edges you want to revolve.
3. Alt+click a straight line, axis, or edge to set the rotation axis.
You can also select the Revolve tool guide, then click the revolve axis. The revolve axis is
shown in blue.
4. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to revolve the selected edge or select the Up
To tool guide and click an edge or face to revolve up to.
Ctrl+click to select edges of faces along with the face to force the pull tool to create new
neighboring faces to contain these edges (essentially changing from a draft to a revolve).
Unlike other CAD products, SpaceClaim allows revolving planar and non-planar edges and
faces about lines that do not lie in those planes. This allows skewed rotational solids and sur-
faces.
You can use the Up To tool guide when you revolve edges.
To dimension the rotation, type the rotation angle while the Revolve handle is displayed and
press Enter.
www.SpaceClaim.com 349
To revolve an edge of a surface
1. Select the Pull tool in the Edit group on the Design tab. The Select tool guide on the
right side of the Design window should be active.
2. Select the outside edge of a surface.
3. (Optional) Hold Ctrl and select an end point to maintain constant radius as the edge is
revolved.
If you don't select an end point, the edge will follow influencing sides of surfaces or solids, if
they exist. A side influence can be another edge of the surface if it lies in the same plane, or a
solid or surface that touches the end of the edge. See the examples below.
4. Alt+click a straight line, axis, or edge to set the rotation axis.
You can also select the Revolve tool guide, then click the revolve axis. The revolve axis is
shown in blue.
5. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to revolve the selected edge.
To dimension the rotation, type the rotation angle while the Revolve handle is displayed and
press Enter.
Options
The following options are available in the Pull tool. Once you select the edge or face to pull, select
these options from the Options panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-toolbar:
Select the Add option to only add material. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no change
Add will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
Select the Cut option to only remove material. If you pull in an additive direction, no
Cut
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
No Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects with an
Merge existing object.
Once you select the edge about which to revolve or sweep, click this option to revolve 360
Full
degrees or to the next face, sweep through the full trajectory, or blend through selected
Pull
faces.
Pulls the element so it mates with the surface of the selected body or be pulled up to a
Up
plane through the selection. You can find this option in the mini-toolbar and it is the same
To
as the Up To tool guide.
www.SpaceClaim.com 350
Examples
Revolving an edge of a surface that is not in the plane of the surface makes an edge with a constant
radius because the edge has no side influence in this direction.
Revolving an edge of a surface with side influence makes an edge that is influenced by adjacent
edges.
www.SpaceClaim.com 351
Revolving an edge of a surface with side influence with its end-point selected makes an edge with a
constant radius.
Revolving an edge that crosses the axis will create more than one surface or solid if the edge is not
symmetrical across the axis.
www.SpaceClaim.com 352
Revolving a helix
You can revolve a helix with the Pull tool. Path and geometry are previewed as you pull along the
axis or enter dimensions, as shown in the image below.
To revolve a helix
1. Select the Pull tool in the Edit group on the Design tab. The Select tool guide on the
right side of the Design window should be active.
2. Select the face or edge you want to revolve.
www.SpaceClaim.com 353
Options
The following options are available in the Pull tool. Once you select the edge or face to pull, select
these options from the Options panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-toolbar:
Select the Add option to only add material. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no
Add
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
Select the Cut option to only remove material. If you pull in an additive direction, no
Cut
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
No Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects with
Merge an existing object.
Pull Select a single, detached edge, imprinted edge, or surface, then click this option to
Both Sides pull both sides of the edge or surface at once.
Right-Han- Select this option to determine the direction in which the helix is revolved around its
ded Helix axis.
www.SpaceClaim.com 354
Sweeping
You can sweep a face, edge, surface, 3D curve, or other object along a trajectory with the Pull tool.
Sweeping a face around a closed path creates a torus.
To sweep a face
www.SpaceClaim.com 355
Options
The following options are available in the Pull tool. Once you select the edge or face to pull, select
these options from the Options panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-toolbar:
Select the Add option to only add material. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no
Add
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
Select the Cut option to only remove material. If you pull in an additive direction, no
Cut
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
No Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects with an
Merge existing object.
Pull
Select a single, detached edge, imprinted edge, or surface, then click this option to pull
Both
both sides of the edge or surface at once.
Sides
Once you select the edge about which to revolve or sweep, click this option to revolve
Full
360 degrees or to the next face, sweep through the full trajectory, or blend through selec-
Pull
ted faces.
Pulls the element so it mates with the surface of the selected body or be pulled up to a
Up
plane through the selection. You can find this option in the mini-toolbar and it is the same
to
as the Up To tool guide.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 356
Sweeping along a primary trajectory with Normal to Trajectory selected. Every section plane that is
normal to the origin trajectory is the exact same profile as the initial section, limited by the extents
of the trajectory.
Sweeping along a primary trajectory with Normal to Trajectory not selected. Every section plane
that is parallel to the initial section profile is the exact same profile as that initial section, limited by
the extents of the trajectory.
www.SpaceClaim.com 357
Sweeping a rectangle along a trajectory with Normal to Trajectory selected.
Sweeping a hole along a trajectory by selecting the axis of the hole, then the trajectory.
If you sweep a non-continuous profile, separate swept surfaces are created.
www.SpaceClaim.com 358
Sweeping with multiple trajectories
You can Alt+Ctrl+click to select multiple trajectories to sweep along. The trajectory you click first is
the origin trajectory (labeled O) and the second trajectory is labeled X. If you select the Normal to
Trajectory option, the sweep is aligned along the origin trajectory. If the object being swept is in the
middle of the sweep, you can pull in either direction to sweep only in that direction.
Sweeps can vary the sketch entities (or edges) along the sweep trajectory. The trajectories can be
thought of as guides that make continual changes to the profiles as if they had been dragged while
in Sketch mode. Tangency and other constraints are maintained.
When you sweep using more than two trajectories and Scale Sections is turned off, the profile lines
and curves will follow the trajectories individually and constraints are preserved. You can see an
example in the image below.
You can use a chain of tangent edges as a guide for Sweep.
The extent (or length) of a sweep is limited by the shortest trajectory. If the profile being swept inter-
sects at any point along the trajectory, you can pull in either direction to sweep only in that dir-
ection. You can also select Full Pull to create a bidirectional sweep that extends throughout the
trajectory.
The sweep preview includes the following visual elements:
l The blue square indicates the direction of the origin trajectory at its start, and is localized
around the origin trajectorys intersection with the profile to be swept.
l A right-angle symbol is displayed on the origin trajectory when you select the Normal to ori-
gin trajectory option.
l The preview rectangles are green and scale with the sweep if you select the Scale sections
option.
www.SpaceClaim.com 359
Sweep with two guides
In a sweep with two guides, every section plane that is normal to the origin trajectory has a profile
section that is aligned to the vector defined by the O-X vector in that plane, scaled by the length of
the O-X vector, and limited by the extents of the shortest trajectory. If there are two or more tra-
jectories and the spline that connects them (as a profile) is tangent to the surfaces that contain the
trajectory edges, then the spline not only scales and aligns to the O-X vector, but also deforms to
keep that profile tangent, at all points along the trajectories, to the neighboring surfaces. The profile
does not have to touch the trajectories, but the profile plane has to intersect with the trajectories.
www.SpaceClaim.com 360
Alt+selected to specify that the profile should remain tangent to the neighboring face throughout
the sweep.
When sweeping, cross-sections can be displayed as a preview for their sweep along the trajectories,
also shown in the figure above. You can control the display of the cross-sections with the Animate
Full Pull Advanced SpaceClaim option.
www.SpaceClaim.com 361
www.SpaceClaim.com 362
Sweeping with an axis
Examples
Setting the orientation of the selected object as it is swept along the trajectory.
www.SpaceClaim.com 363
Variable sweep with axis.Every section plane that is cut through a point on the origin trajectory and
through the selected axis has a profile section that is aligned to the vector defined by the O-X vector
in that plane, scaled by the length of the O-X vector, and limited by the extents of the shortest tra-
jectory. This makes every section appear to radiate around that selected axis.
www.SpaceClaim.com 364
Drafting faces
You can draft faces around a plane or another face, edge, or surface with the Pull tool. Drafting
changes the angle of the selected contiguous faces. For example, a mold designer drafts faces to
facilitate removal of parts from the mold.
To draft a face
1. (Optional) Insert a plane around which you want to draft faces.
You need to do this when you want to draft around a plane that doesn't already exist as geo-
metry in the design.
2. Click Pull in the Edit group on the Design tab. The Select tool guide on the right side of
the Design window should be active.
3. Select the face or contiguous faces you want to draft.
4. Alt+click the plane, face (including rounds), or surface about which you want to draft.
You can also select the Draft tool guide , then click the face or surface. The draft plane,
face, or surface is shown in blue.
Tip: When you need to select more than one face or surface for the Alt-reference (or after
selecting the Draft tool guide) then you have to hold the Ctrl and the Alt keys while selecting
the additional references.
If you select one edge loop, you can create an edge-driven draft. If you select two edge loops,
you can create a split draft.
5. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to draft the selected faces.
To dimension the draft, type the rotation angle while you are pulling and press Enter.
www.SpaceClaim.com 365
Options
The following options are available in the Pull tool. Once you select the edge or face to pull, select
these options from the Options panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-toolbar:
l Add: Select the Add option to only add material. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
l Cut: Select the Cut option to only remove material. If you pull in an additive direction, no
change will occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
l No merge: Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects
with an existing object.
l Up to: Pulls the element so it mates with the surface of the selected body or be pulled up
to a plane through the selection. You can find this option in the mini-toolbar and it is the same
as the Up To tool guide.
l Draft both sides: Select this option to pivot the face on the opposite side of the reference
face as well as the selected face.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 366
Drafting around a plane that does not touch the faces being drafted.
Drafting faces around a plane. The drafted faces pivot around the face or plane you select as the
draft plane.
www.SpaceClaim.com 367
Drafting a face where a plane must be selected as the draft plane. See Inserting a plane for instruc-
tions to create a plane.
Drafting the offset faces (inside and the outside) of a shelled solid.
Drafting around a spline surface with the Draft both sides option selected
www.SpaceClaim.com 368
Drafting a set of surfaces about a planar surface not attached to the solid
www.SpaceClaim.com 369
Creating slots
You can create slots from holes using the Pull tool. You can also edit slots. Slots maintain the rela-
tionship between their faces.
If you pull a hole with a rounded or chamfered edge into a slot, the slot will have a rounded or
chamfered edge.
You must select the axis of the hole, rather than the axis of a round or chamfer on the hole. You
will not be able to pull the slot if you select the axis of the round or chamfer.
To create a slot
www.SpaceClaim.com 370
To create a radial slot
1. Select the axis or face of a hole.
2. Do one of the following:
l Alt+click the face of the driving cylinder to set the direction of the Pull towards the axis
of the driving cylinder. Click the Pull Direction tool guide and pull the hole to create a
radial slot.
l Ctrl+click the face of the driving cylinder to set the direction of the Pull towards the axis
of the driving cylinder. Click the Pull Direction tool guide and pull the hole to offset the
cylinder and create a radial slot simultaneously.
l Select the Pull arrow that points toward the axis and pull.
If you want to lengthen a radial slot while keeping it the same distance from a radial face,
Ctrl+click the radial slot's axis and the face, then pull.
If you want to move a slot along with a radial face Ctrl+select the holes axis and the face, then
Ctrl+pull.
www.SpaceClaim.com 371
3. Click the sweep trajectory.
A sweep mode arrow indicatesthe beginning of the sweep.
4. Click and drag in the direction of the Pull arrow to sweep the selected objects.
You can alsoselect Full Pull from the Options panel or the mini-toolbar to sweep the entire
length of the trajectory. If you select Full Pull and the face or surface being swept is in the
middle of the trajectory, it will be swept in both directions.
To edit a slot
You can modify a hole that was dragged to form a slot by pulling on any of the slot axes.
If the slot has a rounded or chamfered edge, double-click the round or chamfer to change its dimen-
sions.
If you select Detach first in the Options panel, then the slot will become a solid if you use the Move
tool to move it off the body, as shown below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 372
Right-click a face of the slot and select Remove Association.
Any changes you make to the slot's face will affect only that face.
Examples
Creating a circular slot by entering an angle dimension with the Pull Both Sides option
Creating a radial slot by selecting an axis or edge parallel to the holes axis as the Pull direction
www.SpaceClaim.com 373
Creating a slot using a vertex as the Pull direction
www.SpaceClaim.com 374
Scaling solids and surfaces
You can scale solids and surfaces with the Pull tool. You can scale multiple objects in different com-
ponents.
Select the solid or surface, Alt+click a vertex to anchor the scale, and pull.
www.SpaceClaim.com 375
3. Select the object you want to convert.
4. Scale the object by 25.4.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 376
You can use annotation dimensions to scale an object. See Editing with annotation dimensions.
www.SpaceClaim.com 377
Copying edges and faces
You can copy edges and faces by selecting the Pull tool's Extrude Edge option. You can also copy
edges and faces with the Move tool.
When copying and pasting the edge of a surface as a curve or line, the lines are placed on the active
layer and remain selected until you clear the selection. This feature is useful if you need references
to rebuild a surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 378
Examples
When copying an edge, the edge adjusts based on the solid's geometry
www.SpaceClaim.com 379
Copying a round face
www.SpaceClaim.com 380
Pulling with the select tool
You can pull with the Select tool or the Pull tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 381
Pivoting with the select tool
You can pivot an edge with the Select tool or the Pull tool.
To pivot an edge
Drag the vertex of a selected edge to another vertex to pivot the selected face, as shown in the fig-
ure below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 382
Using measure to drive pull
Measurements can be made, and the results used, while in thePull tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 383
Measurement groups can also be created from Area and Perimeterresults. Modifying the group
then adjusts the model to produce a desired area. For example, create a Measurement group for the
area of a side of a box. Whilepulling the front of the box, you can enter a new area value for the side
to complete the Pull.
www.SpaceClaim.com 384
Moving
Use the Move tool to move any object in 2D or 3D, including drawing sheet views. The behavior
of the Move tool changes based on what you have selected.
l If you select an entire object, such as a solid, surface, or sketch, you can translate or rotate the
object.
l You can move one side of a solid, surface, or sketch to enlarge or reduce the size of the
object.
l If you move an object into another object in the same component, the smaller object is
merged into the larger one and receives the larger object's properties.
l Moving a component moves everything contained within the component.
l You can move a circular edge of a flat surface the same way you move a circular sketch curve.
l Mesh bodies, selected mesh facets, and mesh boundary loops can also be moved.
l Moving the apex of a cone changes the height. Anchor the Move tool to the outer face to
scale the cone.
When you move a component that has been assembled using assembly constraints, the Move handle
is positioned at the constraint and the axes that are constrained are disabled. If the assembly con-
straints only allow movement in one direction, then that direction will be automatically selected. For
example, if you move a component with a Center Axes assembly constraint, the Move handle is
www.SpaceClaim.com 385
positioned on the axis and you can only move the component in directions that will keep the axes
aligned.
If the Move handle appears disabled, check the Structure tree to determine if an assembly con-
dition exists for the component you are trying to move.
If you entered the Design tab with sheet metal features selected, the Move tool will work as it
does in Sheet metal. To work as usual, right click on the sheet metal part in the Structure tree
and choose Suspend Sheet Metal in the context menu.
To Move objects
www.SpaceClaim.com 386
l Maintain sketch connectivity: Keeps the connections between a sketch curve and other
curves that share its end points. If you deselect this option and move a sketch curve, the
curve will move independent of other curves.
l Remember orientation: Sets the orientation of the Move tool for the object. The ori-
entation is only remembered for the current session. You can change the Move handle
orientation by using the Direction tool guide, holding Alt and selecting a reference
object, or by dragging a ball on the Move handle's axes. You can select the following
options in the drop-down list to the right of the option:
l Default: The Move handle orientation is determined by the object(s) you select.
l Global: Saves the current Move handle orientation, and this orientation is used for
all objects.
l Per Object: Saves the current Move handle orientation for the selected object.
When you select the object again with the Move tool active, the Move handle will
be oriented at its saved orientation.
4. Click an axis and drag in that direction to move the selected object.
A line extends from the Move handle axis to indicate the direction you selected for move-
ment.
If the move fails, the Move handle is repositioned to the last valid location and orientation. If
you are trying to move a protrusion surrounded by round faces, you may need to fill the
rounds.
5. You can also Alt + select a plane between Move handles to invoke free drag movement within
that plane. Place the Movetool on any movable object and then hold the Alt key. Quarter
circle planes appear between the Move handles. Selecting one changes the cursor to a free
drag cursor and allows free movement within the plane. Select any Move handle to disable the
free drag.
The cursor does not need to be on the axis to move the selected object. In fact, you may find it
easier to control the move if you drag some distance from the entity and the Move handle.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 387
Moving a protrusion with rounds that intersects with a stepped solid with the Detach first option
Moving imprinted edges on a face, and other intersecting imprinted edges are adjusted as needed.
The examples above show how the edges are adjusted when the imprinted areas are moved.
Moving the end point of a line segment that has a tangent arc on its other end changes the arc so
that it remains tangent to the line segment as you move its end point.
To move relative to other objects
l Snap to a co-planar face: Hold Shift while dragging to snap to co-planar faces when you
have the Move handle anchored to a planar face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 388
l Move an object up to another object: Click the Up To tool guide to move objects so the
center of the Move handle is adjacent to the object.
l Orient an object to another object: Select the object to move and a Move handle axis, then
click the Orient to Object tool guide and select a second object. The selected object will be
rotated so the selected Move handle axis is aligned with the second object.
l You can also click the Origin tool in the Insert tab to insert an origin anywhere in your
design that you want to anchor the Move tool.
The yellow center sphere turns into a blue cube when the Move handle is anchored.
Example
www.SpaceClaim.com 389
Normal to Surface - While moving the diamond along the selected trajectory, Ctrl+Alt+click the face
of the cylinder to set the orientation of the diamond normal to the cylinder.
To dimension a move
1. Follow the steps to move an object.
2. After you click an axis on the Move handle, click Ruler in the Options panel.
3. Click an edge or face to anchor the ruler.
The ruler is oriented along the selected Move handle axis.
4. Type a distance and press Enter.
Examples
Copying the red face multiple times by double-clicking the Up To tool guide to keep it active for
more than one move
www.SpaceClaim.com 390
Making copies by double-clicking the Up To tool guide also works with sketches
Tool guides
Within the Move tool, there are several tool guides that let you specify the behavior of the Move
tool:
The Select tool guide is active by default. When this tool guide is active, you can select faces,
surfaces, solids, or components within the Move tool.
Click any object with the Select Component tool guide to select the solid to which the
object belongs. If the solid is the only object in its component, the component will be selec-
ted.
Select a point, vertex, line, axis, plane, or planar face with the Move Direction tool guide to
orient the Move handle and set the initial direction of the move. (The object will not move
until you drag.)
Select a set of lines or edges with the Move Along Trajectory tool guide to move the selec-
ted objects along that trajectory. For best results, perform Moves along trajectories in small
increments. If the object to be moved is a protrusion, it will be detached, then reattached in
the new location. When you move a protrusion along a trajectory, rounds are automatically
removed. Ctrl+Alt+click a face to control the orientation of the object being moved or pat-
terned along.
Select an object, then use the Anchor tool guide to select the face, edge, or vertex that will
anchor the move. You can anchor the Move handle to a temporary object, such as the inter-
section between two axes by Alt+Shift+clicking the two objects.
Select an object, then use the Fulcrum tool guide to move other objects around it. Select a
pattern member to anchor it, or select a component to explode an assembly. See Moving
with the Fulcrum tool guide.
The Move radially about axis tool guide allows you to select an axis to move the selected
objects radially about. Once you select an axis, the Move handle will reorient to have one axis
parallel to the move axis and one axis in the radial direction.
Once you select the object to move and a Move handle axis, use the Up To tool guide to
select the object you want to move up to.
If a Move handle axis is selected, the Move is limited to that direction. If no handles are selec-
www.SpaceClaim.com 391
ted, the object is translated until the center of the Move handle lies on the selected ref-
erence. (A move handle must be selected to move up to the axis of an origin.)
In a linear move to an intersecting object, the center of the Move handle is moved to the
selected object. If the two objects do not intersect, the first object is moved along the
desired direction up to the closest point to the second object. You can use this tool guide to:
l Select a point along a trajectory or the axis of an origin to move up to.
l Move the sketch grid in Sketch and Section modes.
l Move an axis so it is coincident with another axis in a body. If you move the axis of a
pattern, all pattern members will move together to the new location.
You can double-click the Up To tool guide to keep it active. While the tool guide is active, it
will copy faces and surfaces instead of moving them. To deactivate the tool guide, click it
again, select another tool guide, or exit the Move tool.
Once you select the object to move and a Move handle axis, use the Orient to Object tool
guide to click an object. The selected object will be rotated until the selected Move handle
axis is aligned with the clicked object. You can also use this tool guide to rotate the sketch
grid in Sketch and Section modes.
Options
The following options are available in the Move tool:
l Move grid: Select this option to move the sketch grid.
l Symmetric Move: Select this option to move symmetrically.
l Measure: Opens the Measure tool. Selecting a measurement result returns you to theMove
tool. When you select move direction, the measurement value is displayed in a dimension box
with an arrow pointing to the measured object. Modify the value for a one-time adjustment of
the model or create a Measurement Group which can be modified at any time.
l Ruler: Once you select an axis on the Move handle, select this option and click an edge or face
to anchor the ruler. The ruler is oriented along the selected Move handle axis. Enter a value to
use the ruler to dimension the move.
l Maintain orientation: Select this option to maintain the orientation of the object when rotat-
ing or moving along a trajectory.
l Create patterns: Select this option if you want to create a pattern by dragging selected
objects with the Move tool. Dragging creates a copy of the selected object, moves it to a new
location, and creates a pattern relationship. Select the Maintain orientation option to keep
the initial orientation of the original object when you rotate or translate the pattern. See Creat-
ing a pattern.
www.SpaceClaim.com 392
l Detach first: Select this option to detach selected protrusions and depressions, move them,
and reattach them at the new location.
l Maintain sketch connectivity: Keep the connection between a sketch curve and other curves
that share its end points. If you deselect this option and move a sketch curve, the curve will
move independent of other curves.
l Keep beam fixed: This option is for beams and causes the beam to remain fixed while the pro-
file becomes offset from the beam. See Moving beams.
l Remember orientation: Sets the orientation of the Move tool for the object. The orientation
is only remembered for the current session. You can change the Move handle orientation by
using the Direction tool guide, holding Alt and selecting a reference object, or by dragging a
ball on the Move handle's axes. You can select the following options in the drop-down list to
the right of the option:
l Default: The Move handle orientation is determined by the object(s) you select.
l Global: Saves the current Move handle orientation, and this orientation is used for all
objects.
l Per Object: Saves the current Move handle orientation for the selected object. When
you select the object again with the Move tool active, the Move handle will be oriented
at its saved orientation.
l Enter XYZ coordinates: This option allows you to enter X, Y, and Z distances to move relative
to the World Origin. When you select the option, the Move handle re-orients to be parallel to
the World Origin and displays X, Y, and Z input panels.
www.SpaceClaim.com 393
Move handle
You will use the Move handle to move objects in 2D and 3D. The Move handle allows you to trans-
late and rotate objects. You use the Move handle by clicking the axes of the Move handle and drag-
ging to move the selected object.
When you select the object you want to move, and click one of the Move tools, SpaceClaim guesses
at the anchor point and orientation of the Move handle. If either of these is incorrect, you can
change them.
You can adjust the size of the Move handle in Popular options.
www.SpaceClaim.com 394
l Release the Alt key and start dragging
While dragging, the cursor changes to the free drag cursor.
l Clicking on any Move handle cancels free drag movement.
Example
www.SpaceClaim.com 395
Moving symmetrically
Use the SymmetricMove option in the Move tool to move objects relative to each other about a
plane as if they are mirrored objects but without the need to create a mirror association between the
objects. Unlike the Mirror tool, the Symmetric move option can be used to move dissimilar geo-
metry as well as similar.
You can use this option with an automatically determined virtual mirror plane based on the Move
handle location or you can use the fulcrum tool guide to establish a fixed mirror plane.
With a fulcrum-selected mirror plane, geometry which is the same on both sides of the plane is
found and moved automatically when moving geometry on one side of the plane. The center of
each selected object determines which side of the plane the geometry lies on.
Faces, edges, vertices, section curves, and sketch curves can be moved symmetrically. Curves that par-
tially overlap the symmetry plane can be moved. The symmetric move option is not available for
moving objects which have an established mirror association
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 396
Moving two curves.
Examples
Pivoting an edge modifies the matching geometry on the other side of the fulcrum-selected mirror
plane.
www.SpaceClaim.com 397
Moving faces that are symmetric to each other but lie partially on either side of the mirror plane. The
center of each of the objects bounding boxes is on either side of the plane, so the symmetric move
toolcan detect the symmetric geometry and the angled faces can be moved
www.SpaceClaim.com 398
Creating a pattern
You can create a pattern of protrusions or depressions (including slots), points, components, planes,
origins, or axes. You can also create patterns of sketch curves. You cannot create a pattern of threads.
You can use the Undo button Ctrl+Z or Redo button Ctrl+Y when creating a pattern.
You can also create a pattern from a mix of object types, such as a pattern of holes (faces) and bolts
(imported components). In SpaceClaim, any pattern member can be used to modify the pattern after
you create it. If the change cannot be made to all pattern members, the member that cannot change
is still part of the pattern. Once you select a Pattern Type, the fill displays to show a pattern preview.
When you select a member of a pattern, you will see fields for the pattern count and distances rel-
ative to the member you have selected. Press Tab to move among the dimension and count fields.
l Icons next to the patterns dimensions and counts show which will be changed if you change
the value of the highlighted field. The closed lock indicates that a dimension wont change
and the open lock shows you it will change. You can override a lock on a dimension by click-
ing its icon to toggle it between locked and unlocked.
l Dimension or count line placement, arrows, and value fields show you how the pattern will
change if you change the value of a field.
l Your selection determines how changes to the distance and count affect the patterns position.
If you select one member of the pattern, the change is centered on that member. If you select
all pattern members, the change is centered on the entire pattern, with the distance between
members locked by default. You can control which direction the pattern will grow based on
which member you select and which count or distance you change.
l Changing a pattern count in one direction does not change the distance between pattern
members. Instead, the overall distance of the pattern will change. This is indicated by the
closed lock icon.
l Circular patterns are anchored at the opposite end by default when you move one end.
www.SpaceClaim.com 399
Patterns of sketch entities and 3D curves are no longer patterns when they change into another
form, such as a surface or solid. For example, if you pattern a C-shaped curve, then it will
remain a pattern when you switch from sketch mode to 3D mode. But if you close off the curve
to make a box before you switch to 3D mode, then the boxes will become surfaces and will no
longer be a pattern.
The image below shows the preview for a two-dimensional pattern. For one-dimensional, only the
X-direction is displayed. Clicking the arrows flips their direction 180-degrees.
For through-all cuts, the preview is on the plane closest to the direction reference. For blind cuts, the
preview is on the face of the selected pattern leader.
www.SpaceClaim.com 400
You can also create one-dimensional linear patterns on cylindrical faces as long as the pattern dir-
ection is either the cylinders axis or parallel to the axis.
To create a pattern of a pattern
Follow the steps for the linear pattern, but select a member of a linear pattern as the first member of
the pattern.
To create a circular pattern
1. Click the Circular tool in the Insert group on the Design tab.
2. Select a protrusion, depression, body, sketch, points, axes, planes, origins, or 3D curves to be
the first member (leader) of the pattern. The Direction tool guide activates.
3. Select a line, edge, axis, or a set of points to set the direction of the pattern.
4. (Optional) Modify the Pattern options in the Options panel.
Pattern Type: One-dimensional or Two-dimensional.
Change Circular Count, or Angle values for One-dimensional.
Change CircularCount, Angle, Linear Count, or Linear Pitch values for Two-dimensional.
Note that a Circular Count of one will create a single radial pattern.
As you switch between pattern types, or change pattern values, the pattern preview displays
your changes in blue.
5. Select the Create Pattern tool guide, or press Enter, to complete the pattern.
The image below shows the preview for a two-dimensional pattern. For one-dimensional, only the
Angular direction is displayed. Clicking the arrows flips their direction 180-degrees.
www.SpaceClaim.com 401
You can create circular patterns on cylindrical faces, both around the face and along the axis.
To create a fill pattern
1. Click the Fill tool in the Insert group on the Design tab.
2. Select a protrusion, depression, sketch, points, axes, planes, origins, or 3D curves to be the first
member (leader) of the pattern. The Direction tool guide activates.
3. Select a line, edge, axis, or a set of points to set the direction of the pattern.
4. Modify the options in the Options panel
Pattern Type: Grid or Offset
Modify the X Spacing or Y Spacing
Modify the Margin values. A dashed orange boundary line displays the pattern's marginal
boundary.
As you switch between pattern types, or change pattern values, the pattern preview displays
your changes in blue.
5. Select the Create Pattern tool guide, or press Enter, to complete the pattern.
www.SpaceClaim.com 402
6. Click the Move handle axis.
7. Drag to create the end pattern member and create the pattern.
8. Press Tab to change the count, length, and percent fields to edit the pattern of points.
All points are associated with the edge, so that when the edge changes, the points also change
as shown in the example below.
To quickly increase or decrease the number of pattern members, press Tab until the count
field is highlighted, then hold the Alt key while you press the up or down arrow.
To move a pattern
www.SpaceClaim.com 403
If you move a member at one end of a pattern, the member at the opposite end is anchored
and the pattern is skewed:
If you anchor a different member than the member opposite the direction you are moving,
Move skews the pattern.
If you have a linear pattern in a radial direction and you move an interior member without set-
ting an anchor, then the entire pattern shifts in the selected direction
Use the Up To tool guide to move a pattern member up to another face or edge. Pattern
dimensions (such as Count and Length) display as expected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 404
l Radial patterns: If you select a member of a radial pattern, you can change the angle
between pattern members and the distance from the pattern members to the center of
the pattern.
4. Type a new distance or angle and press Enter.
The spacing between all pattern members will change.
www.SpaceClaim.com 405
1. Click Move tool.
2. Select the object you want to pattern.
3. Click the Move Along Trajectory tool guide and select the curve to use as a trajectory.
You can also hold Alt and double-click the curve.
4. Check Create Patterns in the Move options.
5. Pull the trajectory arrow.
6. Release the mouse button to display pattern dimensioning options, then enter values by tab-
bing through the options.
7. (Optional) Check Maintain Orientation in the Move options to keep the patterned objects in
the same orientation as the original object.
www.SpaceClaim.com 406
Examples
Rectangular pattern
Changing spacing between pattern members changes the pattern's overall length when the length
field isn't locked.
A pattern of sketch objects is no longer a pattern when you switch to 3D mode and the sketched
objects are converted to surfaces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 407
Sketch curve patterns can propagate in two dimensions. The pattern abovecontains three squares in
the X direction and two squares in the Y direction.
www.SpaceClaim.com 408
Exploding an assembly
1.
Select all the components in the Structure tree that are part of the assembly you want to
explode.
2. Anchor the Move handle on one component.
3. Select the Fulcrum tool guide and click another component.
4. Select an axis on the Move handle and drag to explode the assembly in that direction.
www.SpaceClaim.com 409
Pivoting and pulling solids
To pull a solid
1. Click the Move tool.
2. Select the face you want to move.
3. Use the Move handle to move the face.
The solid is extended in the direction of the move
To pivot a solid
1. Select an edge loop on the solid that you want to pivot.
2. Click a linear axis of the Move handle.
3. (Optional) Click the Fulcrum tool guide and click an alternate plane to pivot around.
4. Drag to pivot the solid around a plane drawn through a point opposite the selected edge
loop or to pivot the solid around the plane you selected with the Fulcrum tool guide.
If the Move tool cannot maintain a planar or cylindrical face while pivoting, it will create a blen-
ded face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 410
Moving with the select tool
You can move solids and surfaces with the Select tool.
You cannot drag unfolded sheet metal parts in the Unfolded window by dragging their vertices with
the Select tool.
Examples
The blue edge was selected using the Alt key, then the green vertex was dragged in the direction of
the arrow. The part pivots around the blue edge.
www.SpaceClaim.com 411
The vertex highlighted in green was dragged down until the face shown on the right was high-
lighted. The triangular part moves down so the vertex is in the same plane as the face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 412
Moving with a fulcrum
The Fulcrum tool guide moves objects around a point, edge, or face. You can use this tool guide to
pivot patterns or faces, and to create a simple exploded assembly.
Examples
In the examples below, the object was dragged in the direction indicated by the red arrow.
www.SpaceClaim.com 413
Moving a pattern with one pattern member as the fulcrum point. You must select all the faces on the
pattern member that you move.
Moving components with a face of one component as the fulcrum point. Select the components in
the Structure tree.
www.SpaceClaim.com 414
Moving protrusions and depressions
You can move protrusions and depressions with the Select tool or the Move tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 415
Using measure to drive pull
Measurements can be made, and the results used, while in the Move tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 416
5. At any time, clicking on the group in the Group tree will open the Move tool and put the
measurement value in edit mode. Simply enter a new value and complete the move.
Measurement groups can also be created from Area and Perimeterresults. Modifying the group
then adjusts the model to produce a desired area. For example, create a Measurement group for the
area of a side of a box. While moving the front of the box, you can enter a new area value for the
side to complete the move.
www.SpaceClaim.com 417
5. At any time, clicking on the group in the Group tree will open the Move tool and put the
measurement value in edit mode. Simply enter a new value and complete the move.
Measurement groups can also be created from Area results. Modifying the group then adjusts the
model to produce a desired area. For example, create a Measurement group for the area of a side of
a box. While moving the front of the box, you can enter a new area value for the side to complete
the move.
Other examples:
www.SpaceClaim.com 418
Fill
Use the Fill tool to fill in the selected region with the surrounding surface or solid. Fill can "heal"
many cuts made into geometry, such as chamfers and rounds, subtractive revolves, protrusions,
depressions, and regions removed by removing regions in the Combine tool. When using Fill to fill a
gusset, the bend geometry on which the gusset is defined remains intact.
The Fill tool can also be used to simplify surface edges and cap surfaces to form solids. You can
select a combination of faces and edges to replace them with a single new face.
You can use the Fill tool in Sketch mode to fill a loop of sketch curves that is almost closed, but that
has multiple small gaps. If the gaps are too large, multiple error messages appear to show you
where the gaps are. You can also use it to concatenate multiple sketched curves.
You can also use the Fill tool when editing a layout. Fill functionality is useful when you sketch faces
across section lines, but do not want the section lines to split the surfaces when you switch to 3D.
When you change the geometry of a model, for example, the models length, height, or width, the
models fill pattern will automatically update to correctly re-fill to the models new geometry.
www.SpaceClaim.com 419
Let's look at the following sketch curves:
One of the rectangles isn't closed. If we fill this rectangle, the loop is automatically closed and it
becomes a surface:
The gap in this loop is small enough for the Fill tool to automatically close. Larger gaps will not be
closed. If a gap is less than 1.5 times the length of the minor grid spacing on the sketch grid, the
edges are extended to close the gap. If the gap is larger, a message appears in the status bar and the
gap's endpoints flash.
The Fill tool also created surfaces from the other closed loops of sketch curves. The darker shaded
areas in the image above show where the surface parts overlap. If we move the rectangle, we can see
the surface that was created automatically:
The result only has edges for the sketch curves that we did not select, because the selected curves
were used to create a separate surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 420
Now let's go back and close the open rectangle, and let the Fill tool automatically create surfaces
without selecting any edges:
This surface has edges for every closed sketch curve. The same thing automatically happens if we go
from sketch mode to 3D mode.
If we select all the sketch curves, then click Fill, we get a surface without any interior edges:
Vertices
You can select any number of edge points in any order. Each edge point is removed and a spline is
created to make a smooth curvature change between the neighboring edges to the point:
www.SpaceClaim.com 421
If you Fill a vertex on a solid, the system attempts to merge coincident edges into a single edge:
Edges on surfaces
If you select one surface edge in the shape of a spline or arc, the edge is simplified into a straight
line:
If you select two or more edges of a surface, the edges are simplified with a straight edge between
the end points:
If you select an edge that is completely within a surface, the edge is removed:
If you select all the edges that enclose a surface, the surface is simplified into a rectangle based on
its extents:
www.SpaceClaim.com 422
If you select a single edge that lies on an analytic surface, Fill will simplify it with the neighboring
edges:
You can fill irregular gaps on a circular surface, and the gap is simplified into a straight edge. Use Fill
again on the straight edge, and the edge becomes round:
Chamfers on surfaces
Select achamfer on a surface and then use the Fill tool to fill the chamfer.
www.SpaceClaim.com 423
or
If you select an open edge loop that belongs to multiple faces, Fill attempts to cap it with an ana-
lytic surface (cylinder, cone, etc.):
If you select a series of planar edges, you will get aplanar face:
If you select a series of surface edges that are not planar, Fill extends neighboring faces if the Patch
Blend option is off:
www.SpaceClaim.com 424
If the Patch Blend option is turned on,
If you select an edge loop and Alt+click to select neighboring faces, the new face will be tangent to
any faces you used Alt+click to select:
You can also extend neighboring faces to fill sliver gaps (double click to get loop):
If you select open edges of a self-intersecting surface, Fill tries to form a solid and remove excess
(also works in combine):
www.SpaceClaim.com 425
If you select an edge loop and use the Patch blend and Tangent extension options:
When you fill a loop of edges, you can use Alt and select curves and the new face(s) will pass
through the curves:
If you select an edge loop and guide curves, with or without the Tangent extension option (which
applies to areas not influenced by guide curves):
www.SpaceClaim.com 426
If you select an imprinted edge on the face of a surface or solid, the imprinted edge is removed.
This works the same as delete:
If you select laminar edge(s) of a solid or surface, Fill simplifies the edges by replacing them with a
single edge with the same geometry:
Solids
If you select faces, Fill deletes them and extends neighboring faces:
If you select a chamfer or round, Fill removes them and adds them to a named group:
If you select rounds with neighboring rounds, Fill creates planar caps (because rounds should not be
extended by definition):
www.SpaceClaim.com 427
If you select rounds on shelled parts, both faces of the shell are filled:
If you select joint edges created in Sheet Metal, the joints are removed:
If you select two imprinted edges, as shown below, they are combined into one edge:
www.SpaceClaim.com 428
If you select two faces or surfaces that don't touch, you can replace them with a single face. You
must double-click to select the gap between the faces:
Any combination of sketch curves, layout curves, surface edges, and solid edges
When you select any combination of sketch curves, layout curves, surface edges, and solid edges that
lie in the same plane and form a closed loop, Fill creates a planar surface:
Meshes
Mesh internal loops and boundary loops can be filled with the Fill tool. The loops are filled with
facets that consider the curvature of the neighboring facets. This produces a very smooth and uni-
form fill. The newly created facets are added to the selection set after the fill.
Separate loops on the Same mesh object that are NOT intended to be joined.
www.SpaceClaim.com 429
Separate loops on the Same mesh object that ARE intended to be joined
www.SpaceClaim.com 430
Loops on exterior and interior shells, when filled simultaneously, will create a wall thickness. Fill the
interior and exterior loops separately to continue the shell.
You can also use the Delete key to fill faces on a solid or surface.
To fill a region
1. Select the edges that define a surface region, or the faces that define a region within or on a
solid.
You can select an object in the Structure tree to simplify it.
You can select faces and the Fill tool will automatically create a patch if you also select at least
one edge.
www.SpaceClaim.com 431
You can select the face of a solid when only the edge is displayed (such as in a drawing sheet
view) using the scroll wheel. The edge becomes a slightly thicker line when the face is high-
lighted. If you fill lines in a layout, you can then pull the surface into 3D from the layout, but
remain in edit layout mode after this action.
You can fill lines and edges whether or not the sketched lines you want to fill were sketched in
the same plane as the edges. (If the lines are imprinted on a face and become edges, filling
those edges deletes them.)
Click the Fill tool in Sketch mode to fill any closed or almost closed loops and switch to 3D
mode.
Tool guides
Within the Fill tool, there are several tool guides that let you specify the behavior of the Fill tool:
The Select tool guide is active by default. When this tool guide is active, you can select
edges and faces to be filled. You can click an edge loop or use box-select to select multiple
objects.
The Select Guide Curves tool guide allows you to select a guide curve.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
l Patch blend: Select this option to use the initial tangency of the neighboring faces to fill the
selected edges with a patch blend. This option blends all the faces into a smooth, single-face
patch, instead of extending the faces that "own" the edge until they intersect. Alt+click the
points that you want to blend through. This option is automatically selected when you hold
the Alt key or use the Select Guide Curves tool guide to select a reference curve.
The tangency of neighboring faces is ignored unless you hold Alt or click the Select Guide
Curves tool guide and select them.
l Show deviation: Shows a deviation analysis of the surface or face you created with the Patch
blend option. The new face is temporarily colored to indicate the distance from points on its
surface to the faces it was created from. Use the Color and Scale controls to change how the
analysis is displayed.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 432
Simplifying edges
www.SpaceClaim.com 433
Capping a surface
Selecting internal edges to keep them Selecting lines to simplify a surface by filling. Internal
after filling. edges are removed.
www.SpaceClaim.com 434
Patch blend with and without tangent extension. The Tangent extension option is select on the left,
and not selected on the right.
www.SpaceClaim.com 435
Removing rounds
You can use the Fill tool from the Edit group on the Design tab to remove and cap round faces.
You might want to do this if you are trying to move a protrusion surrounded by round faces and it
cannot be moved because the rounds create complex or difficult geometry. The Fill tool attempts to
remove the rounds of the faces you select, and extend the faces that are not selected. With the Fill
too, you can double-click a rounds chain to remove a long continuous chain of rounds.
3. Click the Fill tool or press F to fill the round and create caps if necessary.
A Round Group is created in the Groups panel each time you fill a round.
www.SpaceClaim.com 436
You can fill any round created in SpaceClaim, even a round that removes the underlying face,
until the round is changed by some other action.
www.SpaceClaim.com 437
Examples
Filling a corner round that was created as a surface - surface round in an imported design
www.SpaceClaim.com 438
About to fill imported geometry bounded by surface rounds
Filling a rounded edge chain - the original chain to be filled, chain after splitting round faces, and
filled chain
www.SpaceClaim.com 439
If a round cannot be removed, a "stop face" is added and round removal is discontinued (A stop face
is a cap or vent face).
You can fill a chain of round faces when only one end of the round chain has a stop face.
Replace tool
As an option, when removing rounds, you can also use the Replace tool from the Edit group on the
Design tab, to replace one face with another. You can replace multiple faces with a single face,
replace a single face with multiple faces, or replace multiple faces with multiple other faces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 440
Full round replaced with a face
Sphere tool
l Try using the Sphere tool from the Insert group on the Design tab. Using this tool, you can cre-
ate a round sphere and place it at difficult geometry junctions. Once in place you can use the
sphere to split the junction in order to remove the round. In some cases, you may want to cre-
ate a chain of two or more spheres to help with removing larger or more complex rounds
areas.
l To avoid trouble with removing spheres, it's good practice to fill the sphere immediately after
you remove the rounds on either side of a sphere or sphere chain.
www.SpaceClaim.com 441
Using the Sphere tool to split and partially remove a round
www.SpaceClaim.com 442
Replacing faces
Use the Replace tool in the Edit ribbon group on the Design tab to replace one face with
another. You can replace multiple faces with a single face, replace a single face with multiple faces,
or replace multiple faces with multiple other faces.
The Replace tool also lets you manually simplify or align complex faces and curves into planes,
cones, and cylinders. (If you want to automate this process, use theSimplifytool in the Adjust group
on the Repair tab to automatically find problem areas.)
To replace a face
1. Click the Replace tool in the Edit ribbon group on the Design tab.
2. Select the face you want to replace (that is, the target
3. Select the face, surface, or plane you want to use to replace the target face (that is, the source
You can select sources in the Design window or in the Structure tree.
Do it faster
1. Click the target face and Alt+click the source face, surface, or plane with the Select tool.
2. Click the Replace tool to replace the target face with the source face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 443
To replace a target with multiple sources
1. Click the Replace tool.
2. Select the target face.
3. Click the Source tool guide to make it sticky, then click each source face, surface, or plane.
You can select sources in the Design window or in the Structure tree and can also use any mul-
tiple-face selection method.
4. Click the Complete tool guide or press Enter to replace the target.
4. Click the Complete tool guide or press Enter to replace the targets.
Examples
Replacing a target split face with a source surface
Replacing multiple target faces (the protrusion) with a single source face (the surface)
www.SpaceClaim.com 444
Replacing multiple target faces (in the depression) with multiple source faces (on the surface)
To simplify curves
1. Click the Replace tool.
2. Ctrl+click each curve that you want to simplify.
www.SpaceClaim.com 445
If the selected curves are candidates for alignment or simplification, they are highlighted in
red.
3. Click the Complete tool guide or press the Enter key to align or simplify the highlighted
curves.
Example
Tool guides
Select source faces, surfaces, or planes using the sticky Source tool guide.
Click the Complete tool guide to replace the target face with the source face, or to simplify
or align the target face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 446
Tweaking a face
You can edit any face or surface with Tweak Face to change its surface geometry. This tool is avail-
able in 3D mode and in drawings.
The degree (or complexity) of a primitive face is automatically increased when you edit it with the
Tweak Faces tool. This makes the editing process smooth and seamless, so curves are smooth when
you add them.
Surfaces are checked for self-intersection when you modify the surface using its control points. You
will receive an error message if a change would create a self-intersecting surface.
If you save a selection in the Selection panel and it includes control points, the Face Edit tab will
automatically open when you load that selection.
To tweak a face
www.SpaceClaim.com 447
The U direction is indicated by blue lines in the Design window, and the V direction is indic-
ated by red lines.
l Click or to expand the selection so it includes all points in the U (blue) or V (red)
direction.
l Click or to expand the selection so it includes the next point in the U (blue) or V
(red) direction.
l Click or to reduce the selection by one point in the U (blue) or V (red) direction.
5. Select a tool to edit the face or surface:
l Add Control Curve
l Move
l Scale
l Or any other tool on the Design tab.
6. (Optional) Select Tweak face display options.
7. Click Close Surface Tools to close the tab and end your editing session.
www.SpaceClaim.com 448
Editing tweaked faces
You can think of the editing methods as modes. Different controls are displayed for each method,
and these controls allow you to adjust the face or surface differently.
You can choose from the following methods:
Control points
Use this method when you want to change a face by moving its control points.
Control curves
Use this method when you want to change a face by changing its control curves.
Blend curves
www.SpaceClaim.com 449
Use this method when you want to change a face by changing its blend curves.
Sweep curves
Use this method when you are editing a face or surface created by sweeping and you want to
change a face by changing its sweep curves. The sweep curves are shown in blue and the surface that
was swept is shown in red. You can use these curves to make new sweep faces, and then manually
swap out the new faces for the old, but they can't be used to change the original swept solid.
www.SpaceClaim.com 450
Adding tweak control curves
You can add control curves to a face or surface when any editing method is active.
1. Click Add Control Curve in the Edit group on the Face Edit tab.
The Tweak Face tool must be active for this tab to be visible.
2. Click the point on the face or surface where you want to add the control curve.
You can use temporary geometry to help you find the point where you want to add a control
curve.
www.SpaceClaim.com 451
Tweak face display options
These display modes can help you see the contours of a face or surface.
l Grid displays a grid on your face or surface. This is similar to the Grid tool on the Measure tab.
l Curvature displays a gradient on your face or surface. The curvature with the largest radius is
shown in the maximum color. The curvature with the smallest radius, or no radius, is shown in
the minimum color. This is similar to the Curvature tool on the Measure tab.
l Porcupine displays a fringe graph on your face or surface. This display shows you the tangency
of your surface at multiple points.
l Show Off-Face Control Points displays all control points. If this option is not selected, you
won't see control points that don't affect the surface.
l Show Periodic Seams displays the beginning seam of the surface when you are editing peri-
odic faces (cylinders, cones, and other revolved surfaces). This may help you see of the char-
acteristics or behavior of some periodic faces as you edit.
www.SpaceClaim.com 452
Blending
To create a blend
l Enter theBlend tool
l Select a point, edge, or face
l Ctrl+Select a corresponding point edge or face
l You can select more than two objects
l The blend is previewed as you select
l Complete the blend
You can blend both closed and open sections to a single point as shown below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 453
Options
The following options are available in the Blend tool Options panel when you select the appropriate
geometry for a blend.
l Rotational blend: Create cylinders and cones whenever possible during the creation of a
blend. You must have selected faces, points, or edges that can be rotated around a common
axis.
l Periodic blend: Go all the way around when blending. The blend will begin and end at the
first selected object. You must have selected three or more faces, points, or edges that can be
rotated around a common axis, and that also span an arc greater than 180 degrees. (Blending
between 3 equal-radius circle faces creates a torus.)
l Ruled sections: Create straight edges when you blend. When you blend between faces, this
option has the same affect as selecting the face and its edges.
l Local guides: Selected guide curves only influence areas near to them.
l Clockedguides: Guide curves are oriented relative to the face edges instead being simply
translated from vertex to vertex.
www.SpaceClaim.com 454
l Sheet metal blend: Forces the tool to create developable surfaces. A developable surface is
defined in mathematics as a surface with zero Gaussian Curvature (i.e. a surface that can be
flattened into a plane). The tool attempts to create planes, cylinders, and cones, in that order
to maximize the planar areas. It is restricted to blending between two parallel planes.
Example
www.SpaceClaim.com 455
When blending between colored objects, the blended geometry takes on the color of the object
that was selected first.
www.SpaceClaim.com 456
Blending between faces
You can blend between two or morefaces with the Blend tool. Blended faces automatically simplify
to analytic geometry when possible.
Once you have created a blend, you can use the Tweak Face tool to edit the blended surfaces or
faces.
A blendpreview displays between the first two faces. Blend surfaces begin tangent to the
edges of the initial face and end tangent to the edges of the last face. You can Alt+Click on
these faces to reverse the tangent direction.
www.SpaceClaim.com 457
4. (Optional) Alt+click the edges or lines you want to use as guides for the blend. There is also a
tool guide for selecting guide curves.Guide curves must touch all blend profiles.
5. Continue selecting surfaces orfaces.
6. (Optional) Modify the blend by selecting from the following options:
l Rotational blend: Create cylinders and cones whenever possible during the creation of
a blend. You must have selected faces rotated around a common axis.
l Periodic blend: Go all the way around when blending. You must have selected three or
more faces rotated around a common axis, that also span an arc greater than 180
degrees. (Blending between 3 equal-radius circle faces creates a torus.)
l Ruled segments: Create straight edges when you pull between three or more surfaces
or faces.
l Local Guides: Selected guide curves only influence areas near to them.
Checked Un-Checked
l Clocked guides: Guide curves are oriented relative to the face edges instead being
simply translated from vertex to vertex.
www.SpaceClaim.com 458
Clocked guides unchecked Clocked guides Checked
l Sheet metal blend: Forces the tool to create developable surfaces. A developable sur-
face is defined in mathematics as a surface with zero Gaussian Curvature (i.e. a surface
that can be flattened into a plane). The tool attempts to create planes, cylinders, and
cones, in that order to maximize the planar areas. It is restricted to blending between
two parallel planes.
www.SpaceClaim.com 459
Sheet metal blenduncheckedSheet metal blend
Checked
To blend a surface tangent to one face and through one curve/edge along a direction
Select a face and a curve and Alt+click a linear object to set the direction.
www.SpaceClaim.com 460
www.SpaceClaim.com 461
Blending between edges
Usethe Pull tool in the Design tabEditgroup toblend between two or more edges.You can
selectguide curves for the edges to follow when creating the blend.
www.SpaceClaim.com 462
l Rotational blend: Create cylinders and cones whenever possible during the creation of
a blend. You must have selectededges rotated around a common axis.
l Periodic blend: Go all the way around when blending. You must have selected three or
moreedges rotated around a common axis, that also span an arc greater than 180
degrees.
l Ruled sections: Create straight edges when youblend between three or more curves or
edges.
l Local Guides: Selected guide curves only influence areas near to them.
l Clocked guides: Blend edgespassing through orending at edges (not vertices) will be
equally spaced along the edge.
l Sheet metal blend: Forces the tool to create developable surfaces. A developable sur-
face is defined in mathematics as a surface with zero Gaussian Curvature (i.e. a surface
that can be flattened into a plane). The tool attempts to create planes, cylinders, and
cones, in that order to maximize the planar areas. It is restricted to blending between
two parallel planes.
www.SpaceClaim.com 463
Sheet metal blenduncheckedSheet metal blend
Checked
When a blend between splines will self-intersect, the splines are modified slightly to prevent this
from happening.
www.SpaceClaim.com 464
Adding Tangency
Make the blend tangent toadjacent facesby Alt+Selecting them.
Swept blends
A Swept Blend is a blend between two or more edgeswithoutlocal guide influence. The entire
blend is swept along the guide curve, as shown below.
If you check the Local guide option, the guide curve has a local effect on the blend.
Swept blends are different from sweeps. Swept blends need at least two profiles, while sweepsuse
a single profile.Sweeps giveyou limited control over the orientation and angle of the section along
the trajectory, or at the end cap, because it is always determined by sweeping the profile along the
trajectory.
With swept blends, you specify thesection shape and orientation explicitly at the ends and at spe-
cific points along the trajectory (guide curve).
www.SpaceClaim.com 465
When you select more than one guide curve, the additionalguide curvesgive you more control over
the final shape of the blend. Each guide curveaffects entities in the profile that are closest to the
curve. Vertices between guide curvesare controlled by curves blended between the neighboring
guide curves.
Example
www.SpaceClaim.com 466
Blending between points
You can create a curve byblending between any combination of sketched Points, vertices, or end-
points. Blend between any two points to create a line, or select multiple points to create a spline.
www.SpaceClaim.com 467
To blend between points
l Rotational blend: Createarcs whenever possible during the creation of a blend. You
must have selectedpoints rotated around a common axis.
l Periodic blend: Go all the way around when blending. You must have selected three or
morepoints rotated around a common axis, that also span an arc greater than 180
degrees.
l Ruled sections: Create straightline segmentswhen you blend between three or more
www.SpaceClaim.com 468
points.
www.SpaceClaim.com 469
Creating objects and relationships
Inserting planes
You can define a plane by selecting various faces, edges, axes, or lines in your design. You can select
any combination of coplanar axes, curves, edges, and coordinate axes.
The plane will extend a small amount beyond the edges of the face to make it easier to work with.
The plane will maintain this margin around all the objects in your design, extending and trimming
itself as you add, remove, or move solids within your design.
Planes are useful for creating layouts and annotations. Planes are not linked to the geometry used to
create them; they must be explicitly selected to move along with other items. You can also use a
plane to quickly clip your design to show only the geometry behind the plane.
To insert a plane
1. Click Plane in the Create group on the Design tab.
2. Select one of the following:
Planar face and point Through the point and parallel to the face
Two parallel planar faces At the midpoint between the two faces
Two axial faces with par- Tangent to both faces as close as possible to the selection
allel axes points
www.SpaceClaim.com 470
Select a: To insert a plane:
Axis (or line) and one point That contains the axis (or line) and the point
End point of any line Through the end point and normal to the line at the end point
Line sketched on a plane Through the line and normal to the plane
Line and point on the line Through the line and the point
Two points and a Plane or Through the two points and perpendicular to selected plane
planar face or planar face
3. (Optional) Click the Build Plane tool guide to select reference objects, then select a temporary
(dotted) plane to create the one that you want from the possible planes. See Inserting tem-
porary points, axes, and planes for detailed information about creating temporary planes.
4. An error message is displayed in the status bar if your selection does not define a plane.
www.SpaceClaim.com 471
To insert a plane through the mid-point between two points
1. Select the Plane tool.
2. In 3D mode or Section mode, Alt+Shift+click two points to create a temporary plane that
includes the midpoint.
3. Click the temporary plane.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 472
the same opacity.
l Outline: Set to Automatic by default. Automatic you see the outline of the plane. If you
change to No Outline, the plane is invisible unless selected.
l Setting planes to No Fill and No Outline is useful when dimensioning parts. It is easier to see
annotations when planes are less visible.
l Clipface: Sets the Clipface color override for each clipping plane in the design window. It
does not change the color of the plane itself, just the color of the face the plane is touching.
www.SpaceClaim.com 473
Inserting an axis
You can extend any axis in your design to make it available for revolves or rotations. The axis will
extend a small amount beyond the edge of the space containing your design. It will maintain this
margin extending and trimming it as you add, remove, or move objects in your design. Axes are not
linked to the geometry used to create them (unless they are an extension of existing axes); they must
be explicitly selected to move along with other items.
To insert an axis
1. Click Axis in the Create group on the Design tab.
2. Select one of the following:
Two, non-parallel planar At the intersection of the theoretical planes containing the two
faces faces
Circle or arc That contains the center point and is normal to the line
Point and a plane Through the point and normal (perpendicular) to the plane
3. (Optional) Click the Build Line tool guide to select reference objects, then select a temporary
(dotted) line to create the one that you want from the possible axes. See Inserting temporary
points, axes, and planes for detailed information about creating temporary lines.
www.SpaceClaim.com 474
To insert an axis through the mid-point between two points
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 475
Inserting points
To insert a point
World Origin coordinates are shown for selected Datum Points in the Status Bar.
Points can be Patterned in the Move tool and Linear and Circular Pattern tools.
Points can be dragged and dropped in the Structure Tree.
Move to New Component and Move Each to New Component work for selected Points.
www.SpaceClaim.com 476
Inserting an origin
You can insert an origin at any location in your design where you can anchor the Move tool. You can
anchor a ruler to an origin, and snap to origins while in Sketch mode. This allows you to dimension
from an origin and quickly move the sketch grid to an origin. You can also insert an origin at a solid's
center of mass or volume.
To insert an origin
www.SpaceClaim.com 477
3. Select the Origin tool in the Insert ribbon group to insert an origin.
The origin appears in the Design window and in the Structure tree.
www.SpaceClaim.com 478
Example
Alt+selecting an origin when creating a new component. The image on the left shows the World Ori-
gin and an origin created on the solid. The image on the right is the component opened in a new
design window with the world origin in the location it was placed on the object.
www.SpaceClaim.com 479
Pinned datums
Datums can be Pinned to the location at which they were created using RMB>Pinned.
Pinned Datums will move if their creation references are moved.
If a Datum is created and subsequently moved from its original (created) position (with respect to its
creation references) RMB>Pinned will be grayed out.
www.SpaceClaim.com 480
Pinned Planes
l In the graphics area, Pinned Datums are also given a green color and they have their corners
rounded. The image here shows the plane selected to emphasize the color.
l The pinned datum Reference is also highlighted when the plane is selected.
l If any of the pin references are deleted, the plane is automatically unpinned.
l You can NOT pin datum planes created from temporary references (using ALT+SHIFT.)
l Only Datum Planes that are NOT moved from their original position can be pinned. Planes
moved away, and then back to their creation references, CANNOT be pinned.
l Planes created using the Build Plane tool guide cannot be pinned. The references used in cre-
ating these planes are temporary and are not remembered outside of the tool.
Pinned Axes
l Un-pin a Datum Line if any of the references are deleted.
l Pinned axes are given a green color to distinguish them from normal axes.
l PinnedAxes attached to pinned datum points on faces will adjust when the faces are edited
with Tweak Face, Pull>Offset, Move, Bend, etc.
l Axes created using the Build Line tool guide cannot be pinned. The references used in cre-
ating these planes are temporary and are not remembered outside of the tool.
Pinned Points
l Currently pin to an existing point/vertex, or to the midpoint between two other points.
l Face and Edge point connections have been added.
l You can now box-select Points
l Pinned Datum Points now store their latest location to ensure proper placement if the pin ref-
erence becomes invalid by deletion or geometry change.
l 3D Datum Points can now be moved with the Move tool if they are not pinned.
l When you Bend a face that has pinned datum points, the points follow the face at a well-
chosen location.
www.SpaceClaim.com 481
Inserting temporary points, axes, and planes
You can create temporary points, axes, and planes while working with other tools. Temporary objects
can be used to dimension to and create other objects. For example, you can use them to create a
ruler dimension, or anchor the Move handle on them.
To clear a temporary object, select the object and press Delete. A temporary object also disappears
when you click in an empty space with the Selection tool or create another temporary object.
For curves: A tangent line and a For solids: A plane that is normal to the view dir-
A point
perpendicular plane. ection (or parallel to the plane of the screen)
Two points 2D and 3D: A midpoint between two points and a bisecting line
Two parallel A line midway between two A line midway between two edges and planes
lines or edges lines (2D) that intersect the edges and the line (3D)
www.SpaceClaim.com 482
Alt+Shift+click: 2D example: 3D example:
Two parallel
(not applicable in 2D) A plane midway between two planes
planes
Two non-par- Two bisecting planes and the edge where the
(not applicable in 2D)
allel planes planes intersect
www.SpaceClaim.com 483
Alt+Shift+click: 2D example: 3D example:
Three planes (not applicable in 2D) The point where the three planes intersect
A conical face The point where the conical face would come to
(not applicable in 2D)
and its axis a point
www.SpaceClaim.com 484
Alt+Shift+click: 2D example: 3D example:
A line or edge
and a point that
2D and 3D: Axis from the point normal to the edge and a second axis parallel to
is not in line
the edge through the point
with the line or
edge
An axis and an
The point at the intersection of the axis and the
intersecting (not applicable in 2D)
plane of the face
face or surface
www.SpaceClaim.com 485
Alt+Shift+click: 2D example: 3D example:
A point and a Plane that is tangent to the face and a point that
(not applicable in 2D)
face or surface is normal to the axis from the face to the point
2D and 3D: A plane through the line or edge, or a plane that is normal to the
A point and a
plane that goes through the point. If a line is chosen at a particular point, then that
line or edge
location on the line can also be used as a point reference.
A line or edge
2D and 3D: Planes that are perpendicular to the face and go through the line or
and a planar
edge.
face
www.SpaceClaim.com 486
Alt+Shift+click: 2D example: 3D example:
www.SpaceClaim.com 487
Linear patterns
Patterns can be made from a mix of object types, such as a pattern of holes (faces) and bolts (impor-
ted components). You cannot create a pattern of threads. You can use the Undo button, Ctrl+Z or
Redo button, Ctrl+Y when creating a pattern.
www.SpaceClaim.com 488
5. Select the Define Pattern tool guide.
6. Select the Create Pattern tool guide, or press Enter, to complete the pattern.
When the pattern is previewed, any members which cannot be created are shown in red.
Members that can be created are shown in blue.
The image below shows the preview for a two-dimensional pattern. For one-dimen-
sional, only the X-direction is displayed. Clicking the arrows flips their direction 180-
degrees.
For through-all cuts, the preview is on the plane closest to the direction reference. For
blind cuts, the preview is on the face of the selected pattern leader.
You can also create one-dimensional linear patterns on cylindrical faces as long as the pattern dir-
ection is either the cylinders axis or parallel to the axis.
In SpaceClaim, any pattern member can be used to modify the pattern after you create it. If the
change cannot be made to all pattern members, the member that cannot change is still part of the
pattern.
When you select a member of a pattern, you will see fields for the pattern count and distances rel-
ative to the member you have selected. Press Tab to move among the dimension and count fields.
www.SpaceClaim.com 489
l Icons next to the patterns dimensions and counts show which will be changed if you change
the value of the highlighted field. The closed lock indicates that a dimension wont change
and the open lock shows you it will change. You can override a lock on a dimension by click-
ing its icon to toggle it between locked and unlocked.
l Dimension or count line placement, arrows, and value fields show you how the pattern will
change if you change the value of a field.
l Your selection determines how changes to the distance and count affect the patterns position.
If you select one member of the pattern, the change is centered on that member. If you select
all pattern members, the change is centered on the entire pattern, with the distance between
members locked by default. You can control which direction the pattern will grow based on
which member you select and which count or distance you change.
l Changing a pattern count in one direction does not change the distance between pattern
members. Instead, the overall distance of the pattern will change. This is indicated by the
closed lock icon.
Patterns of sketch entities and 3D curves are no longer patterns when they change into another
form, such as a surface or solid. For example, if you pattern a C-shaped curve, then it will
remain a pattern when you switch from sketch mode to 3D mode. But if you close off the curve
to make a box before you switch to 3D mode, then the boxes will become surfaces and will no
longer be a pattern.
To quickly increase or decrease the number of pattern members, press Tab until the count
field is highlighted, then hold the Alt key while you press the up or down arrow.
To move a pattern
www.SpaceClaim.com 490
1. Click the Move tool.
2. Select a pattern member to move a linear pattern or the pattern axis to move a circular or arc
pattern.
3. Move the pattern member with the Move handle.
If you move an interior member of a pattern and it is not anchored, all the pattern members
move:
If you move a member at one end of a pattern, the member at the opposite end is anchored
and the pattern is skewed:
If you anchor a different member than the member opposite the direction you are moving,
Move skews the pattern.
If you have a linear pattern in a radial direction and you move an interior member without set-
ting an anchor, then the entire pattern shifts in the selected direction
Use the Up To tool to move a pattern member up to another face or edge. Pattern dimen-
sions (such as Count and Length) display as expected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 491
both directions and is located between two pattern members. The field is highlighted in
blue in the image below.
l Radial patterns: If you select a member of a radial pattern, you can change the angle
between pattern members and the distance from the pattern members to the center of
the pattern.
4. Type a new distance or angle and press Enter.
The spacing between all pattern members will change.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 492
Rectangular pattern
Changing spacing between pattern members changes the pattern's overall length when the length
field isn't locked.
A pattern of sketch objects is no longer a pattern when you switch to 3D mode and the sketched
objects are converted to surfaces.
Sketch curve patterns can propagate in two dimensions. The pattern above contains three squares in
the X direction and two squares in the Y direction.
www.SpaceClaim.com 493
Circular patterns
Patterns can be made from a mix of object types, such as a pattern of holes (faces) and bolts (impor-
ted components). You cannot create a pattern of threads. You can use the Undo button, Ctrl+Z or
Redo button, Ctrl+Y when creating a pattern.
www.SpaceClaim.com 494
Note that a Circular Count of one, in a two dimensional pattern,will create a single radial pat-
tern.
As you switch between pattern types, or change pattern values, the pattern preview displays
your changes in blue.
5. Select the Define Pattern tool guide.
6. Select the Create Pattern tool guide, or press Enter, to complete the pattern.
When the pattern is previewed, any members which cannot be created are shown in red. Mem-
bers that can be created are shown in blue.
The image below shows the preview for a two-dimensional pattern. For one-dimensional, only
the Angular direction is displayed. Clicking the arrows flips their direction 180-degrees.
You can create circular patterns on cylindrical faces, both around the face and along the axis.
In SpaceClaim, any pattern member can be used to modify the pattern after you create it. If the
change cannot be made to all pattern members, the member that cannot change is still part of the
pattern.
When you select a member of a pattern, you will see fields for the pattern count and distances rel-
ative to the member you have selected. Press Tab to move among the dimension and count fields.
l Icons next to the patterns dimensions and counts show which will be changed if you change
the value of the highlighted field. The closed lock indicates that a dimension wont change
and the open lock shows you it will change. You can override a lock on a dimension by click-
ing its icon to toggle it between locked and unlocked.
l Dimension or count line placement, arrows, and value fields show you how the pattern will
change if you change the value of a field.
l Your selection determines how changes to the distance and count affect the patterns position.
If you select one member of the pattern, the change is centered on that member. If you select
all pattern members, the change is centered on the entire pattern, with the distance between
members locked by default. You can control which direction the pattern will grow based on
www.SpaceClaim.com 495
which member you select and which count or distance you change.
l Changing a pattern count in one direction does not change the distance between pattern
members. Instead, the overall distance of the pattern will change. This is indicated by the
closed lock icon.
l Circular patterns are anchored at the opposite end by default when you move one end.
Patterns of sketch entities and 3D curves are no longer patterns when they change into another
form, such as a surface or solid. For example, if you pattern a C-shaped curve, then it will
remain a pattern when you switch from sketch mode to 3D mode. But if you close off the curve
to make a box before you switch to 3D mode, then the boxes will become surfaces and will no
longer be a pattern.
To create a single radial pattern, set the Pattern type to Two-dimensional and enter a Circular
Count of 1.
www.SpaceClaim.com 496
To edit a pattern's properties
1. Select one pattern member to display the pattern count and dimensions.
2. Edit the pattern's properties.
Press Tab to switch between the fields.
Click the lock icon to lock or unlock a value.
3. Press Enter.
The result of editing the count and spacing is relative to the member of the pattern you select.
To quickly increase or decrease the number of pattern members, press Tab until the count
field is highlighted, then hold the Alt key while you press the up or down arrow.
To move a pattern
Use the Up To tool to move a pattern member up to another face or edge. Pattern
dimensions (such as Count and Length) display as expected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 497
This member will serve as the anchor, and other pattern members will move relative to this
member.
3. Press Tab until the field you want to change is highlighted:
l Distance: This field is the overall distance of the pattern. The pattern member you select
is anchored, and the length will change relative to this member. The arrows indicate the
direction of change. You can see this field at the top of the image below.
l Spacing: This field is the spacing between pattern members. This field has arrows in
both directions and is located between two pattern members. The field is highlighted in
blue in the image below.
l Radial patterns: If you select a member of a radial pattern, you can change the angle
between pattern members and the distance from the pattern members to the center of
the pattern.
4. Type a new distance or angle and press Enter.
The spacing between all pattern members will change.
www.SpaceClaim.com 498
The components will be propagated to the pattern, as shown below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 499
Fill patterns
Patterns can be made from a mix of object types, such as a pattern of holes (faces) and bolts (impor-
ted components). You cannot create a pattern of threads. You can use the Undo button, Ctrl+Z or
Redo button, Ctrl+Y when creating a pattern.
When the pattern is previewed, any members which cannot be created are shown in red. Members
that can be created are shown in blue.
www.SpaceClaim.com 500
In SpaceClaim, any pattern member can be used to modify the pattern after you create it. If the
change cannot be made to all pattern members, the member that cannot change is still part of the
pattern.
To move a pattern
If you move a member at one end of a pattern, the member at the opposite end is anchored
and the pattern is skewed:
If you anchor a different member than the member opposite the direction you are moving,
Move skews the pattern.
www.SpaceClaim.com 501
If you have a linear pattern in a radial direction and you move an interior member without set-
ting an anchor, then the entire pattern shifts in the selected direction
Use the Up To tool to move a pattern member up to another face or edge. Pattern dimen-
sions (such as Count and Length) display as expected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 502
Creating offset relationships
Use the Offset tool to create an offset relationship between two faces. This relationship will be main-
tained in the other 2D and 3D editing tools. For example, when you select an offset face with the Pull
tool, the offset dimension is displayed. Baseline faces do not display a dimension.
Tool guides
Within the Offset tool, there are several tool guides that help step you through the editing process:
When the Toggle Baseline tool guide is active, click the faces that you want to be the
baseline of the offset.
www.SpaceClaim.com 503
Example
An offset relationship between two cylindrical faces causes both to change when you change the dia-
meter of either cylinder
www.SpaceClaim.com 504
Shelling a solid
Use the Shell tool in the Insert ribbon group on the Design tab to remove one of the faces of a
solid and create a shell of a specified thickness. You can then use the Shell tool to remove other
sides of the shell. SpaceClaim automatically creates an offset relationship between the sides of the
solid for you.
You can also create a closedshell without removing a face.
Shelled solids can have chamfers and rounds, and the faces can be drafted. The chamfer or rounded
edge will be created and maintained on both offset faces. A shelled solid with a chamfer is shown in
cross-section below.
To create a shell
1. Click the Shell toolin the Create ribbon group on the Design tab.
Mouse over the solids in your design to highlight the faces that could be removed.
2. (Optional) Enter a value into the dimension field to change the thickness of the shell.
Enter a negative number to create the shell thickness from the outside of the solid.
3. Selectthe face you want to remove.
The face is removed and a shell is created. The baseline of the offset is shown in blue. If you
did not change the thickness, the default thickness is set by the minor grid spacing.
4. (Optional) Continue clicking to remove additional faces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 505
To edit a shell
Right-click the shell to change its thickness.
Tool guides
The Remove Facestool guide is active by default. Select a face of the solid to remove it and
create a shell. Ctrl+click to remove multiple faces.
If you create a shell, then add a protrusion onto it, you can extend the shell through the pro-
trusion by clicking the More Shell tool guide, then clicking the newly added protrusion.
The Complete tool guide creates the shell and reactivates the Remove Faces tool guide so
youcancreate another shell.
Examples
Adding and changing a rounded edge on a shelled or offset part changes the inside faces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 506
Creating mirror relationships
Use the Mirror tool in the Insert ribbon group on the Design tab to mirror any geometry that can
be moved with the Move tool. You can insert a mirror plane between two faces, associating the faces
so you can edit them together. You can copy a solid, surface, face, or curve from one side of a mirror
plane to the other.
You can mirror curves, points, and axes without leaving sketch mode or cross section mode. When
you mirror a curve, changing its geometry does not propagate to the other side.
You can mirror solids that contain patterns of features on a face, and the pattern will be updated on
both sides. The pattern must be created before the solid is mirrored.
The plane becomes a persistent mirror once you create geometry using the mirror. The mirror rela-
tionship is maintained when you use other 2D and 3D tools to edit your design.
Mirrored components have a mirrored icon in the Structure Tree and maintain their mirror rela-
tionships when they are exported.
Mirrored objects are created on the same layer as the original object. Mirrored points do not main-
tain their mirror relationship.
To mirror an object
1. (Optional) Create the plane you want to use as a mirror using the Insert Plane tool and position
it with the Move tool.
2. Click Mirror in the Create group.
The Select Mirror Plane tool guide is enabled.
3. Click the plane to use as a mirror.
4. Click the Mirror Body or Mirror Face tool guide.
5. Mouse over the solids or faces in your design to preview the solid, surface, or face that will be
created on the other side of the selected mirror plane.
6. Click the object you want to mirror.
7. The mirror plane is created and will persist in other tools.
You can click objects in your design or click a component in the Structure tree.
www.SpaceClaim.com 507
To remove a mirror face or plane
1. Click Mirror in the Create group.
The Select Mirror Plane tool guide is enabled.
Options
l Merge mirrored objects: When you use a face as the mirror plane, or when the mirror plane
lies on a face of the source object, the two mirrored objects will be merged. Deselect this
option to make a new object, as shown below.
l Create mirror relationships: If you deselect this option, only the geometry is created and not
the mirror relationship. Changes to either object will not be reflected in the other, as shown
below.
You can create a mirror plane between two symmetrical faces in your design.
www.SpaceClaim.com 508
To set up a mirror relationship
1. Click the Mirror tool in the Create ribbon group.
You can create mirror relationships by finding similar faces on the other side of an existing mirror.
Tool guides
Within the Mirror tool, there are several tool guides that help step you through the mirroring pro-
cess:
The Mirror Plane tool guide is active by default. Select a face or plane to use it as a mirror.
(You can also use this tool guide to select another mirror plane to use if one is already selec-
ted.
The Mirror Body tool guide activates automatically once you select a mirror face or plane.
Mouse over the solids in your design to preview the solid that will be created by the mirror.
Click a solid to mirror it.
Once you select a face or plane to use as a mirror, use the Mirror Face tool guide to select
the faces you want to mirror. Mousing over the faces before you click them previews the face
www.SpaceClaim.com 509
that will be created by the mirror. Click a face to mirror it.
The Setup Mirror tool guide can be used any time to create a mirror plane between two
faces. Only those two faces will be affected by the mirror. To create a relationship among
many faces, Ctrl+select faces and then select a mirror plane to auto-detect identical faces
equidistant from the mirror plane.
Use the Remove Mirror tool to remove the mirror relationship between faces. You can select
to faces with a mirror relationship, or use box-selection to select any number of mirrored
pairs.
Examples
A mirrored solid with a pattern of features is updated when the count is changed from 7 to 5 on one
side.
Mirroring a sketched circle. Modifying the circle does not change the geometry of the mirrored
circle.
www.SpaceClaim.com 510
Inserting
You can insert another design created in SpaceClaim or another application as a component of your
design. The design is inserted as an external component, linked to the external file. You can make
this component internal to your own design. Lightweight components are displayed with solid
edges and transparent faces until you right-click the component and select Load component from
the context menu.
You can also insert an image file or a video file.
www.SpaceClaim.com 511
If your design includes multiple copies of an external component, making one of them
internal does not affect the other copies. Making another copy of the same external com-
ponent internal creates a second instance of the same internal component.
www.SpaceClaim.com 512
Orient mesh
The Orient Mesh tool in the Reverse Engineering group of the Insert tab allows you to select
roughly planar areas of triangles or cylindrical areas of triangles to align to the World Origin axes.
To Orient a mesh
1. Open the Prepare tab
2. Click on the Orient Mesh tool
3. Hover over triangles to see a preview of the axis it would align to
4. Select the highlighted triangle
5. The mesh aligns as previewed. The selected triangle is shown in blue. Its normal is aligned to
the Z-axis.
www.SpaceClaim.com 513
6. With each selection, the align-to axisalternates between Z and Y. In the next example, the nor-
mal of the selected triangle (shown in green) aligns to the Y-axis
www.SpaceClaim.com 514
As you hover over triangles, cylindrical areas are detected. The following examples show cylindrical
areas being aligned to the Z-axis.
www.SpaceClaim.com 515
www.SpaceClaim.com 516
www.SpaceClaim.com 517
Extracting curves
The Extract Curves tool creates curves through design mesh cross sections.
To create edges
1. Open the Insert tab.
2. Click Extract Curves in the Manufacturing group of the Insert tab.
3. The Select Section Planes tool guide is active by default.
4. Select one or more planes that intersect the mesh.
5. Click Complete to create the curves.
You can also extract curves by placing a section plane in the mesh.
1. Open the Insert tab.
2. Click Extract Curves in the Manufacturing group of the Insert tab.
3. Click the Select Curve tool guide.
4. Select one or more planes that intersect the mesh.
5. Click in the model to place a section plane.
6. The model is displayed in Sketch Mode.
7. Click Complete to extract All curves from the entire section.
8. Or you can select parts of the section and then click Complete.
www.SpaceClaim.com 518
Curves are created on a section plane placed in the model.
www.SpaceClaim.com 519
Creating a cylinder
Use the Cylinder tool to sketch the cylinder's axis in 2D and create its diameter in 3D.
The sketch grid must be visible in the workspace before you can draw.
If you select a 3D curve or edge before you click the Cylinder tool, the cylinder is created as a swept
pipe.
To draw a cylinder
1. Click Cylinder in the Reverse Engineering group of the Insert tab.
2. (Optional) If you want to dimension the first end point of the axis, press Shift and hover the
mouse over a line or point to create a dimension relative to that line or point.
3. Click or press Enter to set the first end point of the axis.
4. (Optional) Dimension the axis.
5. Click or press Enter to set the other end point of the axis.
By default, the axis is dimensioned to its first end point. You can also press Shift and hover the
mouse over another line or point to create a dimension relative to that line or point.
6. (Optional) Dimension the cylinder's diameter.
7. (Optional) Select options from the Options panel, or right-click and select them from the
mini-toolbar.
8. Click or press Enter to set the diameter of the cylinder.
www.SpaceClaim.com 520
To create a swept pipe
1. Select a 3D curve or edge.
If the curves or edges include angles, a spherical surface is added at the angle. If you use the
Fill tool on the spherical joints, the corners are converted to sharp corners. See the examples
below.
2. Click Cylinder in the Create group on the Design tab or in the Shapes menu of the Insert
tab.
3. Click in the Design window to set the diameter of the cylinder.
Options
The following options are available in the Cylinder tool.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 521
Using the Near-side body only option to add cylinder material only on the near side of a thin place-
ment wall
Creating a swept pipe with the Cylinder tool, then using Fill on the spherical joint to create a sharp
corner
www.SpaceClaim.com 522
Creating a sphere
To create a sphere
1. Select the Sphere tool from the Reverse Engineering group of the Insert tab.
2. (Optional) Click No Merge in the Properties panel if you don't want the sphere merged with
existing bodies.
3. (Optional) Click Cut in the Properties panel to remove material from existing bodies where
they overlap the sphere.
4. Click to set the center of the sphere and the plane in which the sphere's radius is dimensioned.
As you move the mouse, you can see a preview of the sphere. Sphere creation works best
when you move the cursor in the x-y direction of the plane indicated by the first click.
5. Click to set the radius of the sphere.
Options
The following options are available in the Sphere tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 523
Examples
Using the Near-side body only option to add sphere material only on the near side of a thin place-
ment wall
Selecting faces and clicking the Sphere tool to create a sphere, then clicking the Sphere tool mul-
tiple times to enlarge the selected sphere
www.SpaceClaim.com 524
Fit spline
The Fit Spline tool allows you to create a "best fit" spline surface through selected mesh facets.
www.SpaceClaim.com 525
Inserting a standard hole
The Standard Hole tool createsindustry standard drilled and tapped holes. Selectone ofthe avail-
able standards (ISO, UNC, etc.) and then choose from available sizes andspecify other hole
characteristics(Blind, Tapped, Countersink, Counterbore, Drill point details).
The currenthole profile is displayed in thePreview group.It dynamically updates as you define the
hole. There is also a gallery of common hole profiles to choose from.
Hovering over the Preview showsthe hole's definition, as it would appear in a Hole Table.
While choosing a placement location, a preview of the hole opening, including countersink and/or
counterbore, is attached to the cursor.This allows you to view the footprint of the hole as you locate
it.
www.SpaceClaim.com 526
l Choose treatments:
l Blind depth
l Tapped thread depth
l When Tapped is checked, diameter displays tap drill size
l When Tapped is checked, Fit is disabled
l May be determined by Series and Size. If so, you can still enter a different
value. The value you enter will be displayed in bold font to indicate it is
non-standard
l Default thread depth is twice the basic hole diameter
l Note that only the most common Standard Hole sizes have cosmetic display
l Cosmetic threads appear in the Structure tree and can be toggled on/off
l Cosmetic thread depth
l Cosmetic threads are only available for the UNC series
l Cosmetic threads show a thread helix without actual thread geometry
www.SpaceClaim.com 527
l For Blind holes, you can specify a Drill point
l Enter a Drill point angle
l Choose Drill point depth measurement type
l Depth to Shoulder
l Depth to Tip
Preview shows the hole profile based on current selections and values. Shown below is a Blind,
Tapped, Countersunk, and Counterbored hole with Drill point details.
As you work with different inputs, Preview gives visual feedback. Below are examples of what
you would see when entering values for Diameter, Hole Depth, Countersink Angle, and Drill
point Angle.
Preview also has a gallery of profiles to choose from. Click on the Preview image to open the
gallery.
The gallery is a graphical way to define the hole. Selecting a hole from the gallery auto-
matically fills in the details in the ribbon.
www.SpaceClaim.com 528
3. Chooseatool guide for hole placement.
l Snap to Grid
Select a face on which to display the sketch grid. As you move the cursor, the hole cen-
ter will snap to the grid points.
l Free Placement
Pick anywhere on any face to locate the hole center.
6. Complete the hole(s) by clicking Complete. All previewed holes will be completed. You
can also double-click when you place a hole to complete it.
7. Continue to make more holes or leave the Hole toolbar.
8. Click in the Close group to close the toolbar.
www.SpaceClaim.com 529
Hole Series
Hole Size and Fitoptions are determined by which Series you choose.
The examples below show the difference between ISO and UNC. Notice the change in Size nomen-
clature and Fit options. ISO has Fit options of Nominal, Close, Medium, and Free.
l Within each Series, the Size you choose determines the hole diameter
l You can enter a different diameter and it will be shown in Bold to indicate that it is non-
standard
As of SpaceClaim 2014 SP1, the NPS series is replaced by NPSM. Standard Holes created using
NPS in existing models will not be recognized.
www.SpaceClaim.com 530
The XML for this ISO hole size is inthe ISO.xml file. The relevant XML is shown below.
Notice the correspondance between the XML tags and the ribbon inputs.
All dimensions are in millimeters and angles are in degrees.
The image below shows the result of switching to the UNC Series and the 3/4 - 10 Size.
The XML for thisUNC hole size is in theUNC.xml file. The relevant XML is shown below.
l Notice the correspondance between the XML tags and the ribbon inputs.
l All dimensions are ininches and angles are in degrees.
www.SpaceClaim.com 531
The image below shows the values in the XML file show up in a Hole Table created in a drawing.
It is recommended that you customize the series by adding files to the directory.
www.SpaceClaim.com 532
l New files add items to the Series drop-down menu
l Deleting filesor moving them out of the directory removes items from the Series drop-down
menu
The DCZ series is based on UNC by copyingUNC.xml to DCZ.xml and editing the sizes.
l Note the new TapDrill value reflected in the Diameter input and the new Countersink and
Counterbore values.
Drill Chart
Drill chart is a Series based only on Diameter values. It refers to a set ofXML files that contain hole
definition tables. Edit the files to customize the Standard Hole tool.
In the <SpaceClaim loadpoint>\Libraries\Holes\Drills directory, you will find the following files:
l Fraction.xml
l Letter.xml
l Metric.xml
l Number.xml
www.SpaceClaim.com 533
File names refer to how the hole name is specified. Below is an example from Letter.xml.
<Name>A</Name>
<Diameter>0.234</Diameter>
<ImperialDisplay>0.234</ImperialDisplay>
<MetricDisplay>5.94</MetricDisplay>
Hole Selection
SpaceClaim recognizes Standard Holes. Hovering over ahole face will pre-highlight thehole object.
Select individual hole faces using query select.
Deletingany Standard Hole face, or the face it wascreated on,breaks theStandard Hole association.
Individual faces are still selectable, but are not recognized as a Standard Hole.
To edit a Hole
1. Select the hole to modify.
You can also CTRL select, or box-select, several holes that share any of the same parameters.
2. Open the Standard Hole Edit tab. You can also double-click a Standard Hole to open the Edit
tab.
The Edit tab is not available for multiple holes that shareno parameters.
3. Edit the Hole definition.
4. You can continue to select and Edit more holes.
5. To close the Edit tab:
www.SpaceClaim.com 534
l Select a non-hole object
l Click white space in the Design window
l Enter selection for another tool
With a Standard Hole selected, you can use the Reverse Hole option in the context menu to flip the
hole to the opposite side of the part.
www.SpaceClaim.com 535
Identifying holes
Use the Identify Holes tool to identify hole geometryin models imported from other modelers. You
can also use it on models made in SpaceClaim that do not have Standard Hole associations.
To identify holes
1. Click Identify Holesin the Manufacturing group of the Insert tab.
2. In the Find Options panel, choose the types of holes to find
3. Select a body to look for holes.
Holes matching the Find Options are highlighted in red.
4. Click on highlighted holes to create associations. Selected holes change to cyan color.
l Box selection is allowed.
l You can change the Find Options if no holes are found or to find different holes.
l To create associations for all highlighted holes, click the Complete button.
www.SpaceClaim.com 536
Finding Standard Holes
1. Check theMatch standard size option on
2. Choose a Series from the drop-down menu
Any customization to existing series apply
The list of available series reflects any added and removed series
3. Entera Tolerance
Any Standard Holes in the selected Series that are within the tolerance will be identified.
4. Select a body to find holes
5. Click on highlighted holes to create associations. Selected holes change to cyan color.
l Box selection is allowed.
l You can change the Find Options if no holes are found or to find different holes.
l To create associations for all highlighted holes, click the Complete button.
Example:
The block shown below has three holes that matchDCZ Standard holes, but they do not have asso-
ciations.
www.SpaceClaim.com 537
Using Identify Holes, associations are added and the Hole Table updates.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
Use the Select Bodies tool guide to select the body in which to find holes.
www.SpaceClaim.com 538
The Complete tool guide creates hole associations for all holes found.
Options
l Match standard size: Choose the hole series and set a tolerance for comparing the hole geo-
metry to standard hole dimensions. Simple holes within the tolerance of a standard hole in the
series will update to match that hole. See Inserting a standard hole for more detail on standard
sizes.
l Series: Choose one of the available Hole Standards from the Series drop-down menu
l Tolerance: Enter a tolerance value. Any Standard Holes in the selected Series that are
within the tolerance will be identified.
l Allholes: With Match standard size checked Off, this option will find all holes.
l Through-holes: Only finds through holes.
l Blindholes: Only finds blind holes.
l Countersunk: Finds holes with countersink geometry.
l Counterbore: Finds holes with counterbore geometry.
www.SpaceClaim.com 539
Move body
The Move Body tool allows you to selectvertices, edges, or planar faces to snap to the World
Origin.
Snapping means the body is translated to the World Origin such that a point on the selected object
coincides with the origin. The body is not oriented or aligned to the World Origin axes.
www.SpaceClaim.com 540
5. The body is translated to the World Origin depending on what is selected
l Vertex - The vertex is made coincident with the World Origin
l Edge - The endpoint nearest to the World Origin is made coincident with the Origin
www.SpaceClaim.com 541
l Planar Face - Of all the face's edge vertices, the one nearest to the World Origin is made
coincident with the origin
6. When you exit the tool, the World Origin display is toggled OFF, if it was OFF when you
entered the tool
www.SpaceClaim.com 542
Create workpiece
The Create Workpiece tool creates a component containing a solid Box or Cylinder that
encloses a selected body or selected faces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 543
Like other components, with a Workpiece you can:
l Create sub-components underneath itusing RMB > New Component
l Activate it for editing
l Rounding edges
l Adding Draft
l Adding protrusions and cuts
l Etc.
l Open it in a separate window
l Replace it with another component using RMB> Source >Replace
l Make it an external component using RMB> Source >Convert to External
l Make anExternal workpiece Internal usingRMB> Source >Use Internal Copy
www.SpaceClaim.com 544
To create a Workpiece
1. Open the Insert tab.
2. Click Create Workpiece in the Manufacturing group
3. Use the Select tool guide to select a body or use the Select Face tool guide to select faces
l You can select more than one body
l The Workpiece will enclose all selected bodies
4. Make your selection
5. The Workpiece previews
6. (Optional) Choose a Workpiece type
l Box (the default)
l Cylinder
7. (Optional) Change the Workpiece dimensions
l Set the Default cushion - Enter a percentage based on the size of the selection. This
will be the amount of clearance around the selection.
l Choose Symmetric dimensions - Applies symmetry to center the selection in the work-
piece. When checked OFF, you can have uneven clearance around the selection.
8. (Optional) Orient the Workpiece
1. Click the Set Orientation tool guide
2. Select an edge to align the nearest face of the box or the axis of the cylinder
9. Click Complete to create the Workpiece
A finished Workpiece
www.SpaceClaim.com 545
Notes on Workpiece Orientation
l The default orientation is based on the World Origin
l A Box type has walls parallel to the planes of the world origin
l A Cylinder type has its axis aligned to the Z-axis of the World Origin.
l Selecting a line, edge, or axis to orient a box will rotate the box to align one of the workpiece
edges to the selected object
l Selecting an origin to orient the box will transform the box to align its walls with the new ori-
gin
l You can only select a linear object (line, axis, edge, or origin axis) to orient a cylinder
l Orienting a cylinder means aligning its axis with the selected linear object
Orientation example is shown below. Selecting the slanted edge will orient the side of the workpiec
with that edge.
www.SpaceClaim.com 546
The images below show the effects of the Symmetric dimensions option.
On the left the option is ON and on the right it is OFF. When it is on, dimension changes apply to
both side of a plane of symmetry.
When it is off, dimensions can be changed independently on either side of a plane of symmetry.
www.SpaceClaim.com 547
For a cylinder, symmetric dimensions apply to the ends of the cylinder.
Once a workpiece is completed, you can incorporate subsequent design changes using RMB >
Update Workpiece.
Select workpiece in Structure Tree then RMB > Update Workpiece
www.SpaceClaim.com 548
Tool Guides
The Select tool guide is active by default. When active, selecting any face will select the
entire body.
Use theSelect Facetool guide to select faces to surround with the Workpiece.
The Set Orientation tool guide asks you to select an edge. A box workpiece will align the
nearest side to yhe edge. A cylinder workpiece will align its axis to the edge.
Create the workpiece
www.SpaceClaim.com 549
Creating curves from edges
Curves are created on all edges of a selected body using the Edges tool.
To create edges
1. Open the Insert tab.
2. Click Edges in the Manufacturing group.
3. Curves are created on all edges of the body.
www.SpaceClaim.com 550
Deburring toolpath
The Deburring Toolpath tool creates an offset curve profile representing the center of a tool tra-
versing a set of edges.
A burr is a raised edge, or small pieces of material, that remain along the edges of a part after some
type of creation or modification process. Burrs are often undesirable and are removed by a
deburring process.
www.SpaceClaim.com 551
Turn profile
The Turn Profile tool creates curves that trace the path of a tool bit during a turning operation. Turn-
ing is a machining operation in which the workpiece rotates while the tool bit moves linearly.
The Turn Profile tool is available for parts that are:
l Cylindrical
l Conical
l Spherical
l Toroidal
To create edges
1. Orient the part with the Z-axis along the axis of rotation.
Typically, this would be like the image above.
2. Open the Insert tab.
3. Click Turn Profile in the Manufacturing group.
4. (Optional) Enter a Tool Offset in the Options panel.
5. Select a cylindrical surface to preview the curves.
6. Click Complete to create the curves.
The curves are displayed in the Structure Tree under the Curves folder.
www.SpaceClaim.com 552
Adding edge reliefs
The Relief tool identifies thickness edges at concave corners. Edges found can then have a cylindrical
cutout made to provide relief at the corner.
Multiple pairs of thickness faces in the same body are included.
An example is shown below.
By default, the tool identifies edges that are Interior to the part. The tool Options allow you to look
for External edges as well. An example is shown below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 553
Edges that Do Not go all the way through the thickness of the part are filtered out of the tool. The
example above shows this with the small pocket on the left side of the part.
The size and position of the reliefs placed on the edges can be controlled with the following
options.
l Cut Radius: Controls the size of the relief.
l Clearance: Controls the position of the reliefs by specifying how far the edge of the relief is
from the original edge.
An example is shown below with a solid block inserted into the cutout. The corners of the block rep-
resent the locations of the original edges.
Beginning at the upper left corner and moving clockwise through the four corners the settings are:
1. Radius = 1 mm; Clearance = Default
2. Radius = 1 mm; Clearance = 0 mm
3. Radius = 1 mm; Clearance = 1.5 mm
4. Radius = 1 mm; Clearance = 1 mm
www.SpaceClaim.com 554
To create reliefs
1. Open the Insert tab.
2. Click Relief in the Manufacturing group.
3. If you want to find external edge,s make sure that the Include external corners option is
checked.
4. All thickness edges in concave corners are found and highlighted.
5. click the Exclude Problem tool guide and click on any edges that you do not want to have
relief.
6. In Fix Options, set a Cut Radius and Clearance for the reliefs.
7. Click Complete to create the reliefs.
www.SpaceClaim.com 555
Wrapping geometry
The Wrap tool lets you wrap geometry around a target model. The example below shows both a
solid and a surface wrapped onto a cylinder.
A solid block and a circular surface are wrapped around a cylindrical target body using the Wrap
tool.
Sketched Curves and Notes can also be wrapped around a target body.
www.SpaceClaim.com 556
Sketched Curves and a Note are wrapped around a target body using the Wrap tool.
Layers of solid geometry can be wrapped. Consider a circuit board that is not flat, for example. Com-
ponents layered onto the board need to follow the contours of the board. An example of the final
circuit board is shown below with transparency in the board to show a component underneath.
The starting model for the circuit board is shown below. Notice that the components are at two dif-
ferent heights and they extend beyond the board. The spacing of the solids is based on their prox-
imity to the first selected solid to be wrapped.
www.SpaceClaim.com 557
Components are about to be wrapped onto the contoured board.
The board is selected as the target and the first set of components is selected for wrapping. it
includes a base layer of components and a second layer that rest on top of the first. Notice the start-
ing point indicated by the yellow handles on the right. By default, the handle locations are set to the
shortest distance between the Source and the Target. They can be moved to different locations if
desired. In the image below, the default location is used for the first set of components. The
wrapped locations are previewed in purple.
www.SpaceClaim.com 558
The wrapped component locations are highlighted in purple.
The image below shows the completed wrap for the first set of components.
www.SpaceClaim.com 559
The first set of wrapped components is completed.
The last component gets wrapped underneath the board. Notice how the start point is initially at the
shortest distance. This would distort its spacing relative to the first set of components.
www.SpaceClaim.com 560
The default spacing of the last component.
In order for the component to map too the correct location, an origin is selected as the start point.
This will maintain the original spacing of the component relative to the other components.
www.SpaceClaim.com 561
Using an origin as the start point ensures the proper spacing.
www.SpaceClaim.com 562
8. (Optional) Set the Wrap Options.
l Imprint as edges
l Delete source geometry
9. Click Complete to wrap the selection.
www.SpaceClaim.com 563
Unrolling surfaces
The Unroll tool works on surface bodies with planar, conical, and cylindrical surfaces.
l Like Unfold in Sheet Metal, Unroll flattens all the surfaces based on a single selected surface.
l The result of Unroll is another surface shown in the Structure Tree as "Unrolled".
l You can have multiple unrolled surfaces in the model
To create a Workpiece
1. Open the Insert tab.
2. Select a face.
3. Click Unroll in the Manufacturing group .
The selected face is considered the anchor face for unrolling the remaining faces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 564
Here the cylindrical face was selected and all the other surfaces flatten out from there.
www.SpaceClaim.com 565
Below is an example with two unrolled surfaces built from one surface.
If the Unroll tool fails, faces that cannot be unrolled are highlighted in red.
In this example the red surface was made by blending between two edges rotated from each other.
www.SpaceClaim.com 566
Recall that Unroll works on planar, conical, and cylindrical faces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 567
Downloading TraceParts
SpaceClaim connects youdirectly to the TraceParts Web,where you can choose from millions of
modeled parts. This service is free of charge with a valid SpaceClaim license.
www.SpaceClaim.com 568
Downloading CADENAS models
You can access and download models from the CADENAS website. Unlike TraceParts, you cannot
insert CADENAS models directly into SpaceClaim.
Using the CADENAS 3D Models button in the Catalog Parts group of the Insert tab, you to access
their website, where you can select and download files onto your computer. You can download mod-
els in any of their supported formats.
www.SpaceClaim.com 569
Inserting an image
You can insert an image into your design or onto a drawing sheet. Inserted images and their trans-
parency colors, aspect ratio, and placement information are saved with the design.
After you insert an image, you can select the image to display control handles for image editing. The
control handles highlight when moused over and selected. If Show cursor arrows is selected in
SpaceClaim Popular Options, arrows also appear next to your cursor that indicate the directions in
which you can move your mouse to manipulate the image.
When placing the image, all the normal orientation shortcuts work, as well as Ctrl+Alt dragging the
middle mouse button to scale/zoom the image itself. This keyboard shortcut provides an way to
quickly scale the image to the size of the face.
When you insert an image with the File tool and wrap it onto a face with the Place Wrapped Image
tool guide:
l You can select Location, Size or Location and Size from the Lock property to prevent changes
to the size and location of an image wrapped to a face.
l You can select both inserted and wrapped images.
l Once you select a wrapped image, you can drag it around the face it is wrapped onto, resize it,
and rotate it with the image control handles.
l Multiple images can be wrapped onto the same face or surface.
l Images wrapped onto a face or surface move with the face or surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 570
To insert an image
1. Select Picture from the Illustrations group of the Insert tab.
2. Select the BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG, or TIF image file you want to insert and click Open.
You can select Image files from the Files of type drop-down menu to filter the files list.
3. (Optional) Zoom the image in or out by Ctrl+Alt+dragging with the middle mouse button.
4. Mouse over the design to align the image with the highlighted object.
To place an image on a curved face, select the Place Wrapped Image tool guide if you want
the image to flow over the curved face. Otherwise, the image will be placed tangent to the
curved face. You may also use this tool guide to place a wrapped image on a planar face. The
edges of the image are clipped to accommodate the size and shape of the planar face.
5. Click on the face that defines the plane on which you want to insert the image. You can place
an image on a datum plane.
The image appears in the Structure tree. The images name is based on the file name from
which the image was created. Removing or altering the image in SpaceClaim does not affect
the original file.
To re-size an image
Select the image and drag the blue control handles.
Hold the Shift key to maintain the aspect ratio while resizing. Hold the Alt key to scale the image
around the center handle.
You can right-click the image and select Properties to lock the aspect ratio in the Keep aspect ratio
property in the Properties panel.
To rotate an image
Drag the green control handle at the top of the image to rotate the image.
You can also drag the red control handle which is not connected to the image edge to change the
center of rotation.
www.SpaceClaim.com 571
To flip an image
Drag handle across the other side of the image to flip the image.
To replace an image
1. Right-click the image.
2. Select Replace image.
To copy an image
1. Select the image.
2. Press Ctrl and drag the image to create a copy of the image.
To copy and paste an image, see Cutting, copying, and pasting.
www.SpaceClaim.com 572
You can use the zoom slider to resize the image and you can drag to pan the image within the
window.
The color you selected appears in the drop-down next to the eyedropper icon. You can add
multiple transparent colors by repeating this process, and remove colors by clicking Delete
Selected Color or Delete All Colors icons. The image window previews the image with the
transparency you selected.
To lock an image
Set the Lock property to Location, Size, or Location and Size.
The image cannot be edited while it is locked depending on the option set. Set Lock property to No
to unlock.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
Place Wrapped Image wraps an image onto a non-planar surface or face. Images are clipped
to accommodate the size and shape of the face the image is being placed on.
www.SpaceClaim.com 573
Inserting video
You can insert WMV and AVI video files in your design. Videos can be inserted on curved or planar
faces, and can be played from within SpaceClaim.
Videos are added to the Structure tree. If you place a video on a face or surface, you will still see the
video if you hide the face or surface.
To insert a video
1. Select Video from the Illustrations group of the Insert tab.
2. Select Video files for the file type.
3. Select the video file and click Open.
4. Position the video:
Select the Place Planar Image tool guide to put the video on a planar face or a plane.
Select the Place Wrapped Image tool guide to put the video on a curved face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 574
To play a video
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
www.SpaceClaim.com 575
Combining
The Combine tool is used to make combinations of objects. You can add (or merge) objects
together and you can subtract (or split) objects from each other. These actions are also known as
Boolean operations.
Tool guides for the Combine tool are sticky, and appear with a double outline when you click them.
The tool guide remains selected so you can perform the same action repeatedly without holding the
Ctrl key. To unstick a tool guide, click it again, click another tool guide, or click an empty place in the
Design window.
When you use a pattern with the Combine tool, the entire pattern is merged or used to cut the tar-
get.
www.SpaceClaim.com 576
4. Select one or more object to use as the cutter.
Depending on the option you chose, the cutting surface will be kept or deleted. You can see
the solids or surfaces created by the cut in the Structure panel.
Move your mouse over the target solid to see the regions created by the cut.
5. (Optional) Select the split region(s) that you want to delete.
1. Click Combine.
2. Select the target solid or surface.
You can select objects for Combine in the structure tree. If you select a component, all objects
belonging to that component will be selected. You can also box select multiple solids or sur-
faces to merge them in one operation.
Solids can be merged with solids, and surfaces with surfaces. Solids and surfaces can only be
merged if the surfaces make a region that can be added to or cut out of the solid.
3. Click the Select Bodies to Merge tool guide or hold the Ctrl key.
4. Select the solid(s) or surface(s) that you want merged with the target.
Do it faster
Hold Ctrl and select the solids or surfaces you want to combine, and then click the Combine tool to
merge them.
1. Click Combine.
2. Select the target solid or surface.
Tool guides
Tool guides for the Combine tool are sticky, and appear with a double outline when you click them.
The tool guides remain selected so you can perform the same action repeatedly without holding the
Ctrl key. To unstick the tool guide, you can click it again, click another tool guide, or click an empty
place in the Design window.
www.SpaceClaim.com 577
The Select Target tool guide is active by default. If you did not pre-select the target solid or
surface, you can select it from within the Combine tool using the Select tool guide.
Click the Select Bodies to Merge tool guide to select multiple solids or surfaces to merge
together.
The Select Cutter tool guide activates once you select a target. When this tool guide is act-
ive, click to select the solid or surface you want to use to cut the target. You can Ctrl+click
when this tool guide is active if you need to add other bodies to your cutter selection.
The Select Regions tool guide activates once the target is cut. When this tool guide is active,
mouse over the target to preview the regions created by the cut. Click a red region to delete
it.
Options
The following options are available for the Combine tool. Select one or more of these options from
the Options docking panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-toolbar:
l Make solids: Solids are made when possible where the target and cutter objects intersect.
When you select this option, you can choose any of the following:
l Merge when done: Select this option to merge all newly-created, touching solids or sur-
faces when you exit the Combine tool. You can also clickon white space anywhere in
theDesign window to complete the merge.Hidden objects are not merged. This saves
you the extra step of selecting all the cut-up regions after you are done with a com-
plicated slice-and-dice session, and manually merging them all back together.
l Keep cutter: SpaceClaim assumes that you created a cutter object to be used only for
cutting. If you want to keep the cutting surface in your design, select this option. If this
option is not selected, then the cutting surface is automatically deleted as soon as you
select it. In other words, cutter objects are normally "used up" unless you select this
option. A kept cutter can be a surface or solid, but either way only the regions of the tar-
get can be removed.
If you are splitting surfaces, check this option to prevent the cutter object from being
split by the target object.
This option is automatically selected if the cutter object is locked.
l Make all regions: Select this option to cut the target object with the cutter object and
the cutter object with the target object. Target and cutter must be the same type of
object, either both solids or both surfaces. Because this option can create a large num-
ber of regions, it can be helpful to use this option along with the Merge When Done
www.SpaceClaim.com 578
option to quickly merge all remaining regions when you click another tool or press
Enter to finish using Combine.
l Make curves: Select this option to make 3D curves where the target and cutter object inter-
sect. The curves are created in the active part, rather than the part that the first body belongs
to.
l Imprint curves: Select this option to create edges at intersections instead of creating
3D curves. You will not be able to preview regions for deletion. As soon as a region is
selected for deletion, this option is disabled. The edges are created on the first body
you select.
l Extend intersections: Select this option to extend the intersection of partially intersecting sur-
faces so the underlying surface is completely split.
Examples
You can use Combine to cut or merge coincident surfaces. (The delete region step is not shown in
the first illustration.)
www.SpaceClaim.com 579
Intersecting
You can use the intersect tools to merge and split a solid or surface in your design with another solid
or surface. You can merge and split solids or surfaces with other solids or surfaces, split a solid with a
face, and split a face with another face. You can also project the edges of a face onto other solids
and surfaces in your design.
SpaceClaim's intersection capabilities include the full suite of geometry combination, all done with
one major tool (Combine) and two minor ones (Split Solid and Split Face). Combine always takes
two or more objects. The split tools always act on one object and that object is automatically selec-
ted from the cutter or projection face.
To understand what the Combine tool can do, the first step is to know which objects can be handled.
Solid objects have faces that meet at corner edges. Edges that lie on faces can be deleted, but
corners cannot. Surface objects have faces that come together at internal edges, and are surrounded
by outside edges. Outside edges can be extended. Internal edges can be deleted if they are
bounded by planar faces. For the purposes of combine, planes can be thought of as surface faces
that extend across the design.
When surfaces enclose a volume, they automatically change into solid objects. When edges of the
same surface become coincident, they will automatically merge. Planes cannot be split by any com-
bine operation, but they can be used to split with. In general, layer, color, and visibility in the struc-
ture tree propagates from the first selected item (the target) to the result. What happens as a result
of the combination can be overridden with the options (both in the panel and the mini-toolbar).
When you use the Combine or Split tools, the newly created objects have the layer properties of the
previous objects.
You have complete control over the pieces that solids and surfaces get cut into. When appropriate,
SpaceClaim prompts you to remove regions, but you can choose to keep or remove those regions.
When using the intersect tools, the original, individual layers and colors of the objects are main-
tained.
Use the Combine tool to merge and split solids and surfaces.
Use the Split Solid tool to split a solid by one or more of its faces or edges. Then select one
or more regions for deletion.
Use the Split Face tool to create an edge on a face by splitting it with another face or surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 580
Use the Project to Solid tool to create edges on a solid's face by extending the edges of
another solid or surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 581
Merging solids and surfaces
1. Select the Combine tool from the Intersect ribbon group or press I.
2. Click the first solid or surface.
3. Ctrl+click additional solids or surfaces to merge them.
The Structure tree shows the merge.
Ctrl+click the solids or surfaces you want to combine in the Structure tree, then click the Com-
bine tool to merge them.
Solids can be merged with solids, and surfaces with surfaces. Solids and surfaces can only be merged
if the surfaces make a region that can be added to or cut out of the solid. For example, if you select
the face of a cylinder, copy and paste it, then you can merge it with the solid used to create it.
www.SpaceClaim.com 582
Merging solids
You can merge two or more solids with the Combine tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 583
l When more than two bodies are selected, all instances that are consumed by the Merge are
made independent. Those that are not merged are left as instances. The merge result is in the
first non-instanced body of the selection.
l When all the bodies in an instance of a component are merged, the merged body is made in
that component. The component is Not made independent.
l If all bodies of a component are consumed by the Merge, the empty components are now
removed.
www.SpaceClaim.com 584
Merging surface protrusions
www.SpaceClaim.com 585
Merging surfaces
You can merge surfaces with the Combine tool. Surface must share edges to be merged. If surfaces
enclose a volume, you can use the Combine tool to quickly convert the enclosed volume into a solid
and trim the extra.
Sometimes, if you manipulate a surface so that it becomes self-intersecting, you may need to create
a solid from the surface that remains.
www.SpaceClaim.com 586
To repair a self-intersecting surface
1. Click the Select tool in the Edit ribbon group.
2. Double-click the edge loops.
3. Click the Combine tool.
Examples
Six surfaces enclosing a volume, box-selected and combined with the Combine tool
www.SpaceClaim.com 587
Ctrl+click to select an open edge loop of a surface, then close the surfaces with the Combine tool
www.SpaceClaim.com 588
Merging a surface and a plane
www.SpaceClaim.com 589
Splitting bodies and surfaces
1. Click the Combine tool from the Intersect ribbon group or press I.
2. Select thebody or surface you want to cut.
The Select Cutter tool guide is activated.
3. (Optional) Control the behavior of the cut by selecting options.
4. Click the surface you want to use to cut the body.
Depending on the option you chose, the cutting surface will be kept or deleted. Review the
information in the Structure panel to see thebodies or surfaces created by the cut.
Mouse over the targetbody to see the regions created by the cut.
5. Click each region you want to delete.
When you are finished selecting the areas to be deleted, click the Select Target tool guide to
combine some more, or select another tool.
If you want to split a body by a face of the body, select the SplitBody tool.
If you want to create an edge on a face, select the Split Face tool.
To split the target object with the cutter object and the cutter object with the target object
1. Select the Combine tool from the Intersect ribbon group.
2. Select the Make all regions option.
3. Click the objects you want to cut.
Target and cutter must be the same type of object, either bothbodies or both surfaces.
4. Mouse over the surface to see the regions created by the cut.
Because this option can create a large number of regions, we recommend using this option
along with the Merge When Done option to quickly merge all remaining regions when you
click another tool or press Esc to finish using Combine.
5. Click the region you want to delete.
www.SpaceClaim.com 590
Example
Using two surfaces as the cutter, when the surfaces can't be merged outside of the region where
they intersect the target. The two surfaces are merged to create a cut in the target.
www.SpaceClaim.com 591
Splitting a solid
Use the Combine tool to split solids. Solids can be split by surfaces, planes, and other solids.
www.SpaceClaim.com 592
5. Click the region you want to delete.
The regions you can delete are highlighted in red.
www.SpaceClaim.com 593
Using the split body tool
l "Fast mode" automatically activates tool guides and moves you through the workflow. This
predictive mode allows you to box-select multiple cutters to add even more efficiency.
You can select a body or surface from the Structure tree as the target and a plane from the Structure
tree as the cutter.
When splitting with a plane passing through the entire body, some cuts may not be desired. Use the
Local Slicing option to gain specific control over which cuts are applied.
Select a face with the Select tool, then select the Split Body tool to cut the body with the face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 594
To selectively split a body:
1. Click the Split Body tool in the Intersect group on the Design tab
2. Select the body
3. Check ON the Local Slicing option
4. Click the cutter plane; you will see a blue outline which previews local slicing locations for
splitting the body
5. Click on a blue outline preview to cut the body; the Select Regions tool guide is then activ-
ated however, holding the Ctrl key or clicking the Select Cuts tool guide allows you to create
additional cuts
6. Click a region to delete it
If you need to make multiple cuts on the same target body, manually click the Select Cuts tool
guide to make it sticky before step 5.
Tool guides
Within the Split Body tool, there are several tool guides that help step you through the splitting pro-
cess:
The Select Cutter tool guide is active by default. When this tool guide is active, click to
select the face you want to use to cut the body.
The Select Cuts tool guide activates when the Local Slicing option is selected. Possible cuts
are highlighted where the plane intersects the body. Mouse over the cuts to highlight them
for selection.
The Select Regions tool guide activates once you once the body is cut by the face. When this
tool guide is active, mouse over the target to see the regions created by the cut. The regions
you can delete are highlighted in red.
www.SpaceClaim.com 595
Options
The following options are available in the Split Body tool. Once you select the edge or face to pull,
select these options from the Options docking panel, or right-click and select them from the mini-
toolbar:
Merge Select this option to merge all touching bodies or surfaces when you exit the Split
when done Body tool. Hidden objects are not merged.
Extend
Extends the selected cutter face to cut through the target body.
faces
Select this option with the Select Cuts tool guide to choose specific cuts made by a
Local Slicing
plane passing through the entire body.
Example
www.SpaceClaim.com 596
Splitting a face
Example
www.SpaceClaim.com 597
To split a face with another face or plane
1. Click the Select Cutter Face tool guide.
2. Mouse over the faces and planes in your design to preview the edge that will be created on
the target.
3. Click the face or plane to split the selected face with an edge.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 598
Previewing edges that can be created using the Select Cutter Point and Select Two Cutter Points tool
guides
Splitting multiple faces with the Select Two Cutter Points tool guide
To split a face using a perpendicular line from a point on an edge
1. Click the Select Perpendicular Cutter Point tool guide.
2. Click a point on an edge.
3. Mouse over edges of the face to preview the edges that will be created.
www.SpaceClaim.com 599
4. The distance and percentage along the edge is displayed. You can Press the Space bar and Tab
key to change these values.
5. The Select Results tool guide is now active, so you can click edges that you don't want to
keep, as shown on the left of the image below. The result after the two straight edges have
been removed is shown on the right.
Tool guides
Within the Split Face tool, there are several tool guides that help step you through the splitting pro-
cess:
The Select Target tool guide is active by default. If you did not pre-select the target face or
surface, you can select it from within the Split Face tool using the Select tool guide. Ctrl+click
multiple surfaces or solid faces in the same plane to split them all.
The Select Cutter Face tool guide activates once you select a target. When this tool guide is
active, click to select the face or surface you want to use to create an edge on the target.
The Select UV Cutter Point tool guide activates once you select a target. Mouse over an
edge to preview the new edges that will be created. Click to create the edge on the selected
face. You can mouse over an edge with this tool guide to display and edit the length along
the edge, and the percentage of the edge that is between the first point and the end point.
The Select Perpendicular Cutter Point tool guide activates once you select a target. Select
an edge to preview where the perpendicular split will be made. Click to create the edge on
the selected face. The face is split perpendicular to the edge you select.
www.SpaceClaim.com 600
The Select Two Cutter Points tool guide activates once you select a target. Click to select
the first point on an edge, then mouse over another edge to preview the new edge that will
be created. Click to create the edge on the selected face. The shortest line is drawn between
the two points. You can mouse over an edge with this tool guide to display and edit the
length along the edge, and the percentage of the edge that is between the first point and the
end point.
Select the Select Results tool guide, then click newly created edges to remove any edges
you don't want to keep.
Options
The following option is available in the Split Face tool:
Make Curves Select this option to create sketch lines instead of splitting the face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 601
Splitting a surface
Use the Combine tool to split solids. Surfaces can be split by solids, planes, and other surfaces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 602
Removing material from a solid
Use the Combine tool to remove material from a solid based on the intersection of a solid or sur-
face. You can remove the material defined by a surface that forms a depression, or remove a solid
completely enclosed within another solid.
www.SpaceClaim.com 603
Projecting to a solid
Use the Projecttool to create edges on a solid's face by extending the edges of another solid, sur-
face, sketch, or note text.
When you project onto a face, the tool makes a new surface to hold the projected edges, if possible.
www.SpaceClaim.com 604
guides you use.
6. Click the Complete tool guide or press Enter to project the edges.
Projecting points
Sketched 3D Points can also be projected onto surfaces using the Project tool. The projected points
are created as Datum Points so that they can be pinned.
In the example below, points were sketched to trace out the shape of a mouse button and then pro-
jected down onto the top surface of the mouse. The workflow is the same as projecting Faces, Sur-
faces, Curves, Edges, or Note Text.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Curves tool guide allows you to select the curves you want to project.
The Select Direction tool guide allows you to select the direction in which the curves will be
projected. If you don't use this tool guide, the curves will be projected in both directions.
The Select Target Faces tool guide allows you to select the face(s) that the curves will be pro-
jected upon.
The Complete tool guide projects the edges.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Project
Project the edges on all faces through the entire solid instead of just the faces closest
through
to the object you project.
solids
Project sil-
Projects the outline, or silhouette, of a part. You must set the direction using the Select
houette
Direction tool guide.
edge
www.SpaceClaim.com 605
Extend
projected Extend the projected curves to the edge of the face(s) they are projected on.
edges
Extend
Extend the target face when the projected face is larger than the target. See the
target
example below.
faces
Wrap Projects a planar object, text, or note onto cylindrical or multiple planar faces and
around wraps it around the faces. This option also works for conical surfaces and over target
target tangent face boundaries.
Examples
Projecting a sphere onto a planar face. Because a sphere has no edge to project, you must choose
Project silhouette edge in the Options panel.
Projecting an edge with the Extend target faces option enabled. The rectangular face was chosen
with the Select Target Faces tool guide.
www.SpaceClaim.com 606
Wrappinga planar object and text onto cylindrical faces with the Wrap around target option.
www.SpaceClaim.com 607
Working with components
Components are shown in the Structure tree on the Structure panel. All the objects in the Structure
tree are contained within a top-level design component (Design1 in the figure below.) This top-
level component is created automatically when you first save your design.
You must create any other components yourself. Once you have created a component, the icon
changes to show that the top-level design is now an assembly.
To create a component
You can do any of the following in the Structure tree to create a component:
l Right-click any component and select New Component from the context menu to create a
new component within that component.
l Right-click an object and select Move to New Component to create a component within the
active component and move the object into it. If the object has a custom name, the new com-
ponent will have the same name.
l Ctrl+click multiple objects, then right-click and select Move Each to New Components from
the context menu to create a new component for each object within the active component
and move the objects into those components. If the object has a custom name, the new com-
ponent will have the same name.
An annotation plane with dimensions cannot be moved to a component because the ref-
erences would be lost.
To activate a component
Activating a component allows you to work with the objects within that component.
www.SpaceClaim.com 608
Right-click the component the Structure tree and select Activate Component from the context
menu.
If the component is lightweight, it is also loaded. As you design, any new objects you create are cre-
ated within this component.
You can right-click on an object in the design window and select Load Component.
Copy:
1. Select the component.
2. Click the Copy tool in the Clipboard group on the Design tab or press Ctrl+C.
Paste:
1. Copy or Cut a component.
2. Activatethe component into which you want to Paste the component.
l Activating the top-level design will create a first-level component.
l Activating a component with no sub-components creates a sub-assembly of the active
component and the pasted component.
l Activating a component with sub-components adds the pasted component to the first
level of the sub-assembly.
3. Click the Paste tool in the Clipboard group on the Design tab or press Ctrl+V.
Copied components are Dependent by default. There are two ways to make copied components
Independent.
l To paste the component, use RMB > Paste > Independent.
l After pasting, select the component and use RMB>Source>Make Independent.
www.SpaceClaim.com 609
To mirror a component
1. Click on the Mirror tool in the Design tab Insert group.
2. Select a mirror plane.
3. Select the component to mirror.
To rename a component
Components have a part name and a component name. The part name is displayed in the Structure
tree next to the component icon. The component name is shown in parentheses next to the part
name.
To change a component's part name, right-click the component in the Structure tree and select
Rename from the context menu.
To change a component's component name, select the component in the Structure tree and modify
the Component Name value in the Name section of the Properties panel.
To change the top-level component's display name, select the top-level component in the Structure
tree andmodify theDisplay Name in the Name section of the Properties panel.
To delete a component
Right-click a component and select Delete Empty Components from the context menu to delete
any empty subcomponents within the component. If the component itself is empty, or contains only
empty sub components, it is also deleted.
www.SpaceClaim.com 610
Internal and external components
Internal components
Objects that are inside of the SpaceClaim document file are internal components. Components you
create in the Structure tree are internal by default.
You can convert an internal component into an external component. This creates a separate file for
the component and makes it external. See the instructions below.
You can create an internal copy of an external component. This integrates the component into your
design, and removes the association to the external component.
External components
Objects that are outside of the SpaceClaim document file are external components. Designs that
you load using the File tool on the Design tab are external. See Inserting another design.
You can make a copy of an external component internal. The copy will be included in the .scdoc file
so it can be viewed and modified in your design. The original external component will not be
changed. See the instructions below.
If you have the Use lightweight assemblies option selected in the File import and export options,
external components will be loaded as lightweight components. See Lightweight components.
www.SpaceClaim.com 611
l Making another copy of the same external component internal creates a second instance of
the same internal component. You will be asked to save the new external component when
you exit SpaceClaim if you haven't saved it.
l Making an external subcomponent independent makes its parent component independent.
l Independent status is propagated up through the structure as far as needed to differentiate
the subassembly from peer assemblies. Names are changed accordingly.
l Independent status is not propagated down through the structure.
Examples
The structure of a design with copied subassemblies is shown below. Copies of the
wheelAxleAssembly subassembly (highlighted) exist in both suspension assemblies:
When we make the highlighted sub-assembly independent, the sub-assembly names are changed.
The names of the components are the text not in the parentheses. The change affects
wheelAxleAssembly and its parent; both names have a 2 appended in the image below:
www.SpaceClaim.com 612
To insert a component or assembly
If you want to save the document in a different folder or with a different name:
1. Right-click the component and select Open Component from the context menu.
The selected component appears in a new Design window.
2. Select Save As from the File menu. (DO NOT check the Save as copy box.)
3. Browse to select the folder where you want the document saved or create a new folder.
4. Type a file name.
5. Click OK.
Whichever method you use, the component is saved as a separate file and its icon in the Structure
tree changes to reflect that the component is now external.
If the design has not been saved, you will be prompted to choose a folder no matter which
method you use.
www.SpaceClaim.com 613
To make a copy of an external component internal
1. Select one or more components in the Structure tree.
2. Right-click on the component and hover over the Source option then select Use Internal
Copy from the context menu.
The selected component is copied into your design. Any changes you make to the component
do not affect the original, external file.
3. Use Internalize All to make all external components in the design internal.
www.SpaceClaim.com 614
Lightweight components
If you have the Use lightweight assemblies option selected in the File import and export options,
external components will be loaded as lightweight components. Only the component's graphic
information is loaded.
A lightweightassembly component uses lessmemorythan an object that is fully loaded.You
canquickly view the component with the Orient tools. When you are ready to work with it in
SpaceClaim, you canload the geometry information.
See also Displaying lightweight components and Internal and external components.
www.SpaceClaim.com 615
Assigning assembly conditions
Assembly tools allow you to create conditions between components. These conditions constrain the
components so they can't be moved in ways that violate the condition. The animated example
below shows two components that are constrained with a tangent condition. For example, imagine
two cylindrical components (one large and one small) that are constrained with a tangent condition.
The large cylinder can be moved vertically without moving the small cylinder, but both cylinders
move if either is rotated because tangency must be maintained.
Click to replay
Assembly conditions are created in the Structure tree and have the same icon as the tool. You can
click on the assembly condition to highlight the faces that share the relationship.
You can create multiple assembly conditions for your components and you can toggle them on or
off, or delete them, in the Structure tree. If your components don't fit together the way you expect,
try clicking the checkbox next to the assembly condition in the Structure tree to turn it off. An
assembly condition that cannot be satisfied is indicated with a different icon.
When you use the Move tool to move a component that is constrained to have only one degree of
freedom, the direction of the degree of freedom is automatically active for the Move handle.
See the printable Assembly constraints reference chart for descriptions of the constraints created
between different combinations of geometry.
Objects must belong to different components for assembly conditions to be assigned. Com-
ponents can be mirrored.
www.SpaceClaim.com 616
To select all assembly conditions
Click Select all conditions in the Options panelwhen an assembly tool is enabled.
You can also select a single assembly condition in the Structure tree and press Ctrl+A.
Aligns two faces so they are tangent or aligns a face tangent with a line, point, or
Tangent
plane. Possible face types include planes, cylinders, spheres, and cones.
Aligns two points, lines, planes, or combination of these elements. If you select a cyl-
Align indrical or conical face, then the axis is used. If you select a spherical face, then the
center point is used.
Orient Rotates components so the selected elements are oriented in the same direction.
Rigid Locks the orientation and position of two components to each other.
Constrains two objects so one of the objects rotates in response to the rotation of the
Gear other object. Gear conditions can be created between two cylinders, two cones, a cyl-
inder and a plane, or a cone and a plane.
Anchor Locks the position of a single component in 3D space.
www.SpaceClaim.com 617
Making objects tangent
The Tangent tool enables if a model isloaded, and italigns two faces so they are tangent or aligns a
face tangent with a line, point, or plane. Possible face types include planes, cylinders, spheres, and
cones.
See the printable Assembly constraints reference chart for descriptions of all assembly con-
straints.
Click to replay
You can use the Tangent tool to move objects without assigning assembly conditions. If the
objects belong to different components,uncheck Create conditions in the Assembly Options
panel before moving.
www.SpaceClaim.com 618
Do it faster
Hold Ctrl and selectthe component that you want to move and the component that you want to
remain stationary, then click Tangentin the Assembly group on the Design tab.
Tool guides
The Reference tool guide allows you to select the component to remain stationary.
www.SpaceClaim.com 619
Aligning objects
The Align tool enables if a model isloaded, and italigns two points, lines, planes, origins, or com-
bination of these elements. If you select a cylindrical or conical face, then the axis is aligned. If you
select a spherical face, then the center point is aligned. You can define a ball joint assembly con-
dition using Align by selecting the face of the ball and then the face of the socket. The ball rotates
within the socket no matter where you place the move handle on the ball part.
See the printable Assembly constraints reference chart for descriptions of all assembly con-
straints.
Click to replay
You can use the Align tool to move objects without assigning assembly conditions. If the
objects belong to different components,uncheck Create conditions in the Assembly Options
panel before moving.
To align objects
1. Click Align in the Assembly group on the Design tab.
The Align tool guide is enabled by default.
2. Select an edge or face of the component that you want to move.
You can Ctrl-click to select multipleobjects.
TheReference tool guide is enabled.
3. >Select an edge or face of the component that you want to remain stationary.
The components align. You can control the alignment animationwith the Animate Full Pull
Advanced SpaceClaim option.
The constraint is added to the components in the Structure tree.
Do it faster
Use the Select tool to click the component you want to move, then Ctrl+clickthe component you
want to remain stationary. Then click Align in the Assembly group on the Design tab.
www.SpaceClaim.com 620
To reverse the sense of an align condition
Right-clickan Aligncondition in the Structure tree and select Reverse Sense to align the com-
ponents to the opposite side of the alignment plane.
You can also modify the Reversed value to True or False in the Assembly Condition section of the
Properties panel.
Tool guides
The Reference tool guide allows you to select the component to remain stationary.
www.SpaceClaim.com 621
Examples
Clicking on the Align assembly condition in the Structure tree highlights the faces.
Pulling one face of the aligned pair changes one object and moves the other.
www.SpaceClaim.com 622
Orienting objects
The Orient tool enables if a model isloaded, and it rotates components so the selected elements
are oriented in the same direction.
See the printable Assembly constraints reference chart for descriptions of all assembly con-
straints.
Click to replay
You can use the Orient tool to move objects without assigning assembly conditions. If the
objects belong to different components,uncheck Create conditions in the Assembly Options
panel before moving.
www.SpaceClaim.com 623
Do it faster
Hold Ctrl and selectthe component that you want to move and the component that you want to
remain stationary, then click Orientin the Assembly group on the Design tab.
Tool guides
www.SpaceClaim.com 624
Examples
Orienting two components that have an Align constraint on their axes turns the second part you
select.
www.SpaceClaim.com 625
Making components rigid
The Rigid tool locks the orientation and position of two components to each other.
See the printable Assembly constraints reference chart for descriptions of all assembly con-
straints.
The Rigid tool is enabled when you select appropriate objects that belong to different com-
ponents.
www.SpaceClaim.com 626
Gear conditions
The Gear tool constrains two objects so one of the objects rotates in response to the rotation of the
other object. Gear conditions can be created between two cylinders, two cones, a cylinder and a
plane, or a cone and a plane.
See the printable Assembly constraints reference chart for descriptions of all assembly con-
straints.
The Gear tool is enabled when you select appropriate objects that belong to different com-
ponents.
The animated example below shows how anchoring different parts in the assembly affects the beha-
vior of the gears. First we turned the gray component without anchoring it or the rose components.
Then we anchored the rose component that is highlighted and turned the gray component. Watch
the purple buttons on the rose components to see the difference.
Load GearsExample.scdoc and try it yourself. Try turning on the anchor constraints in the gray or rose
components and then use Move to rotate a component.
www.SpaceClaim.com 627
To reverse the rotation direction of a gear condition
1. Select the Gear condition in the Structure tree.
2. Right-click and select Reverse Rotation Direction.
By default, gears rotate in the opposite direction to the gear turning them. You can reverse this
to simulate a belt or chain drive, in which both gears spin in the same direction.
Examples
Click to replay
www.SpaceClaim.com 628
Anchoring components
The Anchor tool is enabled when you select an appropriate object that belongs to a com-
ponent.
www.SpaceClaim.com 629
Moving parts in an asssembly
You can set up virtual mechanisms by defining mating conditions in your assembly. These rela-
tionships are solved when you move any related part in the assembly.
For example, load the file SliderMechanism.scdoc and move the purple component (Component5)
in the direction of the black arrow shown on the left in the image below.
When you move a component that has a mating condition, the Move handle is positioned at the con-
straint and the axes that are constrained can't be moved. If the assembly constraints only allow move-
ment in one direction, then that direction will be automatically selected. For example, if you move a
component with a Center Axes assembly constraint, the Move handle is positioned on the axis and
you can only move the component in directions that will keep the axes aligned.
You can solve assembly mechanisms by changing ruler dimensions or annotation dimensions, and
they can be saved as groups for modification. The images below show movement of the Slider-
Mechanism assembly that is driven by a change to the annotation dimension.
www.SpaceClaim.com 630
Detailing
You can detail your designs to communicate with others or to submit your designs for review with
the tools on SpaceClaim's Detailing tab. With the detailing tools, you can annotate your designs, cre-
ate drawing sheets, and review changes to designs. You can customize detailing options to conform
to standards or create your own custom style.
Press Esc, then S to end any detailing action and return to the Select tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 631
Annotation
You can annotate your designs, drawings, and 3D markups with notes, dimensions, geometric tol-
erances, surface finish and datum symbols, as well as center marks, center lines, and threads. When
you create annotations that are attached to the objects in your design, they stay attached, even when
you modify those objects using the Design tools. Annotations created on a drawing sheet or 3D
markup slide are part of that sheet or markup only; they do not appear on your design.
Each annotation has properties which you can modify in the Properties panel. When you create the
first annotation, it is scaled so that it will be visible when your design is zoomed to its extents in the
Design window. All other annotations use the same scale.
Use theSelect tool tochoose Using Box, Using Lasso, Using Polygon, or Using Paint to select
the highlighted object.
Use the Note tool to select an annotation plane and enter text onto the plane.
www.SpaceClaim.com 632
Update Annotations Reading Direction flips annotations that are backwards in the current
viewing direction.
Click to display SpaceClaim's detailing options.
Press Esc, then S to end any detailing action and return to the Select tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 633
Creating notes
Use the Note tool to annotate your designs, drawing sheets, and 3D markups. You can use this tool
to create and edit notes. You can also project the note onto a sketch or onto a solid. Place the
annotation plane on one layer and the note on another layer, then turn off layer visibility for the
annotation plane to hide it. You can also create circular note text.
Notes are shown in the Structure Tree. Like curves, Notes can live in datum planes or drawing sheets.
Unlike curves, they do not live directly in a part. So, in a part, you will not see a Notes folder.
To create a note
1. Select the Note tool from the Annotation ribbon group in the Detail tab.
Mouse over the faces of your design to preview the eligible annotation planes. (In Sketch and
Section mode, the sketch grid defines the annotation plane.)
2. Click a face to create the plane on which to place the note.
To create an annotation plane for a cylindrical face, select the cylinder's axis.
If you need to change the annotation plane, right-click and click Select New Annotation
Plane from the context menu and select a new annotation plane.
3. Click to place the note on the plane.
4. Enter the text of the note.
Click in the mini-toolbar to insert a symbol into your note at the cursor location.
Click in the mini-toolbar to insert a dynamic field. Dynamic fields include current values
from a variety of properties.
You can format the note text, and enter the text by cutting, copying, and pasting the text from
other notes or dimension annotations.
5. Adjust the orientation of the note by dragging the rotation handles.
For vertical notes, set the Stacked property to True.
www.SpaceClaim.com 634
To create a note field
Field codes can be included within a note. The text in field codes is variable text; in other words, the
text within a field is tied to code, so if you change a field code in your note or drawing sheet, for
example, a date format, the field automatically updates.
Some field codes are bi-directional; for example, adding the Scale field code to a drawing sheet
enables you to change the scale by editing the note, or, change the scale by changing the value from
the Scale drop-down in the Sheet Setup group in the Detail tab.
1. Click within the text of the note and place the cursor where you want the field to appear.
2. Right-click to display the mini-toolbar.
3. Click in the mini-toolbar to display the Insert Field window.
The Fields tab displays the properties available for insertion. (Document properties are those
that appear in the Properties panel when you click the top-level design in the Structure tree.)
4. Select a value from the Category drop-down to filter the properties displayed in the Fields list.
If you click Selected Object, you can click any object in the Design window or Structure tree to
make its properties available.
If you select Formula, you can enter an expression, and include any numeric fields within the
expression.
5. Click a property in the Fields list.
6. Click the Format tab to format the text within the field.
The formatting options are based on the type of the property value. For example, strings can
be formatted with upper case, lower case, initial capitals, or title case.
7. Click OK to insert the formatted, dynamic field into the note at the cursor location.
If the field is empty, check to make sure that the property you selected has a value by select-
ing the appropriate object and viewing the Properties panel.
www.SpaceClaim.com 635
To copy a note
Ctrl+drag a note to copy it.
You can also do the following:
l Click on a note.
l The note displays inside the text box border.
l Click on the border.
l Press Ctrl+c
l Press Ctrl+v
l The note copy displays below and to the right of the original note.
l If you paste the note on a different sheet, it will paste in the same location as in the original
sheet. It does not paste at the cursor location.
l If you are zoomed in, the note will paste in the center of the view. If there is another note at
that location, the new note will paste below and to the right of that note.
To edit a note
1. Select the note to move, size, or rotate it.
If you select a single note, you can edit, resize, and rotate the note. If you select multiple
notes, you can only move or change formatting.
To move the note box, mouse over the edge of the box until the cursor changes to , then
drag the note.
To size the box containing the note, drag the handles of the note box (the white circles).
To rotate the note, drag the rotation handle (the green circle). Press Shift to snap to angular
increments.
2. Select the text of the note to reformat it.
Click a field to edit it. Changing the value of a string also changes it in the Properties panel.
3. Modify the note's properties in the Properties panel.
www.SpaceClaim.com 636
l Circular Text
l Type - Choose from:
l None
l Clockwise
l Counterclockwise
l Radius -Enter a radius for the note circle.
l Cosmetic
l Space - Choose from:
l Model Space sizes the text based on the actual measurements of the
objects in your design.
l View Space sizes the text based on the view of the design in the Design
window.
l Mirrored - Set this property to True to display the text as if it is seen in a mirror.
l Stacked - Set this property to True to stack the textvertically instead of hori-
zontally.
l Flagnote
l Flagnote is a drop-down menu of border shapes to put around the text.
l Minimum width prevents theborder from resizing automatically to fit the con-
tent of the note.
l Position
l Anchor influences the position and size of a note within a plane. Where you
anchor a note determines the direction that the text will fill the note. For example,
if you select the Left Top position, as you type, the expanded text box flows from
left to right and top to bottom. The choices are:
l Left Top
l Left Bottom
www.SpaceClaim.com 637
l Right Bottom
l Right Top
l Left Center
l Right Center
l Top Center
l Bottom Center
l Center
When moving a note or circular note, the notes anchor (or circular notes
text center) now snaps to an edge, a sketch point, or an axis. Select the
Move tool, and then select the notes red anchor and drag it to an edge,
sketch point, or axis. The red anchor will snap to the notes anchor location
that is closest to the drag point. The Anchor position updates in the Position
group of the Properties panel as you move the anchor to a new location.
www.SpaceClaim.com 638
To align multiple notes
1. Select multiple notes.
2. In the RMB menu, choose from the following:
l Align Lefts - Align the left side of each note box.
l Align Centers - Vertically align thecenter of each note box.
l Align Rights - Align theright side of each note box.
l Align Top Lines - Align thebottom of the first line of text ineach note box.
l Align Middles - Horizontally align themiddle of each note box.
l Align Bottom Lines - Align thebottom of the last line of text in each note box.
l Make Same width -Makeeach note box the same width based on the first note selec-
ted. Some text may be scaled accordingly.
l Make Same Height - Make each note box the same heightbased on the first note selec-
ted. Some text may be scaled accordingly.
l Make Same Size - Make each note box the samesize (height and width)based on the
first note selected. Some text may be scaled accordingly.
l Distribute Horizontally - The space betweeneach note box is distributed evenly hori-
zontally.
l Distribute Vertically -The space between each note box is distributed evenly vertically.
l Remove Horizontal Spacing - The even horizontal spacing is removed and
anysignificant overlap is equalized.
l Remove Vertical Spacing - The evenvertical spacing is removed and any significant
overlap is equalized.
Any notes rotated differently are not affected by the above commands.
www.SpaceClaim.com 639
When notes are attached, moving the parent note moves all the notes as one. However, moving a
child note will move that note individually.
You can attach a note to the note fields of objects created with tools in the Detail tab. For example,
Surface Finish symbols, Welding symbols, Datum Targets, Datum symbols, notes within a Symbol,
and Dimensions are some tools that have note fields. Any notes can be attached to any other notes.
Dimensions, however, can only be parent notes since they are attached to the model.
www.SpaceClaim.com 640
Circular notes
Use the Note tool to create and edit circular Note text. This text type can orient either clockwise
(CW) or counterclockwise (CCW). The circle center is indicated by a cross-hair marker. The circle
radius displays as a visual guideline. Use the size handle to size the circle. You can adjust the ori-
entation of the note by dragging the rotation handle. Enter or change new radius settings in the
Options panel.
1. Select the Note tool from the Annotation ribbon group in the Detail tab.
Mouse over the faces of your design to preview the eligible annotation planes. (In Sketch and
Section mode, the sketch grid defines the annotation plane.)
2. Click a face to create the plane on which to place the note.
To create an annotation plane for a cylindrical face, select the cylinder's axis.
www.SpaceClaim.com 641
If you need to change the annotation plane, right-click and click Select New Annotation
Plane from the context menu and select a new annotation plane.
3. Click to place the note on the plane.
4. Enter the text of the note.
5. In the Properties panel, select Clockwise or Counterclockwise from the Type drop down.
6. Click the fact to update the note.
www.SpaceClaim.com 642
Formatting note text
You can adjust the font, size, style (bold, italic, underline), alignment of the text within the box, and
create superscripts and subscripts using the tools in the Font ribbon group, or by right-clicking the
annotation and selecting from the mini-toolbar.
You change the text characteristics for notes, dimensions, and tables at the same time.
To format text
All text within a note boundary singular or multiple lines of text aligns to the format you set.
1. To change the text formatting for an entire note, dimension, or table, select one or more in
the Design window. Hold Ctrl to select more than one or draw a box in the Design window.
Place your cursor at the location in the text where you want to change the formatting. To
change the text formatting for only some of the text in a note, dimension, or table, select only
the text you want to change.
2. Use the tools in the Font ribbon group to format the text.
To create a superscript or subscript, select a preset amount from the Vertical Text Offset
drop-down, or select Custom and enter a custom amount to raise or lower the text.
www.SpaceClaim.com 643
www.SpaceClaim.com 644
Creating note leaders
Use the Note Leader tool to create an arrow from your note.
www.SpaceClaim.com 645
Underlining note text with a leader
1. Create a Note
2. Enter the Leader tool
3. Attach a Leader to the underline location
4. Complete the Leader
5. Select the Leader
6. RMB > Underline
7. The text is underlined
When you start the leader, hovering near the note text displays attachment points. The image above
shows the underline location highlighted.
Select the leader and use the context menu to select Underlined. This toggles the leader to an under-
lined leader.
www.SpaceClaim.com 646
To change a note leader's properties
1. Right-click the note leader and select Properties.
2. Modify the Arrow Style, Length, and Width values.
3. Set the All Around value to True to display an all-around symbol. Select False to hide it.
Examples
A virtual sharp
Attaching to the bottom connection point of a note to create a leader with a jog or shoulder.
www.SpaceClaim.com 647
Attaching to the center connection point of a note to create a straight leader.
Use the center connection point to create circle flag notes or BOM balloon notes according to the
JIS standard, without a jog or shoulder.
www.SpaceClaim.com 648
Creating dimension annotations
Use the Dimension tool to add a measurement to your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup.
You can use annotation dimensions with the Pull and Move tools to change your design. See Driving
modifications with annotation dimensions.
An annotation plane cannot be moved to a sub-component after you add dimensions because the
references would be lost.
You can enable dual dimensions, which will display each dimension in both Metric and Imperial
units. See Units options.
www.SpaceClaim.com 649
Where you click on a circle determines whether you will measure from the circle's center, near,
or far edge. To select the center click the top, bottom, left, or right side of the circle.
4. Mouse over your design to preview the possible dimensions.
5. Click a second object if you want to dimension between two objects.
6. (Optional) Select a dimension orientation in the Options panel. You can also select the ori-
entation for the first and second reference.
7. Click to create the dimension.
Two methods:
l Hold the Ctrl key down and click on the arc.
l Click the arc first and hold the Ctrl key down while dragging the dimension.
www.SpaceClaim.com 650
Dimensions for planar and cylindrical chamfers.
You can flip the orientation of chamfer dimensions by setting the Flip Chamfer Dimension property
to True.
Annotation options in the General page of Detailing option in SpaceClaim Options offers choices for
how chamfer dimensions are displayed.
www.SpaceClaim.com 651
fer as shown in the image below.
1. Click the arrow under Dimension in the Annotation group on the Detailing tab and select
Ordinate Dimensions.
2. If you are creating a dimension in 3D, click a face to create the plane on which to place the
dimension.
Mouse over the faces of your design to preview the eligible annotation planes. (In Sketch and
Section mode, the sketch grid defines the annotation plane.) If multiple objects occur at your
cursor location, use the scroll wheel or arrow keys to highlight each one.
To create an annotation plane for a cylindrical face, select the cylinder's axis.
www.SpaceClaim.com 652
If you need to change the annotation plane, right-click and click Select New Annotation
Plane from the context menu. Then right-click the new place and click Set As Annotation
Plane.
3. Click a line or edge to set the baseline dimension.
You can use an existing extension line as a dimensioning reference. An extension line is the
line that connects the point to the dimension text. If you select an extension line, the baseline
dimension for the extension line's dimension is used.
4. Mouse over the face to see all the possible dimensions.
5. Click a point to place the dimension line.
If you select a face, all of the possible ordinate dimensions will be created.
You can click multiple points to use the same baseline for those dimensions.
The baseline dimension (0) is displayed or hidden based on which detailing standard is selec-
ted in the Detailing options.
Automatic jog points are included if ordinate dimensions are too closely spaced. This helps
make them easier to read.
First, establish a simple, oriented dimension. Then use one of the witness lines to set the baseline
and orientation of the ordinate dimensions.
In the example above, the leftmost witness line of the existing circle-to-circle dimension was selec-
ted to define the baseline.
To create foreshortened dimensions
1. Start with a radius dimension
2. Optional - Set the Foreshortened radial dimension center size in SpaceClaim Options
3. Right click and select Foreshortened
www.SpaceClaim.com 653
4. Move the endpoint and jog points as needed.
5. Dimensioning to the center produces a foreshortened length dimension.
To dimension bodies
www.SpaceClaim.com 654
l If you select a single body, then the maximum horizontal or vertical dimension is cre-
ated, as shown below.
l If you select more than one body, then the dimension is created for both solids and is
anchored on the side closest to where you click on the solid. You must click on the
Select bodies tool guide before you select each solid, so you click the tool guide and
select the first part, then click the tool guide again and select the second part.
In both of the examples below, the upper part was selected near its top. The lower part
was selected near its top in the example on the left and near its bottom in the example
on the right. The mouse arrows indicate where the lower part was selected. You will see
a preview of the dimension when you click the tool guide and hover over the second
part.
l If you create the dimension in a section view of a drawing sheet, then the dimension is
created on the extents of the body that is visible in the section plane, as shown below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 655
Select from the drop-down to insert a symbol.
4. Click an arrowhead to cycle through alternative leader styles.
You can also right-click an arrowhead and select Arrow Style to select a style for that arrow-
head, or select the arrowhead, then select the style for the head in the Properties panel.
5. Click the note leaders to modify them.
You can right-click a leader and select Add Jog Point to add a new point.
6. To change the distance between a dimension extension line and its reference point on the
object, click on the extension line, then hover over the end closest to the object. Drag the red
dot to change its distance from the object.
If you cant' see the extension line, hover over the end of the dimension leader, where the line
would be. You will see two red dots that you can drag:
7. Modify the dimension note properties in the Properties panel. Modify the:
l Arrow Length and Width properties to set the length and width of the arrowheads
l Measurement property to change the measurement type. For example, you may want
to display the radius of a hole instead of the diameter.
l Precision property to change the number of decimal places.
l Upper Limit, Lower Limit, and Type of tolerance property to change the format of the
dimension and enter upper and lower tolerance values.
8. To fit a dimension within the text box
l RMB Click on the note and open the Autofit drop-down menu.
l Choose one of the following options:
l Do not autofit: The text box adjusts to the size of the text and grows as you type.
There is no blank space around the note and making the text larger or smaller
adjusts the box accordingly.
l Resize text height on overflow: The text always fits the width of the box. If you
make the box wider, text from the second line will move up to the first line.
l Shrink text on overflow: The text adjusts uniformly (width and height) and scales
to fit in the text box.
l Shrink text horizontally on overflow: The width of the text changes but the
height remains the same.
www.SpaceClaim.com 656
1. Create two layers, one for notes, and one for the annotation planes.
2. Place the note on one layer and the annotation plane on another layer.
3. Turn off the visibility of the layer that contains the annotation plane.
Any notes rotated differently are not affected by the above commands.
To display dimensions for an annotation plane
Right-click an annotation plane and select:
l Show all dimensions to display dimensions on all annotation planes.
l Show dimensions to display the dimensions for only the annotation plane you right-clicked.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 657
Annotations with orientation changed in the Options panel
1. Dimension Orientation set to Aligned
2. Dimension Orientation set to Horizontal
3. Dimension Orientation set to Vertical
4. 1st Reference Orientation set to Horizontal, 2nd Reference Orientation set to Vertical
www.SpaceClaim.com 658
Ordinate dimensions for a planar face
www.SpaceClaim.com 659
Dimensioning between virtual points
You can create dimensions from the line between two points or the mid-plane between two lines,
even when that line doesn't exist as an edge.
If you hold Ctrl when you select point C, the dimension is created between line AB and line
BC:
5. (Optional) If you select point C without holding Ctrl, and hold Ctrl to select a fourth point (D),
the dimension is created between line AB and line CD:
www.SpaceClaim.com 660
6. Click anywhere in the annotation plane to place the dimension.
1. Select the Dimension tool from the Annotation ribbon group in the Detailing tab.
2. Hold Ctrl and select a line.
3. Hold Ctrl and select a converging line.
The head of the note leader is attached to the virtual sharp. You can also drag the virtual
sharps end point, draw another leader to the virtual sharp, create virtual sharps in cross-sec-
tion, for rounds, and between an angled and straight edge.
4. (Optional) To end the dimension at another virtual sharp,
1. Hold Ctrl and select a line.
2. Hold Ctrl and select a converging line.
5. Click anywhere in the annotation plane to place the dimension.
1. Select the Dimension tool from the Annotation ribbon group in the Detailing tab.
2. Define the mid-plane line:
1. Select a face or edge:
www.SpaceClaim.com 661
2. Hold Ctrl and select a second face or edge:
The mid-plane line is displayed as a gray line, and the beginning of the dimension is attached
to this line.
3. Select the face, edge, or point you want to dimension to.
The end of the dimension is attached to the face, edge, or point.
4. Click to place the dimension annotation.
You can reverse these steps to begin the dimension with an existing line or point and end the
dimension with a mid-plane line. You can also dimension between two mid-plane lines.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 662
A dimension between two mid-plane lines
A virtual sharp
www.SpaceClaim.com 663
Center marks and lines
You can put a center mark on any circle, arc, cylinder end, or sphere, and you can put center lines on
any cylindrical face on a drawing sheet.
Examples
Center mark on the end of a cylinder and center line along the face of a cylinder
www.SpaceClaim.com 664
Geometric dimensioning and tolerancing
ASME Y14.5 (2009) provides the standards for Geometric dimensioning and tolerancing (GD&T).
ASME Y14.41 contains additional requirements for tolerances defined in digital models.
SpaceClaim provides functionality for GD&T symbol creation based on this standard.
Help topics for symbol creation focus on functionality and workflowonly.
For helpwith terminology,interpreting GD&T symbols,and understanding the motivations behind
them, refer to ASME Y14.5 (2009) and related publications.
You can create both Semantic and Non-semantic geometric tolerances (GD&T).
Non-semantic tolerances
l Simply annotations using GD&T symbols and tolerance values
l You manually build them up by selecting the symbols, entering values, and adding leaders
Semantic tolerances
l Built into the model using geometric references.
l Contain logic based on the ASME Y14.5 (2009)standard
l Creation workflow assists in building the symbol
l Only geometry applicable to the selectedcharacteristic symbolis selectable
l Tool guides step you through symbol creation
l Update according to geometry changes
l If changes cause symbols to become invalid they are flagged in the Structure Tree
www.SpaceClaim.com 665
Non-semantic geometric dimensioning and tolerancing
Use the Geometric Tolerance tools in the Annotation ribbon group in the Detailing tab to add a tol-
erance to your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide.Non-semantic geometric tolerances are
not created automatically. You can enter anything in a geometric tolerance, so we recommend that
you read the geometric tolerance tooltips carefully to create intelligent geometric tolerance annota-
tions.
www.SpaceClaim.com 666
5. Click in one of the Tolerance fields and enter any combination of text and modifying symbols
from the Symbols ribbon group.
To create multi-row geometric tolerance annotations, select a characteristic symbol, then enter
text and modifying symbols in the second row. To combine the two rows so that they have
one characteristic symbol, check the Composite Frame option.
6. Press Esc to exit the annotation and close the Format tab.
www.SpaceClaim.com 667
Semantic geometric tolerances
Semantic GD&T symbols understand their dimensional and situational context within the model. So,
when their attachment references change in space or in type, the semantic symbols update accord-
ingly or become invalid.
GD&T is part of the Product and Manufacturing Information (PMI) exchanged between CAD systems.
The PMI Working Group recognizes two levels of information that can be exchanged in the context
of explicit 3D geometric shape representation and associated PMI.
l Representation: Describes the exchange of reusable, associative PMI that is not visible in the
3D model. It is used "behind the scenes" by the CAD system and downstream applications.
l Presentation: Describes the exchange of information in a way that is user-visible in the 3D
model.
In , Representation information is pointed to by the definitions shown in the Structure Tree. The
geometry that the definitions apply to are recognized as features which are displayed in the tree.
Definitions which apply to the features are shown as sub-nodes of the features in the tree. This
includes dimensions for features of size. All GD&T items in the Structure Tree are contained in the
'GD&T' folder as shown in the image below.
Presentation information is the actual symbol shown in the graphics area and attached to geometry.
www.SpaceClaim.com 668
Representation stays with the object because it is part of its Structure. Presentation information is
built from the representation.
So, when a solid with associated Semantic GD&T is moved to a new component:
l Representation information is moved to the new component.
l Presentation information is not moved to the new component.Create new symbolsin the
componentusing the Representation information in the Structure Tree.
Prior to creating the symbol, you need to have the appropriate Datum Features in the model.
The geometry to which a GD&T symbol is applied is usually called a "Feature". Features may be spe-
cified by:
www.SpaceClaim.com 669
l Directly selecting a part's faces
l Selecting an existing datum feature
l Selecting an existing Feature Control Frame in the structure tree or graphics window
After choosing a Characteristic Symbol and the geometry (usually called Features)to which the tol-
erance will apply, you will be asked to select the relevant Datum Feature references
An exception is Form tolerances, which do not use Datum Feature references.
When you first create a GD&T symbol, the default Characteristic Symbol is Position. Once you
choose a different symbol, that becomes the default until you select another one.
Tolerance
Symbols Applied To
Type
Individual or Related
Profile
Line Surface Features
Once you have selected the Datum Feature references, you are put in placement mode where:
l In 3D, you choose an annotation plane and then place the symbol somewhere within that
plane
l In a drawing you place the symbol somewhere in the sheet
www.SpaceClaim.com 670
To create a Semantic GD&T symbol
1. (Optional) Use the Datum Symbol tool to create any Datum Features to be referenced by the
symbol. (Datum Symbols are semantic as well)
l This is optional because the Form characteristics (Straightness, Flatness, Circularity, and
Cylindricity) do not require Datum Feature references
l For a single Feature Control Frame, you can select up to three Datum Symbols
l There are up to three Datum Feature references
l Each of these references may use a datum established by more than one Datum
Feature (separated by "-" as in the image below)
www.SpaceClaim.com 671
4. Follow the prompts to select the necessary references
l You can Ctrl+select multiple faces for the following tolerances
l Profile
l Flatness
l Position for Planar Feature of Size (i.e. Middle Plane)
l Coaxial cylinders (ASME Y14.5 Figure 4-34)
l For multiple faces:
l The symbol will show the number of faces by including "3X" for example to
say the tolerance applies to three faces
l Number of faces is not shown for Coaxial Cylinders or Middle Plane
l After creation, selecting the symbol will highlight all the faces
5. Click Complete to place the symbol
6. An annotation plane appears
7. Drag the plane to a desired placement
l As you drag the plane
l Itwill change orientation to other valid orientations based on the geometry under
the cursor
l Existing annotation planes will pre-highlight for selection
8. Click to place the plane
9. The symbol appears
10. Drag the symbol to a desired placement
11. Click to place the symbol
After the symbol has been placed, you can add any appropriate modifiers by
1. Selecting thetolerance value or Datum Reference compartmentsto be modified
2. Choosing a Modifierfrom the mini-toolbar
Modifiers
When you select a symbol element, the mini-toolbar will present all relevant modifiers.
Their meaning and applicabilityare described in the relevant sections of ASME Y14.5 (2009)
andASME Y14.41.
Available Modifiers are shown below.
Symbol Modifier
www.SpaceClaim.com 672
At Maximum Material Condition (When applied to a tolerance Value)
At Maximum Material Boundary (When applied to a Datum Reference)
At Least Material Condition (When applied to a tolerance Value)
At Least Material Boundary (When applied to a Datum Reference)
Translation
Projected Tolerance Zone
Free State
Tangent Plane
Unequally Disposed Profile
Statistical Tolerance
Between
All Around
All Over
www.SpaceClaim.com 673
of a feature between designated extremities.
The example below shows a profile tolerance between D and E. The system prompts you to
select a direction and a first and last face to include (first and last can be the same face). It
places labels based on the next available letters but you need to create notes pointing to the
locations on the faces.
l All Around and All Over apply to Profile of Surface symbols attached to dimensions (Attach-
ment Technique = Size Callout)
You can add segments to GD&T symbols in much the same way as they are initially created.
Instead of selecting geometry, you select the Characteristic Symbol of an existing GD&T symbol.
Based on which Characteristic symbol you wish to add, the system will limit which existing symbols
are available.
For example, adding Concentricity to the position tolerance of a hole is invalid.
www.SpaceClaim.com 674
Feature-Relating Tolerance Zone Framework
To create a FRTZF:
1. Select an existing Position or Profile tolerance value
2. The mini-toolbar appears
www.SpaceClaim.com 675
3. Choose one of the following:
l Remove Feature-Related Tolerance Zone Framework- to remove the segment
l Show one repeated datum reference
l Showtwo repeated datum references
l Showthree repeated datum references
The mini-toolbar options will adjust depending on which segment tolerance is selected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 676
The XYZ coordinate system in the image above is the Datum Reference Frame formed by the three
Datum Features A, B, and C.
When you select a DRF in the Structure Tree, it highlights in the Graphics Window. Likewise, select-
ing a DRF in the Graphics Window highlights it in the Structure Tree.
The DRF may not be valid if changes have been made to invalidate any of the symbols. Invalid Datum
Features are marked with a Red 'X' in the Structure Tree.
You can Delete a DRF by selecting it in the Structure Tree like other SpaceClaim objects.
Basic dimensions
Basic Dimensions locate the controlled features back to the Datum Reference Frame. They are gen-
erated automatically once the DRF is established. All you need to do is place them.
1. Right-click on a GD&T Feature in the Structure Tree.
2. Choose Create basic dimensions from the context menu.
3. Mouse over the design to drag each dimension and click to place them.
l Tool guides are available to switch between the different directions (X, Y, Z) and to
change annotation plane.
l The tool guides and hints will be different based on the type of feature being dimen-
sioned.
The image below shows Basic Dimensions for a Surface Profile tolerance.
www.SpaceClaim.com 677
Creating symbols from Items in the Tree
You can recreate Datum Feature symbols and Feature Control Frames in the graphics window and
drawing viewsfrom symbols listed in the Structure Tree.
1. Select a GD&Tin the Structure Tree
2. RMB > Create Feature Control Frame Symbol
3. Select or place an Annotation plane
4. Drag the symbol to place it
If you select a Datum Feature in the tree, follow the same procedure but use RMB > Create Datum
Feature symbol
www.SpaceClaim.com 678
Datum and surface finish symbols
You can insert datum symbols onto your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide. Datum symbols
are made semantically, which means they update to changing attachment objects.
Datum symbols appear in the tree and show their attachment objects when selected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 679
Datum targets
Use the Datum Target tool in the Detail tab Annotations group tocreate datum targetsin your
design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide. As shown below, you can insert the following datum tar-
get types:
l Point
l Circular Area
l Axis (cylindrical or conical only)
l Line
l Rectangular area
The top field of a datum target is the dimension (target area size or the diameter of the datum tar-
get point); the bottom field is the reference letter (target identifying letter), as shown in the image
below:
www.SpaceClaim.com 680
When you create a datum target, by default, the datum callout height ratio is 3.5. This setting con-
trols how many times the current text height the callout circle size should be, for example, the set-
ting of 3.5x is for ASME, and ISO and ISO-based models use a 4x setting.>
1. Hover over the faces of your design to preview the eligible annotation planes.
2. Move the cursor to where you want to place the target.
3. Click and drag the target leader to a position inside or outside the annotation plane.
4. Click the top field to enter (or to change an existing) number or letter for the callout, as shown
in the image set below:
www.SpaceClaim.com 681
l Text Height - Based on model units
l Text Position - Inside or Outside the callout
l With a leader selected, you can change the following properties:
l Arrow Style - Choose from the drop-down list of available styles.
l Arrow Length - Choose the Default or enter a value in model units.
l Arrow Width - Choose the Default or enter a value in model units.
l With a target selected, the available properties depend on the type of target.
l Point
l Type - Choose from Point, Circular, or Rectangular.
l Point Size - Enter a value in model units.
l Circular area
l Type - Choose from Point, Circular, or Rectangular.
l Radius - Enter a value in model units.
l Rotation - Enter a number of degrees to rotate the circle.
l Hatch Angle - Enter a number in degrees.
l Hatch Spacing - Enter a number in model units.
l Rectangular area
l Type - Choose from Point, Circular, or Rectangular.
l Width - Enter a number in model units.
l Height - Enter a number in model units.
l Rotation - Enter a number of degrees to rotate the rectangle.
l Hatch Angle - Enter a number in degrees.
l Hatch Spacing - Enter a number in model units.
l Line
l Length - Enter a number in model units.
l Point Size - Enter a number in model units.
l Rotation - Enter a number of degrees to rotate the line.
l Show Points - True or False
l Axis
l Point Size - Enter a number in model units.
l Rotation - Enter a number of degrees to rotate the line the point and leader attachment
www.SpaceClaim.com 682
locations.
l Show Points - True or False
You can change default settings for datum callouts and targets from the Annotation group in General
SpaceClaim Options.
l Showdatum target end points: Checkbox to control whether or not datum target lines
should show their end points.
l Datum Callout text height ratio: Controls how many times larger the callout circle should be
compared to the text height.
l Datum Target default point size: Controls the point size used by datum target points, lines,
and circles. Default point size can be overridden on a per object basis.
l Datum Target area default hatch spacing: Controls the hatch spacing for circular and rect-
angular datum targets. Default spacing can be overridden on a per object basis.
l Datum Target area default hatch angle: Controls the hatch angle for circular and rectangular
datum targets. The default angle can be overridden on a per object basis.
l Datum callout leader arrow shape: Controls the arrow shape of leaders connected to datum
targets.
l Linestyle options:
l Set line style and thickness for Datum target area borders
l Set line style and thickness for Datum target area lines
Assembly considerations
Datum targets only appear in the root document of the current design window. If they appeared in
the component itself, they would be shown in every occurrence of the component in an assembly.
Having them in the root document of the design window provides flexibility and prevents multiple,
unnecessary duplicates.
For example, in a table with four legs, each leg is the same component, but each leg in the table
assembly may need a different datum target, or no target at all. See the image below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 683
www.SpaceClaim.com 684
Surface finish symbols
You can insert surface finish symbols onto your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide. Surface
finish symbols move along with the surface they are attached to.
www.SpaceClaim.com 685
To display the text of an annotation and hide the plane
1. Create two layers, one for notes, and one for the annotation planes.
2. Place the note on one layer and the annotation plane on another layer.
3. Turn off the visibility of the layer that contains the annotation plane.
Example
Surface finish symbols using the Standard, Standard 2, and Standard 3 templates
www.SpaceClaim.com 686
Barcodes
You canplace Barcode annotationsin your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide. Barcodes are
placed on Annotation planes and are shown in the Structure Tree. If there are also Notes in the
design, Barcodes and Notes each get their own folder in the tree. Barcodes can be patterned in the
same manner as Notes.
To add a barcode
1. Select the Barcode tool in the Annotation group of the Detail tab
2. (Optional) Change the Display options
l Type: Choose one of the many standard types from the dropdown list (default is 'Code
2 of 5')
l Show Text: Checkbox displaying or hiding Barcode text
3. Place the Barcode on an annotation plane
4. You can continue to place more Barcodes or exit the tool
www.SpaceClaim.com 687
To modify a barcode
1. Select a Barcode and modify any of thefollowing properties
l Type: Choose one of the many standard types from the dropdown list (default is 'Code
2 of 5')
l Data: This is the text that gets displayed (default is '123456')
l Show Text:True or False
l Width: Enter a value for the width
l Height: Enter a value for the height
www.SpaceClaim.com 688
Welding symbols
You can insert Welding Symbols into your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide. They can be
created with or without geometry in the design window.
Symbols can be made to either the AWS or ISO standard.
l AWS follows the specification titled "AWS A2.4:2007 Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing,
and Non-Destructive Examination."
l ISO follows "ISO 2553:1992 (E) Welded, Brazed, and Soldered Joints - Symbolic Representation on
Drawings - p.193 of ISO Drawings."
SpaceClaim defaults to the AWS standard. You can change this in the Annotation options in the
Detailing>General section of SpaceClaim options. The setting is independent of the standard
chosen for font.
The basic procedure for creating Welding symbols is to build up the symbol, adding progressively
more detail while the UI adapts intelligently based on your choices. There are tooltips available for
every possible input value or symbol. Box-selecting the entire symbol will show all possible places
to input values. Weld symbols can be created and edited while in the Welding Symbol tool.
The image below shows a blank welding symbol. As you move the cursor over the highlighted areas,
tooltips will guide you in building the symbol.
Welding symbols have an Arrow side and an Other side. The Reference line divides the symbol into
the Arrow Side and the Other Side. In AWS, the Arrow Side is always on the bottom of the Reference
line. In ISO, the Arrow Side is identified by a dotted line as shown in the image below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 689
To create a Welding Symbol:
1. Select a Welding Symbol Standard in the Annotation options in the Detailing>General sec-
tion of SpaceClaim options.
2. Click the Welding Symbol.
3. Click to place the arrow
4. Click to place the Reference Line.
5. The symbol is now placed and ready to be built.
1. You can add or remove a Jog Point to a Welding Symbol leader while in the Welding
Symbol tool. RMB click on the symbol leader to display this option.
2. You can press the ESC key after beginning symbol placement to delete the leader and
cancel the tool.
6. As you move the cursor over the symbol, highlighting will indicate where you can add symbol
elements or input values.
AWS Symbols
The AWS symbol palettes are shown below. Some symbols are only available for Arrow side.
Arrow Side
www.SpaceClaim.com 690
Other Side
Groove V Seam
www.SpaceClaim.com 691
Groove U Surfacing
Groove J Edge
Groove flare
Melt-through
bevel
Slot
ISO Symbols
The ISO symbol palettes are shown below. Some symbols are only available for the Other side.
Arrow Side
Other Side
www.SpaceClaim.com 692
The symbols are described in the following table.
ISO Sym- ISO Sym-
Weld Type Weld Type
bol bol
Butt weld between plates
Spot weld
with raised edges
Steep-flanked single-bevel
Bevel butt weld
butt weld
www.SpaceClaim.com 693
Fillet weld Backing strip
l Click on the Reference line todisplay the Reference line mini-toolbar (see images and details
in the section below).
Reference Line mini-toolbar options
Symbol Option
Stagger intermittent welds
Weld all around
Field weld
Swap arrow and other sides
Joint with spacer
Show tail even if reference is
not used
Add welding reference line
Add welding symbol leader
l Click on the Tail text box to enter a specification process or other reference. If there is no ref-
erence, the tail will be omitted. You can choose to show the tail regardless of reference by
clicking on Show tail even if reference is not used
1. As you select symbols from the palette and choose options from the mini-toolbars, the avail-
able symbols and options will change to present only those that make sense for the current
symbol configuration. Tooltips are provided to describe possible symbols and inputs.
2. Selecting symbols after they are placed will display the symbol mini-toolbar, which contains
options to:
www.SpaceClaim.com 694
Concave
l If you add a Contour symbol, you can add a Finishing symbol for: No finishing; Chip-
ping; Grinding; Hammering; Machining; Planishing; Rolling; Unspecified
www.SpaceClaim.com 695
Custom symbols
A custom symbol is a two dimensional collection of sketch curves and text grouped together as one
selectable entity. You can insert a custom symbol multiple times in the same document and each
instance of the symbol can be scaled, rotated, and transformed independent of the others.
Custom symbols can include:
l Any set of sketch curves that you can draw using the tools in the Sketch group.
l Fixed text that always remains the same.
l Editable text that you can change independent of other instances of the symbol.
l Leader attachment points that allow you to add note leaders at one or more points on the sym-
bol.
l Other symbols.
Custom symbols can be attached to geometry.Symbols attached to geometry move with that geo-
metry as it changes
Custom symbols are saved with the document, and can be imported from saved documents.
www.SpaceClaim.com 696
Creating custom symbols
A custom symbol is a two dimensional collection of sketch curves and text grouped together as one
selectable and editable entity. Your symbols can include anything drawn with Sketch tools and text
made with the Note tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 697
The example below shows two symbols scaled at 1:1, 4:1, and 10:1. The rect-
angular symbol was set to Model space and the round symbol was set to View
space.
4. If you want the symbol to be attachable, move the origin handle (shown below) to set the ori-
gin of the symbol and then select one or more Placement options to determine how the sym-
bol will be scaled in your design:
l Allow attaching placements to geometry: Attaches the origin point of the symbol to
3D edges and curves. You must select this option to create an attachable symbol.
l Orient placements normal to geometry: Orients the symbol perpendicular to the selec-
ted curve or face.
l Maintain an upward orientation for placements: Automatically positions a symbol ori-
ented normal to geometry so that it is never upside down. This option is useful for
annotation symbols, such as surface finishes, that should be perpendicular to their ref-
erence geometry and also right side up relative to the reading direction of the model.
When you select the first two options, the symbol is automatically oriented per-
pendicular to the reference.
5. Click Complete to finish editing and save the custom symbol in the current document.
or
Click Close Symbol Tools to exit the Symbol tab without saving the symbol.
www.SpaceClaim.com 698
To edit a symbol
1. Insert a symbol if you haven't already.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Click Edit in the Symbols group on the Detail tab or right-click a symbol and select Edit.
4. Use the tools in the Symbol tab to edit your symbol. Refer to the instructions above for
information about each tool or option.
www.SpaceClaim.com 699
Using custom symbols
You can insert a custom symbol multiple times in the same document and each instance of the sym-
bol can be scaled, rotated, and transformed independent of the others. You can copy and paste inser-
ted symbols within the same drawing sheet. Symbols are saved with the document, and can be
imported from saved documents.
You can add and remove symbol libraries in Support files.
www.SpaceClaim.com 700
5. If a conflict is found between the imported symbols and symbols already in the open file, then
a dialog will open with the following options:
l Copy and replace: Replace the local version with the imported version everywhere it is
used in the current document.
l Don't copy: Leave the current version of the symbol unchanged and don't import the
external version.
l Copy and keep both versions: Import a second copy of the external symbol and make
both available in the current document.
www.SpaceClaim.com 701
3. Click on an attachment point.
4. For a segmented line, click to set each point of the note leader line.
5. End the note leader by clicking a vertex, edge, or face to attach the end of the note leader, or
double-click to end the note leader at any point.
The end of the note leader is an arrow unless you attach it to a face.
For an attachable symbol, set this property to True to flip an attached symbol to the
opposite side of the selected geometry.
l Rotation: Use this property to rotate the symbol counterclockwise in the plane where it
www.SpaceClaim.com 702
was placed.
l Scale: The size of the symbol is multiplied by the scale value. For example, if you set this
property to 5, then the symbol size is multiplied by 5.
l Text height: If you selected the Scale symbol to text height option when you created
the symbol, you can set this property to change the text height that is used to scale this
instance of the symbol.
l Use original symbol style: The original scale and size are used for the symbol.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 703
Same symbols moving with changed geometry
www.SpaceClaim.com 704
Threads
Use the Thread tool to create a threaded surface on any cylinder, cone, or hole. Select a thread
edge or face to view its properties in the Properties panel.
The depth of a threaded blind hole on a curved surface is defined as the measured distance from the
end of the thread to the closest point on the outer contour of the thread.
www.SpaceClaim.com 705
l Major Diameter: The largest, or outer, diameter of a thread.
www.SpaceClaim.com 706
<thread:Size>0.073</thread:Size>
<thread:MinorDiameter>0.0544</thread:MinorDiameter>
</thread:ThreadSize>
</thread:ThreadSizes>
</thread:ThreadSizeTable>
You should add your own custom files instead of changing the default files.
www.SpaceClaim.com 707
Bills of materials
You can insert a Bill of Materials (BOM) onto your design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide. BOM
values are automatically populated for both internal and external components that are part of an
assembly. SpaceClaim only itemizes components; if the design only has solids in the structure tree,
they will not be included in the BOM. The QTY column in a design's BOM table shows the number of
sub-components, not items, that are included in an assembly.
When a drawing includes a BOM table that contains data added with a newer service pack of
SpaceClaim than you are using, the new columns are displayed in red. This indicates that the data can-
not be changed, and can only be viewed.
You can include X, Y, and Z dimensions of components in a BOM table. The extents shown are the
exact extents of all solid and surface geometry in the component, for both visible and hidden solids
and surfaces. Sketch curves, bitmaps, and other entities are not included in the extents. Use these
dimensions to create a cut list of parts in an assembly of panels in the BOM, along with their number
and dimensions. See the instructions for adding a column to a BOM table below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 708
l Top level: Creates a table that includes only parent components (or parts):
l Indented: Creates a table that includes all components, with child components inden-
ted:
The last type of BOM you created is remembered and will be automatically chosen if you click
the BOM icon instead of the drop-down arrow.
2. (Optional) If you created a view of a component on the drawing sheet, select the component
on the Options panel to create a BOM for just that component.
3. (Optional) Modify the Bill of Material's properties in the Properties panel.
l The Hidden components option allows you to control whether or not hidden com-
ponents will be included in the BOM.
www.SpaceClaim.com 709
l There are many other options for controlling the cosmetics of the BOM.
4. Click to place the Bill of Materials on the design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup slide. The table
appears in gray until you place it, and it changes to black after it is placed.
To cancel, press the Esc key before you click to place the table.
The BOM appears in the Structure tree.
You can copy and paste a BOM, and you can copy the contents from a BOM table and paste
them into Microsoft Excel.
www.SpaceClaim.com 710
If you select Material Property for the column type and Mass or Volume for the column value,
then the column data will only be filled-in when a material has been assigned to the object.
If you choose 'BOM Template' as the type, all the formatting, header, table properties, and contents
are saved to an .xml file which you can edit.
You can manually edit any values in the BOM but any sorts have to be re-done to update the table.
Sorting works with indented and regular BOM's.
Sequential sorting is remembered across columns. Below is an example of two sequential sorts:
1. First sort items alphabetically by name.
2. Then sort numerically by Quantity.
3. Result:
1. Rows are put in ascending order according to Quantity
2. Items with duplicate quantities are then put in alphabetical order according to their
names. In the image below, items are sorted by Quantity (1, 2, 3). Then all items with a
Quantity of 1 are sorted alphabetically.
www.SpaceClaim.com 711
www.SpaceClaim.com 712
Tables
You can place a table on an annotation plane using the Table tool in the Annotation ribbon group.
You can copy annotation dimensions from drawings and paste them into tables, and their values will
be updated when the dimensions change.
To add a table
1. Add an Annotation plane or activate an existing plane.
2. Click the Table tool .
3. Drag to create the table with as many columns and rows as you need. The default cell size is
determined by the font size in the Detailing tab.
www.SpaceClaim.com 713
l Arrow keys to move the table.
l Ctrl+arrow keys to move the table by a very small amount.
l Round handle at the top of the table to rotate the table.
To delete a table
1. Select the table.
2. Select the rectangular border.
3. Press Delete.
www.SpaceClaim.com 714
Hole tables
Use the Hole table toolfrom the Annotation ribbon group in the Detail tab to create a table
that orders a designs round holes by size (classified by duplicates) and labels the holes on a planar
face. In a hole table, holes are sorted in order from left to right, then top to bottom. This feature
workswith holes only (threaded or non-threaded) includingdesigns with hole patterns,but does not
work withslots of any type.
A Hole table displays in the Structure treeas an Annotation Plane. You can deselect the Annotation
Plane checkbox to hide the Hole table. A Hole chart displays the quantity of holes in your design
that havesimilar diameters. Once you create a Hole table, origin points, and X and Y axis labels, dis-
play as shown in the image below, and you can create a Hole chart:
Holes with counterbores, countersinks, or fillets are shown in the table. Dimensions are taken from
the intersection with the top plane and the hole.
SpaceClaim uses all faces of the solid with the same orientation to collect holes for the table. Label
editing works for holes that appear on multiple faces as shown in the image below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 715
Moving a Hole table origin
You can drag a Hole Table origin to move it.As shown in the image below, an origin displays as a
red circle:
l To view the origin, hover over the two perpendicular axes for the X and Y coordinates (with
extension lines).
l When you select an origin, its size increases and all valid origin positions display as red origin
points. These origin points remain visible until you begin to drag the origin to a different pos-
ition. As you drag the origin, the X and/or Y coordinates data in the Hole Table immediately
updates to provide a preview of X and Y coordinates data for the various origin positions.>
www.SpaceClaim.com 716
l When you release an origin to set the new location, the origin points no longer display, and
the Hole Table updates to reflect the X and Y coordinate position of the new origin location.
When moved close enough to another valid origin position, the X and Y coordinate display in
the new position, and the origin snaps to the new location. as shown below:
l
The images below show samples of hole tables with different fonts used for hole labels and X and Y
axis coordinates:
www.SpaceClaim.com 717
Working with hole tables
l Use the pull handles on the table or chart to size as needed. Use the round handle at the top
of the table to rotate the table or chart.
l Just like a regular table, you can change the values in the Rows and Columns cells in the Prop-
erties panel to adjust the number, width, or height of a table element.>
l You can change individual axis label text and text properties (text is a single line). For example,
you could have X-A coordinates instead of X-Y.
l If you make changes to your design, select the table ( or X or Y axis)anduse the RMB to:
l Show Hole Chart to create another chart.
l Show Hole Tableto create an updated table.
l Save Table As a Web (.htm, .html) or XML file.
l When you change the size of a hole, the values in the table update, and the table re-orders
and re-classifies the holes and rows of the table.
l When you copy and paste a hole, the table updates to display a new row with the holes X, Y,
www.SpaceClaim.com 718
and Description values.
l After you drag a label to another position on the design, the table updates to the size and pos-
ition of the new hole. To display your changes in a new table, right-mouse click and select
Show Hole Table.
l To remove a table or chart, select the table, right-mouse click, and select Cut.
www.SpaceClaim.com 719
Curve tables
Curve Tables contain information about selected curves. They apply to:
l Sketched curves
l Turn Profile curves
l Deburring curves
www.SpaceClaim.com 720
l End: The end point of a curve
l Center: The center point of arcs
The start and end points in curve chains begin at the largest positive Z value and move toward lesser
Z values. This convention comes manufacturing turning operations that set up the workpiece as
shown in the image above. The Z-axis is aligned with the turning axis and the tool bit moves from
the most positive Z location to the most negative Z location.
l Selecting a Curve Table displays handles for modifying the table size and orientation.
l Use the pull handles on the table to size as needed.
l Use the round handle at the top of the table to rotate the table.
l If you make changes to the curves, the Curve Table updates accordingly.
l Select the tableanduse the RMB to Save Table As a Web (.htm, .html), XML file, or CSV file.
www.SpaceClaim.com 721
l When you change the size of a hole, the values in the table update, and the table re-orders
and re-classifies the holes and rows of the table.
l To remove a table, select the table, right-mouse click, and select Cut, or press the Delete key.
www.SpaceClaim.com 722
Balloons
Use the Balloon tool to add BOM balloon notes. The content of the balloon updates when
changes are made to the BOM table.
The document must contain a BOM table for the Balloon tool to be enabled.
www.SpaceClaim.com 723
Bolt circles
Use the Bolt Circle toolfrom the Annotation ribbon group in the Detail tab to view information
aboutdiameter, angular, and radialdimensions for a circular pattern, as shown below:
1. Select the Bolt Circle toolfrom the Annotation ribbon group in the Detail tab.
In your circular pattern design, click the face of your design that holds the pattern member to
create a datum plane on which to place your Bolt circle.
2. SpaceClaim creates a datum plane for the Bolt circle.
3. Select a pattern member.
SpaceClaim automatically adds dimension call outs, arrows, and lines to the annotation plane. You
can click on an arrow or line to view or modify each dimension's values in the Properties panel.
www.SpaceClaim.com 724
Adding hyperlinks to annotations
Hyperlinks allow access to more content in your notes and dimensions. Some examples are:
l Images
l Web pages
l Word documents
l .scdocs
Once a Hyperlink is established, you can hover over theannotation text to display the link in the
status bar and Ctrl+Click to go to the link.
To edit a Hyperlink:
1. Highlight the annotation text.
2. RMB click
3. Select the EditHyperlink option.
4. Edit the link in the Edit Hyperlink dialog box.
To open a Hyperlink:
1. Highlight the annotation text.
2. RMB click
3. Select theOpenHyperlink option.
4. The link opens in the appropriate media.
l You can also hover over the annotation text and Ctrl+Click to open the link in the appropriate
media.
www.SpaceClaim.com 725
To remove a Hyperlink:
1. Highlight the annotation text.
2. RMB click
3. Select theRemoveHyperlink option.
l You can also edit the Hyperlink and click the Remove Hyperlink button in the dialog box.
www.SpaceClaim.com 726
Drawing sheets
SpaceClaim helps you create drawing sheets. When you add a new drawing sheet to a design, views
of the design are created for you automatically. You can then add, remove, and edit these views, as
well as drag them to move them around on the sheet. Drawing sheets are saved within your design.
Normally, you will create the drawing sheet, set up the sheet, apply a format, add and modify views,
then annotate the views.
Drawing sheets and their views appear in the Structure tree. You can place drawing sheet views on
layers.
You can edit a design directly while viewing the drawing sheet using the tools on the Design tab.
www.SpaceClaim.com 727
To display a drawing sheet in the Design window
Right-click the sheet in the Structure tree and select Open Sheet from the context menu.
www.SpaceClaim.com 728
l Hide or show a component in a particular view: Check or uncheck the box next to the com-
ponent in the Structure tree.
l Hide or show an object in all views: Right-click the object in the Structure tree and select
Hide in all views or Show in all views from the context menu.
l Hide or show an object in a particular view: Right-click the object in the drawing sheet and
select Hide in Selected View from the context menu. Check the box in the Structure tree to
restore visibility.
l Isolate a solid in a view: Right-click the solid in the Structure tree and select Isolate in selec-
ted view from the context menu. You can also right-click a face of the body in the drawing
sheet. All geometry in the view disappears except the selected object. This option is not avail-
able for components.
l Hide an individualcurve in a component instance: Right-click the curve and select Hide
from the context menu. You can also check or uncheck the box next to the curve in the Struc-
ture tree.
The Structure tree displays a mixed visibility state for any objects hidden in a view, as shown in the
figure below.
Visibility in a drawing sheet is independent from the visibility of the model in the design window.
If you insert a model into a new document, the model appears with the visibility saved in the doc-
ument. After the model is inserted, the visibility of objects is independent of the saved document.
When you create a new view (general view, projected view, cross section, or detailed view) in a draw-
ing sheet from an existing view in your drawing sheet, the visibility of objects is copied to the new
view.
www.SpaceClaim.com 729
www.SpaceClaim.com 730
Drawing sheet setup
You can format the drawing sheet using a template, orient the page, and select a paper size for the
sheet. When you select the format and size of the drawing sheet, SpaceClaim automatically sets the
scale, but you can modify it.
Use the following tools in the Sheet Setup group to change a drawing sheet:
Format: Select a default or custom format, or remove the formatting from the drawing sheet
with the Format tool.
Orientation: Select a portrait or landscape orientation for the page from the Orientation
drop-down list.
Size: Select the page size from the Size drop-down list.
Scale: Select a scale or type a ratio in the Scale field. For example, enter 1:1 to display views
Scale of your design at actual size. The values listed are the two most common ratios that are smal-
ler and larger than the current scale ratio.
www.SpaceClaim.com 731
Formatting a drawing sheet
You can apply SpaceClaim formats to your drawing sheet or create your own custom formats. You
can show or hide the format lines on the sheet.
You can use different sheet size formats in a single document. The Format, Orientation, and Size
tools now have a Apply to All Sheets option that, when selected, applies your changes to all sheets
in the document. When not selected, the change is only applied to the sheet displayed in the Design
window. The option is only available when the document contains more than one drawing sheet.
www.SpaceClaim.com 732
To create a custom drawing sheet by inserting an AutoCAD file
1. Create a new drawing sheet.
www.SpaceClaim.com 733
Editing a drawing sheet
You can edit your design directly while viewing the drawing sheet using the tools on the Design tab.
When sketching on a drawing sheet, you can:
l Click within the view boundary with a sketch tool to display a sketch grid.
l Right-click a view and select Use Last Sketch Plane from the context menu.
l Turn the mouse wheel to select a face of a solid in the drawing sheet when only the edge is
displayed.
l Override colors for solids and surfaces. Changing the colors on the drawing sheet does not
affect the colors in the design.
www.SpaceClaim.com 734
Drawing sheet views
You can add and remove views from the drawing sheet, move them around the sheet, and modify
their properties. You can create general views, projected views, cross-section views, and detail views.
These views are all related to the view used to create them, and inherit properties from that view.
www.SpaceClaim.com 735
1. Select the component shown in the view.
2. Select the Move tool on the Design tab.
3. Use the Move handle to orient the component within the view.
Views related to the current view also change their orientation.
To modify a view
1. Select the view.
You can select multiple views to modify the properties they have in common.
2. Modify the view's properties in the Properties panel or right-click and modify the view using
the mini-toolbar.
3. Control the visibility of the view in the Structure tree.
To rename a view
1. Right-click a view in the Structure tree and select Rename.
The Rename drawing view labels dialog opens.
2. Change the following:
l Name: The name of a view. By default, the name of a view is a number or letter.
l Show prefix label: Display a descriptive prefix before the view name, such as Detail, Top
View, or Front View.
l Structure tree name override: Use the text in the area below this option instead of the
name and prefix.
The combination of user input and checkboxes are shown in a preview of the view name in the
box at the bottom of the dialog.
To lock a view
1. Select one or more views.
2. Open the RMB menu
3. Choose Lock Position
www.SpaceClaim.com 736
General views
www.SpaceClaim.com 737
To modify a general view
1. Select the view.
2. Modify the values in the Properties panel, or right-click and select a style from the mini-tool-
bar. Change the:
l Orientation to change the orientation of the view to isometric, trimetric, or any side. If
you change the orientation of a general view from which projected views were created,
the orientation of the projected views also change.
l Rendering mode to change the graphics style for the view. Select Inherit if you want to
link the graphics style to the drawing sheet.
l Scale to magnify or shrink the view. When you change the scale, the Type property
changes to Independent from sheet. You can select Linked to sheet to set the scale to
be the same as the scale used for the drawing sheet.
3. You can also adjust the appearance of your design on the drawing sheet by using the:
l Snap View tool to correctly position the design.
l Move tool to position the design more accurately.
When you modify the orientation of a general view, any views dependent on the general view
are oriented simultaneously. Other general views do not change.
www.SpaceClaim.com 738
1. Add a General view of the assembly.
2. RMB click on the new General View in the Structure Tree and select the Convert to Exploded
View option.
3. Move the components around as needed to create the exploded view.
This is a separate view in the drawing sheet, with component positions independent of any other
views. With independent positions, the components can be moved freely within the view without
affecting any other views.
www.SpaceClaim.com 739
Projected views
www.SpaceClaim.com 740
To modify a projected view
1. Select the view.
2. Modify the values in the Properties panel, or right-click and select a style from the mini-tool-
bar. Change the:
l Orientation Type to change the projected view to a General view. This makes the selec-
ted view independent of the view used to create it.
l Rendering mode to change the graphics style for the view. Select Inherit if you want to
link the graphics style to the parent view.
l Scale to magnify or shrink the view. When you change the scale, the Type property
changes to Independent from sheet. You can select Linked to sheet to set the scale to
be the same as the scale used for the drawing sheet.
www.SpaceClaim.com 741
Cross section views
Planar cross-section views show interior details of your design. You locate a plane through the
details of interest and SpaceClaim creates the view.
To create a cross-section view, you must already have at least one view. You can add a cross-section
to any view type.
In some cases, you may want to only show the geometry that lies in the section plane. This is called
an Area section. In other cases, you may want to see the geometry behind the plane as well. This is
called a Total section. Both types are illustrated in the image below.
The Detail section of SpaceClaim Options also has settings for Cross Sections. Refer to the View
Options and Line Style Options.
Planar cross section views can be created in the following ways:
l As a new view projected from an existing view.
l By converting an existing view to a cross section.
www.SpaceClaim.com 742
To create a new planar cross-section view
1. Click the Cross Section View tool in the Detailing tab Views group.
2. Click the Select Reference Geometry Inside Drawing View tool guide.
3. Set the following options in the Options panel before you position the view:
l Create a Total Cross-Section
l Uncheck the option to set the property to Area.
l Check the option to set the property to Area.
l Arrow Orientation
l Horizontal
l Vertical
l Through Selected Geometry to orient the arrows based on the highlighted
object, which can be sketched geometry.
l Placement
l Create as General View to place the view in any location on the drawing sheet.
l Create as Auxiliary View to link the orientation of the cross-section view to the
view containing the arrows.
4. Drag and place the section line on an existing view. If you chose Through Selected Geometry,
the section line will snap to highlighted objects and orient accordingly.
5. The new view is created and attached to the cursor for placement.
6. Click to position the new section view in your drawing sheet.
l For an Auxiliary view, drag parallel to the section arrows to place the view.
l A general view can be placed anywhere in the sheet.
7. Press Esc or S to exit the tool.
Alternate workflow
1. Sketch a single line in a drawing sheet view.
2. Select the single line.
3. Enter the Cross Section tool.
4. Move your mouse to place the planar cross section view.
In addition to Planar sections, you can also create Offset cross sections and Aligned cross sections.
www.SpaceClaim.com 743
1. Click the Cross Section View tool on the Detailing tab's Views ribbon group.
2. Click the Select Section View tool guide and select the view you want to convert to a cross-
section.
If dotted gray lines do not appear around the view, it is not selected. If this occurs, press Esc
and try again.
3. Set the Create a Total Cross-Section option to set the view's section type property to Total.
Uncheck the option to set the property to Area. See examples in the image above.
4. Mouse over a related view to display the cross-section indicator and preview the cross-sec-
tion.
The indicator line snaps to geometry in the view. Geometry in front of the cutting plane is not
displayed.
5. Click to place the cross-section indicator and create the cross-section view.
The view is labeled automatically.
6. Press Esc or S to exit the tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 744
l Angle to modify the angle at which the hatching lines are drawn.
l Spacing to modify the space between hatching lines.
l Offset to modify the start point of the first hatching line.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 745
(red diamond), select the Cut Existing Sections tool guide, then click a section line.
l To create a cross-section from inside the tool, click the Cross Section tool, and then within the
drawing sheet, select a view. Use the Select Reference Geometry Inside Drawing View tool
guide to place the section line.
l You can only divide a section on segments that are perpendicular to the principal direction; at
your cursor location you can right-click on a section line segment and select Split Section.
This right-click option is no longer available for segments that are parallel to the section dir-
ection.
l To view a dotted-line preview of the principal direction of a cross section, scroll with the
mouse wheel onto the entire section line.
www.SpaceClaim.com 746
Offset cross section views
Offset sections allow you to show interior details that lie on different section planes in one view.
In some cases, you may want to only show the geometry that lies in the section plane. This is called
an Area section. In other cases, you may want to see the geometry behind the plane as well. This is
called a Total section. Both types are illustrated in the image below.
The Detail section of SpaceClaim Options also has settings for Cross Sections. Refer to the View
Options and Line Style Options.
Offsetcross section views can be created in the following ways:
l As a new view projected from an existing view.
l By converting an existing view to a cross section.
Once a cross section view is created, you can reverse the viewing direction.
1. Right-click on a section line or arrow.
2. Select Flip Viewing Direction.
www.SpaceClaim.com 747
To create an offset section from an existing cross section
1. Create a cross section view.
2. Select the Create Offset Section tool guide.
3. Click the section line at a point where you want to create an offset.
4. Drag the side of the section line you want to have pass through a different detail.
5. Continue until you establish all necessary offsets.
When you select and drag individual section line segments, the segment you are dragging will snap
to and merge with other sections.
Alternate workflow
1. Create a cross section view.
2. Right-click onthe section line.
3. Select Split Section.
4. SpaceClaim creates a default offset.
5. Dragindividual section line segments to the desired locations.
When you select and drag individual section line segments, the segment you are dragging will
snap to and merge with other sections.
You can only divide segments that are perpendicular to the principal direction.
6. Continue until you establish all necessary offsets.
www.SpaceClaim.com 748
To create an offset section as a new cross section view
1. Sketch achain oflines in a drawing sheet view.
2. Selecta line segment.
3. Enter the Cross Section tool.
4. Move your mouse to place the planar cross section view.
The new view will be projected perpendicular to the selected line segment, which can be slanted.
SpaceClaim will find the other connected segments to create the view.
If the tool cannot find an unambiguous chain of lines, a planar section will be created.
www.SpaceClaim.com 749
Aligned cross section views
Aligned cross sections are similar to Offset cross sections but the segments are rotated about a pivot
point to be parallel to the sheet. So, the width of the section view will be greater than the width of
the parent view.
In some cases, you may want to only show the geometry that lies in the section plane. This is called
an Area section. In other cases, you may want to see the geometry behind the plane as well. This is
called a Total section. Both types are illustrated in the image below.
The Detail section of SpaceClaim Options also has settings for Cross Sections. Refer to the View
Options and Line Style Options.
Planar cross section views can be created in the following ways:
l As a new view projected from an existing view.
l By converting an existing view to a cross section.
Once a cross section view is created, you can reverse the viewing direction.
1. Right-click on a section line or arrow.
2. Select Flip Viewing Direction.
www.SpaceClaim.com 750
You can modify an aligned section byselecting and dragging individual section line segments, the
segment you are dragging will snap to and merge with other sections.
Segments can be deleted. If all segments are deleted, the section reverts to Planar.
www.SpaceClaim.com 751
5. Drag to move that portion of the section line.
6. Repeat to set additional cutter points.
www.SpaceClaim.com 752
Detail views
Detail views allow you to magnify a portion of another view to show more detail. To create a detail
view, you must already have at least one view on your drawing sheet.
If a detail view does not display correctly, make sure that you loaded any lightweight components
shown in the view.
You can change several options for detail views in the Detailing options, such as line weights and
note options.
www.SpaceClaim.com 753
6. Click to set the center of a boundary circle, a corner of a rectangle, or the first point of a
closed spline.
7. Click again to define the boundary circle or rectangle, or click multiple times to define the
boundary spline.
The detail view is displayed.
8. Click to place the detail view on the drawing sheet.
9. Press Esc or S to exit the tool.
You can drag drawing views to different sheets in the Structure tree. When you drag a detail view to
another sheet it remains linked with its parent view.
www.SpaceClaim.com 754
Displaying a modular grid
The modular grid is a coordinate system used to locate objects relative to an origin in 3D space. You
can display the modular grid on any view that is parallel to the world origin axes.
To customize a grid
1. Select the grid by clicking on a grid label or end point.
2. Drag the handles to expand or shrink the grid dynamically.
www.SpaceClaim.com 755
3. Modify the following values in the Modular grid section of theProperties panel:
l Color: The color of the grid, labels, and the legend axis.
l Font: The font and text height used for grid labels. Type the complete name for a font,
followed by a comma and the font height in units (mm, in, etc.). You can also click the ...
button and select a font and a size in points; the size will be converted to the current
units.
l Grid interval: The distance between grid lines.
l Horizontal text location: Show labels for the bottom of grid lines, the top of grid lines,
both, or neither.
l Intervals per grid line: The number of rows between each grid line.
l Show balloons around grid labels: Show circles around grid labels.
l Show baselines only: Select True to only show the baselines. The default is False which
shows all grid lines.
l Show origin: Show the legend axis on the lower left corner of the view.
l Show when at least one direction is parallel to the sheet: Select True to automatically
display the grid if the X, Y, or Z axis in the view is parallel to the drawing sheet. Select
False if you want to hide the grid in this case.
l Vertical text location: Show labels for the left end of grid lines, the right end of grid
lines, both, or neither.
l Axis labels: Override X, Y, or Z with your own labels.
l Negative and positive prefixes: A prefix shown before the distance on a grid label.
l Negative, positive, and zero suffixes: A suffix shown after the distance on a grid label.
You can set the defaults for these values by changing the Modular grid options.
www.SpaceClaim.com 756
Modular grid properties are based on the sheet defaults and are not inherited by child views.
www.SpaceClaim.com 757
Broken views
Broken views are a way of foreshortening long views without changing the scale.
When you break a view, a new view is created and both the original and the new view are converted
to partial views. An alignment is set up to match the cut orientation.
www.SpaceClaim.com 758
6. The view is created with the default gap set in the Broken View Options.
7. Press Esc or strong>S to exit the tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 759
3. Select and delete the handle.
l The break is removed
l The view is also removed
www.SpaceClaim.com 760
Broken out section views
Broken out sections display internal details in a portion of an existing view. You select an attachment
point in the view, set the depth of the section, and sketch a section boundary. The area within the
boundary is cutout up to the section depth to expose the interior details.
www.SpaceClaim.com 761
3. Choose the boundary type:
l Circle
l Spline
4. Sketch the section Boundary.
5. The view is created.
www.SpaceClaim.com 762
3D markup
SpaceClaim allows you to create 3D markup slides so that you can highlight and communicate the
differences between versions of a design. 3D Markup slides display by name, such as Slide1, as com-
ponents in the Structure tree.
Slides can be exported in PowerPoint and XPS formats.
Create a new 3D markup slide for the current design with the New Slide tool.
Display the dimensions of the previous version and the current version with the Original
Dimension Values tool.
Apply colors to the design that indicate the type of change that occurred with the Color
Changed Faces tool.
To create a 3D markup
1. Open the design you want to mark up in the Design window.
2. Select Save As New Version from the File menu to create a new version of your design.
The new version is saved with a version number appended to the file name, and becomes the
active Design window.
3. Make changes to the new version of the design.
4. Select New > 3D Markup from the File menu to create the first 3D markup slide.
The slide is shown in the 3D Markup panel, the design window, and the Structure tree. In the
Structure tree, the version you created in step 2 is labeled Reference Design.
5. Openthe Inserttab in the ribbon.
6. Click the File tooland browse to a previous version or the original versionto insert into the
slide.
The design appears in the Structure tree, labeled either Alternate Version or Original
Version. In the Design window, the previous version of the design is displayed in the wire-
frame transparent style and is placed directly on top of the new version. The Move tool is act-
ive.
7. (Optional) Move the alternate version to a new location by clicking on a Move handle axis and
dragging.
www.SpaceClaim.com 763
8. Customize the slide using the tools in the Markup ribbon group in the Detailing tab.
You can document the dimension changes with dimension annotations, color the faces based
on the type of changes made, and apply any other annotations using the tools in the Annota-
tion ribbon group in the Detailing tab. You can right-click a lightweight component and select
Load Component to load it.
9. Create as many slides as you need to effectively communicate your changes.
You can right-click a slide in the Structure tree and select Open Slide to display the slide.
10. Select Save As XPS or Save As PowerPoint from the File menu to export the 3D markup
slides to a separate document.
Because a slide is a component, when you delete a slide from the Structure tree you also delete all
of that slides objects. This feature allows you to organize your 3D Markup slides as you work
towards creating a design or finished assembly.
Examples
The Structure tree shows contents of each slide. 3D Markup panel shows two slides in the slide show.
The Design window shows reference and original versions compared with dimensions and coloring
for changed faces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 764
Creating a 3D markup
Use the New Slide tool in the Markup ribbon group on the Detailing tab to create a new 3D markup
slide.
1. Select the New Slide tool or right-click in the 3D Markup panel and select New Slide
from the context menu.
A new 3D markup slide appears in the 3D Markup panel containing the reference design. (The
reference design is the design that was active when you first created the 3D Markup doc-
ument.
2. Insert a previous version of the design for comparison.
www.SpaceClaim.com 765
Displaying changed dimensions
Use the Display Original Dimension Values tool to create dimension annotations for the current and
original dimensions in the 3D markup slide.
www.SpaceClaim.com 766
Coloring changed faces
Use the Color Changed Faces tool in the Markup ribbon group on the Detail tab to automatically
color the faces that changed from one version to another based on the nature of the change.
We recommend creating a legend on your slide similar to the following to help communicate the
meaning of each color:
New faces are colored green. Green faces did not exist in the previous version and will appear
only on the modified version of the design.
New topology is colored blue. Blue faces have changes to both the face and its edges, but the
face existed in the previous design.
Deleted faces are colored red. Red faces will appear only on the previous version of the
design.
Faces with changed edges are colored pink. Pink faces are in the same spatial location, but are
bounded differently because their edges have changed.
Faces with a changed spatial location are colored yellow. The edges of yellow faces have not
changed from the previous version.
If you want to manually color the faces, you can apply colors to the individual faces on your 3D
Markup slide.
www.SpaceClaim.com 767
Measuring and analyzing
The Analysis tab contains the tools you use for measuring, displaying interference, and analyzing
quality in your design.
The analysis tools are grouped into the following ribbon groups:
Measure Tools for displaying measurements of the edges, faces, and solids in your design.
Tools for displaying edges where solids intersect each other or volumes created by
Interference
the intersection of solids, surfaces, and components in your design.
Tools for detecting anomalies or discontinuities in surfaces that shading cannot
Quality
show.
www.SpaceClaim.com 768
Checking geometry
You can check the geometry for solids and surfaces. The geometry is checked for all possible ACIS
errors. Select errors and warnings in the dialog to highlight the associated geometry in the Design
window, as shown below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 769
Measuring
Select a tool from the Measure ribbon group to display measurements for the edges, faces, and
solids in your design.
Use the Measure tool to display measurements of the edges and faces in your design. Select
from this tool's menu to display edges and volumes of intersection.
Use the Mass Properties tool to display volume information for the objects in your design.
Use the Check Geometry tool to check geometry for common problems.
Use the Clearance tool to search an assembly for small gaps between parts.
www.SpaceClaim.com 770
Quick measurements
A simple measurement is displayed in the status bar when you select a single object or a pair of
objects. This measurement is displayed using the units and precision set in Units options for the cur-
rent document. The Measure tool also has a Units option to switch units for the measured values
without changing units for the document.
If the text in the quick measure area is cut off, move your mouse over the text area to show all of the
text.
To measure: Select:
Distance between two l Two parallel linear objects (lines, edges, axes)
objects
l Two parallel planar objects (faces, surfaces, planes)
l Two points or vertices
l One point or vertex and one curve or edge (curved or linear) - dis-
plays the shortest distance from the point to the curve or edge
l One point and one analytic face, edge, or curve - displays the pro-
jected distance of point onto face, edge, or curve
l Two parallel, but not concentric, cylindrical faces - displays the dis-
tance between the axes
l Two non-concentric circular edges or arcs - displays the distance
between the centers
Length of an object l A linear object (line, edge)
Radius of an object l A circular object (circular edge or curve, cylinder, sphere)
Angle between two l Two non-parallel linear objects (lines, edges, axes)
objects
l Two non-parallel planar objects (faces, surfaces, planes)
l Two analytic curves that share an end point - displays the angle
between the curves at the point where they meet
Offset l Two concentric cylindrical faces
l Two circular edges that are in the same plane
X, Y, Z coordinates l A point or vertex
from the world origin
www.SpaceClaim.com 771
Mass properties
Use the Mass tool to display volume information for the solids and surfaces in your design.
If you use the tool on a surface, it will display the total surface area. If there are multiple surfaces on
the same plane, the tool displays the total surface area for all the surfaces. To display the surfaces
individual surface areas, use the Measure tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 772
To measure the properties of a planar section
www.SpaceClaim.com 773
Displaying measurements
Use the Measure tool to display measurements of the edges and faces in your design. Any values dis-
played on screen are automatically copied into the Clipboard and can be pasted into another doc-
ument.
The Measure tool is accessible in the Ribbon and from within the Pull and Move tools. Measurement
values are selectable only when the tool is invoked within Pull or Move.
You can select units for measurement in the SpaceClaim Units options. You can also modify the Pre-
cision and Angular Precision values in the Measure Tool options.
The document origin is displayed by default. You can hold Alt and select the origin or its axes as ref-
erence objects, and the distance in that direction (or all three) is displayed.
If you hold Alt and select an origin, then you will see a preview of the X, Y, and Z distance from the
origin. This preview changes as you move your mouse over objects in the Design window. If you
hold Alt and select any plane, then the preview shows the distance from the point under the mouse
to the plane. If you hold Alt and select a line or axis, then the preview shows the distance from the
point under the mouse to the line. Clicking on an object sets the dimensions in the results box.
Negative values are displayed for the results when you select an origin and the measurement is neg-
ative in the direction of one or more axes.
To view a measurement
www.SpaceClaim.com 774
Triple-click on a body to display its total surface area.
3. (Optional) Hold Alt and select a reference object.
The reference can be a point, curve, edge, face, plane, axis, or origin.
You can measure to an axis of an origin object.
4. (Optional) Hover over a measurement value to display the Copy icon. Copy the value to the
clipboard for pasting into Notes, etc.
When measuring edges and curves, the Minimum and Maximum Curvature locations are high-
lighted in the geometry when you hover over the result as shown below.
Selecting a mesh body in the Measure tool reports the total surface area of the body.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select objects to measure tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to
select the object you want to measure.
The Select plane or origin tool guide allows you to set the measurement directions by
selecting an origin, origin axis, line, or plane. You can hold Alt and select the origin to display
the X, Y, and Z coordinates from the origin to the object being measured or between the
www.SpaceClaim.com 775
objects if you select two objects. You can select a plane or origin in the Structure tree or the
Design window.
Examples
Measuring between two points, with a reference face Alt+selected, so the projected distance is
appended to the measurement.
www.SpaceClaim.com 776
Measuring between two points, but the origin is Alt+selected as a reference, so the X, Y, and Z dis-
tances are shown.
www.SpaceClaim.com 777
Measuring the angle between a sketch curve and a face. The sketch curve is extended until it inter-
sects the face. Angle to surface normal is the angle between the extended curve and a line that is
perpendicular to the surface at the intersection point. Angle to surface is the angle between the
extended curve and a plane tangent to the surface at the intersection point.
www.SpaceClaim.com 778
Measuring a projected area
You can measure the projected area of one or more objects. The objects are projected onto a plane,
and the area of their silhouette is measured.
www.SpaceClaim.com 779
Analyzing quality
The tools in the Quality ribbon group allow you to detect any anomalies or discontinuities in a sur-
face that shading cannot show.
Use the Normal tool to display the normal direction ("inside" or "outside") of faces or surfaces.
Use the Curvature tool to display a fringe graph of the curvature along curves or edges.
Use the Draft tool to display a fringe graph of the selected surfaces, where each value is an
angle measurement.
Use the Grid tool to display the curves that define any face or surface in your design.
Use the Dihedral tool to display a fringe graph of the angle between two faces along the selec-
ted edges.
Use the Stripes tool to reflect a virtual 3D cube "room" on the selected faces.
Use the Deviation tool to show the distance from a source, or reference, body to a selected
body or Mesh body.
www.SpaceClaim.com 780
Displaying normal directions
This tool will display the normal direction of faces or surfaces in your design. The normal direction is
the "outside" of the face or surface. The normal can be flipped when you import models. Use this
tool to check and fix face normal directions.
Options
The following options are available with the Normal analysis tool:
Show face
normal
Display the normal direction using an arrow.
using
Arrow
Show face Display the normal direction using colors. Select colors for the front ("outside") and
normal back ("inside") using the drop-down menus. Use contrasting colors to make it easier
using Color to see which faces were incorrectly reversed on import.
www.SpaceClaim.com 781
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 782
Displaying curvature
Use this tool to show curvature values along faces or edges. You can use this analysis to identify
areas with very tight curves that can be difficult to offset or turn into thin solids.
You can also use the visualization to evaluate curvature continuity along a set of faces or edges.
Curvature continuity is when the curvature values change in a smooth, continuous manner. You can
see continuous curves because the data points will gradually change length or the transition
between face coloring is even and smooth. Sudden changes in the length of the data points or color
on a face indicates non-continuous curvature.
www.SpaceClaim.com 783
In addition to the face curvature display, the absolute values for minimum and maximum
curvature are displayed in the Properties panel.
The curvature with the smallest radius is shown in the maximum color (red is the default). The
curvature with the smallest radius, or no radius, is shown in the minimum color (gray is the
default).
Each line length of the fringe graph represents a curvature value C = absolute value (1/r) when
a surface or body is selected.
Options
The following options are available with the Curvature analysis tool:
Show edge curvature using:
Color Select a color for the fringe graph from the drop-down menu.
Scale Slide the scale or click + or - to increase or decrease the relative size of the fringe graph.
Slide the scale or click + or - to increase or decrease the density of sampling (the number
Density
of lines created along the edge).
Select Shading to display face curvature using color. Select colors for Min and Max from
Shading
the drop-down menus.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 784
Displaying draft angles
This tool will help you identify the amount of draft and direction on each face in a design.
You can use this tool to analyze parts that will be molded. Faces shown in red (the default color for a
negative draft angle) may not release properly from a mold. You should input the draft angle you
consider necessary for proper release. The draft angle may depend on a number of factors, including
material choice and design constraints.
To display draft
Tool guides
Within the Draft tool, there are several tool guides that help guide the behavior of the Draft tool:
The Draft Select tool guide is active by default. Use it to select the face(s) for which you want
to display draft angles.
Use the Draft Direction tool guide or Alt+click to select an alternate reference for the draft
direction.
www.SpaceClaim.com 785
Use the Draft Curve tool guide to select a temporary curve (created by the faces selected,
draft direction, and angle of one or both sides) to create the curve in the Structure tree.
Curves appear in the current layer color.
Options
The following options are available with the Draft analysis tool:
Direction Select One or Both to display the draft angle in one or both directions.
Angle Slide the scale or click - or + to set the minimum angle to display.
Color Select colors from the drop-down menus to indicate positive and negative draft angles.
Slide the scale or click - or + to adjust the color transition between sharp and smooth.
Color
The higher this setting, the more gradual the transition between positive and negative
Transition
faces.
Create
shadow Display shadow lines where the angle of the face is the same as the draft angle.
lines
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 786
The shadow line on these examples show where the angle of the curved face is the same as the draft
angle. The example on the left is shown with the Color Transition option set low, and the example
on the right shows the Color Transition set high.
www.SpaceClaim.com 787
Displaying the UV grid of a face
Use the Grid tool to display the curves that define any face or surface in your design. This tool dis-
plays a visual representation of the mathematical expression of the surface. The grid lines represent
the mathematical expression used to generate the surface. You can use it to identify a low quality sur-
face. For example, a face may look fine, but the underlying mathematical representation is unne-
cessarily complicated or poorly parameterized. You would have problems changing the face using
other tools.
If you find a face with underlying problems, you can delete the face, then use the Fill tool with the
Patch Blend option or the Replace tool to generate a new face.
Options
The following option is available with the Grid analysis tool:
Select Grid or Checker from the Texture menu. Use this option to increase performance
Shading
with large or complex designs.
Wire Slide the scale or click - or + to set the scale of the grid.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 788
Face grids displayed on a blended face and on a sphere
www.SpaceClaim.com 789
Displaying a dihedral graph
This tool can be used to visualize tangency (or lack of tangency) between two faces. You won't see
any data points if you select an edge between two tangent faces. Non-tangent faces will show data
points because the angle is more than 0. The larger the angle between the faces, the longer the
fringe lines will be at each test point.
You can use the Repair dihedral tool guide to make the faces tangent. You should only use this tool
guide if the faces are already close to tangent. Neighboring edges are not modified to be tangent as
well, so the results can be unexpected if the faces are not close to tangent.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
Use the Repair dihedral tool guide to make the faces along the measured edge tangent. The
tool guide will slightly modify the two faces to create an edge whose dihedral angle is close
to zero. You should only use this tool guide for faces that are close to tangent.
Options
The following options are available with the Dihedral analysis tool:
www.SpaceClaim.com 790
Color Select a color from the drop-down menu.
Scale Slide the scale or click - or + to decrease or increase the relative size of the fringe graph.
Slide the scale or click - or + to decrease or increase the number of points along the edge
Density
where the angle is measured and displayed.
www.SpaceClaim.com 791
Displaying stripes
This tool will reflect an infinite striped plane on the selected faces (or on all the faces of the selected
solid). This tool is useful to show how the smoothness of a surface.
Use this tool to visualize and check tangency and curvature continuity between faces. For example,
two surfaces may appear to have a smooth transition, but the Stripes tool will reveal an irregularity.
In the example above, the area marked with A has good continuity. The stripes line up almost per-
fectly across the edge. The area marked with B does not have good continuity. The stripes do not
quite line up at the edge.
If you find irregularities in your design, you can repair them using the following tools:
l Tangency (on the Prepare tab)
l Merge Faces (on the Prepare tab)
l Fill with the Patch Blend option (on the Design tab)
To display stripes
Options
The following options are available with the Stripes analysis tool:
Color Select light and dark colors for the pattern from the drop-down menu.
Slide the scale or click + or - to increase or decrease the stripe density (the number of
Density
lines in the pattern).
www.SpaceClaim.com 792
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 793
Displaying deviation
Use this tool to show thedistance froma source, or reference, body to a selected body or Mesh
body. Use this analysisto see how closely thegeometry of two bodies match up. For example, you
would use the Deviation toolwhen you reverse engineer a design from mesh data to see how
closely your design matches the mesh.
To display deviation
Options
The following options are available with the Deviation analysis tool:
Show edge curvature using
Source body
Select the method for defining the sample point spacing.
sample spacing
l Body - Use body faceting vertices as samplingpoints
l Percentage - Enter a percentage of the body's diameter to define
sample spacing
www.SpaceClaim.com 794
l Length - Enter a length to use as the sample spacing
Show Display controls:
l Shading - Use textured shading to indicate deviation
l Porcupine - Use lines to indicate deviation
l Sample points - Show sample points in the deviation display
l Target - Show the target body in the display
l Transparent Target - If the target body is displayed, show it as trans-
parent
Slide the scale or click + or - to increase or decrease the smothness of the
Color transition
transition between colors in the display.
Tolerance Display deviation results above a specified tolerance.
Colors Select colors for the display.
l Inside distance - Choose a color for displaying distances to sample
points inside of the target body
l Outside distance - Choose a color for displaying distances to sample
points outside of the target body
l Distance within tolerance - Choose a color for displaying distances
within the specified tolerance
www.SpaceClaim.com 795
Repairing problems
SpaceClaim can import a variety of native and neutral CAD formats, but you may need to clean up
and repair this data for use in SpaceClaim and for CAE. The Repairtab includes tools you can use to
repair imported models and prepare your designs for export and analysis.
The Repair tools are presented in the following groups:
l Solidify
l Fix
l Fix Curves
l Adjust
In general, when you need to repair geometryimported from another source, you use the tools in
the order they are presented in the ribbon (left to right).
Tools in theSolidify group fix problems that may exist in imported data, which prevent the model
from being solid.
Use the Stitch tool to combine surface part faces that are touching at their edges.
Tools in theFix group fix problems that may exist in imported data, which can exist in a solid model
but cause problems when you edit or modify the geometry.
Tools in the FixCurves groupfix problems that may exist in imported data, which cause problems
when working with curves.
www.SpaceClaim.com 796
Use the Curve Gaps tool to detect and fix gaps between curves.
Use the Small Curves tool to detect and remove small curves and fix the resulting gaps.
Use the Duplicate Curves tool to detect and remove duplicate curves.
Use the Fit Curves tool to improve selected curves by replacing them with lines, arcs, or
splines.
Tools in theAdjust group help you modify characteristics of your design that will affect analysis.
Use the Merge Faces tool to combine two or more faces into a single face.
Use the Small Faces tool to remove small faces from your design.
Use the Tangency tool to change nearly tangent faces so they are tangent.
www.SpaceClaim.com 797
Navigating through issues
The Navigate ribbon group allows you to quickly jump through all the problems identified by a tool
on this tab.
Click Select to convert the problem area into a selection and exit the tool for manual fixing.
Select Zoom to Fit to zoom in on each problem when you click next or back.
Select Clip Volume to put a Clip Volume spheres around the problem areas. You can then use the
Next and Back buttons to make them current.
www.SpaceClaim.com 798
Clip Volume places clipping spheres around the problem areas.
www.SpaceClaim.com 799
Stitching adjacent faces
The Stitch tool combines surface part faces that are touching at their edges. When the merged faces
form a closed surface, a solid is automatically created. You can use this tool to repair multiple sur-
face parts that are in separate components. Coincident faces are detected and removed before
Stitch merges surfaces into a single body.
www.SpaceClaim.com 800
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select and
fix problem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select faces that were not automatically
found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
Options
The following options are available:
Maximum dis- The maximum distance between faces that is automatically detected by the
tance tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 801
Repairing gaps
The Gaps tool removes gaps between faces. These gaps are usually found on parts imported from
other CAD systems when the native format allows faces to fit together loosely.
This tool only works for edges that are paired. Paired edges are edges that are within the maximum
distance along their length or that share an end point and are within the maximum angle you set in
the tools options. Use the Missing Faces tool if you need to repair a part with edges that are not
paired. When a gap is adjacent to a larger hole, this tool only repairs the gap and not the hole.
To remove gaps
www.SpaceClaim.com 802
l Click Next or Previous to step through and highlight each identified problem.
l Select Zoom to Fit if you want to automatically zoom in on the problem in the design
area when you click Next or Previous.
5. Click the Complete tool guide.
SpaceClaim adjusts neighboring faces to remove the highlighted gaps.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select prob-
lem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select edges that were not automatically
found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple edges or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
The Complete tool guide fills faces between all highlighted edges.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Maximum The maximum angle between any neighboring edge pairs in the potential miss-
angle ing face edge loop.
Maximum dis- The maximum distance between any pair of edges in the potential missing face
tance edge loop.
www.SpaceClaim.com 803
Missing faces
The Missing Faces tool automatically detects and fills missing faces on an object. This tool should be
used to find missing faces on imported designs.
Use the Fill tool to fill faces when you know where the edges of the new face should be. Use the
Missing Faces tool to identify missing faces and fill them automatically or choose which missing
faces you want created.
As a precaution, if your design includes any open edge loops, first be certain that the loop(s) are not
simply imported parts that may have been designed as a surface body with open regions.
The tool looks for missing faces that meet both of the minimum measurements.
www.SpaceClaim.com 804
l Fill: Fix the missing face by extending neighboring faces until they intersect.
l Patch: Fix the missing face by creating a new face through the bounding edges of neigh-
boring faces. To repair edge loops, select Patch and insert a new blended face. This new
face will include each relevant tangent neighboring face, enabling you to close any selec-
ted edge loops with the smoothest possible inside surface, thereby creating a more real-
istic design..
l Try both: Fix the missing face by extending neighboring faces. If that does not
work,SpaceClaim will attempt to fill by creating a patch.
l Allow multiple faces: Fix a hole in the surface with two or more missing faces.
4. Use the controls in the Navigate ribbon group to view each problem one at a time before you
fix it.
l Click Next or Previous to step through and highlight each identified problem.
l Select Zoom to Fit if you want to automatically zoom in on the problem in the design
area when you click Next or Previous.
5. Click the Complete tool guide.
SpaceClaim creates a new face using the method you selected in the Options panel.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select prob-
lem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select edges between faces that were not
automatically found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple edges or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
The Complete tool guide creates new faces in areas that are highlighted.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Minimum The minimum angle between all neighboring edge pairs in the potential missing face
angle edge loop.
Minimum
The minimum distance between all of edges in the potential missing face edge loop.
distance
www.SpaceClaim.com 805
Fill Fix the missing face by extending neighboring faces until they intersect.
Fix the missing face by creating a new face through the bounding edges of neighboring
faces.
Patch Faces with a high level of detail on a boundarymay haveone or more short edges. To
make a smooth patch on a boundary, short edges are automatically removed when
patching.
Fix the missing face by extending neighboring faces. If that does not work,SpaceClaim
Try both
will attempt to fill by creating a patch.
Allow
multiple Fix a hole in the surface with two or more missing faces.>
faces
www.SpaceClaim.com 806
Split edges
The Split Edges tool detects and merges coincident edges that do not mark the boundaries of new
faces.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
www.SpaceClaim.com 807
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select prob-
lem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select points that were not automatically
found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple points or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
www.SpaceClaim.com 808
Inexact edges
The Inexact Edges tool finds and repairs edges that have been inaccurately defined and do not meet
precisely. These types of edges are usually found in designs imported from other CAD systems, par-
ticularly from conceptual design systems.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the editing process:
www.SpaceClaim.com 809
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select prob-
lem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select edges that were not automatically
found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple edges or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
The Complete tool guide recalculates all the highlighted edges to increase the precision
between faces or surfaces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 810
Exact edges
The Extra Edges tool works like Merge Faces but operates on edges. Instead of merging two
faces by selecting the faces, you select the edges between faces to remove the extra edge and
merge the faces.
You should only merge faces that are tangent or close to tangent; otherwise, the results may not be
what you expect.
The Extra Edges tool is only intended to be used as preparation for analysis. Merging faces sim-
plifies the model by removing edges and makes the model more difficult to modify.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select and
fix problem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select faces that were not automatically
found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
www.SpaceClaim.com 811
To remove edges
1. Open a model which needs edges removed.
2. Click the Extra Edges tool in the Fix group of the Repair tab.
3. Edges which can be removed are highlighted.
4. Click the Complete tool guide to remove all edges at once.
5. You can also select areas to be excluded from fixing.
SpaceClaim removes the edges and merges the faces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 812
Duplicate faces
The Duplicates tool detects and fixes duplicate faces. SpaceClaim highlights the duplicates and will
remove them all, or you can select duplicates to exclude from being fixed.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select and
fix problem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select faces that were not automatically
found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
www.SpaceClaim.com 813
Merging faces
The Merge Faces tool replaces two or more neighboring faces with a single new face that closely fits
the original faces. Use this tool to simplify a model before you export it for analysis. Merging faces
can result in a smoother mesh on the solid.
You should only merge faces that are tangent or close to tangent; otherwise, the results may not be
what you expect.
You can't select edges when using the Merge Faces tool. You should use the Fill tool on the Design
tab when you need to select an edge and a face to fill in a missing face. The Missing Faces and Gaps
tools on the Prepare tab also perform this function.
The merge faces tool is only intended to be used as preparation for analysis. Merging faces
simplifies the model by removing edges and makes the model more difficult to modify.
To merge faces
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the editing process:
The Select tool guide is active by default. You can also select by drawing a box in the design
www.SpaceClaim.com 814
window.
The Maintain Tangency tool guide allows you to select faces with which you want to retain
tangency. The new face will be tangent to the face(s) you select. You can also use Alt+click to
select faces for tangency.
The Complete tool guide replaces the selected faces with a single face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 815
Removing small faces
The Small Faces tool detects and removes small and sliver faces in your design. You may want to
remove these faces before you export the design for analysis if they will have a negligible impact on
the analysis accuracy but a significant impact on its speed.
If the small face is tangent to a neighboring face, the tool will merge the small face with the neigh-
boring face. If no neighboring face is tangent, the tool will extend neighboring faces to remove the
small face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 816
fix it.
l Click Next or Previous to step through and highlight each identified problem.
l Select Zoom to Fit if you want to automatically zoom in on the problem in the design
area when you click Next or Previous.
5. Click the Complete tool guide.
SpaceClaim will remove the Selected faces.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. You must select objects that you want to
adjust in the Structure tree while this tool is active.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select small and sliver faces that were not
automatically detected. The face will only be removed if it is smaller than the maximum area
and/or width in the Options panel.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
The Complete tool guide removes all the faces that are highlighted.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Maximum Faces that are smaller than the maximum or area will be found and highlighted for
area adjustment.
Maximum Faces that are thinner than the maximum width will be found and highlighted for
width adjustment.
www.SpaceClaim.com 817
Adjusting tangency
The Tangency tool detects edges between faces that are close to tangent and adjusts the faces so
they are tangent.
If a faces is near tangent with more than one neighboring face, you will get the best results if you
make all the edges tangent at the same time.
www.SpaceClaim.com 818
5. Click the Complete tool guide.
SpaceClaim adjusts the highlighted edges so their adjacent faces are tangent.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select prob-
lem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select edges between faces that were not
automatically found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple edges or box select in the design area.
When you hover over an edge, you can see the two faces that would be affected by the
change.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Maximum The maximum angle to detect for tangency. For best results, keep this angle as
angle small as possible.
www.SpaceClaim.com 819
Simplifying a design
This tool examines a design and simplifies complex faces and curves into planes, cones, cylinders,
lines, arcs, etc. This automates the one-by-one Simplify capability found in the Replace tool.
To simplify a design
1. (Optional) Select the faces you want to simplify.
You may want to pre-select faces on large designs because it can be easier to simplify a
region at a time.
2. Click Simplify in the Adjust group of the Repair tab.
3. (Optional) Click the Select Geometry tool guide to select faces to simplify that aren't auto-
matically detected.
4. Click the Select Problem tool guide and click on a highlighted face to simplify the face or
click the Complete tool guide to simplify all highlighted faces.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select prob-
lem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select faces and curves that were not auto-
matically found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
The Complete tool guide replaces all the highlighted objects with simplified faces and
curves.
www.SpaceClaim.com 820
Relaxing surfaces
The Relax tool is used to look for surfaces that may have too many control points and reduce the
number of points. Reducing the number of control points 'relaxes' the surfaces and makes them
more stable.
To relax a surface
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select prob-
lem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select faces and curves that were not auto-
matically found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
The Complete tool guide replaces all the highlightedsurfaces with new surfaces based on
www.SpaceClaim.com 821
the Fix Options.
Find Options
l Minimum distance: Find faceswhose control points are less than the specified distance apart
in either direction.
l Maximum points: Find faces with more than the specified number of control points in either
direction.
Fix Options
l Density of points:Point density to applywhen relaxing the surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 822
Straightening faces
The Straighten tool is used to look forholes and planar faces that are inclined at angles less than a
specified value.
The examples below show how the tool straightens the faces.
The hole is adjusted equally relative to the center. So, the top edge shifts to the Left and the bottom
edge shifts to the Right.
The face is adjusted about its center. So, the left end adjusts Upward and the right end adjusts Down-
ward.
www.SpaceClaim.com 823
automatically detected.
3. Click the Select Problem tool guide and click on a highlighted hole or planar face
tostraighten itor click the Complete tool guide to straighten all highlighted holes and planar
faces.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select prob-
lem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select faces and curves that were not auto-
matically found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
The Complete tool guide replaces all the highlightedsurfaces with new surfaces based on
the Fix Options.
The SelectPlaneOrOrigin tool guide allows you to select an origin, origin axis, line, or plane
to usefor the measurement direction.
Find Options
l Maximum angle: Find faces inclined at less than the specified angle.
Fix Options
l Snap faces to nearest: Angularly misaligned faces will be adjusted to the snap tolerance, mak-
ing it easier to put model dimensions to round numbers. The images below show an example.
Precision is set to 3 decimal places with the trailing zeroes option turned on.
Snap faces to nearest is checked On.
The top face will be straightened by rotating the right edge down and the left edge up.
www.SpaceClaim.com 824
Snap faces to nearest= 0.001mm
www.SpaceClaim.com 825
Curve gaps
The Curve Gaps tool finds any gaps between curves and closes them. It can extend and/or move
lines to close the gaps.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select and
fix problem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select geometry that were not automatically
found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
www.SpaceClaim.com 826
Small curves
The Small Curves tool finds any curves smaller than a specified length.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select and
fix problem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select geometry that were not automatically
found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
The Complete tool removes the small curves and repairs the gaps they leave.
www.SpaceClaim.com 827
Duplicate curves
The Duplicate Curves tool finds any overlapping curves and deletes any extra curves.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select and
fix problem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select geometry that were not automatically
found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
www.SpaceClaim.com 828
Fitting curves
The Fit Curves tool attempts to create fewer and better curves to replace selected curves which
may not be continuous or tangent. You can also replace a curve with simple line segments as in the
example above.
Tool guides
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select geometry that were not automatically
found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Complete tool fixes the curves.
www.SpaceClaim.com 829
l Lines
l Arcs
l Splines
l Correct tangency: Check this option to make arcs tangent that are otherwise slightly
non-tangent.
5. Small curves are highlighted and new curve start and end points are indicated.
6. Click on problem areas to fix them or click the Complete tool guide.
The images below show the effect of the Check tangency option.
Without the Check tangency option checked, only one tangency is found.
With the Check tangency option checked, a slightly non-tangent arc is made tangent.
www.SpaceClaim.com 830
Preparing designs for analysis
Use the tools in the Analysis group to create or subdivide bodies for analysis.
Use the Volume Extract tool to create a solid based on an enclosed region within a part.
Use the Midsurface tool to create a surface midway between two offset faces.
Use the Split by Plane tool to split a part based on a plane.
Use the Spot Weld tool to define points on two faces that represent weld points.
Use the Imprint tool to imprint coincident faces.
Use the Extend tool to extend surface edges or curves up to intersecting bodies.
Use the Enclosure tool to detect coincident faces, edges, or vertices and imprint them to
allow for mesh connections.
Tools in the Remove group help you easily remove elements to simplify your designs.
Tools in the Detect group help you easily find geometry problems in your designs.
Use the Short Edges tool to find edges shorter than a specified length that may impact mesh-
ing results.
Use the Overlap Faces tool to find faces that overlap.
Use the Clearance tool to find small gaps between parts.
Create and edit beam objects with the tools in the Beams group.
www.SpaceClaim.com 831
Use the Profiles tool to select a profile for a beam object.
Use the Create tool to define a beam using a profile from the library.
Use the Extract tool to define a beam and profile from a solid.
Use the Orient tool to change the orientation or axis of the beam.
www.SpaceClaim.com 832
Extracting volume
Use the Volume Extracttool in the Analysis group on the Prepare tab to create a
solid based on the volume enclosed by a single body or set of bodies (including
meshes). A solid named Volume is created in the Structure tree, and the bodies used
to generate the volume are temporarily transparent when the volume is created.
If a surface intersects all of the edges you select to enclose the region, it will be
used to cap the created volume. You can create cleaner caps by placing surfaces at
each of the edges you use to define the enclosed region.
If an edge will be removed when you use the Volume Extract tool, that edge
will flash red and you will receive a warning message. This can happen when
you select a capping edge that will be removed when it is merged with the
rest of the model. The highlight identifies the problem so you can pick a dif-
ferent edge.
1. Click the Volume Extract tool in the Analysis group of the Prepare tab.
2. Click the Select Edges tool guide to select the edge loops that enclose the
volume of the area.
You can double-click to select more than one contiguous edge. You can also
click a selected edge to deselect it. Select edge loops only that you intended
to use to enclose the volume area. If you hover over a face that contains
internal edge loops, the edge loops are highlighted. Click the face to select
the highlighted edge loops.
3. If necessary, click the Select Cap Faces tool guide to cap a face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 833
4. (Optional): Select the Preview inside faces checkbox to activate the Preview
slider. Your model immediately updates to paint a preview of the inner faces
shown in red at 100%. Move the slider to the left and right to preview the
faces, and see a progression of how the faces were captured.
When previewing the faces, all Select tools and context menu Select tools, as
well as all Volume Extract tool guides, are disabled until the Preview checkbox
is turned off.
5. Click the Select Seed Face tool guide and select a face inside the volume area.
The Select Seed Face tool guide is used to select a face to determine the
inside of the enclosed volume. You only need to use this tool guide if the
Volume Extract tool fails to correctly identify the inside of the volume.
6. Click the Complete tool guide.
SpaceClaim creates a surface part based on the volume you defined.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Edges tool guide selects edge loops that enclose a region. Edges
are used to stop the propagation of face selection, emanating face-wise out-
ward, starting at the selected seeds.
The Select Faces tool guide activates by default when you select the Volume
Extract tool, and selects faces whose edges seal an enclosed region. This is a
shortcut to selecting all the edges that are detected in a face. You can Ctrl+
Select multiple seed faces, and then choose to click on a different tool
guide. Once you create a volume, the Select Faces tool guide resets by
default.
www.SpaceClaim.com 834
The Select Cap Faces tool guide selects optional capping faces. This is
important when an internal edge loop is either not simply fillable, or when
you want some non-standard fill geometry to be created.
The Select Seed Face tool guide selects a face that lies within the volume
you want to enclose. If this is not chosen, then SpaceClaim chooses an arbit-
rary face to start from, and test whether any bounded volumes are created. If
they are not, another face will automatically be selected and the algorithm
will re-start. Select a face here to save this iteration time.
The Complete tool guide creates the volume solid based on the edges and
seed face you select.
www.SpaceClaim.com 835
Creating midsurfaces
This tool creates a surface midway between two offset faces. The midsurface faces are automatically
extended or trimmed to adjacent faces, and the distance between the faces is stored as a thickness
property. You can use these surfaces for FE analysis.
Color highlighting shows you face pairs that have been selected, as shown below. The midsurface
face will be offset from the cyan faces. Green indicates that a face is paired with a cyan face. Unse-
lected faces and faces without offsets are shown in the original color.
The thickness of the original model face offsets are stored as a property named Thickness in the Mid-
surface section of the Properties panel. This is a face property, so you must select the face in the
Design window rather than in the Structure tree, even if it is a single face. You can change this prop-
erty, and it is included in the ANSYS data when it is sent out to ANSYS via the SpaceClaim add-in.
The Midsurface tool detects and removes small faces of midsurfaces that are created when an edge
is equal to half of the part thickness.
If the Midsurface tool finds missing faces because neither side can be offset, you will receive an
error message in the error box that lists the faces. If the tool fails to create midsurface parts, the
problem faces or edges are highlighted.
Midsurfaces inherit the material properties of their parent components, but you can change the
material properties for the midsurface object.
www.SpaceClaim.com 836
same offset distance will be added to the selection.
5. Click detected face pairs to remove them or click undetected face pairs to add them.
Two faces may be detected as a pair because they have the same offset distance as the face
pairs to be midsurfaced. Click on the blue face to remove the pair from selection.
A face pair that should be midsurfaced may not be detected because its offset pair is not a per-
fect offset of the first face. Click on the face you want offset to add it to the selection. Its mid-
surface will be offset using the thickness of neighboring detected face pairs.
6. (Optional) Click the Select Faces tool guide or hold the Ctrl key and select additional face
pairs with a different offset distance.
When you add face pairs, all face pairs with the same offset distance will be added to the
selection.
7. Click the Complete tool guide when you are finished selecting faces.
When you successfully create a midsurface, the solid will become semi-transparent and the sur-
face will be opaque until you select a different tool or clear your selection.
Midsurface bodies are created in a component in the Structure tree, and are named using the
name of the original object and appended with MidsurfaceN, where N is a unique number.
www.SpaceClaim.com 837
To change the thickness of a midsurface face
1. Select the midsurface face in the Design window.
2. Change the Thickness property in the Properties panel.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Faces tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select a pair of
offset faces, and all other face pairs with the same offset distance are automatically detected.
The Add/Remove Faces tool guide allows you to select additional faces to offset or remove
detected face pairs from the selection.
The Swap Sides tool guide allows you to switch the face pairs. You may need to do this when
you detect pairs with more than one offset distance, and the offset relationships are incor-
rectly detected.
The Complete tool guide creates the midsurface faces.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Use selec-
Select this option to create midsurfaces for only the faces you select.
ted faces
Use range Select this option to create midsurfaces on all faces in the specified thickness range.
Thickness Change the value of this option to detect offset spline faces with an offset value
tolerance within the tolerance amount.
Select Same component to create the midsurfaces in the same component as the
Create mid-
part you selected for midsurfacing. Select Active component to create the mid-
surfaces in
surfaces in the active component.
Select this option to create midsurfaces in a new sub-component. Deselect the
Group mid-
option to create the midsurface objects in the component you select in the option
surfaces
above (same component or active component).
www.SpaceClaim.com 838
Examples
Selecting an additional face pair with the Use selected faces option and the Select Faces tool guide.
All face pairs with the same offset are added to the selection.
Removing a face that was automatically detected but not desired as a midsurface pair
www.SpaceClaim.com 839
Weld points
The Spot Weld tool creates points on two faces that represent weld points. Each spot weld consists
of two points: one on each face that is to be welded together. Each point must lie on a face or edge.
For export to ANSYS, each point must lie on a different solid or surface part.
When spot weld points are found on another body, the set does not include points with mates
within the same body, as shown below. Weld points in a set that have mates are blue and points that
do not have mates are gray.
Spot welds are updated with changes to the guiding edges or base faces.
l If a guiding edge disappears, the points created along it are removed.
l If a mate face moves out of the search range the weld point, the pairs to that mate face will
disappear.
l If the mate face moves back into the range, the point pairs will reappear.
l If pairs cannot be found for all of the points on the base face, the spot weld is marked in the
Structure tree with an error icon showing that it is no longer valid.
Dimensions for spot weld point patterns are displayed in the Design window. These dimensions look
the same as dimensions for other patterns.
Exporting to ANSYS
Spot welds defined for the design can be exported to ANSYS. ANSYS Design Modeler and ANSYS
Workbench recognize the weld points with the following limitations:
l Only points with mates can be used for simulation.
l You may place weld points between multi-body parts if the two bodies belong to different
parts. Spot welds defined between bodies in the same part are not transferred to simulation.
www.SpaceClaim.com 840
l You can approximate seam welds by placing weld points on the guiding edge with an offset
of zero, if no mating face is found on either side of the base face.
l SpaceClaim supports spot welds of more than two weld points (more than two components
are welded together at one location), but Simulation does not; Simulation ignores any weld
points after the first two supplied.
If a spot weld joint in SpaceClaim contains a spot weld with more than two weld points, then a
chain of pairs of weld points is transferred to Simulation as separate spot welds, and each two-
point spot weld is listed separately under the Connections node. For example, if a single
SpaceClaim spot weld connects parts A-B-C-D, this is transferred as three separate spots welds:
A-B, B-C, and C-D.
www.SpaceClaim.com 841
You can set either the number of points or the increment. The last value you enter will
be used. For example, if you change the number of points, the increment will auto-
matically update. If you then change the increment, the number of points will change.
l Search range: The distance to search for mating faces from the guiding edge.
6. Click the Create spot weld tool guide to define the spot welds.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
Use the Select Base Faces tool guide to select the face or faces on which the weld points will
be defined. You should select a single face or a chain of tangent faces.
Use the Select Guiding Edges tool guide to define the edge along which the weld points
will be defined.
Use the Select Mating Faces tool guide to change the mating face from the face that is auto-
matically detected. You can select more than one face. Clicking on a mating face removes all
previously selected faces and holding Ctrl adds a face.
The Complete tool guide completes the spot weld definition.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Start off-
The distance of weld points from the beginning of the guiding edge.
set
Edge off-
The distance of weld points from the guiding edge.
set
End offset The distance of weld points from the end of the guiding edge.
Number
The number of weld points to define for each edge chain.
of points
The distance between weld points. You can set either the number of points or the incre-
Increment ment. The last value you enter will be used. For example, if you change the number of
points, the increment will automatically update. If you then change the increment, the
www.SpaceClaim.com 842
number of points will change.
Search
The distance to search for mating faces from the guiding edge.
range
Example
www.SpaceClaim.com 843
Enclosures
An enclosure is a solid around a body or bodies that has a cushion around the enclosed solid(s). The
enclosure can be a box, cylinder, or sphere, as shown below.
Enclosures are used by analysis tools to simulate fluid.
To create an enclosure
1. Click Enclosure in the Analysis section of the Prepare tab.
2. Select one or more solid or mesh bodies in the Design window or Structure tree.
These bodies will be inside the enclosure.
3. Set the Default cushion amount.
This is a percentage of the minimum enclosure size, and determines the initial distance
between the enclosed object(s) and the closest point of the enclosure to the objects. You can
adjust the distances by typing in the fields in the Design window.
4. Select the shape of the enclosure in the Options panel: Box, Cylinder, Sphere, or Custom
shape.
If you select Custom shape, you must use the Custom Shape tool guide to select a solid to
use as the enclosure shape.
5. (Optional) Click the Set Orientation tool guide and select a line, axis, or origin to change the
orientation of the enclosure.
The enclosure is oriented with the world origin by default.
6. (Optional) Deselect the Symmetric dimensions option to set the cushion distance different for
dimensions that are opposite each other.
7. (Optional) Type a value to adjust the cushion values, if necessary.
www.SpaceClaim.com 844
Press Tab to move among the cushion values.
8. Click the Complete tool guide when you are finished.
The enclosure is created in a sub-component of the active part.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
Use the Select Bodies tool guide to select the bodies that will be enclosed.
Use the Set Orientation tool guide to change the orientation of the enclosure relative to
your design or the axis of a coordinate system.
Use the Custom Shape tool guide to select a solid to use as the custom shape when you set
the enclosure type to Custom in the Options panel.
Click the Complete tool guide when you are finished.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
This is a percentage of the minimum enclosure size, and determines the distance
Default
between the enclosed object(s) and the closest point of the enclosure to the objects.
cushion
You can change adjust the distances by typing in the fields in the Design window.
Enclosure Select an enclosure shape from the list. If you select Custom shape, you must use the
type Custom Shape tool guide to select a solid to use as the enclosure shape.
Symmetric Forces the dimensions to remain symmetric. Deselect this option if you want to enter
dimensions values for dimensions and you don't want the opposite dimensions changed.
Examples
Changing the cushion by typing in the field doesn't change the size of the opposite cushion. The
Symmetric dimensions option must be disabled.
www.SpaceClaim.com 845
Changing the orientation of the enclosure so it is aligned with the edge highlighted in yellow aligns
the enclosure with that edge.
www.SpaceClaim.com 846
Split by plane
The Split by Plane tool splits parts based on a plane. It is intended to be used to split symmetrical
parts for analysis. This tool is similar to Split Solid, except Split by Plane allows you to select an axis,
point, or edge, to use as splitting plane locations which are not allowed by Split Solid.
The part below has been split along the length of its handle. The purple and green parts are sym-
metrical, and can be analyzed faster than the whole part.
To split by plane
1. Click Split by Plane in the Analysis group of the Prepare tab.
2. Select the object(s) you want to split.
3. Select a plane to split the object:
l To split the part on the same plane as a face, edge, or point, click Select Cutter and
select a reference face, edge, or point.
l To define a temporary plane based on design elements, click Build Cutting Plane and
select faces, edges, or points to define the plane. You can select more than one face,
edge, or point, and the cutting plane will be created that bisects the elements. The
wrench in the image above is tapered. Using the Build Cutting Plane tool guide, you can
select the top and bottom of the wrench to create a plane that bisects the wrench along
its plane of symmetry.
4. To delete objects created by the split, click the Select Regions tool guide and mouse over the
parts created by the split. The regions will be highlighted. Click to delete the region.
5. Click the Complete tool guide.
SpaceClaim splits the solid along the plane.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the editing process:
www.SpaceClaim.com 847
The Select Target tool guide is active by default. Use this tool guide to select the object that
will be split.
Use the Select Cutter tool guide to select a reference face, edge, or point with which to cut
the part. Use Ctrl to select more than one object. The plane is previewed in gray before you
select the reference object.
Use the Build Cutting Plane too guide to select faces, edges, or points to create a temporary
plane with which to cut the object. The temporary plane(s) are shown with a dashed line.
Select a temporary plane to complete the split.
Use the Select Regions tool guide to select regions that will be removed. You can move your
mouse over regions that were created and highlight them before you click to delete.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Merge Select this option to merge all touching solids or surfaces when you exit the tool. Hidden
when objects are not merged. This saves you the extra step of selecting all the cut-up regions
done after you are done and manually merging them all back together.
www.SpaceClaim.com 848
Extend
Use this tool to extend or trim surfaces and merge them with nearby parts, or to extend or trim
sketch curves. The tool automatically detects faces that can be extended or trimmed and highlights
them, as shown below. Click on a highlighted area to perform the extension or trimming. You can
also select a surface that wasn't automatically detected and attempt to extend or trim it. This tool
only works with surface parts and sketch curves.
www.SpaceClaim.com 849
4. Click Complete if you want to extend or trim all highlighted surfaces.
Press Esc to cancel the operation.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select and fix
problem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select faces that were not automatically found.
Hold Ctrl to select multiple objects or box select in the design area.
The Complete tool guide merges or trims the highlighted surfaces.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
Maximum dis- The maximum distance between parts. The tool will search for adjacent faces
tance again if you change this value.
Trim surfaces Controls whether or not surfaces may be trimmed in addition to extended.
Partial inter-
Controls whether or not faces that partially intersect are detected.
sections
Allows a surface to be trimmed or extended by a face or edge on the same
Same body
body.
Finds surfaces to extend to curves when the curve is in the same plane as the
Extend to curves
surface.
Merge after Merges bodies, if possible, when you trim or extend an edge on one surface
extend or trim body up to a face or edge on another body.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 850
The edges of separate surfaces are merged when you select the Merge after extend or trim option.
You can extend curves to surfaces and surfaces to curves when you select the Extend to curves
option.
www.SpaceClaim.com 851
Imprinting
The Imprint tool detects coincident faces, edges, and vertices between bodies and imprints them
onto the coincident face. The contact regions will be the same shape, and the resulting mesh on
each face will be similar. This can be helpful when analyzing stress between two parts.
To imprint a part
1. Click Imprint in the Analysis group of the Prepare tab. The tool will automatically detect and
highlight coincident edges, as shown in the image above.
2. Select the object(s) you want to change:
l Use the Select Problem tool guide to select highlighted areas that you want to change.
The cursor will change to a hand when you move the mouse over a problem area. This
tool guide is active by default.
l Use the Select Geometry tool guide to select edges that were not automatically detec-
ted. You can use box, lasso, and paint select modes.
3. Use the controls in the Navigate ribbon group to view each problem one at a time before you
fix it.
l Click Next or Previous to step through and highlight each identified problem.
l Select Zoom to Fit if you want to automatically zoom in on the problem in the design
area when you click Next or Previous.
www.SpaceClaim.com 852
4. Click the Complete tool guide.
SpaceClaim imprints the selected edges of the coincident faces.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the editing process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select prob-
lem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Complete tool guide imprints all the highlighted edges.
www.SpaceClaim.com 853
Removing rounds
The Rounds tool provides a quick and easy way to remove rounds from an object. It is similar
to the Fill tool, except with the Rounds tool, you can only select rounded edges.
The image below shows an example of well-formed rounds, on the left, and poorly formed rounds,
on the right:
To ensure accurate and complete round removal, remove the rounds in the reverse order in which
they were created, as shown in the example below of a model with colored rounds:
www.SpaceClaim.com 854
To remove rounds
To split and partially remove a round:
1. Click Rounds from the Remove group on the Prepare tab.
Avoid splitting into a round. Instead, split on either side of it. You may need to split and par-
tially remove one or more rounds before adjacent rounds can be removed, especially when
two or more rounded faces meet along an edge or vertex. The rounded face is split and filled
in the middle. To select faces or capping faces, use the Faces tool.
2. Hover over one tangent edge of the rounded face to display the round's split lines. These lines
show you a visual indication of where the round will split, as shown below. You can move the
split lines by moving your mouse.
If necessary, from the Options panel, change the Cap width option to adjust the percentage of the
round face that is removed.
l Click on the edge to split the rounded face.
l Select the rounds you want to remove:
l Click an object in the Structure tree to select all rounds on the object.
l Select a round face in the design area. You can hold Ctrl and select faces or draw a box to
www.SpaceClaim.com 855
select multiple faces.
l Ctrl+click to deselect a face.
l From the context menu choose Select > Using Box. Move your mouse over the area you want
to remove to identify the parts you want to select. Draw the selection box around the area.
You can only select round faces while this tool is active.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Rounds to Remove tool guide is active by default. You can also select by drawing a
box in the design window. You can only select round faces while this tool is active.
The Complete tool guide finishes the operation. F or Enter are shortcuts for removing the
rounds.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
l Auto-shrink fill area: Select this option to split round faces where they can't be removed
when you select a chain of rounds and it cannot be filled in its entirety. The rounds will be par-
tially removed.
l Cap width: The percentage of the width of a round that is removed when you click on an
edge of an existing round. The splits are previewed as the cursor is moved along the round
tangent edges.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 856
Using other tools to remove rounds
l As an option, when removing rounds, you can also use the Replace tool from the Edit group
on the Design tab, to replace one face with another. You can replace multiple faces with a
single face, replace a single face with multiple faces, or replace multiple faces with multiple
other faces.
l
www.SpaceClaim.com 857
Using the Sphere tool to split and partially remove a round
www.SpaceClaim.com 858
Displaying interference
Use the Curves tool to display the edges where solids intersect each other, as shown in the
example below with a block and a sphere.
Use the Volumes tool to display volumes created by the intersection of solids, surfaces, and
components in your design, as shown in the example below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 859
To display volumes of intersection
Tool guides
Within the Volumes tool, there are several tool guides that help guide the behavior of the tool:
The Select Targets tool guide allows you to selectthe objects for which interference will be
shown.
The Create Volume tool guide allows you to select an area of interference and create a new
solid from the volume.
Options
The following options are available:
l Collapse to parent component: All ofthe components sub-components are treated as part
of a single solid when performing the volume interference calculation. Select this option to
optimize performance.
www.SpaceClaim.com 860
Removing interference
The Interference tool detects and removes interference from clashing bodies. The interference is
removed from the body with the largest volume.
The tool searches all visible bodies for interference. Bodies that are hidden (turned off in the Struc-
ture tree) are ignored.
If you want to remove an interfering region from one of the bodies, use the Interference Volumes
tool on the Measure tab to create a solid of the interfering region. You can then use the Combine
tool to remove this solid from one of the parts.
To remove interference
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select prob-
lem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 861
The Select Geometry tool guide allows you to select edges that were not automatically
found. Hold Ctrl to select multiple edges or box select in the design area.
The Complete tool guide merges the clashing objects.
www.SpaceClaim.com 862
Removing faces
The Faces tool allows you to quickly remove faces from your design. Use it to simplify your design
by removing holes, protrusions, etc.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Faces to Remove tool guide is active by default. You can also select by drawing a
box in the design window. You can only select faces while this tool is active. Edges and vertices
will not be selected.
The Complete tool guide finishes the operation.
www.SpaceClaim.com 863
Finding short edges
The Short Edges tool finds any edges smaller than a specified length. If the design needs to be
meshed for running simulations, short edges have an impact on the mesh quality.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Problem tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select and
fix problem areas that are automatically found by the tool.
The Exclude Problem tool guide allows you to exclude areas from selection and fixing.
The Complete tool fixes all remaining problem areas or those that are currently selected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 864
Bad faces
The Bad Faces tool detects faces that have corrupt rendering. It detects bad edges that get flagged
when faceting faces for graphics display.
www.SpaceClaim.com 865
Overlapping faces
The Overlapping Faces tool detects faces that overlap. The example below shows an imported sur-
face model. The lower face extends past the point of tangency with the upper face.
Overlapping faces
www.SpaceClaim.com 866
Checking clearance
The Clearance tool helps you easily find small gaps between faces.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
l Maximum distance: The maximum distance to detect for near faces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 867
Show contact
Use thistool in theValidate group on the Prepare tab to display a preview of topology sharing.
Show Contactlets you see before sending to ANSYS exactly what topology would be shared.
To further define your share topology, and to help you identify any failed or missing connections or
parts, you can use the Edges and Vertices toggle check boxes in the Options panel to hide or show
edge junctions, laminar edges, free beams, and beam junctions and ends. This allows you to get an
isolated preview of the models face, edge, and vertex connections.
www.SpaceClaim.com 868
Beams
Edges of sur-
face bodies
Show Laminar Edges Red that are not
connected to
anything
Beams that
are not
entirely con-
nected (i.e.
Show Free Beams Orange
coincident to
an edge or
embedded
within a face.
Vertex
options con-
trol the dis-
play of
Vertex Options connected
endpoints
(Beam end-
points and
intersections).
Shared points
on Beams (i.e.
shared end-
Show Beam Junctions Blue
points or
interior inter-
sections).
Non-shared
Show Beam Ends Red endpoints of
Beams.
www.SpaceClaim.com 869
Beams
A beam is a long, thin object with a constant cross-section. Defining objects as beams, rather than
modeling them as solid geometry, simplifies the model and analysis.
To create a beam
1. Create objects to define the beam path
One or more of the following methods can be used in the same design:
l Sketch curves: Use any of SpaceClaim's sketching tools to create straight or curved seg-
ments and then assign beam profiles to them. These sketch curve beams can then be
modified just like any curve in SpaceClaim using the Move, Pull, Select, Scale, Bend,
Extend, and Trim tools. This method is a straightforward, lightweight way to create beam
structures.
l Edges of a solid or surface: Use this method when you have solid geometry that you
want to reference for the beams. For example, to create a simple rectangular cage of
beams, sketch a rectangle, pull it into a solid, and assign beams to all of the edges. If
you change the solid, then the beams will dynamically update to match the location and
length of the edges. Any of SpaceClaim's modeling tools can be used to create soph-
isticated geometry changes that drive changes to the beam structure.
For example, beams are assigned to the edges of the rectangular part shown below, and
then the edges are bent. The beams are automatically updated when the solid is
changed.
l Two points or midpoints in a model: You can use any two points in a model to define a
straight beam segment. Planes can be used to create "stages" or additional locations for
defining beams to or from. A beam can be created to the intersection point of any plane
with any edge. When a defining plane is moved, any associated beams dynamically
update their locations. You can create sophisticated tower and truss structures using this
method, and the structures will be easily adaptable to unforeseen design changes.
In the example below, one end of each diagonal beam was created at the intersection of
www.SpaceClaim.com 870
the plane and the solid. The beams change when the plane is moved.
More than one beam can reference the same profile, so the characteristics of all beams
that use that profile will change if you edit the profile.
A Beams folder is created for the beams and a Beam Profiles folder is created for the profiles in the
Structure tree:
www.SpaceClaim.com 871
The profile name is displayed in parentheses after the beam name in the Structure tree.
You can import groups from a beam profile into your design document, which makes them available
to drive changes within ANSYS. The groups are named based on the profile name, as <profile
name>_<group name>.
The beams and surfaces must be in the same component, the component must be set to share, and
the mixed import option in Workbench must be set to lines and surfaces. See Shared topology in
ANSYS for more information about shared topology.
www.SpaceClaim.com 872
Beam highlighting
The following table shows how beams, sketch lines, and edges look when they are highlighted and
selected:
Beam
Sketch
Edge
www.SpaceClaim.com 873
Creating beams
The library of standard profiles includes several basic beam profiles. You can use these profiles and
edit them to your own dimensions.
Create a beam
1. Click Create in the Beams group on the Prepare tab.
The Create tool won't be active until you select a profile, which adds the profile to your design
document.
2. Select edges or points to define the beam path:
l Click the Select Point Chain tool guide and then select an edge or curve, or click on a
series of points to create the path.
l Click the Select Point Pairs tool guide and then select a beginning and end point for
the path.
l You can use intersection points and midpoints on edges and other beams. Click on the
small triangles on the ends and midpoint when you hover over an edge or beam.
The beam object is defined, and the Beams and Beam Profiles folders are created in the Structure
tree. The profile name is displayed in parentheses after the beam name in the Structure tree.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
Use the Select Point Chain tool guide to create a beam along an edge or a series of points
that you select.
Use the Select Point Pairs tool guide to create a beam between two points.
www.SpaceClaim.com 874
Extracting beams from solids
www.SpaceClaim.com 875
Beam properties
Select a beam in the Beams folder and you can change the following properties, which are found in
the Beam section of the Properties panel:
l Profile Name
l Orientation: The angle of the profile relative to the path.
l Reversed: Changing this property flips the profile.
l Section Anchor: Select the location where the profile intersects with the path of the beam:
Area Centroid, Shear Center, or Location. If you select Location, then you can enter the X and Y
coordinates of the anchor location. Area Centroid is the default.
l Location: Correspond with the orientation arrows in the beam Orient tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 876
Product of inertia:
The warping constant, shear center and torsional constants are calculated from the warping function.
The warping function is the solution to the St. Venant boundary value problem for pure torsion:
Using the Trefftz definition, the shear center and warping constant are calculated purely as a prop-
erty of the section:
X coordinate of shear center:
Warping constant:
with
www.SpaceClaim.com 877
Creating beam profiles
You can create your own beam profiles and save them as files.
To use these profiles, click Profiles, select More Profiles, and then browse to locate the SCDOC file.
www.SpaceClaim.com 878
Beam profiles
Profiles are found in the Beam Profiles folder in the Structure tree.
To edit a profile
1. Right-click the profile on the Structure tree.
2. Select Edit Beam Profile.
The profile will open as a sketch in a new Design window.
3. Change the profile like you would a sketch.
Each profile has driving dimensions set up in the Groups panel, and each annotation dimen-
sion is labeled to show you which group it corresponds with. You can change these dimen-
sions to alter the profile. See Working with groups.
www.SpaceClaim.com 879
To remove a profile from the Beam Profiles folder
1. Select the profile in the Structure tree.
Example
The labels of the annotation dimensions on a beam profile correspond with the group names.
www.SpaceClaim.com 880
Orienting beams
Use this tool to change the direction of a beam, rotate it around its anchor point, and offset it from
its anchor point.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select the beam
object that you want to reorient.
The Orient to Object tool guide allows you to select a face, edge, or axis and orient the beam
www.SpaceClaim.com 881
in that direction.
Example
www.SpaceClaim.com 882
Moving beams
You can use the Move tool to move beams. The Move tool has a special Keep beam fixed option
for beams. This options causes the beam (shown in dark green) to be offset while the profile (shown
as a green semi-transparent 3D object) remains fixed.
When you move more than one beam at a time and select the Keep beam fixed option, the beam
profiles moving along a trajectory that can be reversed (normal to the trajectory) are moved and the
beam profiles that can't be reversed (along the trajectory) remain fixed. The beam is offset with
equal and opposite changes to the Location property and the location of the beam's section is main-
tained. You can see this in the preview geometry for the beam.
Moving the beams without the Keep beam fixed option moves all beams and profiles:
Moving the beams with the option selected moves the two beams that are normal to the trajectory,
but the two beams that aren't normal to the trajectory are offset:
www.SpaceClaim.com 883
Beam display
www.SpaceClaim.com 884
Working with sheet metal
You can use SpaceClaim to create sheet metal designs and components.
SpaceClaim recognizes a component as sheet metal if it consists of only planar, cylindrical, and con-
ical faces, and when faces are offsets of the same size.
Sheet metal parts are displayed in azure (blue) by default. Unfolded parts are displayed in purple, as
shown in the image below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 885
Converting a design to sheet metal
Use the Convert tool in the Import ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to convert an existing
design to sheet metal within SpaceClaim. You may need to convert if you imported regular geo-
metry or if you moved a part to another component.
When you click the Convert tool and select a surface body of a design, the surface body auto-
matically thickens into a sheet metal body at the default sheet metal thickness. This enhancement
eliminates the need to redo a surface you may have sketched prior to converting the design to sheet
metal. After you convert the body, you can use the Identify tool to call out forms, joggles, hems, etc.
Walls, bends, junctions (only created, default-sized junctions, not imported junctions), and forms that
were made in Sheet Metal are identified by color: Faces are blue, junctions are purple, forms are
orange, partial bends are yellow, and edges of end faces that are not square are red. Identification is
important because it allows the element to be unbent or flattened when you unfold the part.
See Converting a solid to a sheet metal part tutorial for a hands-on example with additional steps
you may need to perform when you convert a part, such as adding reliefs and junctions.
www.SpaceClaim.com 886
3. Click the Assign Objects tool guide.
4. Convert hard edges to junctions:
1. Select an option from the Junction tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Select the hard edges that you want to convert to the current junction type.
Clicking an edge shown in red creates a junction or squares up a sharp face. The edge
you click to square a face determines the final length of the sheet metal wall.
When you convert to sheet metal, faces that have problems are identified with error messages in the
Status Log. Clicking on each message will highlight the problem with red blinking. In the example
below,the message is selected and the problem is highlighted in the upper left corner of the left-
most image. A detailed view of the problem geometry is shown below in the rightmost image.
www.SpaceClaim.com 887
Example
Tool guides
Use the Select Bodies tool guide to select the part(s) you want to convert to sheet metal.
Use the Assign Objects tool guide to assign or change the junction types, reliefs, and
notches. You can only select geometry that is appropriate for the tool guide.
www.SpaceClaim.com 888
Identifying sheet metal
When you use the Convert tool to convert a body to sheet metal, or, are working with an existing
sheet metal body, only the sheet metal faces that are separated by the default sheet metal thickness
are shown in blue, but sheet metal that varies in thickness from the default, as shown in the image
below, does not display in blue:
After you haveconverted adesign to sheet metal, you can use the Identify tool in the Import
ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to call out sheet metal geometry such as forms, hems, joggles,
beads, notches, and gussets.
You can alsouse Select>Using Box to identify sheet metal geometry. Box selecting selects front and
back faces of the pre-identified sheet metal geometry.
Some geometry is automatically identified and other geometrymust be manually assigned. As the
geometry is identified, the highlighting color changes to indicate. the sheet metal object.
Objects in a converted sheet metal part must be identified before they can be unfolded.
1. Click the Identify tool in the Import group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Identify each of the followingobjects as needed by clicking the appropriate tool guide. Click
Complete when finished.
l Beads: Select highlighted beads or select the faces to identify as a bead.
l Forms: Select highlightedforms or select the faces to identify as a form.
l Formed Bends: Select highlightedformed bendsor select the faces to identify as a
formed bend.
l Gussets: Select highlightedgussets or select the faces to identify as a gusset.
l Hems: Select highlightedhems or select the faces to identify as a hem.
www.SpaceClaim.com 889
l Joggles:Select highlightedjoggles or select the faces to identify as a joggle.
l Notches: Select highlightednotches or select the faces to identify as a notch.
l Tabs:Select highlighted tabs or select the faces to identify as a tab.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 890
Automatically identifying a hem.
www.SpaceClaim.com 891
Unfolding a sheet metal design after identifying the geometry.
Tool guides
Use theForms tool guide to find and identify formed sheet metal details on a part.
www.SpaceClaim.com 892
Selecting sheet metal objects
The Select tool on the Sheet Metal tab works much like the standard Select tool, with the following
differences:
l The tools on the Sheet Metal tab recognize junctions, bends, bend reliefs, and forms first, then
edges and points when you scroll the mouse wheel to select the underlying entities.
l Your selection is now automatically converted from faces to junctions, bend reliefs, or forms
when you switch to the Sheet Metal tab and the Pull, Select, or Move tool is active. The selec-
tion is converted back to faces when you switch to a different tab.
l You can box-selectsheet metal objects. For example, to selecta corner relief,box-select all of
the faces in the corner relief. If you box-select any of the faces from right to left, the entire
sheet metal object is also selected, even if you have not fully enclosed the object within the
selection box.
l Only the tool guides and options that are appropriate for sheet metal are displayed.
Shortcut keys work for all of the tools on both tabs. For example, you can press S to activate the
Select tool from either the Design tab or the Sheet Metal tab.
www.SpaceClaim.com 893
Squaring up sheet metal faces
After you have converted a design to sheet metal, you can use the Square-Up tool in the Import
ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to find and fix edges and faces that are not square to the Sheet
Metal sheet.
The image below shows a simple example. The circular hole and right thickness face are not per-
pendicular to the sheet. Square-Up findsthis geometryand highlights it.
1. Click the Square-Up tool in the Import group on the Sheet Metal tab.
Geometry that can be squared-up is highlighted in red.
2. Click on highlighted geometry tofix
l If you click an edge, that edge remains fixed and the opposite edge is moved to line up
with the selected edge
l If you click on a face all edges misaligned on the opposite face are moved
www.SpaceClaim.com 894
Sheet metal properties
You can modify the thickness, inner radius, and K-factor of sheet metal components in the Properties
panel. Modifying the component's properties affects all the objects in the component. Modified
property values appear in bold. You can set the default values for sheet metal components by set-
ting sheet metal options. Delete a modified property value to return it to the default value.
The thickness of sheet metal is maintained with an offset relationship. A sheet metal component
retains its properties when you move it into a non-sheet metal component.
When the Bend Radius in Sheet Metal options is set to Thickness ratio and
you change the sheet metal part thickness for the part, the value for the
Inner Radius now changes in the Properties panel. In other words, changing
the part thickness property will not change all the bend radii, but the dis-
played bend radius changes to show that there is a problem for you to fix.
You can fix them by selecting the desired bends and changing their prop-
erties manually.
l K-Factor: The K-Factor is used to calculate the bend radius, and is determined by the
www.SpaceClaim.com 895
material, the type of bend, and the ratio of the bend radius to the thickness of the metal.
l Material: You can set the gage for a material used in a sheet metal part. Assigning a
gage enables you to control the thickness of a sheet metal part at a more granular level.
Gage, or, gauge, is the thickness of the metal organized by numbers: the smaller the
number the thinner the metal. A sheet metal design or component of a design must be
assigned a material in order for the gage drop down to display. You cannot select a
gage for designs or components that are assigned the Unknown Material option.
To assign a material, from the Structure tree select the design at the top level, or select
the component for which you want to assign a material, and then click the Material
Name drop down from the Material group in the Properties panel. From the Thickness
group in the Properties panel, click the gage drop down, and select a gage.
l Sheet Metal: True or false; determines whether or not the component is a sheet metal
part. All sheet metal properties and parameters are removed from a part when you turn
off the Sheet Metal property in the Properties panel. This includes things like junctions,
reliefs, forms, etc.
l Thickness: The thickness of the sheet metal part.
You may need to change the inside radius of bends, change the bend or corner reliefs,
or alter the geometry after you change the thickness.
You must first Unfold the part to have the flat properties export.
www.SpaceClaim.com 896
Example
Changing the thickness of parts caused the S junctions to become no-overlap junctions because the
radius was too small for the new thickness. You would need to change the inside radius to convert
the junctions back to S junctions on these parts.
www.SpaceClaim.com 897
Correcting a sheet metal component
SpaceClaim s sheet metal functionality can be used to fix components that are intended to be made
from sheet metal but which do not conform to the sheet metal standards required for production.
There are a number of typical errors in sheet metal creation that can be easily remedied in
SpaceClaim.
www.SpaceClaim.com 898
To identify problems when unfolding parts
If an unfolded component has conflicting geometry, the conflicting geometry is made a separate sur-
face in the Structure tree and highlighted in red, as shown in the figure below. The edge that pre-
vents the unfold is also highlighted.
www.SpaceClaim.com 899
Sketching sheet metal parts
The tools in the Sketch group on the Sheet Metal tab are a little different from normal sketch tools:
Rectangles, circles, polygons, and ellipses are automatically extruded to the thickness of a sheet
metal wall as you sketch. See Sheet metal options to change the default wall thickness. Lines, splines,
and arcs are extruded when they form a closed profile.
Sketching in empty space creates new walls.
A preview is displayed as you sketch that shows you the wall thickness for each sketch curve:
Sketching perpendicular to an existing wall creates a new wall with a bend between the walls with
corner or rip reliefs where needed. The bend radius is created inside when the sketch is connected
to the top edge and outside when the sketch is connected to the bottom edge:
Sketching on an existing wall creates sketch curves on the wall that you can use with the Bend and
Split tools.
Sketching adjacent to or overlapping an existing wall adds material to the wall and may imprint the
overlapping curves on the wall:
www.SpaceClaim.com 900
In addition, you can choose the Profile option tocreate a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch
plane as you sketch:
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Auto
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
Pro-
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created.
file
Auto- Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside
matic of the sheet is maintained when bending.
Maintains the length of the sheet's inside surface when bending.
www.SpaceClaim.com 901
Inside
Out-
Maintains the length of the sheet's outside surface when bending.
side
www.SpaceClaim.com 902
Sheet metal lines
The Sheet Metal Line tool is primarily used to sketch freeform shapes and to draw lines that will
become bends. See Bending a sheet metal wall.
Lines, splines, and arcs are extruded to the thickness of a sheet metal wall when they form a closed
profile.You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
In addition, you can use the Profile option tocreate a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane
as you sketch.
When sketching lines for a profile wall, the attachment edge for determining inside or outside radius
follows the same paradigm as flat-sketched walls. In the images below, both lines start at the top
corner. Sketching vertically downward creates an outside wall, while sketching vertically upward cre-
ates an inside wall.
To draw a line
1. Click on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Click Line in the Sketch group or press L.
www.SpaceClaim.com 903
3. (Optional) Click the Profile optionif you want to create walls as you sketch.
4. Click to set the first point of the line.
You can dimension the points relative to other sketch objects.
5. Click to set the next points of the line.
If you want any section of the line to be an arc, right-click and select Switch to Arc, then click
to set the radius. Right-click and select Switch to Line to return to drawing straight lines
between points. You must create at least one line segment before using this option.
6. End the line:
l Double-click to set the end point of the line.
l Right-click and select Finish Line.
l Press Esc.
l Connect the end point to the start point.
l Click any tool (except the Clipboard and Orient tools).
Do it faster
Click and drag to draw one straight line.
Example
Options
The following Sheet Metal sketch options allow you to choose between sketching a flat wall or a
wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane:
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Auto
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
Pro- When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created.
www.SpaceClaim.com 904
file
Auto- Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside
matic of the sheet is maintained when bending.
www.SpaceClaim.com 905
Sheet metal tangent lines
Use the Sheet Metal Tangent Line tool to sketch lines that are tangent to curves in your design.
Lines, splines, and arcs are extruded to the thickness of a sheet metal wall when they form a closed
profile.You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
In addition, you can choose the Profile option tocreate a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch
plane as you sketch.
Options
The following Sheet Metal sketch options allow you to choose between sketching a flat wall or a
wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane:
www.SpaceClaim.com 906
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Auto
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
Pro-
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created.
file
Auto- Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside
matic of the sheet is maintained when bending.
www.SpaceClaim.com 907
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 908
Sheet metal tangent arcs
Use the Sheet Metal Tangent Arc tool to sketch an arc that is tangent to a curve or line in your
design.
Lines, splines, and arcs are extruded to the thickness of a sheet metal wall when they form a closed
profile. You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
In addition, you can choose the Profile option tocreate a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch
plane as you sketch.
Options
The following Sheet Metal sketch options allow you to choose between sketching a flat wall or a
wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane:
www.SpaceClaim.com 909
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Auto
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
Pro-
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created.
file
Auto- Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside
matic of the sheet is maintained when bending.
www.SpaceClaim.com 910
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 911
Sheet metal rectangles
The Sheet Metal Rectangle tool is most often used to draw the base of a sheet metal part. After
you sketch a base, you can use the Pull tool to create walls perpendicular to the rectangle.
Rectangles, circles, polygons, and ellipses are automatically extruded to the thickness of a sheet
metal wall as you sketch. You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
In addition, you can choose the Profile option tocreate a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch
plane as you sketch.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
l Define rectangle from center: Select this option to sketch rectangles from their centers. Click
to define the center of the rectangle, then click again to set the length of the sides. You can
www.SpaceClaim.com 912
also drag to draw the rectangle. Hold the Alt key while drawing a rectangle to toggle this
option on-the-fly.
The following Sheet Metal sketch options allow you to choose between sketching a flat wall or a
wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane:
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Auto
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
Pro-
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created.
file
Auto- Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside
matic of the sheet is maintained when bending.
www.SpaceClaim.com 913
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 914
Sheet metal Three-point rectangles
The Sheet Metal Three-Point Rectangle tool is used to draw a rectangle at any angle on the sketch
plane.
Rectangles, circles, polygons, and ellipses are automatically extruded to the thickness of a sheet
metal wall as you sketch. You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
In addition, you can choose the Profile option tocreate a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch
plane as you sketch.
Click and drag to draw the first side, then click to set the length of the second side.
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
www.SpaceClaim.com 915
l Define rectangle from center: Select this option to sketch rectangles from their centers. Click
to define the center of the rectangle, then click again to set the length of the sides. You can
also drag to draw the rectangle. Hold the Alt key while drawing a rectangle to toggle this
option on-the-fly.
The following Sheet Metal sketch options allow you to choose between sketching a flat wall or a
wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane:
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Auto
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
Pro-
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created.
file
Auto- Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside
matic of the sheet is maintained when bending.
www.SpaceClaim.com 916
checkbox again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout
curves on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 917
Sheet metal ellipses
Use the Sheet Metal Ellipse tool to draw ellipses in sheet metal.
Rectangles, circles, polygons, and ellipses are automatically extruded to the thickness of a sheet
metal wall as you sketch. You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
In addition, you can choose the Profile option tocreate a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch
plane as you sketch.
Options
The following Sheet Metal sketch options allow you to choose between sketching a flat wall or a
wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane:
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Auto
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
Pro-
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created.
file
Auto- Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside
www.SpaceClaim.com 918
matic of the sheet is maintained when bending.
www.SpaceClaim.com 919
Sheet metal sweep arcs
Use the Sheet Metal Sweep Arc tool to sketch an arc when you know the location of its center and
end points.
Lines, splines, and arcs are extruded to the thickness of a sheet metal wall when they form a closed
profile. You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
In addition, you can choose the Profile option tocreate a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch
plane as you sketch.
Options
The following Sheet Metal sketch options allow you to choose between sketching a flat wall or a
wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane:
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Auto
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
www.SpaceClaim.com 920
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
Pro-
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created.
file
Auto- Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside
matic of the sheet is maintained when bending.
www.SpaceClaim.com 921
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 922
Sheet metal three-point circles
Use the Sheet Metal Three-Point Circle tool to draw circles when you know the location of the
edge of the circle but you don't know the location for its center, or when you want to draw a circle
that is tangent to two objects.
Rectangles, circles, polygons, and ellipses are automatically extruded to the thickness of a sheet
metal wall as you sketch. You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
In addition, you can choose the Profile option tocreate a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch
plane as you sketch.
www.SpaceClaim.com 923
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
l Three-point circle segment: Check this option to create an arc that is a segment of a three-
point circle. To create an arc with this option, click to set the first point, click to set the second
point, then enter the diameter or click to set the final point.
The following Sheet Metal sketch options allow you to choose between sketching a flat wall or a
wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane:
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Auto
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
Pro-
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created.
file
Auto- Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside
matic of the sheet is maintained when bending.
www.SpaceClaim.com 924
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 925
Sheet metal circles
Use the Sheet Metal Circle tool to draw circles in sheet metal.
Rectangles, circles, polygons, and ellipses are automatically extruded to the thickness of a sheet
metal wall as you sketch. You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
In addition, you can choose the Profile option tocreate a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch
plane as you sketch.
Options
The following Sheet Metal sketch options allow you to choose between sketching a flat wall or a
wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane:
Auto When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
www.SpaceClaim.com 926
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
Pro-
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created.
file
Auto- Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside
matic of the sheet is maintained when bending.
www.SpaceClaim.com 927
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 928
Sheet metal polygons
Use the Sheet Metal Polygon tool to draw a polygon with between 3 and 64 sides.
Rectangles, circles, polygons, and ellipses are automatically extruded to the thickness of a sheet
metal wall as you sketch. You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
In addition, you can choose the Profile option tocreate a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch
plane as you sketch.
www.SpaceClaim.com 929
Options
The following options are available in the Options panel:
l Use internal radius: Select this option to dimension the polygon based on the diameter of a
circle inscribed within the polygon. Uncheck the option to dimension the polygon based on a
circumscribed circle. In the image below, the blue circle is inscribed within the polygon and
the orange circle is circumscribed around it.
The following Sheet Metal sketch options allow you to choose between sketching a flat wall or a
wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane:
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Auto
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
Pro-
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created.
file
Auto- Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside
matic of the sheet is maintained when bending.
www.SpaceClaim.com 930
options to change the angular increment used for snapping.
l Create layout curves: The sketch curves are created as layout curves. If you move the design
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 931
Sheet metal splines
Use the Sheet Metal Spline tool to draw curvy lines in sheet metal.
Lines, splines, and arcs are extruded to the thickness of a sheet metal wall when they form a closed
profile. You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
In addition, you can choose the Profile option tocreate a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch
plane as you sketch.
To draw a spline
1. Click on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Click Spline in the Sketch group.
3. (Optional) Click the Profile optionif you want to create walls as you sketch.
4. Click to set the first point of the spline.
5. Click to set the next points of the spline.
You can Dimension spline points by entering the coordinate distance from the start point to
each point, or dimension each point relative to another sketch object.
6. End the spline:
l Double-click to set the end point of the spline.
l Right-click and select Finish Spline.
l Press Esc.
l Connect the end point to the start point.
l Click any other tool (except the Clipboard and Orient tools).
www.SpaceClaim.com 932
l When drawing a spline, end it on the start point.
l When editing the spline, drag one end point on top of the other point.
Once you have created a closed spline, you cannot edit it into an open spline.
Options
The following Sheet Metal sketch options allow you to choose between sketching a flat wall or a
wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane:
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Auto
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
Pro-
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created.
file
Auto- Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside
matic of the sheet is maintained when bending.
www.SpaceClaim.com 933
to a drawing sheet, with Sketch mode selected you must select the Create layout curves check-
box again in the Sketch Options group of the Options panel in order to create layout curves
on the drawing sheet. See Layout Curves.
l Curve Fitter Options: If the Sketch plane passes through a Mesh object, the system will fit
curves through the facet points. Lines are displayed green and arcs are displayed blue. The fol-
lowing options apply to the system-generated curves.
l Fit curves - Uncheck this option if you do not want the system to fit curves through the
points.
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 934
Sheet metal three-point arcs
Use the Sheet Metal Three-Point Arc tool to sketch an arc when you know its chord angle and the
location of its start and end points.
Lines, splines, and arcs are extruded to the thickness of a sheet metal wall when they form a closed
profile. You can change the default wall thickness in the sheet metal properties.
In addition, you can choose the Profile option tocreate a wall that is perpendicular to the sketch
plane as you sketch.
Options
The following Sheet Metal sketch options allow you to choose between sketching a flat wall or a
wall that is perpendicular to the sketch plane:
www.SpaceClaim.com 935
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created. When
Auto
sketching a closed profile (square, circle, etc.), a flat wall is created.
Flat Any closed sketch creates a flat wall.
Pro-
When sketching an open profile (series of lines), a perpendicular wall is created.
file
Auto- Use the starting location of the sketch to determine whether the inside or the outside
matic of the sheet is maintained when bending.
www.SpaceClaim.com 936
l Tolerance - Determines how many points will be found, which also determines how
many curves will be created. The smaller the tolerance, the more points will be found
and the curves will be generated.
l Auto-merge - When checked On, the system will merge linesd and arcs to form splines.
Splines are displayed pink.
www.SpaceClaim.com 937
Creating and editing sheet metal parts
Create a new sheet metal design using the tools on the Sheet Metal tab. See Converting a design to
sheet metal if you have already modeled the part.
www.SpaceClaim.com 938
You can toggle highlighting on and off forjunctions, reliefs, notches, and other sheet metal objects.
You can customize the highlighting colors in the SpaceClaim Sheet Metal Options.
www.SpaceClaim.com 939
Pulling sheet metal
Use the Pull toolin the Edit ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to change sheet metal parts.
Since Sheet Metal thickness faces are thin, and you are likely zoomed out, selecting a non-thickness
edge allows both edge and face Pull options. The image below shows that you can choose to pull
the edge (dimmed Pull arrow)or pull the face (active Pull arrow). In this case you also have a choice
of Extending the wall or creating a Joggle.
If you choose Joggle in the mini-toolbar , pulling the edge will create a Joggle.
www.SpaceClaim.com 940
On cylindrical walls, the mini-toolbar has an option to create a Curved Joggle .
If you change Pull directions, the edge will be pulled up to make a new wall.
Junctions and bend reliefs are automatically created and are determined by the current settings of
the Junction and Relief tools. Pulling an edge on an inside contour creates a wall with a gap on both
sides if a circular or square bend relief is chosen at the standard bend relief width. If a Rip relief type
is selected, then the gap is equal to the rip width.
You can select an edge loop to pull multiple walls simultaneously, as shown below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 941
When you pull walls up on a design, the side edges of the new wall will follow the angles of its
neighbors. This angle is usually 90, but can be almost any angle. If the neighboring walls are obtuse
angles, the neighbor wall must be less than 135 for the new wall to follow along the neighbors.
You can create conical bends by pulling one edge of a bend junction.
When pulling side edges with neighboring bend junctions, you can snap the resulting round radius
to the radius of the junction. Hold the Shift key while pulling to snap to the bend radius, inner or
outer, whichever is appropriate.
Shortcut keys work for all of the tools on both tabs. For example, you can press P to activate the Pull
tool from either the Design tab or the Sheet Metal tab.
1. Click the Pull tool in the Edit group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Change the Junction and Relief tool settings in the Modify group, if necessary.
The settings of these tools are used when you pull. For example, if the Junction tool is set to
Sharp, then a sharp edge is created when you pull. The tools' icons change to represent their
current settings, so you can see them at a glance.
3. (Optional) Change the bend behavior in the Options panel:
The bend options control where bend radii are created in relation to adjacent walls.
l Use Edge Location: When you pull a sheet metal edge, the location of the bend
radius depends on the edge you select and the direction you pull.
www.SpaceClaim.com 942
When you pull away from the other edge (1), the selected edge becomes an inside
corner.
When you pull across the other edge (2), the selected edge becomes an outside corner.
l Inside: The length of the inside surface of the wall is maintained, like 1 in the illus-
tration above.
l Outside: The length of the outside surface of the wall is maintained, like 2 in the illus-
tration above.
l Offset: The amount of space to allow for the bend when pulling.
l Bend angle: The angle between the two walls.
l Bend radius: The inside radius of the bend.
4. Select one of the following:
l An edge to create a new wall with the default sheet thickness.
l A thickness face to extend an existing wall.
l A wall face to offset (or move) the wall in the direction of the Pull arrow.
l A thickness edge to round or chamfer the edge. You cannot create a hem on a non-thick-
ness edge.
5. (Optional) Click the Pull Direction tool guide or hold Alt and select a reference element to set
the direction of the pull.
6. (Optional) Click the Up To tool guide or press U and select a face, edge, or point to pull up to.
7. Click a yellow Pull arrow and drag in the direction of the arrow.
Examples
Pulling a wall with an adjacent wall creates a matching angle in the end of the new wall.
www.SpaceClaim.com 943
Pulling one side of a wall moves the wall and changes adjacent walls.
Pulling a wall up to an angled wall. The wall merges to the walls from which it extends. The exten-
sion and angled wall do not mergea small gap is maintained.
Creating swept sheet metal walls by selecting a tangent chain of edges and pulling them per-
pendicular to the chain (left). Swept sheet metal walls can be unfolded (right).
www.SpaceClaim.com 944
Pulling the edge of an inner loop to create a flange form. Edge reliefs are created automatically and
can be unfolded. (Reliefs are not highlighted in the figure because they are not yet classified as edge
reliefs).
Pulling an angled sheet metal wall. The neighboring wall is modified so that it does not maintain the
junction.
www.SpaceClaim.com 945
6. Reliefs are created as necessary. The shape and size of the relief is determined by the Edge
Relief tool and your Sheet metal options.
www.SpaceClaim.com 946
To create a round or chamfer
1. Clickthe Pull tool.
2. Select one or more thickness edges.
3. Click Round or Chamfer in the Pull options panel.
You can also select Round or Chamfer from the mini-toolbar.
4. Click a yellow Pull arrow and drag in the direction of the arrow.
1. Click the Pull tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Select the edge of a sheet metal wall.
3. Select aBend option in the Sheet Metal Options panel.
4. Pullalong the direction of the wall.
The wall will jog up one wall thickness and continue in the same direction, as shown below.
The bend faces becomejoggles.
Tool guides
The following tool guides are available for this tool:
The Select tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select an object to
pull.
The Revolve tool guide allows you to revolve instead of pulling in a direction.
The Pull Direction tool guide allows you to set the direction to pull.
www.SpaceClaim.com 947
The Up To tool guide pulls the object up to another object.
When using the Up To tool guide to move a face, form, or bead to a new location on a part,
such as an edge or face, select a direction with a Move tool handle and click the Up To tool
to move the face, form, or bead to the new location. You can also use this tool guide with a
sheet metal model in flattened mode.
l Use Edge Location: When you pull a sheet metal edge, the location of the bend radius
depends on the edge you select and the direction you pull.
When you pull away from the other edge, the selected edge becomes an inside corner.
When you pull across the other edge, the selected edge becomes an outside corner.
l Inside: The length of the inside surface of the wall is maintained, like 1 in the illustration
above.
l Outside: The length of the outside surface of the wall is maintained, like 2 in the illustration
above.
l Offset: The amount of space needed to offset the sheet, in orderto allow space for
pulling.
l Dimension to Selected Edge: Uses the selected edge to automatically calculate the
dimension reference based on the subsequent pull direction.
l Dimension to Inside Edge: Uses the inside edge as the dimension reference regardless of
the pull direction.
l Dimension to Outside Edge: Uses the outside edge as the dimension reference regardless
of the pull direction.
l Bend angle: Angle between the two walls.
l Bend radius: Inside radius of the bend.
Pull options
l Add: Only add material when you pull. If you pull in a subtractive direction, no change will
occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
l Cut: Only remove material when you pull. If you pull in an additive direction, no change will
occur. You can combine this option with other Pull options.
l No merge: Pulls without merging into other objects even when the object pulled intersects
with an existing object.
www.SpaceClaim.com 948
l Round: Create a rounded corner (fillet) on a thickness edge while pulling.
l Chamfer: Create a chamfer on a thickness edge while pulling.
www.SpaceClaim.com 949
Moving sheet metal
The Move tool on the Sheet Metal tab is similar to the standard Move tool, with the following
differences:
l The tools on the Sheet Metal tab recognize junctions, bends, bend reliefs, and forms first, then
edges and points when you scroll the mouse wheel to select the underlying entities.
l You can select a form with one click and move or rotate the form using the Sheet Metal Move
tool. The 2D Move handle is displayed for a form, and it is lined up with the frame of the form.
l Your selection is automatically converted from faces to junctions, bend reliefs, or forms when
you switch to the Sheet Metal tab and the Pull, Select, or Move tool is active. The selection is
converted back to faces when you switch to a different tab.
l Only the tool guides and options that are appropriate for sheet metal are displayed.
l The side of the wall you select determines how a bend changes when you rotate a wall. See
Rotating sheet metal walls. When you move a wall, any associated sheet metal objects asso-
ciated with that wall, such as junctions, edges, reliefs, corner reliefs, and bends, also move with
the wall.
Shortcut keys work for all of the tools on both tabs. For example, you can press M to activate the
Move tool from either the Design tab or the Sheet Metal tab.
Faces which have beads can be moved with the Move tool.
1. Click the Move tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Select the edge relief.
3. Click an axis and drag in that direction.
You can move a joggle along a bend. If you have trouble moving a joggle, use the sheet metal
www.SpaceClaim.com 950
Select tool to select the joggle, then usethe Move tool in the Edit ribbon group of the Design
tab to move it.
Example
www.SpaceClaim.com 951
Rotating sheet metal walls
Select one face of the sheet metal wall and rotate it with the Move handle. If you select the inside of
a face to rotate around the inside bend center, or select the outside face to rotate around its outer
mold line
A default junction to rotate around is chosen based on which junction causes the smaller portion of
the part to rotate. To rotate around the other junction, drag the Move handle anchor (the center ball)
to an edge on the other junction.
Select the outer face to rotate around theoutside of the bend (the outer mold line):
www.SpaceClaim.com 952
When a wall is rotated around the outer mold line, the size of the walls change. This type of
rotation is useful because the mold line is a measurable point for inspection.
If the face is connected to more than one junction, then the junction closest to the point
where you click is selected:
Example
www.SpaceClaim.com 953
Rotating walls that are split on an edge around a bend junction and then translating tha base face
shared by the split walls.
www.SpaceClaim.com 954
Bending sheet metal walls
The Sheet Metal Bend tool works similar to Split Face, and is used to create bends in a sheet metal
flat or unfolded part. You can bend along a sketch curve on the sheet metal face, bend perpendicular
to an edge, or bend between two points.
You can also place multiple bend lines along a surface. Existing in-progress bends, that are not yet
bent (flipped) remain de-selected as you place one or more new, additional bend lines along the
sheet metal surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 955
4. Click the Complete tool guide to create the bend.
The dashed lines to either side of the bend line show the extents of the bend allowance area, based
on the radius set by default or overridden by the user in the options area.
If necessary, you can click an empty location in the Design window while a tool guide is active to
clear the bend line and activate the Select Cutter Point tool guide.
Tool guides
www.SpaceClaim.com 956
Select Cutter Point: Click a point on an
edge to create a bend that is perpendicular
to the edge at the point.Press Tab to enter
a value for the percentage or distance from
the bend to the endpoint along the edge.
Select Two Cutter Points: Click a point on
one edge and a point on another edge to
create a bend between the points. You can
see a preview of the line as it extends to the
second edge before you click on it. Press
Tab to enter a value for the percentage or
distance from the bend to the endpoint
along the edge.
Adding bend steps creates a bumped bend, whichinstructs the operator and machine to create a
large radius bend by bumping instead of "rolling" smoothly. The bendis hit with a sharp tool, cre-
ating closely spaced sharp bends that form a large bend.
To display the bend steps and bend dimension properties of the bend in anunfolded sheet metal
part, turn on the visibility in the Bends and Bend Dimensions layers in the Layers panel or in theStyle
ribbon group on the Display tab.
www.SpaceClaim.com 957
To create a joggle
1. Click the Bend tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Select the Create Joggle option in the Bend Options panel.
3. (Optional) Modify the following values in the Bend Options panel:
l Bend angle: the angle for both bends of the joggle
l Bend radius: the inside radius for both bends of the joggle
l Joggle height: the measurement between the top of the sheet going into the bottom
bend and the top of the sheet coming out of the top bend.
l Bend Allowance: Value to use for calculating the flat length of the joggle.
l Bend Deduction: Value to use for calculating the flat length of the joggle.
4. Use the Select Cutter Point or Select Two Cutter Points tool guide to create the bottom
bend of the joggle.
5. Click to select thesecond bend of the joggle, which is previewed as you mouse over the sheet
metal face, as shown below.
If necessary, you can click an empty space in the Design windowto clear your selections and
activate the Select Cutter Point tool guide.
6. Use the Select Anchor Pointtool guide to select the face to remain fixed when the rest of the
body is bent to create the joggle.
www.SpaceClaim.com 958
7. Click the Complete tool guide to create the joggle.
You can move the walls between joggles.
www.SpaceClaim.com 959
3. (Optional) Modify the following values in the Bend Options panel:
l Bead radius: Theradius of the bead, which is also the height of the bead. The minimum
bead radius is 0.25xT (sheet metalthickness).
l Round radius: Radius of the round at the base of the bead that intersects with the sur-
face.
4. Click on a curve on the sheet metal face, or select a tool guide and select bend points based
on the tool guide you use.
5. Click the Bend tool guide to complete the bead.
Tool guides
The Select Cutter Point tool guide is active by default. This tool guide creates a bend that is
perpendicular to the edge at the point you select.
The Select Two Cutter Points tool guide allows you to select a point on one edge and a
point on another edge to create a bend between the points.
The Select Anchor Point tool guide allows you to select the face that will be fixed when the
body is bent.
Click the Complete tool guide to create the bend.
Bend Options
Use the Create Bend option to bend a sheet metal face along a line.
Use the Create Joggle option to create a joggle bend in a face.
Use the Create Bead option tocreate a bead along a curve on a face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 960
Forms
Use the Forms tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab to choose from a gallery of stand-
ard formed sheet metal details. Forms can be placed on any sheet metal face and can be placed on
the edge of a face.
Select Forms in the Highlight group on the Sheet Metal tab to highlight all forms in your sheet
metal design.
www.SpaceClaim.com 961
To add a Swept Edge form to your design
1. Sketch a profile at an endpoint of the edge.
2. Enter the Pull tool.
3. Click the Sweep tool guide.
4. Click the Full Pull tool guide.
The vertical line will be swept along the arc to create the form.
www.SpaceClaim.com 962
Notice that the sweep profile is a single line and an Inside Radius arc is automatically added to the
profile, at the attachment point, to produce a bend. If you draw a tangent arc along with a line, then
that arc determines the bend radius and overrides any inside radius automation that is done in the
case of only a straight line.
www.SpaceClaim.com 963
1. Click Forms in the Forms group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Hover over the illustration thumbnail in the Options panel to see a larger illustration with each
dimension or value.
3. Click to select aform fromthe Countersink or Special gallery.
4. The Options panel updates to display specific parameters for the form type you selected.
These parameters will be saved as properties for the form.
5. Select the face to use as the form shape.
6. Click the Complete tool guide to create the form or double-click to select the face and com-
plete the form in one step.
www.SpaceClaim.com 964
hold Alt and select the edges of the sketch area to prevent a draft. The draft is angled
inward from the profile you select.
l Shift faces or Offset faces: In the illustration below, the embossed area on the left was
done with the Shift method and the embossed area on the right was done with the Off-
set method.
l Remove top face: The top face is removed and the end faces are squared up.
l Chamfer holes: Creates a chamfer on the top edge of inside holes.
4. Select a sketched region to use as the form shape.
Closed sketches inside the region you select will become holes, as shown in the example
below. The Chamfer holes option has been selected in this example:
5. (Optional) Use the Select Edges tool guide and select sides that you want open, like this:
6. Click the Complete tool guide to create the form or double-click to select the face and com-
plete the form in one step.
www.SpaceClaim.com 965
2. Click Punch in the Custom Tools section at the bottom of the gallery.
Click on the arrow at the bottom of the gallery to scroll down if you don't see the Custom
Tools section.
3. Set the following parameters in the Options panel:
l Through: The hole will go all the way through the sheet metal wall.
l Partial: The hole will go only to the depth that you set in the Depth field.
l Depth: How deep the punched hole should go into the sheet metal wall.
l Countersink: The sides of the punched area are drafted at a 45 angle. The draft angle is
measures across the hole and made so that its extents are outside of the sketched area.
l Full: If you select Countersink, the inside walls of the hole are angled from the
top of the hole to the bottom.
l Partial: If you select Countersink, the inside walls of the hole are angled from D1
to D2 in the illustration below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 966
The parameters in the Properties panel are the same as the parameters in the Options panel
when you created the form. No parameters are shown for forms that can't be rotated or that
don't have parameters.
You can also change the Flatten Form property for the component to change how the form is
treated when the sheet metal part is unfolded. See Changing sheet metal part properties.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Place the form tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to place a form
on any sheet metal face.
The Place the form using a grid tool guide allows you to select a face for a sketch plane,
and then you can place the form on the plane using the grid. You may want to use this tool
guide to help accurately position your form. You can use any dimensioning methods nor-
mally available for a sketch grid.
The Select a face tool guide allows you to select the face that will become the form when
you create a user-defined form.
The Complete tool guide creates the form and allows you to place more forms until you exit
the tool.
Options
Each form has its own options for the form's dimensions. These dimensions are shown in the thumb-
nail illustration in the Options panel. Hover over the thumbnail with your mouse to see the full-size
image.
Most forms have the following options:
l Rotation angle: Use this option to turn the form on the face where it is placed.
l Create rounds: Use this option to round the edges of the form.
Examples
Creating a user-defined punch form on the edge of a face removes material from the edge.
www.SpaceClaim.com 967
You can create a pattern of forms, and the forms arerecognized by the Convert tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 968
Splitting sheet metal faces
Use the Split tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tab to divide sheet metal faces and cre-
ate partial rips.
You can use the Split tool and the Select Two Cutter Points tool guide and select a corner for either
or both points to make a miter junction, as shown below. Corner reliefs are automatically created
where needed.
You can only select a facenot a thickness edgewith this tool. You cannot split a bend face.
When creating multiple splits along a sheet metal part, regardless of whether you use one or two cut-
ter points or bend direction, the resulting bend spans the length of the sheet metal part across all
splits, and, on both sides of the split(s):
The Split face gap option in Sheet Metal options controls the width of a gap when you use the Split
tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 969
3. Change the selection for the Relief tool, if necessary.
The shape of the end of a partial split is determined by the type of relief selected for the
Relief tool. The Relief tool is set to Square in the example below.
Tool guides
The following tool guides help step you through the process:
The Select Cutter Point tool guide is active by default. This tool guide splits a face per-
pendicular to an edge at the point you select.
The Select Two Cutter Points tool guide allows you to select two points and a split is made
between the points. The snap radius from SpaceClaim Options > Snap is used.
www.SpaceClaim.com 970
Beads
Use the Bead tool in the Create ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to create a bead on a face
of a sheet metal part.
You can create a bead using a line, spline, arc, tangent curve chain, layout curve, imprinted edge, or
other curve on a face. The curve must be completely on the face and must not self-intersect. The
curve can extend from an edge of the face or it can extend from edge to edge to create a full bead.
A dotted line previews the bead. If the preview extends beyond the edge of the face, or if the curve
is too tight, the bead will not be created. Faces which have beads can be moved with the Move tool.
The bead unfolds in the same way as a form unfolds.
Select Bead in the Highlight group on the Sheet Metal tab to highlight all the beads in your sheet
metal design.
To relocate beads on a face, select the Move tool.
Do it faster
Select the curve then click the Bead tool.
You can also create a bead using the sheet metal Bend tool.
Options
Bead The radius of the bead, which is also the height of the bead. The minimum bead radius
radius is 0.25 x T (sheet metal thickness).
Round
Radius of the round at the base of the bead where it intersects with the surface.
radius
www.SpaceClaim.com 971
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 972
Sheet metal markers
Use the Marker tool tocreate one or more bluecross-hair placeholder markers on planar sheets
or side walls (flat surfaces) of your sheet metal design.
To create a marker
To move a marker
When moving a marker, the only Move handles that display are those that allow you to move the
marker along the design's grid. Markers move along with the walls on which they are initially placed.
1. Click Move in the Edit group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Click the marker that you want to move.
Hold Ctrl and click to select multiple markers. Markers you select with Ctrl will move as a
group. You can also select one marker, then right-click and choose Select All to select all mark-
ers. To move a marker, you can also enter a new location value.
3. Move the marker to its new position.
Markers that are added to a sheet metal part remain in place if you bend the part. When you
unfold a sheet metal part, markers that appeared on the part will also display on the unfolded
part.
www.SpaceClaim.com 973
Double walls
Use the Double wall tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tabtocreate a folded full or
partial double wall in your sheet metal design, for example, in use with creating pipes, ducts and fit-
tings.
Examples
You can not only rotate double walls around a bend axis, but you can also click anywhere on the
model, such as a face, and rotate the double wall to change the models geometry. How the double
wall rotates depends on which face is selected, as shown in the examples below:
www.SpaceClaim.com 974
When you move a double wall, the wall and any objects associated with it, such as junctions
and reliefs, also move..
www.SpaceClaim.com 975
Gussets
Use the Gusset tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metal tabtool tocreategussetsin your
design.A gusset is a section of the metal inside a bend which is not bent, but rather forced into the
bend in order to reinforce or stiffen the piece. You can create flat or cylindrical gussets. Both types
are shown in the image set below:
To create a gusset
To move a gusset
When moving a gusset, the only Move handle that displays is simply the handle that allows you to
move the gussets along the bend axis on which the gusset is defined.
1. Click Move in the Edit group on the Sheet Metal tab.
2. Select the gusset that you want to move.
3. Move the gusset along the bend axis to relocate the gusset to a new position.
You can also enter a new location value for the gusset.
When you use the Fill tool to fill a gusset, the bend geometry on which the gusset is defined
remains intact.
www.SpaceClaim.com 976
Tabs
Use the Tab tool in the Create group on the Sheet Metaltab tocreatetabs in your design.You
can create a tab on a sheet metal junction, such as a bend or split.
Overlap Full
www.SpaceClaim.com 977
Overlap 1-sided partial
Length
Spacing
Clearance
Height
www.SpaceClaim.com 978
Sharp Edges
Rounds
Chamfers
To create a tab
1. In your design,select the junction where you want to place the tab.
2. Click the Tab tool in the Sheet Metal tab Create group. The Select Edges tool guide activates.
The tab highlights in preview mode (blue) so you can see the tab's values and placement.
3. (Optional):Modify theoptions in theOptions panel
l Length
l Spacing
l Clearance
l Height
l Edge options:
l Sharp Edges
l Rounds
l Chamfers
l Flip: Checkbox to alternate the tabs in the opposite direction along the edge used to
create the hem.
4. Click Complete to create the tab.
With a Hem feature selected, the RMB has two Hem menu options.
l Flip: Alternate the tabs in the opposite direction along the edge used to create the hem.
l Reverse: Switches the edge to the other body to create the hem.
www.SpaceClaim.com 979
To create a single tab
1. In your design, select the junction where you want to place the tab.
2. Clickthe Tab tool in the Sheet Metal tab Create group.
3. Click the Select Points tool guide.
4. (Optional): Modify the options in the Options panel.
l Clearance
l Height
l Edge options:
l Sharp Edges
l Rounds
l Chamfers
5. Hover over the edge you want for the tab.
6. Click once to locate the first point. Dimensions display to enter an exact location.
7. Click the edge a second time to locate the end of the tab. Dimensions display to enter an
exact tab length.
8. Click Complete to create the tab.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 980
Tabs created on a split sheet metal partial edge.
www.SpaceClaim.com 981
Hinges
Use the Hinge tool in the Sheet Metal tab Create tocreatehingesat junctions betweensheet
metal parts.
Pin diameter
Pitch
Knuckle
length
www.SpaceClaim.com 982
End play
Paint clearance
To create a hinge
1. Create one of the three overlap junctions, or create a split across a flat wall.
2. Select the junction where you want to place the hinge.
3. Click Hinge in the Sheet Metal tab Create group.
4. The Select Edges tool guide activates and thehinge highlights in preview modeto showthe
hinge's placement and size.
5. (Optional):Modify theHinge options in the Options panel:
l Pin diameter
l Pitch
l Knuckle length
l End play
www.SpaceClaim.com 983
l Paint clearance
l Hinge direction can be flippedusing the Flip checkbox.
6. ClickComplete to create the hinge.
www.SpaceClaim.com 984
Cross breaks
Cross breaks are a cost effective method for strengthening a thin piece of sheet metal. Typically, this
is done in an X shape, however two lines crossing at most angles will add strength.
www.SpaceClaim.com 985
Sheet metal text
A note is text that is engraved or cut out of the sheet metal part when it is fabricated. The special
sheet metal note can only be created, edited, moved, or deleted in the flattened state, but you can
see it in the folded state. The text can cross bends, as shown in the example below.
You can only create lightweight notes, which means they are rendered simply and don't require as
many resources as normal rendering. Their faces cannot be edited directly; you can only change the
text by changing the note.
www.SpaceClaim.com 986
Lightweight patterns
Lightweight patterns allow you to create patterns in sheet metal that contain hundreds of thousands
of members. They are displayed nearly as fast as one member because only the original member's
graphics facets are calculated and then translated into graphics according to the pattern dimensions.
You can't select the graphics-only members. All changes are driven from the pattern leader and all
pattern members move when you move the leader.
When you toggle from a real to a lightweight pattern, the hole that is selected as the pattern leader
remains selected. This allows you to convert a lightweight pattern to a regular pattern, change the
center of modification or the leader position, then convert the pattern back to lightweight for speed
purposes.
Lightweight patterns are automatically converted to regular patterns when you export a sheet metal
design.
www.SpaceClaim.com 987
To convert a lightweight pattern to a normal pattern
Right-click the pattern leader and select Toggle Lightweight Pattern.
www.SpaceClaim.com 988
Modifying sheet metal parts
SpaceClaim automatically creates reliefs, junctions, and other sheet metal features as you create a
sheet metal design or convert a design to sheet metal.
Use thefollowing tools in the Modify ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to change the type of
existing sheet metal features or to create additional features.
Junction
Edge relief
Corner relief
Notch
Hem
www.SpaceClaim.com 989
Junctions
Use the Junction option tool to set the default junction type and to change the junction type of
an existing junction. The junction type can be changed for junctions with or without reliefs.
The icon on the Junction option tool changes to reflect the junction type. This setting is saved until
you close SpaceClaim. The junction type can also be found in the Sheet Metal section of the Prop-
erties panel when you select a junction.
Select Junctions in the Highlight group to highlight all junctions in your sheet metal design.
Full
One wall overlaps the other.
Overlap
Partial
One wall overlaps the other halfway.
Overlap
No
The walls meet but do not overlap.
Overlap
www.SpaceClaim.com 990
One side of the junction is bent and the other is
Flange straight. Use Reverse to change the bent and
straight sides.
The junction will no longer be recognized by
None
SpaceClaim.
The junction type you select is saved as the default for the session, so any junctions created by Pull
will be this junction type.
Examples
Selecting the edge of a corner junction to change the junction type from No Overlap to Full Overlap
www.SpaceClaim.com 991
Using the junction mini-toolbar to change a junction type when Select and Pull tools are active
To remove a junction
1. Select an edge or face that belongs to one or more Full overlap, Partial overlap, or No overlap
bend junctions.
2. Ctrl+click toelect multiple edges.
3. Select theNone option from the Junction option tool.
You can also right-click the edge or face and click inthe junction mini-toolbar or
selectNoneas the Junction type in the Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel.
The geometry at the junction will not change, but the junction will no longer be recognized
by SpaceClaim. You may need to do this when you want to make changes that can't be made
to a recognized junction, such as creating a partial flange.
To reverse an overlapjunction
Right-clicka partial overlap or full overlap junction and selectReverse from the context menu.
www.SpaceClaim.com 992
Edge reliefs
Edge reliefs are automatically created when you pull a partial wall.
The edge relief type is determined by the Edge Relief option tool in the Modify group on the
Sheet Metal tab. The default is round, but you can change it to another type. The icon on the Edge
Relief tool changes to reflect the relief type. This setting is saved until you close SpaceClaim.
The shape of the end of a partial split is also determined by the relief type you have set for the Edge
Relief tool. See Splitting a sheet metal face.
The dimensions of a relief are determined by the relief settings in Sheet metal options.
Dragging a yellow ball end point to pull a partial wall creates an edgerelief.
A message appears in the status bar if a relief cannot be created, such as when it is too close to the
side.
After you create a bend that has an edge relief, you can select the relief and change the type using
the Edge Relief tool, or you can change the type, depth, and width in the Properties panel. You can
also move an edge relief along a sheet metal wall.
Smooth and Circular edge reliefs do not change the 3D geometry. Their effect is seen in the
unfolded part.
www.SpaceClaim.com 993
To change an edge relief type and dimensions
1. Select an edge or faceof a relief.
www.SpaceClaim.com 994
Corner reliefs
Corner reliefs are created automatically when you create a sheet metal design or convert a design to
sheet metal.
The corner relief type is determined by the Corner Relief option tool in the Modify group on the
Sheet Metal tab. The default type is square, but you can change it to another type. The icon on the
Corner Relief option tool changes to reflect the corner relief type. This setting is saved until you
close SpaceClaim.
You can select a corner relief and view its propertiesin the Sheet Metal section of the Properties
panel.
You may need tocreate a corner relief on a sheet metal part, for example,when you
import a shelled part that doesn't have any reliefs, or when you want to convert a
watertight corner to a regular corner. When you change asharp edge to another junc-
tion type or when you split a wall at a corner, corner reliefs are automatically added.
www.SpaceClaim.com 995
Corner relief type Icon Application
Laser Edge Any corner
Laser Symmetric Any corner
None Any corner
3. You can also select a corner relief type from the mini-toolbar or modify the following values
in the Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel:
l Relief Type: Select a corner relief type.
l Reference: Select Corner or Middle based on how you want the corner to be posi-
tioned.
l Diameter, Offset, Width, Height: Enter values for the selected relief type.
You may wish to rotate a wall. To achieve a solid rotation and retain correct geo-
metry, before rotating a sheet metal wall face, you can automatically convert the
corner reliefs to a default corner relief (which is purposely a bit over-sized). When
finished with the rotation, the corner reliefs will automatically restore to their ori-
ginal relief type.
Selecting the Smooth option from the Corner Relief tool for
unequal radius bends.
The following examples show the effect of the Reference corner relief property in an unfolded sheet
metal part.
www.SpaceClaim.com 996
Corner relief type: Circular
Reference: Corner
Adding a corner relief to a shelled part that was previously converted to sheet metal. This part will
need junctions and split faces before it can be unfolded.
www.SpaceClaim.com 997
1. Ctrl + click to selectequal bends neighboring a cornerrelief.
2. Select the Smooth optionfrom the Corner Relief tool.
To remove by filling
1. Select one or morecorner reliefs.
2. Click theFill tool in the Edit section of the Design tab.
When a corner relief is filled, it will be filled with a radius to match the inside radius of the bend and
create acorner object.
www.SpaceClaim.com 998
Notches
Use the Notch option tool in the Modify ribbon group on the Sheet Metal tab to create a notch
in an edge of asheet metal wall. The notch type is also determined by this tool. The icon on the
Notch tool changes to reflect the type.
Click the Notches option in the Highlight group to highlight all the notches in your sheet metal
design.
When you convert a part that includes a notch, and then click the Identify tool and select the
Notches tool guide, notches are clearly identified by the cyan color in the sheet metal part.
To create a notch
To modify a notch
Select one or more notches and do any of the following:
l Select an option from the Notch tool.
l Select a notch type from the mini-toolbar. Use the Reverseoption to flip the sides of Rect-
angular and XY Bevel notches.
www.SpaceClaim.com 999
l Modify the Notch Type in the Sheet Metal section in the Properties panel. Depending which
Notch Type you select, you can modify the Width, L1, L2, and Radius values.
To remove a notch
To remove by filling
1. Select the notch.
2. Click the Fill tool in the Edit section of the Design tab.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1000
Hems
Option Icon
Simple
Open
Teardrop
Rolled
None
If you move a wall with a hem, the hem moves with the wall.
Click the Hems option in the Highlight group to highlight all the hems in your sheet metal design.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1001
To create a hem using the Pull tool
1. Use the Hem tool dropdown menu to set the default Hem type
2. Enter the Pull tool
3. Select an edge
4. Choose the inline Pull arrow (not the arrow at 90 degrees from the face)
5. Choose Joggle or Hem from the mini-toolbar
6. Pull back over the face to create the Hem
1. Use the Hem tool dropdown menu to set the default Hem type
2. Enter the Pull tool
3. Select an edge
4. Drag the edge end handles (yellow balls)to size the length of the Hem
5. Choose the inline Pull arrow (not the arrow at 90 degrees from the face)
www.SpaceClaim.com 1002
6. Choose Joggle or Hem from the mini-toolbar
7. Pull back over the face to create the Hem
1. Use the Hem tool dropdown menu to set the default Hem type
2. Enter the Pull tool
3. Double-click an edge to select an entire edge chain
4. Choose the inline Pull arrow (not the arrow at 90 degrees from the face)
5. Choose Joggle or Hem from the mini-toolbar
6. Pull back over the face to create the Hem
www.SpaceClaim.com 1003
To create a hem using theMove tool
To modify a hem
1. Selectone or more hems.
2. Select an option from the Hem tool.
You can also select a hem type from themini-toolbar or modify the Hem Type in the Sheet
Metal section in the Properties panel. Dependingwhich hem type you select, you can modify
theLength, Height, Gap, and Diameter values.
With a hem selected, you can alsomodify the hems Inner Radius, Bend Steps, Bend Allowance
(BA) and Bend Deduction (BD) parameters in the Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel.
When you change a hems BA, the BD parameter also automatically updates, depending on the
hems other parameters, such as Inner Radius, Height, or Angle.
With a hem selected, you can alsomodify the hems Inner Radius, Bend Steps, Bend Allowance
(BA) and Bend Deduction (BD) parameters in the Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1004
When you change a hems BA, the BD parameter also automatically updates, depending on the
hems other parameters, such as Inner Radius, Height, or Angle.
To remove a hem
www.SpaceClaim.com 1005
Miters
When you pull two Sheet Metal edges that form a corner, a Miter will be created. Miters are Sheet
Metal objects like Hems Notches, Reliefs, and Junctions.
To create a miter
1. Select two edges that form a corner.
2. Enter the Pull tool.
3. Pull the edges.
4. The miter is created as you pull.
You can also enter the Pull tool and then select the edges.
Tomodify a miter
1. Select a miter.
2. Choose one of the following options from the mini-toolbar.
1. Bisector: If the selected miter is Perpendicular, you can change it to Bisector.
2. Perpendicular: If the selected miter is Bisector, you can change it to Perpendicular.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1006
3. None: Remove the miter
4. Reverse: If the selected miter is Perpendicular, you can reverse the direction.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1007
Watertight corners
Watertight corners are sheet metal corners that don't have reliefs, so to make them you simply
remove the reliefs. Parts with watertight corners can be unfolded and modified just like any other
sheet metal part.
or
www.SpaceClaim.com 1008
Partial flanges
The part shown below has partial flange junctionson the front and back corners:
7. Pull in the direction that isparallel with the adjacent wall, as shown below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1009
www.SpaceClaim.com 1010
Unfolding sheet metal
You can unfold a sheet metal design and changes appear simultaneously in the unfolded component
and in the original design.
The Unfoldbutton enables when you select a single face of a sheet metal part.
Unfolded parts are not exported with the solid when you export a sheet metal part; however, you
can explicitly export the unfolded part.
You can unfold the following types of walls, but you must right-click a planar face and not a cylinder
or a cone:
l Planar walls
l Cylindrical walls, including large diameter cylinders (roll bends)
l Most conical walls, such as a part with variable radius round between arcs that was shelled and
converted to a sheet metal part. Parts that are made with blends between radii also unfold reli-
ably.
l Z bends and S bends, even when they neighbor a cylindrical or conical wall.
l Walls thatincludes holes that touch a bend or are included in an object that includes a bend.
l Double-walled parts that include a complex unbending edge.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1011
If a chamfer is recognized as a form, it unfolds based on the Flatten form as value in the
Sheet Metal section of the Properties panel for the design.
If an unfolded component has conflicting geometry, the conflicting geometry is made a sep-
arate surface in the Structure tree and highlighted in red, as shown in the figure below. The
edge that prevents the unfold is also highlighted.
If you save an unfolded sheet metal partwithin a component, opening that component in an
assembly displays a checkbox and icon for the unfolded part in the Structure tree. You can
toggle the visibility of the unfolded sheet metal part in the unfolded part design window.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 1012
Unfolding a form. Outlines are shown on the unfolded part on the side on which they were placed.
Only the topmost outlines of forms are displayed. Form outlines are on the Bends layer, which is hid-
den by default.
To place views next to each other, click and drag the tab for a Design window and drop it next to
another view.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1013
Examples
Using the Pull tool and annotation dimensions to change the height of a wall on the unfolded part
(on top); the changes are reflected in the folded part (on the bottom).
www.SpaceClaim.com 1014
Using the Pull tool to put a hole in an unfolded cylinder also creates the hole in the folded part.
With this option enabled, any changes made to the model will automatically update the drawing
sheet bend dimensions.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1015
tab.
2. Set the Graphics Style in the Display tab to Wireframe.
This step prepares the model for dxf export and shows you what the resulting image will look
like.
3. Select Save As from the SpaceClaim menu and specify AutoCAD files (*.dxf) as the export type.
The unfolded model is saved as a 2D dxf file with the included annotations and can be used in
manufacturing.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1016
Calculating unfolded lengths
SpaceClaim can use sheet metal bend deduction to calculate unfolded lengths. You can set the
default Sheet Metal Options in the SpaceClaim Options window.
You can change the default bend properties for a specific component or bend by selecting the com-
ponent or bend and modifying the values in the Properties panel:
l The Bend Allowance property contains the length of the arc through the bend at the neutral
axis of the sheet metal wall being bent. Adding the Bend Allowance and the lengths of the two
sides give the unfolded length.
l The Bend Deduction value for the selected bend represents2 times theOutside Set Back
(OSSB)minus the bend allowance.
Bend Allowance (BA)and Bend Deduction (BD) are linked. Modifying one value causes the other to
be automatically recalculated as follows.
BD = 2 x OSSB - BA
www.SpaceClaim.com 1017
Bend allowances
Bend allowance calculations use what is known as a K-factor. This is the ratio of the location of the
neutral line (t in the image below) to the material thickness (T). When metal is bent, the material at
the inside radius is put in a compressive state while the material at the outside radius is put in ten-
sion. The neutral line is the point of zero stress where the material transitions from compression to
tension.
K-factor = t/T
The K-factor is a geometric calculation and does not take into account physical factors for a given
bend process (material type, bend operation type, tools, etc.). Because of this, the only way to know
the actual K-factor for a given setup is to do a reverse calculation from an actual bend. In other
words, bend the metal, measure the result, and calculate the K-factor.
SpaceClaim determines the correct K-factor curve so you have a more accurate result, without chan-
ging the K-factor or frequently change bend tables. The default bend allowance produces an accur-
ate result for normal bends made with normal tools and a normal press brake. For basic parts, you
should use the default allowances. For special cases, you can use a bend allowance table.
The curve for the default values used in SpaceClaim is shown below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1018
The graph shows three segments: red, blue and green.
l The red segment represents bend radii less than the material thickness. Because of the physical
limit of the steel compressibility, it is difficult to obtain bends with a radius less than the thick-
ness in an air bend process.
l The blue segment shows that, as the inner radius increases, the K factor is not constant. It
increases up to approximately 0.5 when the inner radiu is about four times the material thick-
ness. It does not increase beyond that because the material is no longer stretched. A K-factor
greater than 0.5 is not possible.
l The green segment is constant at 0.5, which is the neutral axis for bends with a radius greater
than four times material thickness.
The point where the red and blue segments meet is important. It represents a bend radius equal to
the material thickness. For normal bends, a reverse calculation finds the K-factor to be:
K = (4-PI) / PI = 0.27324
This can be confirmed by press brake manufacturers. It is correct for normal bends because it is
based on the actual physical result.
You can build bend allowance tables for your materials and processes. When your tables are filled
(which is a one-time task), you can unfold with the tables, or use the default value.
With a sheet metal design selected at the top level of the Structure tree, theK-Factor Typeoption
displays in the Sheet Metalgroup of thePropertiespanel. By default, the K-factor type is set to Vari-
able, but you can also set a constant K-factor.
The Constant K-Factor type option allows you to enter a numerical value for the part. Using this
option, you can map the design to other mainstream CAD functionality, or, adjust the design to a
manufacturers unique standards or tolerance levels to achieve various unfolding results.
You should only change the K-factor so it corresponds to the working properties of the metal.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1019
Bend deduction table
Bend deduction tablesare usedto calculate flat pattern layouts. The tables are based on the Bend
Deduction (BD) formula, which calculates the flat line length to produce a specific bend angle.
BD = 2 X OSSB - BA
Where:
l BD is Bend Deduction
l BA is the Bend Allowance that equals the arc length of the bend along the neutral
line. The neutral line is the radius where the material transitions from compressive
stress (inside)to tensile stress (outside)
l OSSB is the Outside Set Back. Depending on the bend angle, SpaceClaim uses two
different definitions of OSSB as explained below.
For bend angles less than 90-degrees, OSSB is measured from the begin-
ning of the bend tothe Outside Mold Line, which is the intersection of the
planar faces. See the image below.
OSSB = Tan
(A/2) X (BR +
T)
Hence
BD = 2 X Tan
(A/2) X (BR +
T) - BA
Where:
l BR =
Bend
Radius
l T=
Thick-
ness
l A=
Angle
meas-
www.SpaceClaim.com 1020
ured
from
flat
(radi-
ans)
For bend angles greater than, or equal to, 90-degrees, theOSSB is measured
from the beginning of thebend toa plane tangent to the outside bend
face. This means that the OSSB is the same as the outside radius of the bend.
See the image below.
OSSB = BR
+T
Hence
BD = 2 X
(BR + T) -
BA
Where:
l BR =
Inside
Bend
Radius
l T=
Thick-
ness
l A=
Angle
meas-
ured
from
flat
(radi-
ans)
NOTE:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1021
l If a bend table is not assigned to a part, the Bend Allowance is calculated from the default K-
factor found in the Sheet Metal options.
l If a bend table is assigned to a part, the Bend Allowance is obtained from the table and the
assigned bend table file must specify tables for all possible combinations of part thickness
and Vee Die width.
l If some bends in the part use Vee Die and other bends in the part do Not, the assigned bend
table file must specify a table with no Vee Die Width entry.
l If you enter values in the Properties panel for a Bend Allowance or Bend Deduction, it will over-
ride the values obtained from the bend table or computed using K-factor.
l You can set the bend deduction to a negative value to correctlyrepresent the
correspondingbend allowance.
All values may then be obtained from the bend table instead of being calculated. Any values not
obtained from the bend table may result in an error when you unfold the design. You can clear the
sheet metal bend table assignment from a component by selecting the blank value from the Bend
Table property drop-down.
The table below shows a simple bend table as it would appear in a spreadsheet editor. Keywords are
shown in bold. Angle Values are measured from the flat.
When you unfold a sheet metal design, the thickness, inner bend radius, and angle from the design
are used to determine the value in the selected table.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1022
Once you select a bend table, you can edit the Vee Die Width property in the Properties panel. Vee
die width sets the width of the tooling that produces the bend.
Tables can have two types of data. In the example above, the data type is DataTypeCompensation,
which is the default. The table below is an examplewhere data type is set to DataTypeRadius.
In this table, each combination of Thickness and VeeDieWidth represents a table that provides the
actual radius based on tool radius and angle. In the example above the green cells are the tool
radius, blue cells are the angle, and pink cells are the actual radius applied to the geometry.
The radius table only affects bend creation. Once the bend is created the actual (table lookup) radius
is stored in the bend. You can change the value later or disconnect the table without affecting the
bend.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1023
When a radius table is applied, Bend creation changes slightly. In the Sheet Metal Options panel,
Die width is a dropdown list. The Bend radius text box label is changed to Tool radius and the input
dynamically changes to a dropdown list if the following conditions are met.
l One or more edges of a sheet metal part are selected
l The selected edge is in a part that references a bend table file
l The bend table file contains a table that matches the part's thickness and selected vee die
width
www.SpaceClaim.com 1024
Keyword Description Parameters
side mold line.
Bend angle >= 90
degrees: outside setback
is measured from tangent
plane to bend.
l Version 3.0
l Bend Allowance
l BendDeductionOml: Out-
side setback is measured
from the bend outside
mold line for all bend
angles.
l BendDeductionTangent:
Outside setback is bend
angle dependent:
Bend angle < 90 degrees:
outside setback is meas-
ured from the bend out-
side mold line.
Bend angle >= 90
degrees: outside setback
is measured from tangent
plane to bend.
The default units are used for
Units,<units-type> numeric values which do not Must be in, mm, or cm.
have units provided explicitly.
A single parameter specifying the
Thickness,<value> Begins a bend table definition. thickness for which the bend deduc-
tions in the table are defined.
Optional. Specifies an optional
tooling parameter, allowing mul-
tiple sets of bend deduction val- A single parameter specifying the
VeeDieWidth,<value>
ues for a given thickness. width of the die tool.
Must occur after a Thickness
keyword.
DataType, <datatype- Optional. Specifies whether bend Two types are supported in Version
name> radii will be specified manually 3.0.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1025
Keyword Description Parameters
l DataTypeCompensation: This is
the default and was the only
type for Versions 1.0 and 2.0.
or obtained from a Bend Table.
Allows for radius values to be
Inputs in the Bend tool switch to
manually entered.
dropdown lists of values con-
l DataTypeRadius: New in version
tained in the table.
3.0. Limits bend radii and
VeeDieWidths to those con-
tained in the table.
Defines the columns of the bend
deduction table.
Note the extra empty cell to aid
in table alignment.
AngleValues,,<value>, A list of angles, specified in degrees.
The values defined by the table
are associated with the preceding
Thickness and VeeDieWidth
keywords.
Defines the body of the bend
deduction table.
Individual deduction values may The first parameter (radius) provides
be omitted. the inner bend radius for the table
Radius,<radius>,
The total number of deduction row. The following parameters all
<deduction-value>,
values provided cannot exceed provide the deduction values for each
the number of values provided combination of angle and radius.
above for the AngleValues
keyword.
Controls what happens when an True: K-Factor is used
KFactorFallback
invalid VeeDieWidth is False: The Bend fails. This is the
<True/False>
encountered. default.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1026
Additive manufacturing
SpaceClaim has tools that allow you to prepare models for Additive Manufacturing i.e. 3D Printing.
3D Printers use STL files to build up a model in layers. SpaceClaim's Facets tab contains tools for
working with meshes and preparing them for export to a 3D printer.
The ribbon is organized in groups of tools that, from left to right, step through the process of cre-
ating a mesh for the printer.
1. Cleanup has tools that remove defects which can cause problems for downstream operations.
2. Organize has tools for separating and joining disconnected mesh regions (e.g. shells).
3. Modify has tools for working with mesh geometry.
4. Adjust has tools smoothing the mesh, reducing the number of facets, and making the facets
more uniform.
5. Analyze has tools for measuring thickness and finding overhangs.
6. Create has tools for previewing the mesh and exporting it to an STL file.
7. Edge Display has toggles for displaying:
l Internal mesh edges are shared by two connected facets
l Open mesh edges belong to one facet
l Over-connected mesh edges are connected to three or more facets and cannot be
resolved by 3D printers
www.SpaceClaim.com 1027
Mesh cleanup
3D Printing requires that the mesh be watertight and free of self-intersecting facets, or other defects.
The Cleanup tools identify and fix mesh defects.
Checking meshes
Use the Check Mesh tool to list problems with the Mesh that will adversely affect the3D Printing
process.
To check a mesh:
1. Select a mesh in the Structure tree
2. Click the Check Mesh tool
3. A dialog appears listing any issues found
The Check Mesh tool can also be used in an Action-Object workflow by entering the tool and then
selecting the mesh.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1028
To Auto Fix a mesh:
1. Click the Auto Fix tool
2. Select a mesh in the Graphics window
3. Problem areas are fixed
Mesh intersections
Use the Intersections tool to highlight areas of self-intersection.
Holes in meshes
You can find and fix holes using the Holes tool. It works like other Find-and-Fix tools in the Repair
tab.
In the mouse example below, the button needs a smooth fill and the bottom simply needs to be
capped.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1029
To find and fix holes in meshes:
1. Click the Holes tool to highlight holes in the mesh.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1030
6. The button is filled in smoothly and the bottom hole is highlighted again.
Mesh sharps
Meshes may contain sharp spikes that need to be flattened. You can use the Fix Sharps tool to find
and fix any sharps in the mesh. It works like other Find-and-Fix tools in the Repair tab.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1031
l Convexity options specify which type of sharps to look for.
l Both convex and concave: All types are found.
l Convex: Only convex sharps are found.
l Concave: Only concave sharps are found.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1032
Organizing meshes
The Organize group has tools for separating disconnected mesh regions in a single mesh body and
combining multiple mesh bodies into a single body.
A single mesh body can have any number of disconnected mesh bodies. A common example is a
shelled mesh which has both an inner and an outer mesh in one body. Another example can be cre-
ated by saving a SpaceClaim model, which contains several separate solid bodies, as an STL file. It
gets imported in SpaceClaim as a single mesh body but has several separate mesh regions.
Use the Separate All Pieces tool to separate disconnected mesh regions into individual mesh
bodies.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1033
To Separate a single disconnected mesh:
1. Click the Separate tool.
2. Use the Select Shells tool guide for a shelled mesh body.
3. Use the Select Meshes tool guide for a mesh body with disconnected mesh regions.
4. Select a mesh shell or disconnected mesh region.
5. The selection is then converted to a separate mesh body.
To Join meshes:
1. Click the Join tool.
2. Use the Select Meshes tool guide to join selected bodies one-by-one.
3. Use the Select Target Mesh tool guide to join all mesh bodies to the selected target body.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1034
Mesh modification
The Modify group contains tools for combining, splitting, shelling, thickening, and scalingmesh bod-
ies. You can also modify the number of meshtriangles to optimize the 3D printing process (more tri-
angles means longer printing time).
To Merge meshes:
1. Click the Merge tool
2. Select the first mesh
l The first mesh is highlighted in blue
3. Select the second mesh
4. The two meshes are merged into one
The Merge tool also works on two Open meshes to automatically create the union that produces a
single, closed mesh.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1035
To Subtract meshes:
1. Click the Subtract tool
2. Select the first mesh
l The first mesh is highlighted in blue
3. Select the second mesh
4. The second mesh is subtracted from the first
To Intersect meshes:
1. Click the Intersect tool
2. Select the first mesh
l The first mesh is highlighted in blue
3. Select the second mesh
4. The two mesh bodies are intersected
Patterned components are up-selected in the Boolean tools. In the example below, the cylinders
were made as a pattern. Highlighting one pattern member highlights the entire pattern.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1036
l Dont cap
l Cap
l Cap with internal points
Use the Shell tool to add thickness on the inside or outside ofa mesh.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1037
Use the Scale tool to scale the mesh body.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1038
Thicken has the following options:
l Thicken direction
l Inside
l Outside
l Thickness
l Fix intersections: Fixes any intersection that result from thickening the facets.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1039
Adjusting meshes
The Adjust group contains tools for smoothing meshes, reducing the number of facets, and making
facets more uniform (Regularize).
Smoothing meshes
Mesh smoothing is done with the Smooth tool. You control how the smoothing is done through the
Smooth Options.
The Angle threshold option determines if an angle stays sharp or gets smoothed.Vertices on edges
with faces coming together at angles above the Angle Threshold will not be moved or changed. The
example below shows a block that has all 90 edges except for two which are 45. With an angle tol-
erance of 60, only the two 45 edges get smoothed and the 90 edges are left alone.
Smooth type determines which of the following algorithms is used to so the smoothing.
Approximate:
l The original vertex positions and the new vertex positions are allowed to move.
l The amount of movement depends on how smooth the surroundings are.
l In sharp areas, the amount of movement will be large.
l In smoother areas, the amount of movement may be barely noticeable.
l Because of the movement, the Approximate option will, in general, produce smoother results.
The Approximate option can produce results that are very noticeable as shown in the example
below. The final result is achieved with several smoothing passes.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1040
Local:
l Local does not change topology.
l It mostly knocks down spikes.
The example below shows how Local smoothing works on slightly rough areas.
To Smooth a mesh:
1. Click the Smooth tool.
2. In Smooth Options, set an Angle threshold and choose a Smooth type.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1041
3. Select mesh facets or a mesh body.
4. Click Complete to smooth the selection.
5. You can continue to click Complete to further smooth the mesh.
You can also select mesh facets or a mesh body and then enter the Smooth tool.
Maximum deviation controls the distance between triangle edges and the actualedges of the part.
It influences the number of triangles used to approximate curved edges. See the images below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1042
To Reduce the number of mesh triangles:
1. Click the Reduce tool
2. Optional - Change the Reduce Options:
l Change the Triangle reduction percentage (default = 20%).
l Enter a Maximum deviation in model units.
3. Select a mesh body or box-select facets.
4. Click Complete.
5. The model or selection is re-meshed with fewer triangles.
6. You can continue to click Complete to reduce further.
You can also make your selection and then enter the tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1043
To Regularize selected facets:
1. Click the Regularize tool
2. Optional - Change the Angle threshold.
3. Select a mesh body or box-select facets.
4. Click Complete.
5. The model or selection is re-triangulated.
6. You can continue to click Complete to regularize further.
You can also make your selection and then enter the tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1044
Analyzing meshes
The Analyze group contains tools for checking the thickness of a mesh and checking for overhangs.
Thickness and the presence of overhangs are things that need to be considered for 3D printing.
Thickness
Thickness is important for planning 3D printing. The Thickness tool lets you measure the thickness
based on facet normals or relative to the printer vertical direction.
The results are shown shaded with areas that are less than the Minimum thickness shown in red. An
example is shown below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1045
Overhangs
Overhanging geometry is an important consideration in 3D printing because it may require special
supports. This can add cost and setup time to the process.
The Overhangs tool detects and highlights areas of the mesh that protrude out at angles up to 90.
You can set the Overhang Angle option to look for any angle up to 90.
In the example below, the overhang is at 65. The Overhang Angle is set to 64.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1046
Creating a mesh
Use the Convert tool to convert solid bodies into mesh bodies.
Use the following Convert options to control the size and shape of the mesh facets in areas with
curvature.
l Max distance
l Max angle
l Aspect ratio
l Max edge length
These are the same options (geometrically-speaking) as the ones that control STL export.
Regardless of thecontext in which these options are used, they control the facet creation required
by mesh modeling tools, whether it is for the explicit,user-directed Convert,or the behind-the-
scenes conversion required by other mesh modeling tools.
Max distance controls how far facet edges are away from model edges. The images below show the
effect of Max distance on the mesh of a cylinder. These examples keep the Aspect ratio fixed at 3
and the Max edge length set to 4 mm.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1047
Max Distance = 0.75mm Max Distance = 0.01mm
Max angle = 20-degrees Max angle = 20-degrees
Notice how the settings change the facets along the edge of the circle. The intrerior is a flat plane,
so 45-degree triangles are the most efficient facets.
The example on the left shows the default Max distance of 0.75mm. This refers to the gap seen in
the zoomed-in (top) image. Decreasing the Max distance to 0.01mm results in more facets along the
edge, which brings the facet edgess closer to the cylinder edge, as seen in the example on the right.
Similarly, decreasing the Max angle will result in more facets along curved edges. This example
shows the result of decreasing the Max angle from 20 degrees to 1 degree.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1048
Max Distance = 0.75mm
Max angle = 1-degree
Without a fixed Aspect ratio and without a Max edge length, you can get more distorted triangles as
shown in the following images.
No set Aspect Ratio or Max- No set Aspect Ratio or Max- No set Aspect Ratio or Max-
imum Edge Length imum Edge Length imum Edge Length
Max Distance = 0.75 mm Max Distance = 0.75 mm Max Distance = 0.01 mm
Max angle = 20-degrees Max angle = 1-degree Max angle = 20-degrees
www.SpaceClaim.com 1049
Converting a solid body to a mesh consumes the original solid.
Use the Keep original bodies option if you want to retain the original solid bodies.
The Convert tool also has a Progress Bar and a Stop button for meshes that take longer to generate.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1050
Exporting a mesh
Use the Export tool to writea mesh file for the 3D printer.
To export a mesh:
1. Select a mesh
2. Click the Export tool
3. The Save As dialog opens
4. Browse to a folder and enter a file name
5. Click Save
www.SpaceClaim.com 1051
Customizing SpaceClaim
You can customize SpaceClaim to best suit your working style. Most customization is done on the
SpaceClaim options window, accessible from the File menu.
To customize SpaceClaim
1. Select SpaceClaim Options from the File menu to display the SpaceClaim Options window.
2. Click the type of option you want to set from the navigation panel on the left.
You can use the up and down arrow keys to navigate the left panel.
3. Modify the options on the page.
4. Click OK to save all your changes and close the window.
If you try to enter a value that is out of the allowed range in the Options panel or the
SpaceClaim Options dialog, you will see a red exclamation mark icon next to the field. You can
hover over the icon to see a tooltip that will explain the valid values for the option.
Option types
You can set the following option types:
Popular Change your application color scheme, set file options for
importing and exporting, grid size, application performance
(speed vs. graphics quality), and customize the tools that are
displayed while you are working in the Design window.
Detailing Change options for annotations and drawing sheets.
Color Change the color of the SpaceClaim application window.
Snap Change the objects snapped to while you are sketching and
editing solids.
Units Set the units for dimensions, the sketch grid, and text height.
Support Set the search path for support files, such as standard thread
Files size tables.
Sheet Set the thickness, bend, and relief defaults for sheet metal com-
Metal ponents.
Advanced Modify how your design changes are displayed in the Design
window, whether tools and hints are displayed, enable back-
ground loading, change the language, customize the Spin,
Select, and Undo tools, reset the layout of the panels, and
adjust the license warning.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1052
Customize Add or remove tools and commands from the Quick Access
toolbar.
Change the keyboard/mouse actions used for common nav-
Navigation
igation tasks.
Add-Ins Include or remove SpaceClaim add-ins.
License View and activate SpaceClaim licenses.
Resources Download sample designs, check for updates, contact
SpaceClaim, or view information about this version of
SpaceClaim.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1053
Popular options
Set the startup options, interface, application performance (speed vs. graphics quality), and cus-
tomize the tools that are displayed while you are working with your design.
Startup options
Show splash screen: Select this option to display the splash screen when you start SpaceClaim.
Show welcome screen: Select this option to display the Welcome window with links to tutorials,
training videos, and other support resources when you start SpaceClaim.
Check for software updates: Select this option to use your internet connection to check for
updates each time you start SpaceClaim.
Interface options
Show tooltips: Select this option to display hints when you hover over tools, tool guides, and other
icons. They briefly explain what will happen when you select the tool and provide some hints on
how to use the tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1054
Showpopup messages in status bar: ON by default. Select this option to display popup
messagesin the statusbar area(the lower left corner of the SpaceClaim window). These messages
provide hints and feedback while you work in SpaceClaim.
Show popup progress messages: ON by default. Select this option to display progress
messageswhenimporting files or using the Volume Extract tool.
Show tool KeyTips: Select this option to enable keyboard shortcuts. Pressing and releasing the Alt
will display shortcuts that can be used to access the Quick Access toolbar, the Ribbon groups, and
the tools in the Ribbon groups.
Show Journal tab in the Ribbon: Select this option to enable Journal tools, which you can use to
save and play back a record of actions used to create a design.
Control options
Tool Guide position: Select Left, Right, Top, Bottom, or Not Shown.
Show view orientation in design window: Default is OFF.When selected, this optiondisplays a
view orientation gizmo, as shown below,in the design window. You can click a linear gizmo arrow to
rotate the design to a new orientation in 3D, or a rotational arrow to rotate the design in 90-degree
increments in the plane of the screen.
Show mini-toolbar on selection: Select this option to display a small toolbar near your cursor when
you right-click. The contents of the mini-toolbar depend on the tool you are using. You can click or
scroll the middle mouse button to hide the mini-toolbar, and it fades as you move the mouse away
from it. The mini-toolbar is shown in the image below.
Show radial menu: Allows you to use the radial menu to change select modes while other tools are
active, and gives you quick access to the Pull, Move, Fill, and Combine tools. If you select this option,
you can select one or both of the following methods to open the radial menu:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1055
l Show after holding left mouse button for N ms
l Show after clicking right mouse button, while holding left mouse button down
Show cursor arrows: Select this option to display arrows next to your cursor that indicate the dir-
ections in which you can move your mouse to edit the selected object. The arrows also convey the
change in size that will occur if you pull in that direction.
Arrow transparency: Adjust the slider to control the transparency of the cursor arrows. Move the
slider to the right to make the arrows more opaque; move it to the right to make them more trans-
parent. The arrows are set to opaque in the image below.
Move handle size: Move the slider to increase or decrease the size of the Move handle relative to
the size of the Design window, as shown in the image below.
Grid guide: Change the position and size of the toolbar displayed for the sketch grid. You can set
the Position (Bottom, or Corner), and the Size (Large, or Small). The defaults are Bottom and Large.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1056
General detailing options
You can customize the style of your annotations in a single design or set a custom style as the
default for all designs. You can quickly customize the style to conform to ASME or ISO/JIS standards,
or you can create a style by customizing note leaders, dimensions, and geometric tolerances.
View options
Default view projection:
l First Angle to label the view by the direction you are looking. For example, if you are looking
front, you see the back of an object. Therefore, the back of the object is the "Front view."
www.SpaceClaim.com 1057
l Third Angle to label the view by the object. For example, the front of the object is the "Front
view."
Section line arrow size - Enter the length of the arrow on section lines.
Section line length - Enter the length of section lines.
Detail view name text height ratio - Set the ratio of a character's height to width. For example, a
value of 1.4 sets the character height to 140% of its width.
Default view note layout - Select One Line to display the detail name and scale on one line. Select
Two Lines to display the scale below the detail name.
Default detail name note prefix - Select how you want the detail label to appear on the drawing
sheet.
Default view scale note prefix - Select how you want the scale label to appear on the drawing
sheet.
Detail view boundary note placement - Select how you want the detail name and scale inform-
ation to be positioned relative to the detail boundary.
Section cut line extension distance - Enter the length.
Section line arrow direction - Choose either Away from cut line or Toward cut line.
Cosmetic thread display standard Select a value from the drop-down.
l ISO Conventional
l ASME Simplified
l JIS Conventional
l CB Conventional
ASME Simplified is the same as ISO and JIS Conventional display standards.
Default projected view arrow style - Select the style you want to use for the projected view arrow-
heads from the drop-down list.
Show projected view name - Check whether or not to show the projected view name.
Show projected view arrow - Check whether or not to show the projected view arrow.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1058
Default projected view name prefix - Enter a new prefix or choose one from the dropdown list.
Show auxiliary view name - Check whether or not to show the auxiliary view name.
Show auxiliary view arrow - Check whether or not to show the auxiliary view arrow.
Default auxiliary view name prefix - Enter a new prefix or choose one from the dropdown list.
Projected/auxiliary view arrow length - Enter the length of the arrow on projected and auxiliary
views.
Annotation options
Default text height - Enter the height of the annotation text.
Leader circle size - Enter the size of the circle that connects note leaders to faces.
Leader arrow length - Enter the length of the arrow on note leaders.
Leader arrow width - Enter the size of the arrowhead on note leaders.
Leader shoulder length - Enter the length of the line from the note text to the note leader arrow.
Leader textbox gap - Enter the size of the margin between the note text and the beginning of the
note leader.
Center line extend- Enter the length that a center line will extend past the edge of the object.
Default arrow fill style - Select the style you want to use for the arrowheads on note leaders from
the drop-down list.
Default dimension arrow shape - Select the shape you want to use for the arrowheads on dimen-
sions and leaders from the drop-down list.
Default dimension text location - Select how you want to align the note leader text with the note
leader line from the drop-down list.
Fallback font - Select the font you want to use if the new window font is not available.
Virtual sharps rendering style - Select the symbol you want to use to indicate the virtual sharp.
Datum symbol frame - Select the frame style for datum symbols.
Datum symbol attachment - Select the attachment style for datum symbols.
Show thread designation in thread diameter - Choose whether thread designations are shown
instead of thread diameters:
l Never: Show the diameter and not the thread designation.
l Always: Show the thread designation instead of the diameter.
l Per thread table: Use the value for ShowThreadDesignationInDiameterDimensions in the
thread table XML file. The value can be set to true or false.
l If units match: Show the thread designation if the system units match the units from the
thread table.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1059
l Per thread table if units match: Show the thread designation if the units match and if the
ShowThreadDesignationInDiameterDimensions value is true.
Datum Callout text height ratio: Controls how many times larger the callout circle should be com-
pared to the text height.
Datum Target default point size: Controls the point size used by datum target points, lines, and
circles. Default point size can be overridden on a per object basis.
Datum Target area default hatch spacing: Controls the hatch spacing for circular and rectangular
datum targets. Default spacing can be overridden on a per object basis.
Datum Target area default hatch angle: Controls the hatchangle for circular and rectangular
datum targets. The defaultangle can be overridden on a per object basis.
Datum callout leader arrow shape:Controls the arrow shape of leaders connected to datum tar-
gets.
Welding symbols standardChoose either AWS or ISO.
Enforce dimension line - Check the box to use the European standard of keeping the dimension
line when the extension lines are shown.
Tight gap between dimension line and text - Check the box to shrink the gap between the dimen-
sion text and witness lines.
Horizontal dimension text - Check the box to keep all annotation text oriented horizontally.
Override layer color for annotations - Check the box to set all annotation text to the color selec-
ted shown in the Annotation color control. If you choose to override the layer color, select the color
used for the override from the Annotation color control.
Extension line gap - Enter the size of the margin between geometry and the end of dimension
lines.
Extension line extent - Enter the length that the dimension lines cross each other.
Dimension line extent - Enter the length of the arrow that appears outside the dimension lines.
Dimension text offset - Enter the distance between the dimension text and its leader line.
Foreshortened radial dimension center size - Enter the size of the cross shown to represent the
center.
Default chamfer dimension style - Choose either Linear or Normal to chamfer.
Default chamfer dimension text format - Choose between:
l <length> X 45
l C <length>
Show zero value for base ordinate dimension - Display the baseline dimension as a 0.
Show common dimension line for ordinate dimensions - Display all dimensions along the same
line.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1060
Check Rotate text if you want the dimensions to be displayed along the line instead of per-
pendicular to the line.
Show datum target endpoints - Checkbox for showing or hiding the endpoint.
Hide annotations behind model - Checkbox to allow solid geometry to hide annotations that are
behind the geometry. For printing, set the Print as image to Yes in the Printing Options to show
annotations as hidden in the print.
Linestyle options
Default thick lineweight - Enter the default width for thick lines.
Default medium lineweight - Enter the default width for medium lines.
Default thin lineweight - Enter the default width for thin lines.
Type of object - From the drop-down, select an object type, then select the Line style and Thick-
ness for that object.
l Only a Thickness option is available for Crosshatching.
l Options forDetail view clipping edges apply to all clipping edges of partial views. You can
also set a Color for the clipping edges.
l Only a Thickness option is availablefor Area cross section border lines.
l Only a Thickness option is available for Cross section arrow tips.
The values in the Trim back section control the line weight for side offset handles.
Thick-Empty-Thick lines look like this:
Thick-Thin-Thick lines look like this:
Line style: Selecta line style for the object. For example, when working with Wireframe, Hidden
Line, or Hidden Line Removed visibility modes, you can now select a line style to show the edge(s)
of a designs partial view. This feature enables you to easily identify which parts of the model are cut
by the partial clipping boundary. Non-solid line styles can help to differentiate a detail view with
clipped edges when in wireframe mode.
To enable the display to view while workingwith your design:
Select Lineweight in the Show group in the Display tab
Select Hidden Line, Hidden Line Removed or Wireframe from the Graphics drop down in
the Style group in the Display tab
If you try to enter a value that is out of the allowed range in the Options panel or the
SpaceClaim Options dialog, you will see a red exclamation mark icon next to the field. You can
hover over the icon to see a tooltip that will explain the valid values for the option.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1061
Drawing sheet size and format options
The drawing sheet size and format options allow you to choose a drawing sheet layout.
l To use a pre-defined drawing format that has been saved as an .scdoc file, select Use external
format and select a format from the list or click Browse to choose a file.
l To create drawings without a format, select No format and select a size and orientation, or set
a custom width and height.
l Deselect Show SpaceClaim -provided default formats in the user interface if you don't
want to list drawing sheet formats that were installed with SpaceClaim in the external formats
selection list.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1062
Modular grid options
Modular grid options allow you to change how modular grids appear by default in your drawings.
When you change these options, all new modular grids will use these settings; existing grids in your
drawings will not change.
Most of these options are also found in the properties for a grid. To change one instance of a mod-
ular grid, see Displaying a modular grid.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1063
l Axis labels: Override X, Y, or Z with your own labels.
l Negative and positive prefixes: A prefix shown before the distance on a grid label.
l Negative, positive, and zero suffixes: A suffix shown after the distance on a grid label.
l Modular grid description label: A label shown next to the section line when you show a
modular grid on a cross section view.
l Automatic creation for new views:Select an option for displaying modular gridsfor
all new views in drawing sheets.
l Automatically show modular grid when two grid directions are parallelto the
sheet: Two of the X, Y, or Z axes in the view must be parallel to the drawing sheet
to display the modular grid.
l Automatically show modular grid when at least one grid directions are par-
allelto the sheet:The X, Y, or Z axis in the view must be parallel to the drawing
sheet to display the modular grid.
l Do not automatically show the modular grid
l Automatically show modular grid description: If selected, then the description label is
displayed next to the section line for a cross section view.
l Show balloons around grid labels: Show circles around grid labels.
l Automatically show origin: Show the legend axis on the lower left corner of the view.
3. Click OK to save your changes.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1064
Appearance options
You can adjust SpaceClaim's appearance, such as its menu bar style and color schemes. This options
page also contains placeholder elements for future color customization options.
General
Ribbon style: Choose between Fluent (Office 2007) or Scenic (Office 2010), or Windows 8 (Office
2013) style ribbon bar styles.With the Scenic style, the File menu provides a Recent menu item,
which displays Recent Documents (lists the name and location of all recently opened files) and
Recent Places (lists a history of all recently visited folders).
Color scheme: Select Silver, Blue, Black, or Custom Colorfrom the menu.
Reset Docking Layout: Click this button to return the layout of the docking panels and SpaceClaim
windows to their original locations.
Show cross sections in sketch: Display selectable section curves at the intersection of the section
plane and bodies while in Sketch mode.
Show coaxial face groups: Display faces that share an axis with blue shading.
Show arc centers: Display small crosses on the sketch grid at the centers of circles, ellipses, poly-
gons, and arcs.
Show section points: Toggle the display of points that represent tangent edges in Sketch and Sec-
tion modes.
Show occluded mesh selection: Show mesh selection highlighting through objects. When the
option is On, hidden mesh selections are shown. When it is Off, hidden mesh selections remain hid-
den.
Fill cross section: Display cross section area with a filled appearance in Section mode and Sketch
mode.
Add tool graphics to scene image: When copying the scene from a window, include the tool ele-
ments in the image.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1065
Colrors
Design color scheme: Select a color scheme from the menu. This option controls the color scheme
used in the Design window. You can choose between two pre-set color schemes: White Background
or Black Background. Elements displayed in the design area will change to colors that work well for
the background color.
You can change the colors for other elements. Click the color next to an individual element and
choose a new color from the drop-down. Select colors from the Custom, Web, or System palettes.
Click Reset to change all the colors back to the SpaceClaim defaults.
Highlight and Select scheme: Select a scheme from the drop-down menu. Classic and Default can-
not be modified. Custom allows you to modify color options to create your own scheme. Use
Ctrl+Shift+H to toggle through schemes in the following order: Classic; Default; Custom.
Mesh back face color: Enable or Disable the ability to show mesh back faces in a different color and
choose which color.
Mesh Highlight and Select scheme: Choose the Classic or Default scheme, or choose Custom and
set the following:
l Highlighted mesh
l Highlighted selected mesh
l Selected mesh
www.SpaceClaim.com 1066
Selection options
You can adjust SpaceClaim's selection settings, such as the cursor Hit radiusand the tolerance used in
Power Selection.
To setselection options
1. Select SpaceClaim Options from the File menu to display the SpaceClaim Options window.
2. ClickSelection in the navigation panel on the left.
3. Modify the options on the page.
4. Click OK to save all your changes and close the window.
General
Hit radius: Type the number of pixels your cursor can be from the object you want to select.
Select edge loops using mouse scroll wheel: This option is ON by default. It allows you to hover
over an edge and use the mouse scroll wheel to cycle through the possible loops that include that
edge. You can click a pre-highlighted edge loop to select it. If you are using a multitouch machine,
you can select edge loops by double-clicking OR double-tapping the first edge of the edge loop
you want to select.
Show previous selections with prehighlight hint: This option is OFF by default. If it is enabled,
SpaceClaim will remember previous selections that were used for some operation. For example,
select several faces and moved them. The next time you select one of the faces, the others will pre-
highlight.
Power Selection
Automatically calculate Power Selection results: Select this option to automatically display objects
in the Selection panel. You do not need to click to search when power selecting. Objects similar
to the selected object are automatically displayed in the Related list. This option is on by default.
Power Selection relative tolerance: Type a percentage to change the relative tolerance used when
searching in the Selection panel. Enter a non-zero percentage to find objects with similar, but not
exactly the same dimensions when power selecting. For example, if you enter 10% in this option
field, select a 10 mm radius round in your design, then click in the Selection panel, rounds with a
radius between 9 mm and 11 mm will be returned in the All rounds equal to 10 mm results list. The
default is 1%. Adjust this value to 0% to detect perfect rounds exactly or increase it to find imported
rounds.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1067
Mesh
Mesh selection granularity: Allows you to control the scope of selection in meshes.
l Fine: Shows the selection hot spot and allows selection of mesh facets, edges, and vertices.
l Coarse: Allows selection of mesh facets only.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1068
Snap options
You can set snapping options for sketching and editing solids. Units for snap options are set by your
Units options for all new documents.
If you try to enter a value that is out of the allowed range in the Options panel or the
SpaceClaim Options dialog, you will see a red exclamation mark icon next to the field. You can
hover over the icon to see a tooltip that will explain the valid values for the option.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1069
l Tangent/perpendicular from line - Snap points at tangent and perpendicular angles
along lines indicated by tangent and perpendicular guides
l Parallel to line - Lines parallel to the sketched line indicated by highlighting
l Parallel to grid - Snap enabled parallel to the grid when snap to grid is disabled
l Grid - Snap enabled to the grid
www.SpaceClaim.com 1070
For the primary dimension, you nudge the value up using the Up Arrow key and nudge it down using
the Down Arrow key.
Nudge the secondary dimension vakue up with the Right Arrow key and down with the Left Arrow
key.
You can set three nudge increment values:
l Normal - The nudge increment when you pressShift and an arrow key.
l Small - The nudge increment when you pressAlt+Shift and an arrow key.
l Big - The nudge increment when you pressCtrl + Shift and an arrow key.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 1071
Snapping to an existing diameter
www.SpaceClaim.com 1072
Units options
You can set the units for dimensions, the sketch grid, and text height.
To customize units
1. Select SpaceClaim Options from the File menu to display the SpaceClaim Options window.
2. Click Units from the navigation panel on the left.
3. Select one of the following from the Units settings for drop-down list:
l All New Documents to create a default detailing style for all your designs. These set-
tings will not affect any currently open documents.
l This Document to set options for the current design only.
4. Modify the options on the page.
5. Click OK to save all your changes and close the window.
If you try to enter a value that is out of the allowed range in the Options panel or the
SpaceClaim Options dialog, you will see a red exclamation mark icon next to the field. You can
hover over the icon to see a tooltip that will explain the valid values for the option.
Units
Type: Select Metric or Imperial from the menu.
Length: Select the default units used for length. Angles are always shown in degrees.
Decimal/fraction: If you use Imperial units, you can select Decimal or Fraction to display distance
measurements that are less than 1 unit.
Angle: Select from the following options.
l Degrees
l Degrees/Minutes/Seconds
l Degrees/Minutes
www.SpaceClaim.com 1073
Primary precision: The number of decimal places you want displayed for distance measurements for
the primary units.
Angularprecision: The number of decimal places you want displayed forangle measurements for
the primary units.
Show trailing zero: Select this option to display trailing zeros in decimal measurements.
Use tight tolerances: When this option is selected, tolerances are rounded to a value that gives a
tighter tolerance when youhave dual dimensions or when a dimension from the design window is
shown in the drawing window with a different unit setting than the design window. The purpose is
to not lose any precision when converting from one unit system to another. When this option is not
selected, the values are rounded according to method A in ISO 370-1975 (E). Whenselected, values
are rounded according to method B.
Show symbol in user interface: Select this option to display the units abbreviation in SpaceClaim.
The abbreviation will appear in measurement fields, such as a distance field when you pull a face.
Show symbol in annotations: Select this option to display the units abbreviation after the meas-
urement in annotation dimensions.
Show "-" separator: Select this option to display a hyphen between whole values and fractions.
Use Dual dimensions: Select this option to display annotation dimensions in both Metric and Imper-
ial. The unit type you have selected is displayed first and the other is displayed in square brackets.
You can see a preview of the display below this option category.
Secondary precision: The number of decimal places you want displayed for distance measurements
for the secondary units.
Show nearest fraction: Check this option to show the nearest fractional value Less Than the nominal
dimension and the nearest fractional value Greater Than the nominal dimension. It allows for Ruler-
style dimensions. For example, if you were to lay a ruler down and the distance falls between the
marks on the ruler, these values tell you the nearest marks on either side of the dimension value.
l Fraction: Enter a fraction between 1/128 and 1/2. The default is 1/16, which is a common ruler
increment.
l From both sides: Show fractions on both sides of the nominal dimension.
l From closest: Only show the fraction that is closest to the nominal dimension regardless of
which side it is on.
Grid
Reset to Defaults: Click this button to reset the grid settings to the SpaceClaim defaults.
Minor grid spacing: Type the distance you want between the smallest grid lines.
Number of grid lines per major: Type the number of smaller grid lines between larger, darker grid
lines.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1074
Text
Text height units: Select a unit type for note text.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1075
Sheet metal options
You can set the wall thickness, bend, and relief defaults for sheet metal components. These defaults
can be changed for each component or bend by selecting the component or bend and modifying
the property values in the Properties panel. Units for sheet metal options are set by your Units
options for all new documents.
Options in the Basic Defaults section apply to all new designs, and persist after you close
SpaceClaim. Options in the Relief Defaults section apply only to new designs in the current session.
If you try to enter a value that is out of the allowed range in the Options panel or the
SpaceClaim Options dialog, you will see a red exclamation mark icon next to the field. You can
hover over the icon to see a tooltip that will explain the valid values for the option.
Basic Defaults
Thickness: Type a value for the default wall thickness of sheet metal parts.
Bend Table: Specify an existing Bend Table as the default for new parts.
K-Factor (for R=T): Type a value for the K-factor. The K-factor is a value between .25 and .50 that is
used to calculate the bend radius. K-factor is a percentage of the metal thickness and depends on
factors such as the material and type of bending operation.
Bend radius: Type a value for the default bend radius. The value is a Thickness ratio by default, but
you can select Value to enter an absolute value.
Split face gap: Set the default gap created when you bend a split face, which is shown as C in the
image below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1076
Junction gap: Set the default gap created in Full, Partial, and No Overlap Junctions and Flanges.
l Thickness ratio to change the gap based on the thickness of the wall.
l Value to specify the exact width of the gap.
Junction overlap: Set the percentage of overlap in Partial Overlap Junctions. The default is 50%.
l For individual Partial Overlap Junctions, you can change the Overlap Proportion property in
the Sheet Metal properties panel with the Junction selected.
When the Bend Radius is set to Thickness ratio and you change the sheet metal part thickness
for the part, the value for the Inner Radius now changes in the Sheet Metal Properties panel. In
other words, changing the part thickness property will not change all the bend radii, but the dis-
played bend radius changes to show that there is a problem for you to fix. You can fix them by
selecting the desired bends and changing their properties manually.
Relief Defaults
Bend Relief: These values are the defaults used when you create a bend. Select the default Type,
Width, and Depth from their menus. You can change this type for an individual bend relief by select-
ing the bend relief with the Pull tool and clicking a different option in the Options panel.
In the images below, A is the width and B is the depth of the bend relief.
Corner relief: Set the default depth of corner reliefs, which is shown as D in the image below.
If you change the width or depth for these option you can select:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1077
l Thickness ratio to change the relief width and depth based on the thickness of the wall.
l Value to specify the exact width and depth of the bend relief.
Export
Round all sharp corners at DXF export: Select this option to round all the edges in your design
whose neighboring faces are not co-planar when you export a DXF file. You can set the round radius
values if you select this option.
Colors
Select highlighting colors to use on sheet metal designs. To distinguish between corner reliefs and
edge reliefs, select two different colors. Colors on designs will appear more saturated than the col-
ors shown in the sheet metal options.
Click Reset Colors to restore the default colors.
Unfold Layers
Assign default layer colors and linestyle for:
l Bend Lines-Up
l Bend Lines-Down
l Forms
l Overall Dimensions (color only)
l Bend Dimensions (color only)
www.SpaceClaim.com 1078
Navigation options
SpaceClaim allows you to customize how you spin, pan, and zoom. You can customize which mouse
button/keypress combinations are used as shortcuts for these tools, or you can select a theme to
match another CAD application you are familiar with.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1079
mode, you cannot modify options from the Misc section of the Properties panel. When
you select a face within the boundary, the entire face (unclipped) displays.
l Zoom to fit: Changes the behavior of the ClipView>Locate function. If this option is
selected, then the Clip Volume is moved to the center of the graphics window and is
magnified for the user; when Zoom to Fit is chosen. If it is not set, then the Clip Volume
is only centered, and not magnified.
9. Click OK to save all your changes and close the window.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1080
Advanced options
Modify how your design changes are displayed in the Design window, whether tools and hints are
displayed, enable background loading, change the language, customize the Spin, Select, and Undo
tools, reset the layout of the panels, and adjust the license warning.
If you try to enter a value that is out of the allowed range in the Options panel or the
SpaceClaim Options dialog, you will see a red exclamation mark icon next to the field. You can
hover over the icon to see a tooltip that will explain the valid values for the option.
General
Animate changes to view projection: Select this option to animate the steps when you select a
view.
Show previous selections with pre-highlight hint: Select this option to highlight all the geometry
you last acted on that includes the selected vertex, edge, or face. If you click again with the Select
tool, the previously selected group will be selected for you with that one click.
Auto-extrude/revolve sketches in Section mode: Select this option to automatically extrude or
revolve in section mode. As you sketch in Section mode, lines that begin on an existing edge are
extruded to form surfaces, and closed surfaces form solids. If the line begins on a solid, the line is fin-
ished automatically when you click another point on the solid. To automatically revolve, the sketch
must be attached to a revolved face.
Maximum undo steps: Type the number of actions you want available for undo. We recommend
that this value be set to at least 50. To enable your changes, you must restart SpaceClaim.
Language: Select a language from the menu. The SpaceClaim user interface and online help display
in the selected language.
Reset All User Settings: Reset all modifiable user settings toa default state. To apply the updated
settings, you must restart SpaceClaim.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1081
Export User Settings: Export a SpaceClaim user.config file (XML format) for editing and/or
future import.
Import User Settings:Apply non-default, customized selections that are unique to an individual
user.A valid SpaceClaim user.config file (XML format) must be available for import. User-
.config file location can vary depending on SpaceClaim installation, but generally, this file type is
stored in your local AppData directory. Once you locate theuser.config file you want to import,
or, enter the name of the user.config file in the File Name text box, click Open to import the
file.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1082
SpaceClaim. You should only need to do this once.
l Users may need to delete local settings to get SpaceClaim to use the central config file the
first time. This is because SpaceClaim checks the file dates and uses the newest of the two
files.
l After the first time, you should not need to delete local settings again.
l When you do a new install on a machine with the Environment variable set, the admin user set-
tings will be used without needing to delete the local settings.
l Once a user has a specified central config file, any changes they make will persist. However, set-
tings within tabsrestricted by 'panel.config' cannot be overridden.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1083
Navigation
Advanced
FileOptions_General
FileOptions_ACIS
FileOptions_AutoCAD
FileOptions_CATIA
FileOptions_IGES
FileOptions_JTOpen
FileOptions_OBJ
FileOptions_Parasolid
FileOptions_PDF
FileOptions_ProEngineer
FileOptions_Rhino
FileOptions_SketchUp
FileOptions_STEP
FileOptions_STL
FileOptions_VRML
SupportFiles
Customize
AddIns
License
Resources
SpaceClaim Labs
Pull Tool
Select Automatic, Add, Cut, or No Merge to set the initial state of Pull. The Automatic option
selects by default.
Animate Full Pull: Select this option to animate all the steps when you select the Full Pull option to
revolve, sweep, or blend your design.
Behavior
Preview before modifying: Select when you want interim calculations performed when modifying
solids from the menu. If this option is turned on, the preview of a change is displayed as a rough
wireframe model rather than a rendered, 3D model. If you work with very large designs, a wireframe
preview can be faster than doing the calculations necessary to render the change as a shaded 3D
model. Select:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1084
l Auto to allow SpaceClaim to determine when to render the preview based on the size of the
component and the capabilities of your graphics card.
l On to always display changes as rough wireframe previews rather than rendered previews.
l Off to always render the preview instead of displaying it as a wireframe model.
Enable geometry convergence: Select this option if you want SpaceClaim to help you when you are
moving solids together so that the edges (such as rounds) converge perfectly. If this option is
enabled, when you are moving solids together, SpaceClaim will display a progress bar as it performs
the convergence steps.
Show cross sections in sketch: Select this option to display cross sections of solids with hatching.
You might want to disable this option if you are working with complicated cross-sections.
Show coaxial face groups: Display faces that share an axis with blue shading.
Fill cross section: Controls the visualization of a cross-sectioned solid in Section mode. If this option
is on and you view a section through a body, the body is filled with color.
Show arc centers: Select this option to display small crosses on the sketch grid at the center of
circles, ellipses, polygons, and arcs.
Offset edges by geodesic calculation: With this option selected, all the points on the offset edge
are the same distance from the initial edge. In the examples below, the original edge is highlighted
in green, the regular offset is shown in orange, and the geodesic offset is shown in blue.
Top view direction: Allows you to change the top view to Z or Y. This setting is saved with the doc-
ument and only applies to new documents. You may want to change this setting when you import
drawings from other CAD applications that use a different upward direction. This option is auto-
matically set to Y when you run SpaceClaim with an ANSYS license. This gives your design the same
orientation in SpaceClaim and ANSYS.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1085
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 1086
Import and export options
You can open and insert files from many other modeling applications into SpaceClaim for editing,
and save your SpaceClaim designs as many different file types. If you work frequently with non-
SpaceClaim files, we recommend that you set your file options to optimize the importing and
exporting process for your needs.
If you try to enter a value that is out of the allowed range in the Options panel or the
SpaceClaim Options dialog, you will see a red exclamation mark icon next to the field.
You can hover over the icon to see a tooltip that will explain the valid values for the
option.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1087
SpaceClaim assembly as multiple documents. When you save your design, click Refer-
ences to adjust where the documents are saved.
l Use matching SpaceClaim documents for faster import if a design contains an
external component that was previously imported and converted to the SpaceClaim
.scdoc format,and you want to re-use that previously imported file.
l When SpaceClaim is integrated with a manufacturing application, this option is
ignored. In the manufacturing use case, it is common to alter geometry to accom-
modate manufacturing processes and save the model with the same name. If this
option is on, it could cause the manufacturing version to be overwritten.
l Automatically save imported documents to immediately save an opened or inserted
non-SpaceClaim file to an SCDOC file. (If you do not select this option, then opened or
inserted files are not saved until you save the design.) Make sure that Save imported
document and load as lightweight is NOT checked if you do not want to save any
imported documents.
l Improve imported data to improve a file when it is opened or inserted. You can
choose to have SpaceClaim Clean and simplify geometry, Stitch nearby surfaces
together, and Find coincident surfaces within a tolerance that you specify. De-select-
ing this option imports the file without improvements so the file appears more quickly,
but you may have to perform the improvements manually.
l Use multi-threading: Improve performance when importing large CATIA V5,
Pro/ENGINEER, SolidWorks, or Solid Edge assemblies by running translation in multiple
threads
l Use lightweight assemblies for SpaceClaim documents: If you open a SpaceClaim doc-
ument with external components, the external components will be opened as light-
weight.
l Use lightweight assemblies for imported documents: If you select this option, then
you can select one of the following load methods:
l Save imported document and load as lightweight: When this option is selected,
the imported file will be opened in memory. An SCDOC file will be created for
each part in the file, saved, and then loaded as lightweight, which frees the heavy-
weight data from memory. You will see an entirely lightweight assembly. If you
then right-click on one of the lightweight components and select Load Com-
ponent, then the part will be fully loaded very quickly. Also, this method displays
the color of imported parts. The methods below do not. PMI information cannot
be imported with a lightweight model.
l Lightweight assembly structure and geometry: This method imports the doc-
ument just like in the above option, creating lightweight parts in SpaceClaim, but
www.SpaceClaim.com 1088
no SCDOC files are created or saved. As a result, this option uses less memory than
the above method when importing the document; however, if you use Load Com-
ponent on one of the lightweight components, the entire document must be re-
imported in order to get all of the data for the component. Loading the com-
ponent can be very slow. This method is recommended if you intend only to use
the lightweight facets and not the heavyweight geometry or if you are working
with smaller imported documents. Since an SCDOC is not created and saved, you
are able to toggle Off the display of these lightweight components using the
checkbox in the Structure Tree.
l Assembly structure only: Only the component name and hierarchy is created. No
lightweight facets are created.
l Allow import of hidden components and geometry to open or insert hidden com-
ponents within CATIA v5, Parasolid, SolidWorks, and SketchUp files, and turn off their vis-
ibility in the Structure tree.
l Objects to be imported has checkboxes for:
l Free curves
l Points
l Planes
l Axes
l Coordinate systems
l Object names
l Improve data on export to improve a file when it is exported. This allows you to turn
off the behavior if you don't want to merge faces and edges before a model is expor-
ted, such as exporting to Rhino.
l Allow export of hidden components and geometryto save components that have
their visibility turned off in your design as hidden components when you save them as
any other file type. This option is supported for ACIS, Rhino, SketchUp, and SAT/SAB
formats.
l Select Import object names to import CATIA files with object names.
l Select Export object names to export CATIA files with object names.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1089
structure is used in the Structure tree.
l Split body name by the following characters to insert the character between the part
name and the body name, when the names are different. For example, with the character
set to a period, the name would be part.body. If you deselect this option, then the com-
ponent name of imported components and solids are the same in the Structure tree.
l Version to set the format of exported designs.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1090
the imported data is moved to world origin coordinates (0, 0, 0). This option is ON by
default.
l Allow default code page conversion:
l Associate dimensions to geometry: Import associated dimensions
l Substitute font: Select a font to use when the original font in the DXF file is missing.
3. Set the Export options:
l Version: Select the AutoCAD version to set the format of exported designs.
l Save as Black and White: Remove color information from exported designs.
l Associate Dimensions to Geometry: Select dimensions to associate with adjacent geo-
metry.
l Include Drawing Format: On by default.
l Scale Output 1:1: Off by default. Set the output of your AutoCAD files to a 1:1 ratio.
l Export solids as: Choose either Solids or Hidden line curves
When saving a drawing as a DWG or DXF file, you can also access the last two Exportoptions
by choosing Save As from the File menu; from the Save As dialog box, click the Options but-
ton.
l Set the Translation technology for Import and Export:
l Teigha (Associated Dimensions) to use Teigha 3.4.0 libraries.
l Autodesk Real DWG to use Autodesk's translator. Importsupports associated
dimensionsin your design. Use this option to import DWG files with 3D bodies. For
export it will disconnect dimensions from the geometry in your design.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1091
l For CATIA CGR files, you can specify how you want to import the faceted data (similar to
other faceted formats such as AMF and STL)
l Lightweight
l Connected mesh
l Simple mesh
l Solid/surface body
3. Set the Export options:
l Version: Select the CATIA version to set the format of exported designs
l Simplify spline surface data: Reduce the number of control points on surfaces
Whether you import or export CATIA files, XYZ locations of point objects will scale as expec-
ted.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1092
l Import part manufacturing information:Imports JT PMI (Product and Manufacturing
Information) files with datum labels, text notes, dimension measurements, and GTOLs
(geometric distance and tolerance information, also called GD&T).
l Import polylines: Import polylines from JT facet data. To enable this option, Free
curves under General file options must be turned on
l Import data:
l B-Rep
l Facets
3. Set Export options:
l Resolution
l Coarse, Medium, Fine to use the deviation and angle preset values.
l Custom to use the Deviation and Angle sliders to set a custom resolution.
Resolution indicates the number of sides of a polygon used to represent a circle.
The deviation is the difference in distance between the circles radius and the poly-
gons radius. The angle is the angle between the edge of the polygon and a tan-
gent drawn through the circle at the same point.
l Default to use the system setting.
l Use JT Open Toolkitconfiguration file to import/export JT files, which allows
you to control common translation parameters using a standard configuration file,
the format of which is defined by JT Open Toolkit. Using the toolkit also ensures
100% data compatibility and allows you to have more control over the number of
LODs (Levels of Detail) and tessellation parameters for each LOD in an exported JT
file.
l Export part manufacturing information: Check On or Off
l Version: Select a JT version
www.SpaceClaim.com 1093
Resolution indicates the number of sides of a polygon used to represent a circle.
The deviation is the difference in distance between the circles radius and the poly-
gons radius. The angle is the angle between the edge of the polygon and a tan-
gent drawn through the circle at the same point.
l Facet maximum edge length: Enter a value in current model units
l Facet maximum aspect ratio: Enter a value in the range 1- 10
www.SpaceClaim.com 1094
3. Set Export options
l Version: Choose a SketchUp version
www.SpaceClaim.com 1095
3. Set the Resolution optionsto control the size and shape of mesh facets in areas with
curvature:
l Coarse, Medium, Fine use preset values for Deviation and Angle.
l Customenables the Deviation and Angle sliders so you can use your own specific
values.
See below for a description of the effect of these options. Deviation is the dis-
tance between a chord drawn through a curved cross-section of the model and
the curves most distal point. The angle is the angle that the chord line makes with
a line tangent to the cross-section curve.
l Facet maximum aspect ratio to change the triangle faceting ratio when you
export anSTL file.
l Facet maximum edge length to enter a desired edge length. The value you spe-
cify is the maximum value for the edges, however smaller edge lengths may be
created. The ACIS modeler attempts to meet your desired edge length setting,
but in some design scenarios, may create an edge length that is less than what you
specify as your facet maximum edge length setting, to best accommodate the
design.
Deviationcontrols how far facet edges are away from model edges. The images below show the
effect of Max distance on the mesh of a cylinder. These examples keep the Aspect ratio fixed at 3
and the Facet maximum edge length set to 4mm.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1096
Max Distance = 0.75mm Max Distance = 0.01mm
Max angle = 20-degrees Max angle = 20-degrees
Notice how the settings change the facets along the edge of the circle. The intrerior is a flat plane,
so 45-degree triangles are the most efficient facets.
The example on the left shows the default Max distance of 0.75mm. This refers to the gap seen in
the zoomed-in (top) image. Decreasing the Max distance to 0.01mm results in more facets along the
edge, which brings the facet edgess closer to the cylinder edge, as seen in the example on the right.
Similarly, decreasing the Max angle will result in more facets along curved edges. This example
shows the result of decreasing the Max angle from 20 degrees to 1 degree.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1097
Max Distance = 0.75mm
Max angle = 1-degree
Without a fixed Aspect ratio and without a Max edge length, you can get more distorted triangles as
shown in the following images.
No set Aspect Ratio or Max- No set Aspect Ratio or Max- No set Aspect Ratio or Max-
imum Edge Length imum Edge Length imum Edge Length
Max Distance = 0.75mm Max Distance = 0.75mm Max Distance = 0.01mm
Max angle = 20-degrees Max angle = 1-degree Max angle = 20-degrees
To set VRML file options
www.SpaceClaim.com 1098
1. Select VRML in the panel on the left.
2. Select Override quality to change the print resolution options and tolerances.
l Coarse, Medium, Fine to use the deviation and angle preset values.
l Custom to use the Deviation and Angle sliders to set the resolution of the VRML mesh.
Deviation is the distance between a chord drawn through a curved cross-section of the
model and the curves most distal point. The angle is the angle that the chord line makes
with a line tangent to the cross-section curve.
l Facet Aspect Ratio to change the triangle faceting ratio when you export a VRML file.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1099
Support file options
You can specify the directories in which you store support files, such as drawing sheet formats or
thread size tables. Drawing sheets contained in these directories are displayed within the Format
tool.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1100
To use a template for new designs
To create a design template, do the following:
1. Create some geometry (or set some parameters) you wish to use as a template for new
designs
2. Save the document as a SpaceClaim Template File (*.scdot)
3. In Support Files options, check the Use template for new designs checkbox and specify a
path to the template files.
File Locations
Check the Initialize Open dialog to the following directory checkbox and specify a path. When
you choose to open an existing design, the Open dialog opens and displays files in this directory.
Check the InitializeSave dialog to the following directory checkbox and specify a path. When you
choose to saveyour design, the Save dialog opens and displays files in this directory.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1101
Quick access toolbar options
The Quick Access toolbar (QAT) is located on the title bar. The Ribbon is the menu bar that contains
all the tools in groups. You can add or remove tools from this toolbar and control the placement
and display of the Ribbon.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1102
License options
You can view and activate SpaceClaim licenses. If you have questions about licensing, please
contactSpaceClaim customer support.
To change add-ins
The licensed add-ins that are available to you are listed. Select an add-in to activate the license.
When you try to activate an add-in, and a license is not available, you will receive a warning message.
Flex Licensing
If flex licensing is available for you, your license is stored on a server.You can check out a flex license
on a specific computer, and then go off the network and continue to use the borrowed license. You
borrow the license for a specified period of time, after which it is returned to the server on the date
and time you specify.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1103
To borrow the license
1. Do one of the following:
l Check Specific Borrow Length and enter the number of days you want to borrow the
license.
The maximum number of days is determined when SpaceClaim is purchased.
l Check Specify return date/time and enter the exact date and time.
Use this option if the borrow time is shorter than one day.
2. Select the Translator licenses to borrow.
3. Click BorrowLicense.
When the license if successfullyborrowed, Borrow License is disabled (grayed out) and title
bar shows the expiration date or the time remaining.
Node-locked Licensing
A node-locked licenseis intended to prevent unauthorized (repeated) use of the SpaceClaim applic-
ation, and requires that a serial number only works on a single machine. In SpaceClaim, node-locked
licenses can include, for example, Data Exchange Package I, Data Exchange Package II, JT Open,
TraceParts, and CATIA V5.
To use the same serial number on another machine, you must first deactivate the license on the first
machine. To do this, select the Deactivate License button in the License Options dialog box. The
Deactivate License button displays only if you have a node-locked serial number license, and is not
visible to Flex customers, or most serial number customers.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1104
Multitouch options
The Multitouch options page is only visible if a multi-touch device is connected to your computer.
General
Enable multitouch: Enable or disable multi-touch functionality in SpaceClaim.
Use style: Select either of the following, then set the options in the Settings section.
l Timing-based: This mode automatically chooses touch functions based on the amount of time
a touch signal is maintained. For example, using two fingers moving together to immediately
drag invokes panning, while holding two fingers down for a while, then moving them, invokes
what are normally right-mouse-button drag mouse gestures.
l Gizmo-based: Existing mouse buttons and popular keyboard buttons are placed in an on-
screen gizmo, to clearly map existing functions onto the touch interface. This mode is inten-
ded to transition existing SpaceClaim users to the touch interface.
See Using a multitouch screen for more information about multitouch styles.
Show touch spots: Displays a red filled circle at the location of the recognized pen or touch loc-
ations on the screen. This was added to facilitate online demos, so the viewer can see where fingers
are touching on the remote screen.
Settings
The options in this section change depending on your Use style setting.
If you select Timing-based, then you can set Query next direction: Set the direction of flick-based
query. The default is up.
If you select Gizmo-based, then you can set Gizmo configuration: Select Switch buttons to reverse
the direction of the gizmo. The default gizmo is configured for right-handed use and the reversed
gizmo is configured for left-handed use.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1105
Displaying workspace tools
You can adjust the display of workspace tools and the display of your design in the Design window
using the Show drop-down list of tools in theDisplay ribbon group on the Display tab, and by modi-
fying SpaceClaim options.
To customize the tools displayed while you are working with your design
SpaceClaim offers the following tools on the Show ribbon group on the Display tab to assist you
while creating, editing, and detailing your designs:
l Check the World Origin box to display the axes that set the default orientation of the design
in the Design window.
l Check the Spin Center box to mark the center of the spin when using the Spin tool. (This is the
same as the Show Spin CenterSpaceClaim option.)
l Check the Lineweight box to switch the line style of lines (such as those displayed in Hidden
Line, Hidden Line Removed, and Wireframe graphics styles) from thin to the thickness set by
the Lineweight tool in the Style ribbon group.
l Check the Face Highlight box to enable pre-highlighting of faces.
l Check the Face Spotlight box to show a spotlight attached to the cursor when passing over
faces.
l Check the Adjacent Entities box to display faint highlighting on adjacent faces when you
hover over an edge and on adjacent edges when you hover over a vertex. Scrolling the mouse
wheel switches between adjacent entities. This feature is useful in selecting the correct edge
or face to extrude.
l Check the Layout Lines box to display sketch curves on layout planes.
l Check the Offset Baseline Faces box to display offset relationships with blue shading.
l Check the Standard Holes box display Standard Holes in blue. When unchecked, Standard
Hole faces display in the normal face color.
l Check the Lightweight Components box to display Lightweight components. This also has a
flyout for setting Lightweight component transparency.
l Check the Environment box to display according to the settings in the Appearance panel.
To display other workspace tools, modify the settings in the Popular SpaceClaim options.
You can also display journal-related tools by checking the Show Journal Tab option in the Popular
SpaceClaim options.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1106
Examples
Hovering over an edge with Adjacent Entities highlights the faces shared by the edge
www.SpaceClaim.com 1107
Configuring windows
SpaceClaim has several docking windows that are initially docked along the left side of the applic-
ation. You can minimize these panels, detach them, or dock them to different sides of the applic-
ation. You can also dock and detach your design windows.
To minimize a panel
Click the thumbtack icon to minimize the docked panel. Mousing over a minimized panel expands
the panel while the cursor is over it. Once the cursor leaves the expanded panel, it returns to its min-
imized state.
To maximize a panel
Click the thumbtack icon to "stick" the panel to the application window.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1108
Customizing the welcome window
The layout and contents of the SpaceClaim Welcome window can be customized by editing a single
XML file. You can add or remove buttons, edit the icon for a button, control the layout of buttons,
and determine the action executed when a button is pressed.
The following button actions are supported:
l Launch a video any media format that the operating system of the computer displaying the
Welcome window can play
l Launch a Web page uses the default browser
l Launch a SpaceClaim Help page opens SpaceClaim s html-based help to a specific page of
its contents
l Load a SpaceClaim model from any file format that SpaceClaim opens in the running
instance of SpaceClaim that the Welcome screen is attached to
l Launch any other executable that the operating system can handle
www.SpaceClaim.com 1109
XML Elements
The following tags are used in Welcome.xml to specify the content and behavior of the Welcome
screen:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1110
File structure and versioning
When the Welcome screen launches, it looks first for the Welcome.xml file and uses that file to set
the layout and behavior of the buttons. It looks first in the %APPDATA%\SpaceClaim \Welcome dir-
ectory (typically C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\SpaceClaim \Welcome\) and then
in SpaceClaim InstallDirectory\Library\Welcome\ for the xml file.
The paths to files (example: <DocumentPath>folder\intro.scdoc</DocumentPath>) used in Wel-
come.xml should be relative paths from the location of welcome.xml. This means that in order to cre-
ate a custom Welcome screen, the Welcome.xml file should be placed in either of these locations
with the supporting files and images.
Once the Welcome screen has loaded, it checks the SpaceClaim server (if connected to the internet)
to see if a newer version of Welcome.xml exists. If it does, it automatically downloads it and replaces
the current Welcome screen display. This means that if a user wishes to have a custom Welcome
screen created and used by SpaceClaim, they should assign a large version number in the <Version>
tag in Welcome.xml so that SpaceClaim will not download and overwrite the custom version with a
newer version.
There is also an XML attribute to control whether or not the XML file can be updated automatically
from the server. The attribute is <Update>false</Update> and can be placed after the version num-
ber as shown below.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1111
Lastly, in order to minimize the size of files included with a SpaceClaim install, the Welcome screen
need not have the files referenced in the Welcome.xml. For example, if the xml file uses the link
<Link>Videos\intro.wmv</Link> (to a possibly large video file) and the video file is not present on
the users machine, when the button is pressed to watch the video (and only when the button is
pressed) the user will be prompted to download the video from the SpaceClaim server (if it exists).
This way large videos can be stored on a server and only accessed if and when the user tries to watch
them.
Additional notes
l The <Link> tag can be used to open any executable or windows document.
l The preferred button image type is .png with a transparent background. This approach pro-
duces the best highlighted appearance when the button is pressed.
l The <Tooltip>, <Link>, <HelpId>, and <DocumentPath> tags are optional.
l The <Name> tag for an item must be unique. This tag is used internally to identify buttons so
that they can use different translated text.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1112
Views
You can change the shortcut keys for standard views and create your own custom views to save set-
tings for object orientation and visibility.
User-created views will not auto-scale when they are moved.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1113
l Orientation: Select if you want the current orientation to be saved in the view.
l Object visibility: Select if you want the visibility of objects in the current view to be
saved in the view. Objects that are hidden when you create the view will be hidden
when you apply the view. Visibility is applicable to all types of geometry, planes, and
curves.
l Visibility behavior for new objects: Select the visibility behavior you want to apply to
objects you create after you create the view.
l Leave Unchanged: New objects will retain their visibility when you apply the
view.
l Visible: New objects will be visible when you apply the view.
l Hidden: New objects will be hidden when you apply the view.
5. Click OK.
Your custom view is added to the View tool menu.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1114
3. Edit the view properties.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1115
Creating custom shortcuts
You can continue to add more shortcuts or select an existing shortcut and click Edit to change it.
When you are done creating and editing shortcuts, click OK to exit.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1116
SpaceClaim add-ins
You must install and activate each add-in before you can use it. You will receive a warning message if
you try to activate an add-in and a license is not available. If you want to use an add-in, but it is not
available, contact SpaceClaim Customer Support.
To activate an add-in
1. Select SpaceClaim Options from the File menu then click Add-Ins.
2. Check the box next to the add-in to activate it.
3. Click OK.
4. Exit SpaceClaim and restart it.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1117
SpaceClaim API
The SpaceClaim Application Programming Interface (API) allows you to create add-in applications
that extend the functionality of SpaceClaim. An add-in application is a managed code DLL that uses
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.0 and the SpaceClaim API.
Information about the SpaceClaim API can be found in help files in a sub-folder in the SpaceClaim
installation folder. The sub-folder has a name of the form "SpaceClaim .Api.Vx", where "Vx" refers to
the version of the API. For example, information about API V4 can be found in the "SpaceClaim
.Api.V4" sub-folder.
The following documents are provided:
l SpaceClaim_API.chm - the Developer's Guide to writing an add-in.
l API_Class_Library.chm - documentation for classes, structs, methods, and properties in the
API.
l API Overview.pdf - an overview of the SpaceClaim API and its concepts.
These documents are written by developers for developers, and are available only in English.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1118
Mastercam
The plugin for Mastercam allows geometry transfer back and forth between the two products. This is
beneficial for SpaceClaim users who need a CAM solution and Mastercam customers who need a
powerful geometry editing and preparation tool.
The plugin is supported in SpaceClaim versions SC2012 SP0 and later that are licensed for Parasolid
import/export.
Mastercam versions X6, X6 MU1, and X8 are supported.
After installing the plugin, there will be a new toolbar in Mastercam with an "Export to SpaceClaim "
Installation procedure
1. Download theMastercam zip file from http://www.space-
claim.com/en/Support/downloads.aspx
2. Extract the downloaded zip file.
Thezip file may be blocked by Windows, sinceit came from the internet. To check:
l Using Explorer, navigate to the directory containing thezip file
l Right click on the file
l Select Properties
l Click the "Unblock" button if it is there
3. Within the extracted file structure, copy the following files into the {Mastercam Installation}
\chooks directory (keep the original DLL's inside their SpaceClaim sub-directory):
SpaceClaim \MastercamSpaceClaim Plugin.6.0.dll
www.SpaceClaim.com 1119
SpaceClaim \SpaceClaim AddInBridge.dll
SpaceClaim \SpaceClaim PlugInBase.dll
MastercamSpaceClaim Plugin.6.0.ft
The DLL files may be blocked by Windows, sincethey came from the internet. To check:
l Using Explorer, navigate to the directory containing the DLL's
l Right click on the DLL file
l Select Properties
l Click the "Unblock" button if it is there
4. Launch Mastercam > Go to Settings > Customize > Toolbars:New Toolbar. Category:NETHook
5. Drag the SpaceClaim import/export icons onto the new toolbar
6. Close and re-launch Mastercam. The new toolbar should appear with the SpaceClaim tools on
www.SpaceClaim.com 1120
it.
Open the configuration file in a text editor and change the following settings:
l FromSpaceClaim Format
l ToSpaceClaim Format
www.SpaceClaim.com 1121
ESPRIT
The plugin forESPRIT allows geometry transfer back and forth between the two products. This is
beneficial for SpaceClaim users who need a CAM solution and ESPRITcustomers who need a power-
ful geometry editing and preparation tool.
The plugin is supported in SpaceClaim versions SC2012 SP0 and later that are licensed for Parasolid
import/export.
ESPRITversion 2012 issupported.
After installing the plugin, there will be a new toolbar in ESPRIT with an "Export to SpaceClaim " but-
Thezip file may be blocked by Windows, sinceit came from the internet. To
check:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1122
l Using Explorer, navigate to the directory containing thezip file
l Right click on the file
l Select Properties
l Click the "Unblock" button if it is there
www.SpaceClaim.com 1123
Installation procedure for64 bit OS
1. Download the ESPRIT zip file from http://www.spaceclaim.com/en/Support/downloads.aspx
2. Extract the downloaded zip file and save the following ESPRIT plugin files in the {ESPRIT Install-
ation}\Addin directory:
l ESPRIT directory with the SpaceClaim Addin icon files
l ESPRITSpaceClaim PlugIn.dll
l RegisterAddinToESPRITon64bitOS.reg
l RegisterOn64BitOS.bat
l SpaceClaim AddinBridge.dll
l SpaceClaim PlugInBase.dll
3. When installing on64 bit OS, edit the RegisterOn64bitOS.bat file.
1. Set ESPRITSpaceClaim PlugInDllFilePath = {SpaceClaim install directory}
\ESPRITSpaceClaim PlugIn.Dll
4. Save and run the batch file. The batch file will first register the plug-in to the system using
RegAsm.exe, then call RegisterAddinToESPRITon64bitOS.reg to register the ESPRIT software to
find and load the SpaceClaim plug-in.
5. Launch ESPRIT.
6. To verify the plugin installation, go to Tools>Add-in>Add-in Manager.
Open the configuration file in a text editor and change the following settings:
l FromSpaceClaim Format
l ToSpaceClaim Format
www.SpaceClaim.com 1124
GibbsCAM
The plugin forGibbsCAM allows geometry transfer back and forth between the two products. This is
beneficial for SpaceClaim users who need a CAM solution and GibbsCAM customers who need a
powerful geometry editing and preparation tool.
The plugin is supported inSpaceClaim versions SC2014 SP0 and later that are licensed for Parasolid
import/export.
Gibbs CAM API version must be higher thanv10.5.0.
The GibbsCAM API only supports export of of selected bodies. If nothing is selected, all bodies are
exported.
Only export to Parasolid Text Format is supported.
Once installed, the UI appears in GibbsCAM under the Plug-Ins menu.
Import toSpaceClaim is used inGibbsCAM to receive models from SpaceClaim. This will import
the current active design from the currentSpaceClaim session. The model will be imported in the
sameGibbsCAM design window.SpaceClaim should already be running when using the import func-
tionality. Solids inSpaceClaim can be imported intoGibbsCAM and will retain their colors. Assem-
blies will be flattened when transferred.
Export toSpaceClaim is used to send models having one or more solids to SpaceClaim. If
SpaceClaim is not already running, this will start a new SpaceClaim session and load the model. If
SpaceClaim is already running, it will open the model in a new design window. Note that only solids
inGibbsCAM can be imported using this plugin.
Installation procedure
1. Go tothe SpaceClaim installation directory
2. Copy the followingfilesto the {GibbsCAM Installation}\Plugins\SpaceClaim directory:
l GibbsCAMSpaceClaimPlugIn.dll
l SpaceClaimAddinBridge.dll
l SpaceClaimAddinBridge.dll.config
l SpaceClaimPlugInBase.dll
www.SpaceClaim.com 1125
3. Optionally, copy the desired language folder(s) to the same location for translated versions of
the plugin
4. Launch GibbsCAM.
5. To verify the plugin, open the Plug-Ins menu and look for GibbsCAM-SpaceClaim Addin.
Depending on your Data Exchange License, some formats may not be available.
Open the configuration file in a text editor and change the following settings:
l FromSpaceClaimFormat
l ToSpaceClaimFormat
l The GibbsCAM API only allows "ParasolidText" regardless of the value set in the config
file
www.SpaceClaim.com 1126
Driving dimensions with Excel
The Excel add-in lets you control dimensions with an Excel spreadsheet.
When you create a spreadsheet in the Excel ribbon, Driving Dimension groups are automatically
added to an Excel spreadsheet. In the spreadsheet, you can enter new target values, or use Excel's for-
mulas to calculate new values.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1127
www.SpaceClaim.com 1128
MakerBot Thingiverse
The MakerBot add-in allows you to upload models to MakerBot's Thingiverse design community.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1129
ANSYS add-in
SpaceClaim and ANSYS provide a combined solution that you can use to simplify CAD models for
analysis. With this add-in, you can send a model that was imported or created in SpaceClaim to
ANSYS Workbench, ANSYS Mechanical, ANSYS Design Modeler, or any other integrated ANSYS
products. The geometry is sent into ANSYS along with any driving parameters or analysis specific
attributes (spot welds, midsurfaces thicknesses, etc) that you have defined. Driving parameters can be
edited within ANSYS to run sets of iterative analyses.
The basic process is simple:
1. Import a CAD model into SpaceClaim.
2. Simplify and modify the model for analysis.
3. Define parameters and named selections that you can use in ANSYS.
4. Send data to ANSYS:
l ANSYS 11.0, 12.0, and 12.1: Launch ANSYS from SpaceClaim, and then set up analysis con-
ditions and constraints using the powerful simulation tools in ANSYS.
l ANSYS 13.0: Start ANSYS Workbench and create a geometry cell:
l To work with an existing design,click Import Geometry in ANSYSand choose an
existing SCDOC file, then use Edit Geometry to launch SpaceClaim with that doc-
ument loaded.
l To start a new design, click New SpaceClaim Geometry in ANSYS to launch
SpaceClaim with an empty design.
5. Modify and send data between SpaceClaim and ANSYS, and rerun the tests as often as neces-
sary.
6. Return the validated design options or recommended changes to the designer when testing is
complete.
You can view the following video that demonstrates the process:
SpaceClaim ANSYS integration demonstration
www.SpaceClaim.com 1130
l Geometry
l Solids
l Surfaces
l Line bodies (Beams)
When a Beam withSection Anchor type set toLocation is transferred to Workbench, its
Location becomes a Workbench Offset of type, User Defined. The X and Y offset com-
ponents will, in general, change to preserve the Beam cross-section position relative to
the Beam line. This coordinate transformation is necessary to account for differences
between SpaceClaim and Workbench reference frames.
l Points
l Origins
l Named Selections (groups)
l Driving dimensions (groups)
l Ruler dimensions
l Pattern count
l Driving annotation dimensions
l Shell thickness
l Midsurface thickness values on surfaces
l Spot welds
l Material properties
www.SpaceClaim.com 1131
ANSYS demos and tutorials
You may want to view the following videos that feature the Prepare tools and the ANSYS add-in:
3D Direct Modeling Optimized for CAE
CAE Solution Demo
The following tutorials provide in-depth and hands-on examples to help you get started:
l Spot welds tutorial
l Midsurface tutorial
l Shared topology tutorial
l Using groups and dimensions in ANSYS tutorial
www.SpaceClaim.com 1132
Spot welds tutorial
This tutorial will teach you how to define spot welds on a part and analyze them in ANSYS Mech-
anical.
Next step
www.SpaceClaim.com 1133
Spot weld tutorial conclusion
Previous step
www.SpaceClaim.com 1134
Midsurface tutorial
Select Faces tool guide is active by default. This tool guide allows you to select a pair of off-
set faces, and all other face pairs with the same offset distance are automatically detected.
Add/Remove Faces tool guide allows you to select additional faces to offset or remove
detected face pairs from the selection.
Swap Sides tool guide allows you to switch the face pairs. You may need to do this when the
sets of detected colored faces are not grouped cleanly.
Complete tool guide creates the midsurface faces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1135
Define midsurface faces
1. Click Midsurface in the Define group on the Prepare tab.
The Select Faces tool guide is active by default.
2. Select the face shown here:
After you select the first face, SpaceClaim will filter the selection and will only allow you to
click on parallel faces, or faces that produce an offset.
3. Select the offset face, shown here:
As you can see, one round does not have the same thickness and is not identified as an offset
pair. Faces that look like offset pairs might not be identified as a midsurface because of errors
in translation, or when the part was not modeled with an offset face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1136
4. Click the Add/Remove Faces tool guide if it is not already active (it should be).
5. Select the round face:
The solid is temporarily transparent so you can see the newly-created midsurface.
2. For a better view of the midsurface, hide the solid and expand the Midsurface component in
the Structure tree, like this:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1137
Midsurface tutorial: Step 4
Now let's try a more complicated example.
1. Click on the following link and save the file on your computer: Midsurfacing.scdoc.
2. Open the document in SpaceClaim.
The design looks like this:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1138
5. Now select its offset pair:
The base side of an offset pair is highlighted in blue and the offset side is highlighted in
green. Midsurfaces are generated from the blue, or base, faces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1139
Midsurface tutorial: Step 5
The inside ribs have a different thickness or offset from the outside walls, so we have to add them to
the selection. We can do this using the Select Faces tool guide.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1140
4. Continue selecting face pairs until your design looks like this:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1141
3. Click on the solid:
All face pairs with offsets between the minimum and maximum thickness are selected.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1142
Midsurface tutorial: Step 7
If you zoom in, you'll notice that the base and offset sides on the ribs are not highlighted correctly.
You can use the Swap Sides tool guide to change the base and offset sides. This is important
because the midsurfaces are created from the base (blue) face. The offset face (green) is only high-
lighted so you can see it as you define midsurfaces.
Swap sides
1. Click the Swap Sides tool guide.
2. Select the first incorrect face:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1143
3. Select the other incorrect face:
Now all inner faces are highlighted correctly as base and offset faces.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1144
Midsurface tutorial: Step 8
In addition to normal face properties, a midsurface has a thickness property that is sent to ANSYS
and applied to the shell element.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1145
The Thickness property is in the Midsurface section of the panel.
Launch ANSYS
1. Click the ANSYS Workbench button in the ribbon bar to send the current model in SpaceClaim
to a new project in Workbench.
Everything that is visible in the Design window will be sent, so hide the solid so it will not be
sent to ANSYS.
2. Go to Workbench and click on one of the midsurfaces under Geometry in the project:
3. Look in the Properties panel (below the structure tree) and you will see that a thickness is
assigned to the midsurface. This is the thickness from the original solid in SpaceClaim.
4. Generate a mesh:
1. Right click Mesh under the project and select Generate Mesh.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1146
Workbench will use the thickness property assigned to it to give the model the proper
mesh.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1147
Shared topology tutorial
ANSYS utilizes shared topology when bodies are grouped into multi-body parts and the solid(s) and
surface(s) are touching or intersecting. A component in SpaceClaim becomes a multi-body part in
ANSYS.
See Shared topology in ANSYS for more information.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1148
Solids under the same component will be sent to ANSYS as a multi-body part if the Shared Topo-
logy property is set to true. In this case the solids are at the top level, and two midsurfaces are also
in their own components. See Shared topology in ANSYS for detailed information about how shared
topology propagates through the structure for designs sent to ANSYS 11.0 vs. ANSYS 12.0 and 12.1.
Only visible objects are sent to ANSYS; hidden objects are not sent.
As you can see, the smaller parts that share the component with the blue part are not imprin-
ted. You do not need to imprint edges from one body to another to have a multi-body part. It
will be created automatically if the solids are in the same component.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1149
2. Click the box next to Top_Level_Assy twice to hide and then unhide all of the objects in the
Design window.
All objects should now be visible.
3. Click ANSYS Workbench on the ANSYS tab to launch Workbench and send the design.
Generate a mesh
www.SpaceClaim.com 1150
4. The solids should now be meshed. Take some time to view the mesh. Notice how it looks
around all of the components.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1151
2. Notice that the mesh has been formed around the solids that used to be there.
Also notice that the top face has been split into regions in order to use shared topology. No
imprinting of edges needs to be done in SpaceClaim to make this occur. Overlapping parts
also create shared topology.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1152
l Put the solid or surface in its own component.
l Set the Shared Topology property on the component.
For ANSYS 12.0 and 12.1, you must make sure the top level component has its Shared Topology
property set to False, and then change the property for each component as desired. Keep in mind
that the property is applied to everything below a component, including its sub-components.
In this exercise we will put the solids in sub-components and set the Shared Topology property
because this method works for all supported versions of ANSYS.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1153
5. Select Component1 and change its Shared Topology property to true.
6. Go back to Workbench and select the model in the structure tree.
7. Click Update: Use Geometry Parameter Values.
This will update the geometry in Workbench from SpaceClaim, so your change will be sent
over.
8. Notice that the bearing component is now in the structure tree in Workbench.
9. Right-click Mesh and select Generate Mesh.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1154
1. Hide the bearings and notice that the small components are no longer split.
2. Hide the plug on top of the design to see that the solids that are still under the same com-
ponent are still using the same topology. This includes the midsurfaces.
Note: To make a multi-body part, the solids need to exist in the same component and the
Shared Topology property for the component must be set to True.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1155
l Only visible objects are sent to ANSYS; hidden objects are not sent.
l Solids or surfaces in the same component will be treated as a multi-body part and will use
shared topology.
l To prevent shared topology, place solids in their own components or set the Shared Topology
to false for a component.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1156
Using groups and dimensions in ANSYS tutorial
This tutorial will teach you how to create groups in SpaceClaim to drive changes in ANSYS Work-
bench.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1157
Create named selections
1. Select the two cylindrical holes on the right side of the model:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1158
These names will make it easier to identify the groups when you are working with the design
in ANSYS.
Notice that there is a dimension on the screen. When a dimension is showing and you create a
group, you will usually create a driving dimension.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1159
5. Click Create Group.
A group is created in the Driving Dimensions folder in the Groups panel.
6. Select the top face of the blue part:
10. Select the opposite end of the model to make a ruler dimension that controls the total length
of the design:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1160
11. Click Create Group.
A group is created under Driving Dimensions.
12. Rename the groups so their uses will be easier to recognize in ANSYS:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1161
The faces stored in the named selection are highlighted in red.
Before: After:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1162
Also notice that when you click on the groups in the Groups panel, you see the dimensions
specified in ANSYS.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1163
You must select an axis on the Move handle before you can use the dimensions to drive
changes. Clicking a handle tells the Move tool which direction the change will be made. The
sparks appear only after an axis is selected.
5. Click the spark next to the 38mm dimension and change it to 40:
www.SpaceClaim.com 1164
7. Go back to ANSYS and click Update: Use Geometry Parameter Value.
The model will update and the new parameter will be passed over. Now you can change the
length of the model by changing the location of the part or by stretching the model.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1165
SpaceClaim parts and properties in ANSYS
Workbench applications only support flat (single-level) assemblies. An ANSYS part is created for
each SpaceClaim part, at any level in the assembly. This part contains bodies that are visible and
match the user import filters set in ANSYS. The filters are Import Solid Bodies, Import Surface Bod-
ies, and Import Line Bodies.
In ANSYS Design Modeler, multi-bodied parts are parts (components) that contain more than one
body (solid, surface, or line body). For example, for two surface or two solids to share topology, they
must be placed in a multi-bodied part.
ANSYS Mechanical allows a maximum of two assembly levels. You can have components inside com-
ponents, but nothing deeper.
If you send a component with two or more bodies into ANSYS Mechanical, then it shows up as a part
with multiple bodies in it (multi-bodied part).
If you send a component with two or more bodies into ANSYS Design Modeler, then everything
becomes flat.
When you send a SpaceClaim assembly to ANSYS mechanical, it also gets flattened to 2 levels.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1166
The image above shows an assembly in SpaceClaim on the left and the same assembly in ANSYS on
the right. Component 1 is displayed as a single-body part in ANSYS and component 3 is moved to
the root level.
Component instance names are not transferred.
Mass properties
ANSYS will calculate the volume, center of gravity, and moments of inertia of the part if these values
are not supplied. SpaceClaim supplies the volume and allows ANSYS to calculate the center of grav-
ity and moment of inertia.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1167
Using groups to drive changes in ANSYS
SpaceClaim and ANSYS have full round-trip associativity. This means that changes to the model can
be sent back and forth between SpaceClaim and ANSYS.
You can define groups to use as parameters and named selections. If the objects in the group are
similar or related, then a property is created that can be used to change a parameter in ANSYS. For
example, you could create a group of all faces that have the same offset and use this group to
change the offset in ANSYS.
See Using groups and dimensions in ANSYS tutorial for hands-on examples.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1168
Using Named selections in ANSYS
You can create named selections in the SpaceClaim Groups panel and then use these groups as
named selections in ANSYS.
See Using groups to drive changes in ANSYS for information about using groups to make changes to
the design in ANSYS.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1169
Shared topology in ANSYS
SpaceClaim can share topology (face, edge, and vertex connections) between touching or inter-
secting bodies and surfacesin designs that are transferred to ANSYS.
Shared topology is the only way to achieve a conformal mesh where bodies meet, and is the only
way to be certain that the intersection of bodies is meshed perfectly.
Shared topology also applies to volume and surface bodies that are completely inside of other
volume or surface bodies. This situation is common in analyses involving fluid flow.
For ANSYS 15.0 and 16.0, Shared Topologyset to Merged applies to the following cases:
l Bodies that are touching each other (same as Shared)
l Surface bodies that are intersecting each other (same as Shared)
l Volume bodies that are completely inside of other volume bodies. For example Solid A is
completely inside of Solid B which is completely inside of Solid C. Solid A will share topology
with Solid B and Solid B will share topology with Solid C.
l Surface bodies that are completely inside of volume bodies. For example Surface A is com-
pletely inside of Solid B which is completely inside of Solid C. Surface A will share topology
with Solid B and Solid B will share topology with Solid C.
l Any combination of the above four cases.
l Not Supported - Cases where volume bodies partially intersect each other or surfaces extend-
ing outside of volume bodies.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1170
l For example, if you set Shared Topology to true for the root component, then the entire
model will be one share group.
l The name of the component node is the name of the component from which recursive sharing
starts.
l The bodies under this node are listed with full path names through the assembly, such as Axle
Sub-Assy (Front)\Wheel (Left)\Solid, using component names in parentheses if they are
present.
l You can have multiple distinct share groups, but a body can only belong to one group.
See the Shared topology tutorial for hands-on experience with shared topology. See ANSYS online
help for detailed information about how ANSYS handles multi-body parts and shared topology.
The Shared Topology property on Parent component is set to true, so the solids inside the shaded
area are shared.
Examples
www.SpaceClaim.com 1171
ANSYS meshes two blocks with shared topology. The blue block will gain a new imprinted face
which will be shared between the green and blue blocks. Notice how the nodes of the mesh line up
along the bottom of the smaller block.
ANSYS creates separate meshes for two parts because they are in different components and the root
part has Shared Topology set to None.
The mesh for shared topology is not the same as merged geometry. Here the boxes are merged,
and you can see that the mesh is different than it is for two bodies with shared topology.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1172
ANSYS workbench settings
There are many user preferences in Workbench that control geometry transfer. The settings sup-
ported by SpaceClaim are explained below.
Workbench
Description
setting
The following parameters are transferred:
l Part parameters: Only includes the sheet metal parameters for thickness, inner
radius, and kFactor if the part is a sheet metal part. These are transferred with
the names, Sheet.Thickness, Sheet.InnerRadius, and Sheet.kFactor.
l Assembly parameters: Groups for the active window (belonging to the root
part) that have a dimension.
If you have more than one part occurrence for the same part master in SpaceClaim
Parameter (for example, 4 wheels in a car assembly), then part parameters are only transferred
Processing for the first occurrence. We do not transfer the parameters for each part node
because Simulation allows you to set contradictory parameters on different nodes,
even if they share the same geometry.
The Parameter Processing option also controls whether parameters are applied if
they have been changed in Simulation and then the Update: Use Simulation Para-
meter Values command has been executed.
New assembly parameters are applied in the order that dimension groups are listed
in the Groups panel in SpaceClaim. You can change this order by dragging a group
to a new location in the list.
Personal The Personal Parameter Key is a string that can match the start or the end of the
Parameter parameter name. You can specify more than one key separated by semicolons. By
Key default, SpaceClaim groups have no parameter prefixes.
Named
SpaceClaim does not transfer vertex members because we do not support CAD Asso-
Selection
ciativity for vertices at this time.
Processing
Named
Selection Supported by SpaceClaim.
Prefixes
Materials
Supported by SpaceClaim.
Property
www.SpaceClaim.com 1173
Workbench
Description
setting
Transfer
This option may slow things down, which is why there is a preference to turn it off.
CAD Asso-
With SpaceClaim, the performance difference should be negligible, so you should
ciativity
keep it enabled.
Import
Coordinate Coordinate systems belonging to the root part are transferred.
Systems
Import
Spot Welds are transferred.
Work Points
Simulation allows parts to share a B-Rep, which means transfer is faster and the B-Rep
only needs to be meshed once. Because spot weld points must be defined in terms
of special vertices created in the B-Rep (for example, a vertex in a face requires a
Import degenerate loop containing a single vertex), breps can only be shared if they are
Using identical in the spot welds that they have. SpaceClaim compares spot weld points
Instances and create instances that share a B-Rep for those part occurrences that have the same
spot weld requirements.
We recommend that you leave this option turned on.
Smart update will only re-transfer parts that have changed, which can save a lot of
time with a large assembly. Unfortunately, what constitutes a change in this case is an
all-or-nothing consideration, which means a part will need to be re-transferred,
along with any other parts that would share its B-Rep, if any of the following have
changed:
l The placement of the part occurrence in the overall assembly has changed.
l Bodies have changed geometry, or been added/removed, or been made vis-
Do Smart ible/invisible, or the user filters have selected different bodies.
Update l The name of the part or any of the bodies has changed.
l Named selection members for this part occurrence have changed.
l Spot weld points for this part occurrence have changed.
l Parameters (currently only sheet metal parameters) for this part have changed.
If you save your work in Simulation as a "dsdb" file, the timestamps used for smart
update are saved with it, which means smart update continues to work in the next ses-
sion.
Attach File
Attach is what ANSYS calls a transfer. This preference uses a file for data transfer
Via Temp
rather than reading data streams directly. This may be faster for large assemblies.
File
www.SpaceClaim.com 1174
Workbench
Description
setting
Analysis
If this is set to 2D, then only surface bodies lying in the XY plane are transferred.
Type
Simulation does not support bodies of mixed dimensionality in a multi-body part.
They will transfer successfully, but they will fail to mesh. Mixtures of surface and line
bodies are supported, but mixtures of solid-surface or solid-line are not. Therefore, if
a part contains a mixture of solid and surface bodies, which is quite common in
Mixed SpaceClaim, Mixed Import Resolution can be used to specify whether solids bodies
Import Res- or surface bodies should be used.
olution If Mixed Import Resolution is set to None, a mixture of solid bodies and surface
bodies could be transferred, and as already mentioned, the part will fail to mesh. The
default setting is None, since most CAD systems do not support mixtures of solids
and surface bodies, but this setting should be set to Solid or Surface with
SpaceClaim.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1175
Working with ANSYS 13.0
www.SpaceClaim.com 1176
Connecting to ANSYS 13
www.SpaceClaim.com 1177
Updating data with ANSYS 13
When you transfer geometry to ANSYS, only surface bodies are stitched. Other bodies are
fused, and a warning is issued if shared topology fails.
When a Beam withSection Anchor type set toLocation is transferred to Workbench, its Loca-
tion becomes a Workbench Offset of type, User Defined. The X and Y offset components will,
in general, change to preserve the Beam cross-section position relative to the Beam line. This
coordinate transformation is necessary to account for differences between SpaceClaim and
Workbench reference frames.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1178
Working with ANSYS 15.0
www.SpaceClaim.com 1179
Connecting to ANSYS 15
www.SpaceClaim.com 1180
Updating data with ANSYS 15
When you transfer geometry to ANSYS, only surface bodies are stitched. Other bodies are
fused, and a warning is issued if shared topology fails.
When a Beam withSection Anchor type set toLocation is transferred to Workbench, its Loca-
tion becomes a Workbench Offset of type, User Defined. The X and Y offset components will,
in general, change to preserve the Beam cross-section position relative to the Beam line. This
coordinate transformation is necessary to account for differences between SpaceClaim and
Workbench reference frames.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1181
Working with ANSYS 16.0
www.SpaceClaim.com 1182
Connecting to ANSYS 16
www.SpaceClaim.com 1183
Updating data with ANSYS 16
When you transfer geometry to ANSYS, only surface bodies are stitched. Other bodies are
fused, and a warning is issued if shared topology fails.
When a Beam withSection Anchor type set toLocation is transferred to Workbench, its Loca-
tion becomes a Workbench Offset of type, User Defined. The X and Y offset components will,
in general, change to preserve the Beam cross-section position relative to the Beam line. This
coordinate transformation is necessary to account for differences between SpaceClaim and
Workbench reference frames.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1184
Collaborating with LiveReview
SpaceClaim LiveReview securely links a Host SpaceClaim session with other interested parties over
the internet. Models opened in the Host session can be viewed, manipulated, measured, and
marked-up by everyone connected.
To begin a shared session, the Host connects to the server. Secure invitations are then sent out for
Guests to connect to the server from their Client machines.
Models used in the session reside on the Host PC and are opened in the Host SpaceClaim session.
SpaceClaim LiveReview then distributes graphics information from the Host session to the Clients. In
other words, each Client sees graphics from the active model in the Host s SpaceClaim session.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1185
l Monitoring participant status
l When necessary, suspending client navigation for the group
SpaceClaim LiveReview provides enough graphics information for Clients to work independently with
the model and perform the following actions.
l View navigation
l Selection
l Making measurements
l Taking view Snapshots
www.SpaceClaim.com 1186
Hosting a LiveReview session
Models used in the session reside on your PC. You control which models are in session and which is
the active model.
In SpaceClaim Options, the LiveReview panel allows you to specify the Server address.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1187
l Copy URL
l Copies the session link to the clipboard
6. Once an invitation type has been chosen the session begins
l The SpaceClaim graphics window is given a blue border
l Session status is displayed in the upper left corner of the graphics window
l Hovering over the session status will display the session ID
l
As guests join the session, their names are added to the Participant list in the LiveReview panel.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1188
l Green Client graphics have finished loading and caught up to the current view on the Host
l Red Client graphics are loading
l While Red on the Host, the Client will see a progress bar
By default, all guests can independently navigate the model, i.e. perform view operations.
l Spin, Pan, Zoom
l Choosing standard views (Top, Front, etc.)
To make it easier for you to control the session, Host navigation takes precedence over that of the
Clients.
Also, updates from the Host are pushed to the Clients with a forced pause to their navigation.
At times, in order to focus the attention of the group, you can shut off all Client navigation with the
While Client navigation is blocked, the command button shows a Lock icon.
When you change your active window on the Host machine, the Clients view also changes.
Selecting
Selection is shared both ways, Host-to-Client and Client-to-Host, across multiple client sessions.
The following Selection Modes are available on the Client.
l Single, Double and Triple-click
l Ctrl+selection
l Alt+selection
l Box-selection
www.SpaceClaim.com 1189
l Lasso
l Polygon
l Paint
l Using Boundary
When Selection Modes are used on the Host, the results are shared with the Client.
Chat
Use the Chat panel to type text messages to your guests.
Guests can also type text messages in their Chat window.
If a guest has their Chat window closed, a popup will notify them when a new chat message is sent.
Messages from both Host and Clients are displayed on all participants' machines.
Markup
LiveReview has a set of tools for marking up the graphics.
Pen Tool
Line Tool
Use the Line tool to draw straight lines and arrows on the model.
1. Click the Line tool
www.SpaceClaim.com 1190
4. Choose an Arrow Style for the start and end points of the line
l The top dropdown menu is for the start point
l Thebottom dropdown menu is for the end point
Text Tool
Markups are broadcast to all clients, which allows simultaneous drawing on models by multiple
users.
l Each client is assigned a different color
l Markups on clients display on the Host and the other Clients
l While anyone is marking up, all participants are prevented from spinning
l Spinning is enabled when the markup is cleared
www.SpaceClaim.com 1191
In the example above, the image was taken on the Host machine. The green circle was sketched on
the client and the blue arrow was drawn on the Client.
Client markups are cleared on the Host when the session is disconnected.
Snapshots
Snapshots allow you to snap images of the graphics window while connected to a shared session.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1192
Clicking on a Snapshot in the Gallery restores the view to the as-snapped orientation and zoom
level.
When you end the shared session, you will be asked if you want to save the Snapshots.
If you choose to save them, the Save As dialog opens for saving the Snapshots as PNG files.
Sending feedback
While in a LiveReview session, click the Feedback button to connect with the SpaceClaim Support
page.
There, you can enter information about your session experience.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1193
l Was the session useful
l Were there any performance issues
l What features would you like to see added
www.SpaceClaim.com 1194
LiveReview client sessions
As a Client, you connect to the secure server session initiated by the Host.
During the session you see graphics information from the active model in the Hosts SpaceClaim ses-
sion.
SpaceClaim LiveReview provides enough graphics information for you to independently work with
the model and perform the following actions.
l View navigation
l Selection
l Make measurements
l Markup the model
l Take view Snapshots
l Chat with the group using text
The Host provides a link to the secure session This will be by an email containing a direct link, or
some other method providing a link to paste into your browser.
When you arrive at the session site, you will see a login box.
Before you can join the session, you must enter a username. This is the name that appears in the Par-
ticipant list on the Host machine.
When you join the session, the system reports your connection speed.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1195
Client user interface
When the Host loads a model, you will see a Progress bar on the Client.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1196
l You will not receive broadcasts from the Host until you resume your session.
l If the Host switches model tabs, your display will update to show the new model.
l However, you will not receive any subsequent navigations, selections, and Markups.
Click the Play button to resume receiving broadcasts from the Host.
When a model comes up on the Client, it orients the same way as in the Host session.
Spin, Pan, and Zoom operations are done with the same mouse buttons as in SpaceClaim.
The table below summarizes other view functions available on the Client.
Display toggles in the Client Structure Tree can be used to toggle the display of Solids.
l Shared with Host and Clients
l No Component display toggles for components on Clients
www.SpaceClaim.com 1197
l Component displays toggled on the Host are shared with the Clients
Selecting
Selection is shared both ways, Host-to-Client and Client-to-Host, across multiple client sessions.
l Single, Double and Triple-click
l Ctrl+selection
l Alt+selection
l Box-selection
Since the LMB spins the model, you cannot click and drag to box-select on the Cli-
ent.
Instead, thereare buttonsto switch between Spin and Box-select modes.
When Selection Modes are used on the Host, they are shared with the Client.
Measuring
The following measurements can be made in the Client through selection (not using measurement
tools).
www.SpaceClaim.com 1198
l Radius
l Point-to-point distance
l Length
l Angle
As selections are made, the corresponding measurement is displayed in the lower left corner of the
screen.
On the Client, there is a Change Color command in the RMB to change the color of the whole body.
Color changes are shared among all Clients and the Host.
Chat
Use the Chat panel to type text messages to Host and other guests.
Type text messages in the Chat window.
Ifyour Chat window is closed, a popup will notify you when a new chat message is sent.
Messages from both Host and Clients are displayed on all participants' machines.
Markup
LiveReview has a set of tools for marking up the graphics.
Markups are broadcast to all clients, which allows simultaneous drawing on models by multiple
users.
l Each client is assigned a different color
l Markups on clients display on the Host and the other Clients
l While anyone is marking up, all participants are prevented from spinning
l Spinning is enabled when the markup is cleared
Pen Tool
www.SpaceClaim.com 1199
1. Click the Pen tool
2. Choose a Color from the dropdown list
Upon entering the Pen tool on the Client, the cursor changes to indicate drawing.
Pen markups are broadcast to the Host and to all clients, which allows simultaneous drawing on mod-
els by multiple users.
l Each participant is assigned a different color
l Markups on clients display on the Host and the other Clients
l While anyone is marking up, all participants are prevented from spinning
l Spinning is enabled when the markup is cleared
In the example below, the image was taken on the Host machine.
The green circle was sketched on the client and the blue arrow was drawn on the Client.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1200
While you draw on the model, you are listed as Marking in the Participant list on the Host.
Line Tool
Use the Line tool to draw straight lines and arrows on the model.
4. Choose an Arrow Style for the start and end points of the line
l Theleft dropdown menu is for the start point
l Theright dropdown menu is for the end point
Text Tool
Use the Text tool to add text box notes in the graphics.
1. Click the Text tool
2. Choose a Font from the dropdown list
3. Set the font Size
4. Set thefont Color
5. Click in the Graphics where you want to place thetext
6. Type text
l Note text is broadcast as it is typed.
7. Exit the Text tool when you are done
Snapshots
Snapshots allow you to snap images of the graphics window while connected to a shared session.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1201
Click the Snapshot button to create an image of the screen.
Snapshots are added to the Snapshot Gallery at the bottom of the page.
Clicking on a Snapshot in the Gallery restores the view to the as-snapped orientation and zoom
level. Snapshots are associated with the model and can only be recalled if the associated model is
active.
All Snapshots taken on the Host and the other Clients are added to the Gallery.
When the Host ends the shared session, they are asked if they want to save the Snapshots.
They can be saved as PNG files in a directory on the Host machine.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1202
Viewer
SpaceClaim Web Viewer is a secure way to share visualization data of the current design with others.
From within your SpaceClaim session, you generate a secure link and share it with anyone who needs
to view the model. The link takes them to the server, which displays the models graphics in their
browser.
Viewing of the model is done independently of a SpaceClaim session. Graphics information used to
visualize the model resides on the secure server.
Sharing a model
To share a model, you create a link to the models graphics information on the server. Then you
share the link with anyone who needs to view the model.
Google Chrome is the preferred browser for the Beta version of SpaceClaim Web Viewer.
SpaceClaim Web Viewer has a simple interface for viewing SpaceClaim models.
The model is displayed in the browser window with tools on the left for changing the model view.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1203
This is a Fly-out menu with the following options:
Perspective On
Perspective
Perspective Off
This is a Fly-out menu with the following options:
Planar Drag the cursor over the model to view possible planes for a section
Sections
www.SpaceClaim.com 1204
YZ Create a section through the World Origin YZ-plane
www.SpaceClaim.com 1205
XZ Create a section through the World Origin XZ-plane
www.SpaceClaim.com 1206
Clear Remove the current section and view the entire model
You can also use F9 to set the model spinning the for several revolutions. Frames per Second (FPS) is
reported in the upper right-hand corner of the screen for both desktop and tablet in real time.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1207
You can also Markup the view using the Pen and Line tools.
Take snapshots of your marked up view using the Snapshot tool. Snapshots are displayed in a sep-
arate window for copying, printing, etc.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1208
Printable Glossary
3D markup
SpaceClaim document that enables you to annotate and compare different ver-
sions of a design.
Absolute coordinates
See Coordinates
ACIS
Modeling engine by Spatial Corporation. SpaceClaim can import and export ACIS
files (.sat and .sab).
Alignment axis
Axis around which you can rotate a component using the Orient tool.
Anchor in Patterns
A member of a linear or rotational pattern that does not move with the pattern.
You can anchor one or more pattern members using the Fulcrum tool guide.
Anchor point
See Anchor
Angular reference
Starting point for dimensioning an angle.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1209
Angular ruler dimension
See Ruler dimensions
Annotation
Information you can add to a drawing, such as notes, dimensions, geometric tol-
erances, center marks, and Bills of Materials.
Annotation plane
Plane on which you can annotate designs, drawing sheets, and 3D markups. Use
the Create Note tool to select an annotation plane and enter text onto the plane.
Arc
Curved line of constant radius; part of a circle. See Sweep arc, Three point arc, Tan-
gent arc.
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers standards for engineering drawing
practices. You can customize the style of your annotations to conform to ASME
standards. See ISO, JIS
Aspect ratio
Ratio of the length to width of a rectangle or the height to width of an image.
When resizing images, it can be important to maintain the aspect ratio to avoid
distortion.
Assembly
Hierarchy of components and subcomponents showing relationship within a
design, as shown in the Structure tree. In manufacturing, a unit fitted together
from manufactured parts. See Assembly tool, Component
Assembly tool
Use the Assembly tools to specify how components are aligned with each other,
that is, create a mating condition. You can Align, Center, and Orient components.
Association
Relationship between objects that enables you to edit them together. For
example, when you pull a polygon into 3D, the faces acquire a polygon
www.SpaceClaim.com 1210
relationship. If you act on one face or edge, it affects all the faces in the polygon.
Another example of an association is a mirror plane between two faces. See Mir-
ror, Remove associations
AutoCAD
Software application for 2D and 3D design and drafting by Autodesk, Inc.
AutoCAD's native file format is DWG, its interchange file format is DXF, and its
format for publishing CAD data is DWF.
Axial face
Face of a 3D object through which an axis extends. The axis displays when you
move the cursor over the axial face.
Axis
Straight line that an object rotates around or that objects are regularly arranged
around. See Alignment axis.
Balloon
Annotation consisting of content from the Bill of Materials. Balloon notes update
when changes are made to the BOM table.
Baseline faces
See Offset baseline faces
Bend allowance
Amount of material added to compensate for changes caused by bending sheet
metal. Allowance is required to correct for the change in length caused by bend-
ing a flat sheet.
Bend deduction
Value used to calculate unfolded lengths of sheet metal. Bend Deduction is twice
the distance from the outside mold line to the beginning of the bend (set back)
minus the bend allowance.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1211
Bend deduction table
CSV (comma-separated value) file used to calculate the developed lengths for
unfolded or flat patterns to be machined.
Blend
Smooth and tangent transition between faces or edges; created using the Pull
tool.
Blend plane
Sections that appears when you edit a face as a blend using the Edit as Blend
tool. You can create, move, and orient blend planes.
Blend surface
Faces you can edit using the Edit as Blend tool. If the face was originally created
as a blend, the original blend surfaces are available for editing. If the face is not
blended, the tool first converts the face to a blended surface.
Blended face
Face created by blending between two edges.
Body
A solid or surface.
Bounded line
Segment of a line bounded by one of more intersections with lines or edges. Use
the Trim Away tool to delete a bounded line.
CATIA
Modeling engine by Dassault Systmes. SpaceClaim can import and export CATIA
files.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1212
Chamfer
Sloping corner between two edges created using the Pull tool; angle with equal
setback; bevel.
Chord
Straight line with both end points on a circle.
Chord angle
Degrees of a circle delineated by a chord. In a Swept arc, the starting point and
end point of the arc define the chord.
Clip
Hide all geometry in a design above or below the grid or selected plane.
Closed lines
Intersecting lines that enclose an area to form a region when you sketch shapes
in 2D. The regions will become solids and the lines become edges when you pull
your sketch into 3D.
Closed loop
Contiguous sketched lines or edges. Can be selected by double-clicking one of
the edges or lines.
Coaxial
Relationship between faces that share the same center of rotation. If you check
the Coaxial Face Groups box in the Display tab, faces that share an axis are indic-
ated with blue shading.
Combine
SpaceClaim tool used to cut or glue geometry together.
Component
Object in a design, including the top-level design component. Each component
consists of any number of objects, such as solids and surfaces, and can contain
sub-components. You can think of a component as a "part." Components can be
saved as a separate file. An external component is another design inserted as a
component of your design. Making the component independent prevents
www.SpaceClaim.com 1213
changes from being made to the external component file. You can also create an
external component by saving a component as a separate file. See Lightweight
components, Assembly
Constant-radius round
Default configuration for a fillet. The radius of the rounded corner is uniform
across the length of the line or edge. See Fillet, Variable radius round
Construction line
Shape drawn with a Sketch tool to help you create an accurate sketch. Con-
struction lines become axes in 3D. They are also useful for creating mirrors.
Context menu
In the SpaceClaim user interface, a list of functions specific to the operation that
you are performing. Access the context menu by right-clicking in the design win-
dow.
Converging lines
Non-parallel lines. With the Dimension tool, you can annotate converging lines at
a virtual sharp.
Coordinates - Absolute
Method of inputting points based on distance and angle. Absolute coordinates
are measured from the origin (x and y for 2D and x, y, z for 3D).
Coordinates - Polar
Method of inputting points based on distance and angle. Polar coordinates are
measured by entering values for distance and angle.
Coordinates - Relative
Method of inputting points based on distance and angle. Relative coordinates are
measured from the selected point (x and y for 2D and x, y, z for 3D).
Corner
See Fillet (interior corner) or Round (exterior corner)
www.SpaceClaim.com 1214
Cross-section mode
Mode used to edit solids by working with their edges and vertices in cross-sec-
tion. In this mode, pulling a line pulls a face, and pulling a vertex pulls an edge. To
create a cross-section view, you select the face that will be used to set the cross-
section plane. Hatching is used to show the intersection of the cross-section
plane and a solid.
Cross-section view
One of the view selections for drawing sheets. Cross-section view shows a cross-
section through your design. You create a cross-section view from one of the
other views on the drawing sheet. See General view, Projected view, and Detail
view.
Curvature
Analysis tool that displays a fringe graph or color shading to represent the
curvature along curves or edges. Values indicate how curvy or "swoopy" the
curve or surface is at each point.
Curve
In 3D, any line in space.
Curve center
A small cross that appears on the sketch grid at the center of a circle, ellipse, poly-
gon, or arc.
Curved slot
A slot created by pulling a hole along the axis of a driving cylinder. A 360 degree
curved slot is a round cut. See Radial slot.
Cutter object
When using the Combine tool to split a solid or surface, the Cutter object is the
solid or surface you use to cut the target. Use the Select Cutter tool guide to
select the Cutter object.
Cylindrical face
The surface of a cylinder, formed by points at a fixed distance from the axis of the
cylinder.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1215
D
Datum
Object that is assumed to be an exact size and shape, and be in an exact location,
that is used to locate or establish geometric relationship of other objects.
Datum symbol
Symbol attached to a point, axis, or plane that must be referenced for machining
and inspection.
Design
2D or 3D model that contains at least one top-level component.
Design component
See component
Design window
Area in SpaceClaim user interface displaying your model or assembly. Also
known as Workspace.
Detach
Create separate surfaces from individual pieces of a sketch, or objects or faces in
3D. You can detach protrusions to move them with the Move tool's Detach First
option.
Detail
Aspects of a design incorporated to communicate with others or submit the
design for review. Use the tools on the Detailing tab to annotate designs, create
drawing sheets, and review design changes. You can customize detailing settings
to conform to standards or create your own custom style.
Detail view
One of the view selections for drawing sheets. Detail view creates an enlarged
view of a particular area, magnifying a portion to show more detail. You create a
detailed view from one of the other views on the drawing sheet. See General
view, Projected view, and Cross-section view.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1216
Dimension
Annotation on a drawing showing measurement of an edge or face. Use the
Dimension tool to add measurements to your design, drawing sheet, or 3D
markup.
Dimensional sketching
Precise sketching by entering measurement values for the current line or relative
to other lines and points. See Dimensions.
Dimensions
Values or expressions you enter for precise control during the creation or modi-
fication of a design. You can dimension every element, from lines in sketches to
faces of solids. See Ordinate dimensions, Progressive dimensions, Ruler dimen-
sion.
Document
A SpaceClaim file (.scdoc) that may contain any combination of design versions,
associated drawing sheets, and 3D markup slides.
Draft
Angle or taper on an object that facilitates removal from a mold or die. You draft
by pulling one or more faces around about another face that you selected as the
pivot. You can add or cut material as you pull.
Draft faces
See Draft
Driving cylinder
Shape used when pulling a hole to create a curved or radial slot. You select the
face or axis of the driving cylinder to guide the shape of the slot.
Driving dimension
Ruler dimension created with the Move, Pull, or Select tool and saved within a
group.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1217
Driving edge
Edge you select to drive the change when using the Pull tool. Select a driving
edge for revolves, directed extrusions, sweeps, and drafts. The driving edge is
shown in blue.
Driving face
Face you select to drive the change when using the Pull tool. Select a driving face
for revolves, directed extrusions, sweeps, and drafts. The driving face is shown in
blue.
DWG
AutoCAD native drawing format. SpaceClaim can open and insert drawings,
parts, and assemblies. Drawings can be inserted as layouts. SpaceClaim can
export parts, assemblies, drawing sheets, and 3D markup slides.
DXF
Drawing Interchange Format or Drawing Exchange Format. CAD data file format
developed by Autodesk for enabling data interoperability between AutoCAD and
other programs. SpaceClaim can open and insert drawings, parts, and assem-
blies. Drawings can be inserted as layouts. SpaceClaim can export parts, assem-
blies, drawing sheets, and 3D markup slides.
Eccentric
Not sharing the same center.
Edge
3D object composed of a single outside boundary of a feature. A line sketched in
2D becomes an edge when you pull your sketch into 3D.
Edge chain
Tangent chain; a continual series of edges that are connected edge-to-edge.
Double-clicking an edge in the chain selects the entire chain.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1218
Edge loop
All of the edges around a face; a continual series of edges that are connected
edge-to-edge forming a closed loop. Double-clicking an edge in the loop selects
the entire loop.
Edge tangency
When you blend between two faces, the blend surface begins tangent to the
edges of the initial faces and ends tangent to the edges of the end faces. By decid-
ing which edges you do not want to use for tangency, you can create a blend
with or without the effects of the edges.
Ellipse
Geometric shape described as a circle viewed at an angle; oval with two centers
of equal radius.
Entity
Term used to refer to any object in a 2D sketch or 3D drawing.
Exploded assembly
View of components in which objects are shown along an axis line.
Extents
The outer boundaries of the objects you have drawn.
Extrude
To pull a face along with its edges. The edges extend to bound the extruded face,
creating a new section defined by the edges.
Face
Side or other surface of a solid. Some examples are the inside surface of a hole or
the six sides of a rectangular solid. See Surface.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1219
Face grid
Horizontal and vertical lines, displayed using the Face Grid tool, that define any
face or surface you select in your design.
Face styles
Modes you can select for displaying a solid or surface. You can set the display to
be transparent, opaque, or metallic. See Graphics styles.
Facet
Simple triangular face used to describe surface geometry in STL (ste-
reolithography) file format.
Fade scene
Make the geometry under the sketch grid more transparent, by selecting Fade
Scene Under Grid in SpaceClaim options. Selecting this option enhances the vis-
ibility of your sketch.
Fill
Use the Fill tool to simplify or clean up geometry by extending surrounding faces
to eliminate a selection. The selected region is filled in or healed with the sur-
rounding surface or solid.
Fillet
Rounded corner at the intersection of two lines or edges; concave intersection
between two surfaces. Fillet refers to an interior corner; exterior corner is known
as a round. You can draw a fillet using the Create Rounded Corner tool or by
selecting the Fillet (Constant radius round) option from the Pull options. See
Round.
Filleted corner
See Fillet
Filter
See Selection filter
Flag note
See Note
www.SpaceClaim.com 1220
Fulcrum
Hinge; pivot point. When using the Move tool, you can select an object and use
the Fulcrum tool guide to move other objects around it.
Full pull
Pull tool option that enables you to revolve 360 degrees or to the next face,
sweep through the full trajectory, or blend through selected faces.
General view
One of the view selections for drawing sheets. General view makes the selected
view independent of the view used to create it. See Projected view, Cross-section
view, and Detail view.
Geometric tolerances
Annotation symbols used for dimensioning geometry in technical drawings;
usage is guided by ASME, ISO, and other standards.
Golden rectangle
A rectangle with ratio of side lengths (approximately 1:1.618) considered by
artists and architects to be aesthetically pleasing. As you sketch a rectangle, an
indicator line appears when the shape has the proportions of a square or golden
rectangle.
Graphics styles
Modes you can select for displaying a design. You can display geometry as
shaded, perspective shaded, wireframe, wireframe with hidden lines displayed in
light gray, and wireframe with hidden lines removed. You can apply styles to
your entire design or drawing sheet, to individual layers, or to individual views in
your drawing sheet. See Face styles.
Grid
See Sketch grid
Grid lines
See Face grid
www.SpaceClaim.com 1221
Groups
Sets of objects that appear in the Groups tab. You create a group from any set of
selected objects. Information such as Selection, Alt+selection, move anchoring,
axis, and ruler dimension is all stored with the group.
GTOL
See Geometric tolerance
Guides
See Tool guides
Heal
See Fill
Helix
Pull tool option that revolves the selected shape around an axis to create a screw
or drill shape. You control the height, direction, pitch, and taper.
Home view
Tool used to return the view to the Home settings. You can customize the Home
view tool so that it displays your design with a specific orientation, location, and
zoom level.
Imprinted edge
A line that does not define a corner. For example, you might create an imprinted
edge on a face of a cube, if you want to divide the face and pull different parts.
Imprinted edges are often created when importing designs.
Inking a line
See Project to sketch
Interference
Edges where solids intersect each other or volumes created by the intersection of
solids, surfaces, and components in your design; can be displayed using the
www.SpaceClaim.com 1222
Analysis tools.
Intersect
SpaceClaim tool used to split solids and faces.
Inverse selection
The inverse of the current selection in the active component. For example, if you
select the top face of a cylinder, right-click and select Select > Inverse Selection,
the entire cylinder except the top face will be selected.
ISO
International Organization for Standardization standards for architectural and
engineering drawing, including guidelines for dimensioning and tolerancing. You
can customize the style of your annotations to conform to ISO standards. See
ASME, JIS.
Isometric view
3D view of surfaces and edges, oriented to show the top, front, and side faces of
your design. The angles between the projection of the x, y, and z axes are all
equal at 120. See Trimetric view.
JIS
Japanese Standards Association standards for technical drawings. You can cus-
tomize the style of your annotations to conform to JIS standards. JIS defaults are
the same as ISO, except that JIS uses third-angle views while ISO uses first-angle
views. See ASME, ISO.
K-factor
Parameter of bends in a sheet metal part used to calculate the bend radius. K-
factor is a percentage of the metal thickness and depends on factors such as the
material and type of bending operation. Relates to the depth of the neutral axis; a
line within the sheet where the length does not change when the sheet is bent.
The inside of the bend is under compression, the outside is under tension, and
www.SpaceClaim.com 1223
the neutral axis occurs somewhere between the midpoint of the material (K-
factor=0.50) and a point closer to the inside of the bend (K-factor=0.25).
Layer
Grouping mechanism for visual characteristics such as visibility and color. You
can group objects on layers to organize your drawing. Layers are especially use-
ful when you want to show or hide annotation planes.
Layout
2D drawing mode that is most useful when you have no immediate need to gen-
erate 3D objects from the lines in the layout. If you try to pull layout lines to 3D,
they do not behave the same way that sketched lines do. Think of a layout as a
pencil drawing made on your design. When you are ready to use your layout to
create geometry, you must project the layout lines to a sketch. Projecting a layout
line to a sketch is like inking the line. You can import a 2D AutoCAD DXF or DWG
file as a layout.
Library
Resource available for downloading from SpaceClaim options. Provides mater-
ials and properties selections in the Properties panel. You can select from the
Materials Library and add them to your Local Materials.
Lightweight assembly
Graphics-only representation of a design. When inserting an external file into a
design, select the Enable lightweight assemblies option to load only the com-
ponent's graphic information. This improves performance of large and complex
assemblies for quicker viewing. When you are ready to work with the component
in SpaceClaim , you can load the geometry information.
Lightweight component
See Lightweight assembly
Line
A straight line, arc, or spline drawn in Sketch mode or on a layout plane. Lines
have length but no area. When you pull a sketch into 3D with the Pull tool, lines
www.SpaceClaim.com 1224
become edges.
Local materials
See Library
Markup
Slides you can create to highlight and communicate the differences between ver-
sions of a design.
Mass
Analysis tool used to display mass properties, or volume information for the
solids and surfaces in your design.
Mass properties
See Mass
Material
Property that you can assign to an object, consisting of material name and attrib-
utes such as density and tensile strength.
Materials library
See Library
Mating condition
Attribute of components that specifies how they are aligned with each other. You
create mating conditions with the Assembly tools.
Measure
Tools for displaying measurement properties of the edges, faces, and solids in
your design.
Mesh object
Object created by importing an STL file lightweight (facets only). Mesh objects
have the ability to snap to the facets.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1225
Mini-toolbar
Set of tool-specific options that appears when you right-click in the Design win-
dow. You can also access the options in the Options panel.
Mirror
Associative relationship between two faces or planes mirrored about a centerline
plane or planar face. The second object is a copy of the original; if the geometry
of the original is changed, the mirrored copy is also updated. Use the Mirror tool
to designate a face or plane as a mirror, or to create a mirror plane between two
faces.
Mode
Three ways of designing in SpaceClaim : Sketch, Cross-section, or 3D. You can
switch between modes at any time.
Mouse up
See Zoom box in
Move
SpaceClaim tool used to translate or rotate geometry.
Non-planar edges
Edges that do not lie in the same plane. See Planar edges.
Normal
The vector that is perpendicular to a flat plane at the selected point. In the case of
a non-flat plane, the vector that is perpendicular to the plane tangent to the sur-
face at the selected point.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1226
Note
Annotation placed on a design, drawing sheet, or 3D markup. Notes contain text
or symbols that you insert and can be connected to geometry by a note leader.
Object
Anything recognizable by SpaceClaim tools. 3D objects include vertices, edges,
faces, surfaces, solids, layouts, planes, axes, and origins. 2D objects include points
and lines.
Offset
Distance an edge, segment, or curve is moved or copied.
Offset relationship
A relationship between two faces that is maintained in the 2D and 3D editing
tools. Offset relationships are created when you define a relationship using the
Offset tool, create a sheet metal part, or Shell a solid.
Offsetting faces
Pulling a face without selecting the edges. The pull extends the neighboring faces
without creating an edge. The neighboring faces extend to bound the offset face,
creating a new section defined by the adjacent geometry.
Offsetting lines
Using the Offset Line tool to create an offset of any line or spline in the grid
plane. A new object is created at a specified distance from the selected object.
Options panel
Area of SpaceClaim user interface that enables you to modify functions specific
to tools.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1227
Ordinate dimensions
X or Y distances that originate from a single location, which is usually the lower
left corner of the object. Also known as datum dimensioning or baseline dimen-
sioning
Orientation angle
Property that you define when sketching a polygon. Orientation angle determ-
ines the polygons rotational position.
Origin
Zero point in coordinate system. You can insert an origin at any location in your
design where you can anchor the Move tool, enabling you to dimension from the
origin or quickly move the sketch grid to the origin. You can also insert an origin
at a solid's center of mass or volume.
Origin Axis
Axis through the origin.
Orthogonal view
Projection that is constrained to regular 90 angles (top, bottom, left, and right of
the current view). When you create a projected view from one of the other views
on the drawing sheet, the available projections are orthogonal (orthographic).
Pan
Move a drawing around by dragging the drawing area around your screen; move
the viewpoint laterally relative to the drawing.
Panel
Sections of the SpaceClaim user interface that initially appear along the left side
of the application window and include: Structure panel, Layers panel, Selection
panel, Groups panel, Options panel, and Properties panel. You can dock and
detach these panels.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1228
Parasolid
Parasolid geometric modeling kernel. SpaceClaim can open and insert parts and
assemblies and export parts and assemblies.
Parent component
A component upon which other components depend. For example, in a block
with a hole, the block is the parent and the hole is the child.
Patch blend
Fill tool option that uses the initial tangency of the neighboring faces to fill the
selected edges. Faces are blended into a smooth, single-face patch, instead of
extending the faces attached to the edge until they intersect. Deselecting the Tan-
gent extension option ignores the tangency of the neighboring faces.
Periodic blend
Pull tool option used to go all the way around when blending faces.
Periodic face
A cylinder, cone, or other revolved surface.
Pitch
Unit of length that a helix face shifts per 360 rotation; distance from one point
on a thread to the corresponding point on the next thread.
Pivot line
Line around which a face is revolved using the Pull tool.
Plan view
Head-on view.
Planar edges
Two or more edges that lie in the same plane. You can select planar edges and
select the Plane tool from the Insert ribbon group to insert the plane defined by
the edges.
Planar face
Face that lies within a plane.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1229
Plane
Construction geometry consisting of a flat surface. Planes can be used for a 2D
sketch, section view of a model, a neutral plane in a draft feature.
PMI
Product Manufacturing Information. SpaceClaim can import PMI if you check the
Import Part Manufacturing Information box when importing CATIA files.
Point
Single location in the sketch grid. 2-D object that has no height, width, or length.
The origin, an axis, and a vertex are examples of points. Use the Point tool to
sketch a point on the sketch grid. Points are useful as a dimensional reference,
for splitting, and for creating a point on a line or curve through which you want
to draw a three-point circle.
Polar coordinates
See coordinates
Polygon
Complex object composed of three or more straight lines in a closed figure. Use
the Polygon tool to sketch a polygon with up to 32 sides.
Power selection
Advanced selection tool available from the Selection tab. Enables you to search
for and select all objects with geometry similar to the currently selected object.
Profile
Line in space; outline of an object; used to describe objects when sweeping or
blending.
Project to sketch
Tool used to convert 2D layout lines to a sketch so you can use the layout to cre-
ate geometry.
Projected view
One of the view selections for drawing sheets. You create a projected view from
one of the other views on the drawing sheet to show another side of the model.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1230
See General view, Cross-section view, and Detail view
Properties panel
Area of SpaceClaim user interface that displays editable details about the selec-
ted object(s). This panel is initially displayed on the lower left side of the screen,
but can be moved.
Pull
Tool used to distort or deform geometry. Use the Pull tool to offset, extrude,
revolve, sweep, draft, and blend faces; or to round, chamfer, or extrude edges.
When converting a sketch to 3D, pulling a line creates a surface and pulling a sur-
face creates a solid.
Quality
SpaceClaim tools for detecting anomalies or discontinuities in surfaces.
Radial slot
A slot created by pulling a hole toward the axis of the driving cylinder. See
Curved slot.
Radiused corner
See Fillet (interior corner) or Round (exterior corner)
Reference line
Line used as the starting point for dimensioning.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1231
Region
When you sketch shapes in 2D using the sketch tools, regions are formed by
closed or intersecting lines. The regions will become solids and the lines become
edges when you pull your sketch into 3D with the Pull tool.
Regular face
An unblended face. The face must be converted to a blended face before you can
edit the face as a blend. See Blend surface
Relative coordinates
See Coordinates
Remove associations
Tool that removes an associative relationship. For example, removing a polygon
relationship enables you to make changes to only one face of the polygon solid
without affecting the other faces. See Associations.
Rendering
Mode available from the Properties panel for a view on a drawing sheet. Use Ren-
dering mode to change the Graphics style for the view. Select Inherit if you want
to link the graphics style to the parent view. See Graphics styles.
Revolve
Move in a path around an axis. Use the Pull tool to revolve faces, edges, or a helix
around an axis. The axis may be a straight line, axis, or edge. See Subtractive
revolve.
Revolve axis
A straight line, axis, or edge around which you revolve a face, edge, or helix.
Rotate
Design: Using the Rotate tool to spin a design 90 degrees in the plane of the
screen. You can rotate your design clockwise or counterclockwise. Object: Using
the Move handle to spin an object around an axis.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1232
Rotate with multi-touch
Hold one finger on the axis you want to rotate around and move the other finger
in an arc that is centered on your first finger.
Rotational blend
Pull tool option used when blending faces to create cylinders and cones
whenever possible.
Round
Rounded corner at the intersection of two lines or edges. Round refers to an
exterior corner; an interior corner is known as a fillet. In SpaceClaim , rounds and
fillets are both called rounds. See Fillet, Constant-radius round, Variable-radius
round.
Round Group
Grouping that is created each time you fill a round. You can reattach a group of
rounds as long as some portion of the original edges (or faces that bordered the
edges) still exists in your design. See Group.
Ruler dimension
Option used to enter precise dimensions when pulling or moving. Dimensions
may be linear when moving or pulling, or angular when rotating.
Scale
Solid or surface: Change the size of the selected object using the Pull tool. You
can scale dynamically or by entering a scale value. Drawing sheet or cross-sec-
tion views: Magnify or shrink the view by selecting a View in the Structure tree
and editing the Properties panel.
SCDOC file
File format for SpaceClaim files (.scdoc). Files comply with the Microsoft Open
Packaging Convention, which is also used by Microsoft Office 2007. These files
are actually zip archives with a special structure, the contents of which are primar-
ily XML data.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1233
Section
Design mode in which you edit solids by working with their edges and vertices in
cross-section. View is cut away to show interior detail.
Section mode
See Section
Selection filter
Drop-down control in the status bar that can be used to limit the selection of
objects. Only object types you check will be selected; for example, only faces and
edges.
Selection tab
Area of SpaceClaim user interface where you can locate objects similar to the
ones selected. See Power selection.
Shell
Solid or part that is hollowed out from a selected face, leaving a shell of des-
ignated thickness.
Shell relationship
Association that stays with a solid when it is moved to another component,
unless the relationship would link two components when it is moved. See Shell.
Silhouette edge
Edge that is rotated to conceal a 3D object and appears as a 2D line.
Sketch grid
Pattern of regularly spaced lines that guides you when sketching. The sketch grid
makes aligning and drawing objects easier.You can adjust the units and spacing
of the grid, as well as how solids are displayed when the grid appears.
Sketch mode
Mode for drawing in two dimensions using the sketching tools on the sketch
grid. A sketch is a collection of lines and other 2D objects on a sketch grid. Sketch-
ing creates regions that can be pulled into 3D. When you pull your sketch into 3D
www.SpaceClaim.com 1234
with the Pull tool, regions formed by intersecting lines will become solids and
lines will become edges.
SLA
See Stereo lithography
Snap
Constrain to objects, angular and linear increments, or grid points while you are
sketching or editing solids. You can customize the snapping behavior in
SpaceClaim options. Pressing Shift while dragging snaps the tool based on your
snap settings. You can use the Snap to grid tool to constrain or lock all drawing
to grid points only.
Snap view
Tool used to display the head-on view of a face. You can also use the tool to
"throw" the highlighted face to the top, bottom, right, or left.
Solid
Object that encloses volume. A surface becomes a solid if it encloses volume.
Spin
Tool used to re-orient your design in any direction, allowing you to view it from
any angle.
Spin center
Axis about which you spin your design when you use the Spin tool.
Spline
A continuously curved line, without sharp boundaries (that is, without vertices).
Create a spline by defining a set of points using the Spline tool. A spline becomes
an edge when you pull it with the Pull tool.
Split
Using the Combine tool to split solids or surfaces. You select a solid or surface to
use as a Cutting tool to cut the target. See Cutter object.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1235
STEP
Standard for the Exchange of Product model data (ISO 10303). Defines a meth-
odology for describing product data. You can select the STEP protocol to use to
format exported SpaceClaim designs.
Stereo lithography
Technology used for rapid prototyping, in which a laser hardens successive lay-
ers of a photopolymer to create a part with a shape defined by a computer
model.
STL file
File format native to the stereo lithography CAD software created by 3D Systems.
SpaceClaim can export parts and assemblies (.stl).See Stereo lithography.
Structure tree
Display in the Structure panel that shows you each of the objects in your design.
You can expand or collapse the nodes of the tree to view the objects. You can
rename objects, create, modify, replace, and delete objects, as well as work with
components.
Subtractive
Manipulation (revolve, draft, pull, etc.) of a solid in which material is removed. In
SpaceClaim , the cursor changes to - to indicate that the edit is subtractive.
Surface
Two dimensional object that has no thickness (as opposed to a face, which is part
of a three-dimensional object). A surface has area but no volume. See Face.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1236
Sweep
Pull a surface or face along a line or edge using the Pull tool. You can sweep
faces and edges, and select straight or curved lines or edges along which to
sweep. Sweeping along a spline is a pulling technique for creating a smooth,
swoopy shape. See Trajectory.
Sweep arc
Arc created by defining a center point and two end points; drawn using the
Sweep Arc tool.
Sweep circle
The circular path followed by a Swept arc. See Swept arc.
Sweep trajectory
See Trajectory
Swept arc
See Sweep arc
Tangent
Line that touches a curve (arc or circle) at only one point, without crossing over,
and is perpendicular to the radius at the point of tangency. In SpaceClaim , you
can sketch a line tangent to a curve or you can sketch an arc tangent to a line or
curve.
Tangent arc
Arc that is sketched using the Tangent Arc tool, using a point on a line or curve as
the starting point.
Tangent chain
See Edge chain.
Tangent edges
Transition edge between rounded or filleted faces in hidden lines visible or hid-
den lines removed modes in drawings.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1237
Tangent extension
See Patch blend
Tangent faces
Faces created by rounds or when edges are drawn on a face.
Taper
Angle of a helix or threads made on a conical surface. See Helix, Thread.
Target
The object you want to cut, when using the Combine tool to split a solid or sur-
face.
Tessellation
An approach for data exchange between CAD programs. Tessellation represents
entities such as lines and surfaces in a CAD system with tiny triangles (polygonal
data representations). Data formats such as XML and VRML are examples of tes-
sellated data.
Theme
Set of view navigation options used for spin, pan, and zoom.
Thickness edge
Edge across the thickness of a sheet metal wall.
Thickness face
The end face of a sheet metal wall. The thickness face is shown highlighted in
orange in the image below.
Thread
Texture created on the surface of a cylinder, cone, or hole using the Annotation
tools.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1238
Tool guides
Functions that are specific to the selected tool.
Torus
Doughnut-shaped object created using the Pull tool to sweep a sketched shape
around an axis on a circular path.
Trajectory
Straight or curved line or edge along which you sweep a face or an edge.
Translate
Move in a plane (x, y, or z).
Trim away
Delete a line portion bounded by an intersection with a line or edge.
Trimetric view
3D view of surfaces and edges, oriented to show the top, front, and side faces of
your design. Compared to isometric view, trimetric view angles the front face
slightly towards you, shows less of the side face, and less of the top. In
SpaceClaim , this is the default Home view. See Isometric view.
UV grid
See Face Grid
U-V lines
See Face Grid
Vee-die width
Sheet metal property; sets the width of the tooling that produces a bend.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1239
Vertex
Point that terminates a line; point at which two or more lines or edges intersect.
Vertices can be selected for sketching, dimensioning, and other operations.
View
Orientation settings that you can apply to your design, including spin, pan, and
zoom. You can adjust these settings individually or you can apply one of the fol-
lowing preconfigured views: Trimetric, Isometric, Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Right,
Left. You can also select Snap View and click a face to view it head-on.
Virtual sharp
Point of intersection formed by extending converging lines.
Wall face
The side face of a sheet metal wall. The two perpendicular wall faces are high-
lighted in orange in the image below.
Wireframe
View mode in which all edges of the part or assembly are displayed.
World origin
Axes that set the default orientation of the design in the Design window. Display
the World origin by checking the World Origin box on the Display tab.
Zoom box in
Tool used to pan and zoom until the design fits within a selected area.
Zoom extents
Tool used to enlarge or contract the view so that the selected face, the selected
edge, or the design fills the Design window. If you are working with a drawing
sheet, Zoom extents will fit the drawing sheet to the Design window.
www.SpaceClaim.com 1240